Service 3120895 12-06-12 CE English PDF

Service and Maintenance Manual
Models
400S
460SJ
P/N - 3120895
December 6, 2012
INTRODUCTION
SECTION A. INTRODUCTION - MAINTENANCE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
A GENERAL • ENSURE REPLACEMENT PARTS OR COMPONENTS

ARE IDENTICAL OR EQUIVALENT TO ORIGINAL PARTS
This section contains the general safety precautions OR COMPONENTS.
which must be observed during maintenance of the aerial
platform. It is of utmost importance that maintenance per- • NO SMOKING IS MANDATORY. NEVER REFUEL DUR-
sonnel pay strict attention to these warnings and precau- ING ELECTRICAL STORMS. ENSURE THAT FUEL
tions to avoid possible injury to themselves or others, or
CAP IS CLOSED AND SECURE AT ALL OTHER
damage to the equipment. A maintenance program must
TIMES.
be followed to ensure that the machine is safe to operate.
• REMOVE ALL RINGS, WATCHES AND JEWELRY
WHEN PERFORMING ANY MAINTENANCE.
MODIFICATION OR ALTERATION OF AN AERIAL WORK PLATFORM
SHALL BE MADE ONLY WITH WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM THE • DO NOT WEAR LONG HAIR UNRESTRAINED, OR
MANUFACTURER. LOOSE-FITTING CLOTHING AND NECKTIES WHICH
The specific precautions to be observed during mainte- ARE APT TO BECOME CAUGHT ON OR ENTANGLED
nance are inserted at the appropriate point in the manual. IN EQUIPMENT.
These precautions are, for the most part, those that apply
when servicing hydraulic and larger machine component • OBSERVE AND OBEY ALL WARNINGS AND CAU-
parts. TIONS ON MACHINE AND IN SERVICEMANUAL.
Your safety, and that of others, is the first consideration • KEEP OIL, GREASE, WATER, ETC. WIPED FROM
when engaging in the maintenance of equipment. Always STANDING SURFACES AND HAND HOLDS.
be conscious of weight. Never attempt to move heavy
parts without the aid of a mechanical device. Do not allow • USE CAUTION WHEN CHECKING A HOT, PRESSUR-
heavy objects to rest in an unstable position. When raising IZED COOLANT SYSTEM.
a portion of the equipment, ensure that adequate support
is provided. • NEVER WORK UNDER AN ELEVATED BOOM UNTIL
BOOM HAS BEEN SAFELY RESTRAINED FROM ANY
MOVEMENT BY BLOCKING OR OVERHEAD SLING,
SINCE THE MACHINE MANUFACTURER HAS NO DIRECT CON- OR BOOM SAFETY PROP HAS BEEN ENGAGED.
TROL OVER THE FIELD INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE, SAFETY
IN THIS AREA RESPONSIBILITY OF THE OWNER/OPERATOR. • BEFORE MAKING ADJUSTMENTS, LUBRICATING OR
PERFORMING ANY OTHER MAINTENANCE, SHUT
OFF ALL POWER CONTROLS.
B HYDRAULIC SYSTEM SAFETY
• BATTERY SHOULD ALWAYS BE DISCONNECTED-
It should be noted that the machines hydraulic systems DURING REPLACEMENT OF ELECTRICAL COMPO-
operate at extremely high potentially dangerous pres-
NENTS.
sures. Every effort should be made to relieve any system
pressure prior to disconnecting or removing any portion of • KEEP ALL SUPPORT EQUIPMENT AND ATTACH-
the system. MENTS STOWED IN THEIR PROPER PLACE.
Relieve system pressure by cycling the applicable control
several times with the engine stopped and ignition on, to • USE ONLY APPROVED, NONFLAMMABLE CLEANING
direct any line pressure back into the reservoir. Pressure SOLVENTS.
feed lines to system components can then be discon-
nected with minimal fluid loss.
C MAINTENANCE
FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH SAFETY PRECAUTIONS LISTED IN

THIS SECTION COULD RESULT IN MACHINE DAMAGE, PERSON-
NEL INJURY OR DEATH AND IS A SAFETY VIOLATION.
3120895 – JLG Lift – A-1

INTRODUCTION
REVISON LOG
Original Issue April 1, 2000

Revised: July 21, 2000
Revised: October 1, 2000
Revised: March 27, 2001
Revised October 1, 2001
Revised January 25,2002
Revised April 10, 2002
Revised June 14, 2004
Revised September 14, 2005
Revised April 9, 2007
Revised June 20, 2007
Revised December 28, 2010
Revised December 6, 2012
A-2 – JLG Lift – 3120895

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION NO. TITLE PAGE NO.

SECTION A - INTRODUCTION - MAINTENANCE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
A General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1
B Hydraulic System Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1
C Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1
SECTION 1 - SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
1.2 Engine Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
1.3 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
1.4 Specifications and Performance Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
1.5 Torque Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
1.6 Critical Stability Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
1.7 Major Component Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
1.8 Function Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
1.9 Pressure Settings - PSI (Bar). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
1.10 Cylinder Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
1.11 Lubrication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
Hydraulic Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.12 Welder, Hydraulic (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
1.13 Serial Number Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
1.14 Operator Maintenance and Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Draining Oil Build Up From The Propane Regulator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Propane Fuel Filter Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Propane Fuel System Pressure Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
SECTION 2 - GENERAL
2.1 Machine Preparation, Inspection, and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Preparation, Inspection, and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Pre-Start Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Pre-Delivery Inspection and Frequent Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Annual Machine Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Preventative Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2 Service and Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Safety and Workmanship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Cleanliness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Components Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Component Disassembly and Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Pressure-Fit Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Gaskets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Bolt Usage and Torque Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Hydraulic Lines and Electrical Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Hydraulic System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Lubrication and Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
3120895 – JLG Lift – i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.3 Lubrication and Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Hydraulic System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Hydraulic Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Changing Hydraulic Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Lubrication Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.4 Cylinder Drift Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Platform Drift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Cylinder Drift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.5 Pins and Composite Bearing Repair Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
2.6 Welding on JLG Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Do the Following When Welding on JLG Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Do NOT Do the Following When Welding on JLG Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
SECTION 3 - CHASSIS & TURNTABLE
3.1 Tires & Wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
Tire Inflation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Tire Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Tire Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Wheel Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Wheel Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 Drive Hub Part No. 2780243 (2wd Rear) Part No. 2780244 (4wd Rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Disassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Disassembly of Cover Unit (8). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Disassembly of First Stage Planetary Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Disassembly of the Second Stage Planet Gears (1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Assembly of First Stage Planetary Assembly (7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Assembly Of End Cover Unit (8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Final Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.3 Drive Hub Part No. 2780246 (4wd steer axle Prior to S/N 0300076633) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Disassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Disassembly of Cover Unit (8). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Disassembly of First Stage Planetary Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Disassembly of the Second Stage Planet Gears (1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Assembly of First Stage Planetary Assembly (7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Assembly of End Cover Unit (8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Final Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.4 Torque Hub - 4WD (Machines built after S/N 0300076633) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Roll and Leak Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Tightening and Torquing Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Oil Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Main Disassembly for ”B” Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Hub-Spindle Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Cover Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Carrier Disassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Assembly of the Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Cover Sub-Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Hub-Spindle Sub-Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Main Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Tool List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.5 Re-Aligning Torque Hub Input Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
ii – JLG Lift – 3120895

TABLE OF CONTENTS

3.6 Drive Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Pre-Installation Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Disassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3.7 Drive Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Shaft Seal Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Loop Flushing Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Disassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Initial Start-up Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
3.8 Adjustment Procedure For Lockout Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40
3.9 Toe-In Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40
3.10 2WD Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
Removal & Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Cleaning & Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Assembly & Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3.11 Oscillating Axle Bleeding Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43
3.12 Oscillating Axle Lockout Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43
3.13 Swing Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44
Turntable Bearing Mounting Bolt Condition Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Wear Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Replacement of Swing Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Swing Bearing Torque Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Swing Drive Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3.14 Swing Brake (Prior to S/N 64802) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-50
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Brake Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Assembly Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
3.15 Swing Brake S/N 64802 to Present. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-52
Disassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
3.16 Swing Drive Torque Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-54
Disassembly Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Hub Shaft Sub-Assembly Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Carrier Sub-Assembly Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
3.17 Semi-Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-61
Testing the Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
Removing the Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
Assuming Normal Wear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
3.18 Generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-66
Every 250 hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
Every 500 hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
Overload Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
Inspecting Brushes, Replacing Brushes, and Cleaning Slip Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
3120895 – JLG Lift – iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

3.19 Ford EFI Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-68
Performing Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
Visual/Physical Engine Inspection Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
EFI Diagnostics (Prior to S/N 61718) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
ECM and Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
3.20 Throttle Checks and Adjustments - Deutz Engine (Prior to S/N 61718) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-79
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
Controller Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
Failure Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
3.21 Tilt Alarm Switch (Prior to S/N 61718) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-83
Manual Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
3.22 Hydraulic Welder (225-4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-86
Replacement of Weld Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
Replacement of Hydraulic Motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
Replacement of Fine Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
Rotor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
Replacement of Flow Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
Replacement of Exciting Rectifier Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
Replacement of Weld Rectifier Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
Replace Brushes on Sky Welder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
Replacing Range Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
Replacing Selector Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
Replacement of Couplings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
Voltage Change Over - 120/240 Volt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
3.23 Troubleshooting of the Sky Welder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-90
Low Sky Welder Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-90
Low Welding Amps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-90
No Output on Weld Receptacles or AC Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-90
No Ac Output but Weld Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-90
No Output on Weld Receptacle but AC Receptacle Output OK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
Welder Completely Dead - No AC or Weld Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
Intermittent Welder Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
3.24 Deutz EMR 2 (S/N 77682 to Present) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-95
3.25 GM Engine General Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-108
Maintenance of the Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-108
Engine Electrical System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-108
Checking/Filling Engine Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-108
Changing The Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-109
Coolant Fill Procedure - Dual Fuel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-109
3.26 GM Engine Dual Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-111
Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-111
Electric Lock Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-111
EPR Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-112
Low Pressure Regulator (LPR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-112
Air Fuel Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113
Engine Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114
Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114
Gasoline Multi Point Fuel Injection System (MPFI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114
Gasoline Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115
Gasoline Pressure And Temperature Sensor Manifold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115
Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115
Fuel Injector Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115
Fuel Injector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115
iv – JLG Lift – 3120895

TABLE OF CONTENTS

3.27 GM Engine Fuel System Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-116
Propane Fuel System Pressure Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116
Propane Fuel System Leak Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116
Propane Fuel Filter Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116
Electronic Pressure Regulator (EPR) Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-117
Temperature Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-118
Electronic Throttle Control Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-119
MIXER REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-120
Coolant Hose Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-120
Vapor Hose Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-120
Engine Control Module Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-121
Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-121
3.28 GM Engine LPG Fuel System Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-121
Fuel System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-121
Diagnostic Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-122
3.29 Perkins Engine General Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-138
Replacing the Engine Crankcase Breather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-138
Engine Oil Level - Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-138
Engine Oil and Filter - Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-138
Fuel Filter/Water Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-140
Setting the Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-141
Speed Sensor Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-142
3.30 Engine Radiator Fill Procedure - Perkins & Caterpillar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-142
3.31 DGC DIAGNOSTIC SUPPORT AND TROUBLE CODE DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-144
Section Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-144
List of Abbreviations in this Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-145
Fault Code Broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-146
Diagnostic Trouble Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-146
CAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-146
MIL Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-147
Diagnostic Calibration Configuration and Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-147
Fault/Diagnostic Trouble Code Interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-148
DBW Diagnostic Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-153
3.32 Diagnostic Trouble Code Fault Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-154
DTC 116- ECT Higher Than Expected Stage 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-154
DTC 117- ECT/CHT Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-155
DTC 118- ECT/CHT High Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-157
DTC 122- TPS1 Signal Voltage Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-159
DTC 123- TPS1 Signal Voltage High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-162
DTC 217- ECT Higher Than Expected 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-164
DTC 219- RPM Higher Than Max Allowed Governed Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-165
DTC 336- Crank Signal Input Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-166
DTC 337- Loss of Crank Input Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-168
DTC 521- Oil Pressure Sender/Switch High Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-169
DTC 524- Oil Pressure Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-172
DTC 562- Battery Voltage (VBat) Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-176
DTC 563- Battery Voltage (VBat) High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-178
DTC 601- Microprocessor Failure - FLASH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-180
DTC 604- Microprocessor Failure - RAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-182
3120895 – JLG Lift – v

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DTC 606- Microprocessor Failure - COP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-184
DTC 642- 5 Volt External Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-186
DTC 643- 5 Volt External High Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-188
DTC 1612- Microprocessor Failure - RTI 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-190
DTC 1615- Microprocessor Failure - A/D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-195
DTC 1616- Microprocessor Failure - interrupt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-197
DTC 1625- CAN J1939 Shutdown Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-199
DTC 1626- CAN J1939 Transmit (Tx) Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-200
DTC 1627- CAN J1939 Receive (Rx) Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-201
DTC 1628- CAN Address Conflict Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-202
DTC 1629- J1939 TSC1 Message Reciept Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-204
DTC 1652- TPS1 Loss of Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-205
DTC 2111- Unable to Reach Lower TPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-206
DTC 2112- Unable to Reach Higher TPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-208
DTC 9999- Throttle Actuator Failsafe Spring Failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-209
DTC to SPN/FMI Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-210
SECTION 4 - BOOM & PLATFORM
4.1 Boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Disassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.2 Articulating jib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.3 Limit Switch Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Boom Horizontal Limit Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Dual Capacity Angle Limit Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Boom Length Limit Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.4 Drive Card Setup Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Machine Orientation When Doing Speed Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Test Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Lift, Swing, and Drive Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Flow Control Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.5 Helac Rotary actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Theory Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Tools Required for Assembly/Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Disassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Installing Counterbalance Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
vi – JLG Lift – 3120895

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 5 - HYDRAULICS
5.1 Cylinders - Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1
Systems Incorporating Double Acting Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Systems Incorporating Holding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 Cylinder Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1
Cylinders Without Counterbalance Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Cylinders With Dual Counterbalance Valves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Disassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.3 Valves - Theory of Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Solenoid Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Relief Valves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.4 Pressure Setting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
1. Bang-Bang Main Relief Valve; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
2. Steer; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
3. Platform Level Up; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
4. Platform Level Down;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5. Articulating Jib Up; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
6. Articulating Jib Down; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
7. The Bang-Bang Main Relief Valve; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
8. The Proportional Main relief valve; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
9. Lift Down; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
10. Swing; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.5 Hydraulic Motor Repair (H Series Char-lynn) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Disassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Reassembly Shaft End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Gerotor End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Timing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Standard Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Reverse Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.6 Hydraulic Pump “Neutral” Or Null Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
5.7 Non-feedback, Proportional Electrical Control - NFPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Features and Benefits of the NFPE Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Input Signal requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.8 Hydraulic Component Start-Up Procedures and Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
SECTION 6 - JLG CONTROL SYSTEM (S/N 61718 TO PRESENT)
6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
6.2 To Connect the JLG Control System Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
6.3 Using the Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
6.4 Changing the Access Level of the Hand Held Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
6.5 Adjusting Parameters Using the Hand Held Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
6.6 Machine Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
6.7 Level Vehicle Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
6.8 Machine Personality Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-17
6.9 System Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-62
Test from the Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Test from the Ground Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
6.10 Analyzer Diagnostics Menu Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-81
3120895 – JLG Lift – vii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 7 - BASIC ELECTRICAL INFORMATION & SCHEMATICS
7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1
7.2 Multimeter Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Backprobing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Min/Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Voltage Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Resistance Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Continuity Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Current Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.3 Checking Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Basic Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Limit Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Automatic Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Switch Wiring - Low Side, High Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.4 Applying Silicone Dielectric Compound to Electrical Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
Installation of Dielectric Grease. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Deutsch HD, DT, DTM, DRC Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
AMP Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
AMP Mate-N-Lok . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
DIN Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Exclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.5 AMP Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8
Applying Silicone Dielectric Compound to AMP Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Disassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Wedge Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Service - Voltage Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.6 Deutsch Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
DT/DTP Series Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
DT/DTP Series Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
HD30/HDP20 Series Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
HD30/HDP20 Series Disassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
viii – JLG Lift – 3120895

LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE NO. TITLE PAGE NO.

1-1. Serial Number Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
1-2. Operator Maintenance and Lubrication Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
1-3. Deutz Engine Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
1-4. Filter Lock Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11
1-5. Torque Chart (SAE Fasteners - Sheet 1 of 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
1-9. Torque Chart (METRIC Fasteners - Sheet 5 of 7). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
2-1. Engine Operating Temperature Specifications - Deutz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
2-2. Engine Operating Temperature Specifications - Ford . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
2-3. Engine Operating Temperature Specifications - Caterpillar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
2-4. Engine Operating Temperature Specifications - GM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
2-5. Engine Operating Temperature Specifications - Perkins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
3-1. Drive Hub (Part No. 2780243-2WD Rear & Part No. 2780244-4WD Rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
3-2. Drive Hub (Part No. 2780246-4WD Steer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
3-3. Cluster Gear Punch Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
3-4. Drive Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
3-5. Swing Brake Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
3-6. Drive Motor Cross Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
3-7. Removing the Shaft Seal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
3-8. Loop Flushing Spool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
3-10. Plugs, Fittings, and Speed Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
3-11. End Cap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
3-12. Valve Plate & Rear Shaft Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
3-13. Cylinder Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
3-14. Shaft Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
3-15. Shaft & Front Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
3-16. Swash Plate & Servo Piston . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
3-17. Cylinder Kit Disassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
3-18. Servo Piston . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
3-19. Cylinder Kit Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
3-20. Swash Plate and Journal Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
3-21. Shaft and Front Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
3-22. Cylinder Kit Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
3-23. Servo Spring and Minimum Angle Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
3-24. Valve Plate and Rear Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
3-25. End Cap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
3-26. Shaft Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
3-27. Plugs and Fittings Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
3-29. Front Axle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40
3-30. 2WD Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42
3120895 – JLG Lift – ix

LIST OF FIGURES

3-31. Swing Bearing Feeler Gauge Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45
3-32. Swing Bearing Tolerance Measuring Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45
3-33. Swing Bearing Torque Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47
3-34. Drive Motor Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47
3-35. Swing Drive Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48
3-36. Swing Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49
3-37. Swing Brake Prior to S/N 64802 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51
3-38. Swing Brake S/N 64802 to Present. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-53
3-39. Swing Torque Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-55
3-40. Auxiliary Pump - Sheet 1 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-64
3-41. Auxiliary Pump - Sheet 2 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-65
3-42. Inspecting Generator Brushes, Replacing Brushes, and Cleaning Slip Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-67
3-43. Malfunction Indicator Light and Test Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-69
3-44. EFI Component Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-72
3-45. Typical Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-76
3-46. Addco Adjustments - Deutz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-80
3-47. Addco Throttle Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-82
3-48. Tilt Switch Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-83
3-49. Valve Location - Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-84
3-50. Hyd Tank Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-85
3-51. Hydraulic Welder 225-4 (sht 1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-92
3-52. Hydraulic Welder 225-4 (sht 2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-93
3-53. EMR 2 Engine Side Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-96
3-54. Deutz EMR 2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-97
3-55. Deutz EMR 2 Vehicle Side Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-98
3-56. Deutz EMR 2 Engine Side Connection Diagram - Sheet 1 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-99
3-57. Deutz EMR 2 Engine Side Connection Diagram - Sheet 2 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-100
3-58. EMR 2 Engine Plug Pin Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-101
3-59. EMR 2 Vehicle Plug Pin Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-102
3-60. EMR2 Fault Codes - Sheet 1 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-103
3-65. Engine Oil Dip Stick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-108
3-66. Electric Fuel Lock Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-111
3-67. EPR Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-112
3-68. Low Pressure Regulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-112
3-69. Air Fuel Mixer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-113
3-70. ETC throttle control device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-113
3-71. LPG Engine Control Unit (ECM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-114
3-72. ECM Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-114
3-73. Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor (HEGO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-114
3-74. Gasoline Fuel Pressure and Temperature Manifold Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-115
3-75. Filter Lock Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-116
3-76. EPR Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-117
x – JLG Lift – 3120895

LIST OF FIGURES

3-77. Pressure Regulator Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-118
3-78. (TMAP) Sensor & Electronic Throttle Control (ETC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-118
3-79. Mixer Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-120
3-80. EPR Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-121
3-81. GM 3.0L Engine - Sheet 1 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-136
3-82. GM 3.0L Engine - Sheet 2 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-137
3-83. Crankcase Breather - Perkins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-138
3-84. Perkins Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-139
3-85. Fuel Filter/Water Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-140
3-86. Faults Page with Active Fault Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-148
3-87. Faults Page with Historic Fault Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-149
3-88. Custom Fault Variable Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-150
3-89. Historic Fault Information Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-151
3-90. Snapshot Data Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-152
3-91. Flight Data Recorder Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-152
3-92. Clear Faults Prompt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-153
3-93. Exhaust Venturi Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-211
4-1. Support - Side Entry Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
4-2. Support - Rear Entry Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
4-3. Location of Components - Boom Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
4-4. Articulating Jib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
4-5. Limit Switches - 500 / 1000 LB (230 / 450 kg) Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
4-6. Limit Switches - 750 LB (340 kg) Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
4-7. Limit Switches - CE Machines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
4-8. Limit Switches - 460SJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
4-9. Control Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
4-10. Rotary Actuator (Exploded View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
4-11. Cutaway View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
4-12. Rotator Counterbalance Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
5-1. Boom Prop Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
5-2. Cylinder Barrel Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
5-3. Capscrew Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
5-4. Cylinder Rod Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
5-5. Tapered Bushing Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
5-6. Composite Bearing Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
5-7. Rod Seal Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
5-8. Axle Lockout Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
5-9. Platform Level Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
5-10. Jib Lift Cylinder (460SJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7
5-11. Lift Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
5-12. Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
5-13. Steer Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
5-14. Telescope Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
5-15. Wiper Seal Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
5-16. Installation of Head Seal Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
5-17. Piston Seal Kit Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
3120895 – JLG Lift – xi

LIST OF FIGURES

5-18. Tapered Bushing Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
5-19. Seating the Tapered Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
5-20. Poly-Pak Piston Seal Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
5-21. Rod Assembly Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
5-22. Main Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
5-23. Main Valve Cartridge Torque Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
5-24. Char-Lynn H Series Hydraulic Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
5-25. Variable Displacement Hydraulic Pump. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
6-1. Hand Held Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
6-2. ADE Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
6-3. Analyzer Connecting Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
6-4. Control Module Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
6-5. Analyzer Flow Chart, Prior to Version 5.X Software - Sheet 1 of 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
6-9. Analyzer Flow Chart, Version 5.X Software - Sheet 1 of 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
6-13. System Test Flow Chart - Platform Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-63
6-14. System Test Flow Chart - Ground Station Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-65
7-1. Voltage Measurement (DC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1
7-2. Resistance Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
7-3. Continuity Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
7-4. Current Measurement (DC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
7-5. Application to Female Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
7-6. Use of Seal Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
7-7. Connector Assembly Figure 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8
7-8. AMP Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8
7-12. Connector Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
7-13. Connector Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11
7-14. DT/DTP Contact Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
7-15. DT/DTP Contact Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
7-16. HD/HDP Contact Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
7-17. HD/HDP Locking Contacts Into Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
7-18. HD/HDP Contact Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
7-19. HD/HDP Unlocking Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
7-20. Electrical Components Installation w/o JLG Control System - Sheet 1 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
7-21. Electrical Components Installation w/o JLG Control System - Sheet 2 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
7-22. Electrical Components Installation with JLG Control System - Sheet 1 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
7-23. Electrical Components Installation with JLG Control System - Sheet 2 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
7-24. On Board Generator Electrical Schematic. (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19
xii – JLG Lift – 3120895

LIST OF FIGURES

7-25. Electrical Schematic - Ford Engine w/o JLG Control System - Sheet 1 of 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
7-29. Electrical Schematic - Deutz Engine w/o JLG Control System - Sheet 1 of 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24
7-33. Electrical Schematic - Isuzu Engine w/o JLG Control System - Sheet 1 of 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-28
7-37. Electrical Schematic - Caterpillar Engine - Sheet 1 of 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-32
7-43. Electrical Schematic - Deutz EMR2 & GM Engine - Sheet 1 of 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-38
7-49. Electrical Schematic - Hydraulic Welder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-44
7-50. Electrical Schematic - Deutz, GM, & CAT Engine - Sheet 1 of 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-46
7-56. Hydraulic Schematic - (Sheet 1 of 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-52
3120895 – JLG Lift – xiii

LIST OF TABLES
TABLE NO. TITLE PAGE NO.

1-1 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
1-2 Ford LRG-425 (Gas or Dual Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
1-3 Deutz F3M1011F/F3M2011F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
1-4 Isuzu 4LE1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
1-5 Caterpillar 3024/C2.2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
1-6 GM 3.0L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
1-7 Perkins 404C-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
1-8 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
1-9 Specifications and Performance Data - 400S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
1-11 Torque Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
1-10 Specifications and Performance Data - 460SJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
1-12 Critical Stability Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
1-13 Major Component Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
1-14 Function Speeds (In Seconds) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
1-15 Relief Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
1-16 Cylinder Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
1-17 Hydraulic Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
1-18 Mobilfluid 424 Specs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
1-19 Mobil EAL H 46 Specs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
1-20 Exxon Univis HVI 26 Specs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
1-21 Welder Specifications - Model 225-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
1-22 Lubrication Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
2-1 Inspection and Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
2-2 Cylinder Drift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
2-3 Inspection and Preventive Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
3-1 Wheel Torque Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
3-2 Excessive Noise and/or Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
3-3 System Operating Hot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
3-4 Won’t Shift or Slow to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
3-5 Displacement Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
3-6 Slipper Foot Thickness & End Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
3-7 Cylinder Block Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
3-8 Adjustment Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-63
3-9 ECM Diagnostic Trouble Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-70
3-10 Position Controller Truth Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-79
3-11 LPF Fuel System Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-123
3-12 Symptom Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-126
3-13 DTC to SPN/FMI Cross Reference Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-134
3-14 J1939 Diagnostic Lamp Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-147
3-15 Diagnostic Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-147
3-16 Historic Fault Information Interface Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-151
4-1 Function Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
4-2 Flow Control Card Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
4-3 Flow Control Card Ramp Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
5-1 Cylinder Head and Tapered Bushing Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
xiv – JLG Lift – 3120895

LIST OF TABLES

5-2 Holding Valve Torque Specification.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
5-3 Pump Flow Direction with NFPE Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
6-1 Personality Ranges/Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-17
6-2 Help Fault Codes, Displayed Faults, and Descriptions - Prior to S/N 66995 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-20
6-3 Help Fault Codes, Displayed Faults, and Descriptions - S/N 66995 to Present . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-24
6-4 Machine Configuration Programming Information Prior to Software Version P5.3 . . . . . . . . . . . .6-45
6-5 Machine Configuration Programming Information Software Version P5.3 to P6.1 . . . . . . . . . . . .6-49
6-6 Machine Configuration Programming Information Software Version P6.1 to Present. . . . . . . . . .6-54
6-7 System Test Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-66
6-8 Machine Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-69
6-9 Analyzer Fault Code Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-73
6-10 ADJUSTMENTS - Personality Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-81
6-11 Diagnostic Menu Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-84
3120895 – JLG Lift – xv

LIST OF TABLES
This page left blank intentionally.
xvi – JLG Lift – 3120895

SECTION 1. SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 CAPACITIES Table 1-3. Deutz F3M1011F/F3M2011F

Table 1-1. Capacities
Fuel Diesel
Fuel Tank 26 gallons (98.4 liters) No. of Cylinders 3
Hydraulic Tank 40.0 gallons (152 liters) Bore 3.6 in. (91 mm)
Hydraulic System (Including Tank) 52 gallons (196.8 liters) Stroke 4.4 in. (112 mm)
Drive Hub 17 ounces (0.5 liters) Displacement 133 cu. in. (2184 cm³)
Engine Oil Capacity BHP at Max. RPM 48
Ford 4.5 Quarts (4.25 L) w/Filter Oil Capacity
Deutz 6.3 qts. (6 L) w/Filter crankcase 6.3 quarts (6 L)
Caterpillar 3.8 quarts (3.6 L) crankcase only cooler 4.75 quarts (4.5 L)
GM 4.5 qts. (4.25 L) w/Filter total capacity 11 quarts (10.5 L)
Low RPM 1200
1.2 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS Mid RPM 1800
High RPM 2800
NOTE: RPM Tolerances are ± 100.
Table 1-4. Isuzu 4LE1

Table 1-2. Ford LRG-425 (Gas or Dual Fuel)
Fuel Diesel
Type 4 cylinder, 4 stroke, spark
ignition No. of Cylinders 4
Fuel Gasoline or Gasoline/LP Gas BHP at Max. RPM 45
Bore 3 in. (96 mm) Low RPM 1000
Stroke 3.4 in. (86.4 mm) Mid RPM 1500
Displacement 153 cu. in. (2.5 L) High RPM 2800
Firing Order 1-3-4-2

BHP at Max. RPM 82 Table 1-5. Caterpillar 3024/C2.2
Oil Capacity 4.5 quarts (4.26 L) Fuel Diesel

Low RPM 1000 No. of Cylinders 4
Mid RPM 1800 BHP 46.5 hp (34 kW)
High RPM 3000 Bore 3.307 in. (84 mm)
Fuel Consumption: Gasoline Stroke 3.9370 in. (112 mm)
Intermittent 6 gal. hr. Displacement 134.3 cu. in. (2.2L)
Continuous 5 gal. hr.
Oil Capacity 3.8 quarts (3.6 L) crankcase
Fuel Consumption: LPG only
Intermittent 26 lbs. hr.
Compression Ratio 19:1
Continuous 23 lbs. hr.
Firing Order 1-3-4-2
Spark Plug AWSF-52-C
Max. RPM 2800
Spark Plug Gap 0.044 in. (1.117 mm)
3120895 – JLG Lift – 1-1

Table 1-6. GM 3.0L 1.4 SPECIFICATIONS AND PERFORMANCE

Fuel Gasoline or Gasoline/LP Gas DATA
No. of Cylinders 4 Table 1-9. Specifications and Performance Data - 400S
BHP
Gasoline 83 hp @ 3000 rpm Maximum Work Load (Capacity): standard
LP 75 hp @ 3000 rpm Unrestricted: 500 lbs. (230 kg.)
Bore 4.0 in. (101.6 mm) Restricted: 1000 lbs. (230 kg)
Optional: 750 lbs. (340 kg)
Stroke 3.6 in. (91.44 mm)
Maximum Travel Grade, Stowed Position 2 W/D-30%
Displacement 181 cu.in. (3.0 L, 2966 cc)
(Gradeability) 4 W/D-45%
Oil Capacity w/filter 4.5 qts. (4.25 L)
Maximum Travel Grade, Stowed Position 5o
Minimum Oil Pressure
(Side Slope)
at idle 6 psi (0.4 Bar) @ 1000 rpm
Hot 18 psi (1.2 Bar) @ 2000 rpm Maximum Vertical Platform Height: 40 ft. (12 m)
Compression Ratio 9.2:1 Maximum Horizontal Platform Reach: 34 ft. (10 m.)
Firing Order 1-3-4-2 Turning Radius (Outside) 16 ft. (5 m.)
Max. RPM 2800
Turning Radius (Inside) 6 ft.-8 in. (2 m.)
Overall Width 6ft.- 6in. (1.98 m)
Table 1-7. Perkins 404C-22
Tail swing Zero
Fuel Diesel
Stowed Height 7ft. 4in. (2.24 m)
No. of Cylinders 4
Stowed Length 20ft. 2in. (6.15 m)
BHP 50 HP (37.3 kW)
Bore 3.3 in. (84 mm) Wheelbase 7ft. 10in. (2,3 m)
Stroke 3.9 in. (100 mm) Ground Clearance 12in. (30 cm)
Firing Order 1-3-4-2 Max. Tire Load (400S-500 lbs. Cap.) 6200 lbs. (2812 kg)
Displacement 135 cu.in. (2.2 L) Max. Tire Load (400S-750 lbs. Cap.) 8350 lbs. (3788 kg)
Oil Capacity w/filter 10 qt. (9.4 L) Ground Bearing Pressure
12x16.5 FF Tires 58 psi (4.07 kg/cm2)
Compression Ratio 23.3:1
14x17.5 pneumatic tires 45 psi (3.16 kg/cm2)
Travel Speed, boom stowed.(2WD/4WD) 4.5 m.p.h. (7.24 kmh)
1.3 TIRES (27-32 sec/ 200ft.)
Table 1-8. Tires Travel Speed, boom elevated. (2WD/4WD) 0.75 m.p.h. (1.20 kmh)
(46-115 sec/ 50 ft.)
Size Type Pressure Weight
Gross Machine Weight Std. 2wd Machine
12x16.5 Pneumatic 90 psi 128 lbs. (Platform Empty, Pneumatic Tires)
(6.2 Bar) (58 kg) 500 lb. (230 kg) Capacity 12,525 lbs. (5681kg)
12x16.5 Foam-filled N/A 328 lbs. 750 lb. (340 kg) Capacity 13,525 lbs. (6135 kg)
(149kg) Maximum System Voltage 12 VDC
14x17.5 Pneumatic 90 psi 128 lbs.
Max. Hydraulic System Operating Pressure 4060 psi (280 bar)
(6 Bar) (58 kg)
14x17.5 Foam-filled N/A 440 lbs. Manual Force 400 N maximum
(200kg) Maximum Wind Speed 28 mph (12.5 m/s)
33/16LLx16.1- Sand Pneumatic 90 psi 119.5 lbs.
(2.75 bar) (54 kg)
33/16LLx16.1- Sand Foam Filled N/A 426 lbs.
(193 kg)
Semitrack Tires
24x12x 12 Pneumatic 20 psi 20.7 lbs.
(1.4 bar) (9.38 kg)
1-2 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Table 1-10. Specifications and Performance Data - 460SJ 1.6 CRITICAL STABILITY WEIGHTS
Maximum Work Load (Capacity):
Table 1-12.Critical Stability Weights
Unrestricted: 500 lbs. (230 kg.)
Maximum Travel Grade, Stowed Position 2 W/D - 30% Component LB. KG
(Gradeability) 4 W/D - 45% Ford Engine 339 154
Maximum Travel Grade, Stowed Position 5o Deutz Engine 441 200
(Side Slope) 8 ft Platform (x 30") 205 93
Maximum Vertical Platform Height: 46 ft. (14 m.) 6 ft. Platform (x 30") 160 73
Maximum Horizontal Platform Reach: 40 ft. (12 m.) 5 ft. Platform (x 30") 145 66
Turning Radius (Outside) 16 ft. (5 m.) 4ft. Platform (x 30") 130 59

8 ft. Platform (x 36") 230 105
Turning Radius (Inside) 6 ft.-8 in. (2 m.)
Bolt-on T/T Cwt. (SJ) 487 221
Overall Width 6ft.- 6in. (1.98 m)
12 x16.5 pneu.Tire & Wheel 128 58
Tail swing Zero 12 x16.5 F/F Tire & Wheel 440 200
Stowed Height 7ft. 4in. (2.24 m) 12 x 21.5 (NHS)pneu.Tire & 55 97
Stowed Length 20ft. 2in. (6.15 m) Wheel
12 x 21.5 (NHS)F/F Tire & Wheel 224 102
Wheelbase 7ft. 10in. (2,3 m)
14 x16.1 Sand pneu. Tire & Wheel 91.5 42
Ground Clearance 12in. (30 cm)
14 x16.1 Sand F/F Tire & Wheel 440 200
Max. Tire Load 7200 lbs. (3266 kg)
Ground Bearing Pressure 63 psi (4.4 kg/cm2)
Travel Speed, boom stowed.(2WD/4WD) 4.5 m.p.h. (7.24 kmh)
(27-32 sec/ 200ft.)
Travel Speed, boom elevated. (2WD/ 0.75 m.p.h. (1.20 kmh)
4WD) (46-115 sec/ 50 ft.)
Gross Machine Weight Std. 2wd Machine 7192 kg (15,855 lb.)
(Platform Empty, Pneumatic Tires)
Maximum System Voltage 12 VDC
Max. Hydraulic System Operating Pres- 4060 psi (280 bar)
sure
Maximum Manual Force 400 N
Maximum Wind Speed 28 mph (12.5 m/s)
1.5 TORQUE REQUIREMENTS

Table 1-11.Torque Requirements
Interval
Description Torque Value
Hours
Wheel Lugs 170 ft. lbs. (231 Nm) 150
Swing Bearing ((Loctite) 190 ft. lbs. (260 Nm) 50/600*
* Check swing bearing bolts for security after first 50 hours of
operation and every 600 hours thereafter.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 1-3

1.7 MAJOR COMPONENT WEIGHTS 1.8 FUNCTION SPEEDS

Table 1-14.Function Speeds (In Seconds)
Table 1-13.Major Component Weights
Function Speed
Component LB. KG
Main Boom Lift Up 26-32
8 ft Platform 230 105
Main Boom Lift Down 19-25
6ft. Platform 160 73
Swing - (10% max diff.) 70-90
5 ft. Platform 145 66
Telescope Out 18-23
4 ft. platform 130 59
Telescope In 23-29
Extend-A-Reach 230 104
Platform Rotate (Left & Right) - (15% max diff.) 9-15
Boom (400S) 985 447
Jib Up - (460SJ) 17-23
Boom (460SJ) 1250 567
Jib Down - (460SJ) 13-20
Turntable 3560 1615
Drive Forward & Reverse (200 ft.) 27-32
Engine Tray 890 404 (4.5 MPH)
Hydraulic Tray 225 102 Drive Above Horizontal, Fwd. & Rev. 46-115
Tail Counterweight (460SJ) 3410 1547 (.75-.33 MPH)
Chassis (12x16.5 pneu. tires) 4200 1905
12 x16.5 pneu.Tire & Wheel 128 58
1.9 PRESSURE SETTINGS - PSI (BAR)
12 x16.5 F/F, Tire & Wheel 440 200
12 x21.5 (NHS)pneu.Tire & 55 97 Cold temperatures have a significant impact on pressure
Wheel readings. JLG Industries Inc. recommends operating the
machine until hydraulic systems have warmed to normal
12 x 21.5 (NHS) F/F, Tire & Wheel 224 102 operating temperatures prior to checking pressures. It is
14 x16.1 Sand pneu. Tire & 91.5 42 also recommended using a calibrated gauge. Pressure
Wheel readings are accepted if within +/-5% of specified pres-
14 x16.1 Sand F/F Tire & Wheel 440 200 sures.
Jib 320 145 Table 1-15.Relief Settings
Hydraulic Welder 140 64 Circuit PSI Bar
Main Relief - (Bang-Bang Valve) 2500 172
Main Relief (Proportional Valve) 2750 189
Lift Up N/A N/A
Lift Down 1600 110
Level Down 1800 124
Level Up 2800 193
Swing (Right & Left) 1600 110
Steer 2500 172
Jib Up (460SJ Only) 2500 172
Jib Down (460SJ Only) 1200 83
Drive - (Pre-Set) 4500 310
1-4 – JLG Lift – 3120895

1.10 CYLINDER SPECIFICATIONS Aside from JLG recommendations, it is not advisable to

mix oils of different brands or types, as they may not con-
Table 1-16.Cylinder Specifications
tain the same required additives or be of comparable vis-
Cylinder Bore Stroke Rod Dia. cosities. If use of hydraulic oil other than Mobilfluid 424 is
desired, contact JLG Industries for proper recommenda-
Oscillation 2.5 in. 4.125 in. 1.75 in. tions.
(63.5 mm) (104.8 mm) (44.45 mm)
Table 1-18. Mobilfluid 424 Specs
Main Lift 5.0 in. 39.0 in. 2.5 in.
(127.0 mm) (990.0 mm) (63.5 mm) SAE Grade 10W30
Telescope 3.0 in. 181.0 in. 2.0 in. Gravity, API 29.0
(76.2 mm) (459.74 cm) (50.8 mm)
Density, Lb/Gal. 60°F 7.35
Slave 2.5 in. 14.9 in. 1.25 in.
Pour Point, Max -46°F (-43°C)
(63.5 mm) (37.9 cm) (31.75 mm)
Flash Point, Min. 442°F (228°C)
Master 2.5 in. 15.13 in. 1.25 in.
(63.5 mm) (38.4 cm) (31.75 mm) Viscosity
Jib 3.0 in. 18.4 in. 1.5 in. Brookfield, cP at -18°C 2700
(76.2 mm) (46.7 cm) (38.1 mm) at 40° C 55 cSt
steer 2.5 in 9.2 in 1.75 in at 100° C 9.3 cSt
(63.5 mm) (233.6 mm) (44.58 mm) Viscosity Index 152
1.11 LUBRICATION
Hydraulic Oil Table 1-19. Mobil EAL H 46 Specs
Type Synthetic Biodegradable

Table 1-17.Hydraulic Oil
ISO Viscosity Grade 46
Hydraulic System S.A.E. Viscosity
Specific Gravity .910
Operating Temperature Range Grade
+0° to + 180° F (-18° to +83° C) 10W Pour Point -44°F (-42°C)
+0° to + 210° F (-18° to +99° C) 10W-20, 10W30 Flash Point 500°F (260°C)
+50° to + 210° F (+10° to +99° C) 20W-20 Operating Temp. 0 to 180°F (-17 to 162°C)
7.64 lb. per gal.
Weight
NOTE: Hydraulic oils must have anti-wear qualities at least (0.9 kg per liter)
to API Service Classification GL-3, and sufficient
Viscosity
chemical stability for mobile hydraulic system ser-
vice. JLG Ind. recommends Mobilfluid 424 hydraulic at 40° C 45 cSt
oil, which has an SAE viscosity index of 152. at 100° C 8.0 cSt
Viscosity Index 153
NOTE: When temperatures remain consistently below 20
degrees F. (-7 degrees C.), JLG Industries recom-
mends the use of Mobil DTE-13. Table 1-20. Exxon Univis HVI 26 Specs
NOTE: Machines may be equipped with Mobil EAL224H bio- Specific Gravity 32.1
degradable and non-toxic hydraulic oil. This is Vege- Pour Point -76°F (-60°C)
table oil based and possesses the same anti-wear
Flash Point 217°F (103°C)
and rust protection characteristics as mineral oils,
but will not adversely affect the ground water or the Viscosity
environment when spilled or leaked in small at 40° C 25.8 cSt
amounts. Mobil EAL224H has a viscosity of 34 cSt at
at 100° C 9.3 cSt
40° C. and viscosity index of 213. The operating tem-
perature range of this oil is -18° C. to +83° C. Viscosity Index 376
NOTE: Mobil/Exxon recommends that this oil be
checked on a yearly basis for viscosity.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 1-5

1.12 WELDER, HYDRAULIC (OPTION)

Table 1-21.Welder Specifications - Model 225-4
Description Specification
Weld Amps 225
Strike Weld 75
Weld Voltage 21.6 - 28 DC
Frequency 60 Hz, KVA - 4.2 Kw, Single Phase
Oil Flow 18.8 Gpm, 2000 Psi.
1.13 SERIAL NUMBER LOCATION

A serial number plate is affixed to the left rear side of the
frame. If the serial number plate is damaged or missing,
the machine serial number is stamped on the left side of
the frame. SERIAL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
PLATE STAMPED ON FRAME
Figure 1-1. Serial Number Location
5 14,15,16,17,18,19 20 3 9
8,9,10,11,12,13 21, 22
8
1 4 7 6
Figure 1-2. Operator Maintenance and Lubrication Diagram
1-6 – JLG Lift – 3120895

1.14 OPERATOR MAINTENANCE AND 2. Wheel Bearings (2WD Only)
LUBRICATION
NOTE: The following numbers correspond to those in Figure
1-2., Operator Maintenance and Lubrication Dia-
gram.
Table 1-22. Lubrication Specifications
KEY SPECIFICATIONS
MPG Multipurpose Grease having a minimum dripping point of 350°
F (177° C). Excellent water resistance and adhesive qualities,
and being of extreme pressure type. Lube Point(s) - Repack
(Timken OK 40 pounds minimum.) Capacity - A/R
EPGL Extreme Pressure Gear Lube (oil) meeting API service classifi- Lube - MPG
cation GL-5 or MIL-Spec MIL-L-2105 Interval - Every 2 years or 1200 hours of operation
HO Hydraulic Oil. API service classification GL-3, e.g. Mobilfluid 3. Wheel Drive Hub
424.
Lube Point(s) - Level/Fill Plug
EO Engine (crankcase) Oil. Gas - API SF, SH, SG class, MIL-L- Capacity - 17 oz. (0.5 L) - 1/2 Full
2104. Diesel - API CC/CD class, MIL-L-2104B/MIL-L-2104C. Lube - EPGL
OGL Open Gear Lubricant - Mobiltac 375 or equivalent. Interval - Check level every 3 months or 150 hrs of
operation; change every 2 years or 1200 hours of
operation
4. Hydraulic Return Filter
LUBRICATION INTERVALS ARE BASED ON MACHINE OPERATION
UNDER NORMAL CONDITIONS. FOR MACHINES USED IN MULTI- Interval - Change after first 50 hrs. and every 6
SHIFT OPERATIONS AND/OR EXPOSED TO HOSTILE ENVIRON- months or 300 hrs. thereafter or whenever Charge
MENTS OR CONDITIONS, LUBRICATION FREQUENCIES MUST BE Filter is replaced.
INCREASED ACCORDINGLY.
5. Hydraulic Charge Filter
NOTE: It is recommended as a good practice to replace all Interval - Change after first 50 hrs. and every 6
filters at the same time. months or 300 hrs. thereafter or as indicated by
Condition Indicator.
1. Swing Bearing - Internal Ball Bearing
6. Hydraulic Tank
Lube Point(s) - 2 Grease Fittings
Capacity - A/R Lube Point(s) - Fill Cap
Lube - MPG Capacity - 40.0 gal. tank (151L) 52.0 gal. system
Interval - Every 3 months or 150 hrs of operation (196.8L)
Comments - Fittings in center of bearing: Remote Lube - HO
Access is optional Interval - Check Level daily; Change every 2 years or
1200 hours of operation.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 1-7

7. Suction Strainers
Lube Point(s) - 2
Interval - Every 2 years or 1200 hours of operation, MINIMUM OIL
LEVEL
remove and clean at time of hydraulic oil change.
8. Oil Change w/Filter - Ford
MAXIMUM OIL
LEVEL
MINIMUM LEVEL,
OIL HOT
MAXIMUM LEVEL,
OIL HOT
Lube Point(s) - Fill Cap/Spin-on Element (JLG P/N
7014501)
Capacity - 4.5 Quarts
MINIMUM LEVEL,
Lube - EO
OIL COLD
Interval - 3 Months or 150 hours of operation MAXIMUM LEVEL,
OIL COLD
Comments - Check level daily/Change in accor-
dance with engine manual. NOTE: Hot oil checks should not be made until the engine
has been shut down for a period of 5 minutes.
9. Oil Change w/Filter - Deutz
Figure 1-3. Deutz Engine Dipstick
10. Oil Change w/Filter - Isuzu

7022111)
Capacity - 6 qt. (5.6L) engine; 6.5 qt. (6.1L) w/cooler
Lube - EO
Interval - 3 Months or 150 hours of operation
dance with engine manual.
11. Oil Change w/Filter - Caterpillar
7026855)
Capacity - 10 Quarts (9.4 L)
7016331)
Lube - EO
Capacity - 6.3 qt. (5.9) engine
Interval - Every Year or 600 hours of operation
Lube - EO
dance with engine manual. Refer to Figure 1-3.,
Deutz Engine Dipstick.
1-8 – JLG Lift – 3120895

12. Oil Change w/Filter - GM 15. Fuel Filter - Deutz
Lube Point(s) - Fill Cap/Spin-on Element

(JLG P/N 7027965) Lube Point(s) - Replaceable Element
Capacity - 4.5 qt. (4.25 L) w/filter Interval - Every Year or 600 hours of operation
Lube - EO
16. Fuel Filter - Isuzu
Comments - Check level daily/Change in accor- Lube Point(s) - Replaceable Element
dance with engine manual. Interval - Every Year or 600 hours of operation
13. Oil Change w/Filter - Perkins 17. Fuel Filter - Caterpillar
Lube Point(s) - Fill Cap/Spin-on Element (JLG P/N Lube Point(s) - Replaceable Element
7026855) Interval - Every Year or 600 hours of operation
Capacity - 10 Quarts (9.4 L)
18. Fuel Filter (Gasoline) - GM
Lube - EO
Interval - Every Year or 600 hours of operation Lube Point(s) - Replaceable Element
Comments - Check level daily/Change in accor- Interval - Every 6 months or 300 hours of operation
19. Fuel Filter - Perkins
14. Fuel Filter - Ford
Lube Point(s) - Replaceable Element
20. Air Filter


Interval - Every 6 months or 300 hours of operation
or as indicated by the condition indicator
3120895 – JLG Lift – 1-9

21. Electronic Pressure Regulator (LP only) 2. Start the engine and bring to operating temperature.
3. With the engine running, close the manual tank
valve and run the engine out of fuel.
4. Push in the Emergency Switch once the engine
stops.
5. Disconnect the electrical connection to the LPG fuel
temperature sensor in the auxiliary fuel port of the
EPR.

Comments - Drain oil build up. Refer to Draining Oil
Build Up From The Propane Regulator
22. Fuel Filter (Propane) - GM Engine
6. Remove the retainer clip for the LPG fuel tempera-

ture sensor and remove the sensor from the regula-
tor body.

Comments - Replace filter. Refer to Propane Fuel Fil-
ter Replacement
Draining Oil Build Up From The Propane

Regulator
During the course of normal operation oils may build
inside the primary and secondary chambers of the pro-
pane pressure regulator. These oils may be a result of
poor fuel quality, contamination of the fuel supply
chain, or regional variation in the make up of the fuel. If
the build up of the oil is significant this can effect the NOTE: Have a small container ready to collect oil that will
operation of the fuel control system. Refer to Section drain freely from the regulator at this point.
1.14, Operator Maintenance and Lubrication for main-
tenance intervals. More frequent draining may be 7. Once all of the oil has been drained, reinstall the
required if the fuel supply has been contaminated. LPG fuel temperature sensor and reconnect the
electrical connector.
8. Open the fuel tank manual valve.
FOR BEST RESULTS WARM THE ENGINE TO OPERATING TEM- 9. Start the engine and verify all connections are
PERATURE BEFORE DRAINING. THIS WILL ALLOW THE OILS TO secure.
BE LIQUID AND FLOW FREELY FROM THE REGULATOR.
10. Dispose of any drained oil in a safe and proper fash-
1. Move the equipment to a well ventilated area. ion.
Ensure there are no external ignition sources.
1-10 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Propane Fuel Filter Replacement INSTALLATION
BE SURE TO REINSTALL THE FILTER MAGNET INTO THE HOUS-

ING BEFORE INSTALLING NEW SEAL
1. Install the mounting plate to lock off O-ring seal.

2. Install the retaining bolt seal.
3. Install the housing seal.
4. Drop the magnet into the bottom of the filter hous-
ing.
5. Install the filter into the housing.
6. Install the retaining bolt into the filter housing.
7. Install the filter up to the bottom of the electric lock
off.
8. Tighten the filter retaining bolt to 106 in lbs (12 Nm).
1. Electric Lock Off Solenoid 7. Electrical Connector
2. Mounting Plate 8. Fuel Outlet 9. Open manual shut-off valve. Start the vehicle and
3. Housing Seal 9. O-ring leak check the propane fuel system at each serviced
4. Filter Magnet 10. Filter fitting. Refer to Propane Fuel System Leak Test.
5. Filter Housing 11. Fuel Inlet
6. Seal 12. Retaining Bolt Propane Fuel System Pressure Relief
Figure 1-4. Filter Lock Assembly
REMOVAL
THE PROPANE FUEL SYSTEM OPERATES AT PRESSURES UP TO
1. Relieve the propane fuel system pressure. Refer to 312 PSI (21.5 BAR). TO MINIMIZE THE RISK OF FIRE AND PER-
Propane Fuel System Pressure Relief. SONAL INJURY, RELIEVE THE PROPANE FUEL SYSTEM PRES-
SURE (WHERE APPLICABLE) BEFORE SERVICING THE PROPANE
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS.
3. Slowly loosen the Filter housing retaining bolt and
remove it. To relieve propane fuel system pressure:
4. Pull the filter housing from the Electric lock off 1. Close the manual shut-off valve on the propane fuel
assembly. tank.
5. Locate Filter magnet and remove it. 2. Start and run the vehicle until the engine stalls.
6. Remove the filter from the housing. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
7. Remove and discard the housing seal.

8. Remove and discard the retaining bolt seal. RESIDUAL VAPOR PRESSURE WILL BE PRESENT IN THE FUEL
9. Remove and discard mounting plate to lock off O- SYSTEM. ENSURE THE WORK AREA IS WELL VENTILATED
ring seal. BEFORE DISCONNECTING ANY FUEL LINE.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 1-11

Values for Zinc Yellow Chromate Fasteners (Ref 4150707)

SAE GRADE 5 BOLTS & GRADE 2 NUTS
Torque
Torque
Tensile Torque Torque (Loctite® 242TM or 271TM
Size TPI Bolt Dia Clamp Load TM
(Loctite® 262TM or Vibra-
Stress Area (Dry) Lubricated OR Vibra-TITE 111 or
TITETM 131)
140)
In Sq In LB IN-LB [N.m] IN-LB [N.m] IN-LB [N.m] IN-LB [N.m]
4 40 0.1120 0.00604 380 8 0.9 6 0.7
48 0.1120 0.00661 420 9 1.0 7 0.8
6 32 0.1380 0.00909 580 16 1.8 12 1.4
40 0.1380 0.01015 610 18 2.0 13 1.5
8 32 0.1640 0.01400 900 30 3.4 22 2.5
36 0.1640 0.01474 940 31 3.5 23 2.6
10 24 0.1900 0.01750 1120 43 4.8 32 3.5
32 0.1900 0.02000 1285 49 5.5 36 4
1/4 20 0.2500 0.0318 2020 96 10.8 75 9 105 12
28 0.2500 0.0364 2320 120 13.5 86 10 135 15
In Sq In LB FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m]
5/16 18 0.3125 0.0524 3340 17 23 13 18 19 26 16 22
24 0.3125 0.0580 3700 19 26 14 19 21 29 17 23
3/8 16 0.3750 0.0775 4940 30 41 23 31 35 48 28 38
24 0.3750 0.0878 5600 35 47 25 34 40 54 32 43
7/16 14 0.4375 0.1063 6800 50 68 35 47 55 75 45 61
20 0.4375 0.1187 7550 55 75 40 54 60 82 50 68
1/2 13 0.5000 0.1419 9050 75 102 55 75 85 116 68 92
20 0.5000 0.1599 10700 90 122 65 88 100 136 80 108
9/16 12 0.5625 0.1820 11600 110 149 80 108 120 163 98 133
18 0.5625 0.2030 12950 120 163 90 122 135 184 109 148
5/8 11 0.6250 0.2260 14400 150 203 110 149 165 224 135 183
18 0.6250 0.2560 16300 170 230 130 176 190 258 153 207
3/4 10 0.7500 0.3340 21300 260 353 200 271 285 388 240 325
16 0.7500 0.3730 23800 300 407 220 298 330 449 268 363
7/8 9 0.8750 0.4620 29400 430 583 320 434 475 646 386 523
14 0.8750 0.5090 32400 470 637 350 475 520 707 425 576
1 8 1.0000 0.6060 38600 640 868 480 651 675 918 579 785
12 1.0000 0.6630 42200 700 949 530 719 735 1000 633 858
1 1/8 7 1.1250 0.7630 42300 800 1085 600 813 840 1142 714 968
12 1.1250 0.8560 47500 880 1193 660 895 925 1258 802 1087
1 1/4 7 1.2500 0.9690 53800 1120 1518 840 1139 1175 1598 1009 1368
12 1.2500 1.0730 59600 1240 1681 920 1247 1300 1768 1118 1516
1 3/8 6 1.3750 1.1550 64100 1460 1979 1100 1491 1525 2074 1322 1792
12 1.3750 1.3150 73000 1680 2278 1260 1708 1750 2380 1506 2042
1 1/2 6 1.5000 1.4050 78000 1940 2630 1460 1979 2025 2754 1755 2379
12 1.5000 1.5800 87700 2200 2983 1640 2224 2300 3128 1974 2676
NO. 5000059 REV. J
NOTES: 1. THESE TORQUE VALUES DO NOT APPLY TO CADMIUM PLATED FASTENERS
2. ALL TORQUE VALUES ARE STATIC TORQUE MEASURED PER STANDARD AUDIT METHODS TOLERANCE = ±10%
3. * ASSEMBLY USES HARDENED WASHER
REFERENCE JLG ANEROBIC THREAD LOCKING COMPOUND

JLG P/N Loctite® P/N ND Industries P/N Description
0100011 242TM Vibra-TITE TM 121 Medium Strength (Blue)

0100019 271TM Vibra-TITE TM 140 High Strength (Red)
0100071 262TM Vibra-TITE TM 131 Medium - High Strength (Red)
Figure 1-5. Torque Chart (SAE Fasteners - Sheet 1 of 7)
1-12 – JLG Lift – 3120895

SAE GRADE 8 (HEX HD) BOLTS & GRADE 8 NUTS*

Torque Torque
Torque
Tensile (Loctite® 242TM or 271TM (Loctite® 262TM or Vibra-
Size TPI Bolt Dia Clamp Load (Dry or Loctite® 263)
Stress Area
K= 0.20 OR Vibra-TITE TM 111 or TITETM 131)
140) K=.18 K=0.15
In Sq In LB IN-LB [N.m] IN-LB [N.m] IN-LB [N.m]
4 40 0.1120 0.00604
48 0.1120 0.00661
6 32 0.1380 0.00909
40 0.1380 0.01015
8 32 0.1640 0.01400
36 0.1640 0.01474 1320 43 5
10 24 0.1900 0.01750 1580 60 7
32 0.1900 0.02000 1800 68 8
1/4 20 0.2500 0.0318 2860 143 16 129 15
28 0.2500 0.0364 3280 164 19 148 17
In Sq In LB FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m
5/16 18 0.3125 0.0524 4720 25 35 20 25 20 25
24 0.3125 0.0580 5220 25 35 25 35 20 25
3/8 16 0.3750 0.0775 7000 45 60 40 55 35 50
24 0.3750 0.0878 7900 50 70 45 60 35 50
7/16 14 0.4375 0.1063 9550 70 95 65 90 50 70
20 0.4375 0.1187 10700 80 110 70 95 60 80
1/2 13 0.5000 0.1419 12750 105 145 95 130 80 110
20 0.5000 0.1599 14400 120 165 110 150 90 120
9/16 12 0.5625 0.1820 16400 155 210 140 190 115 155
18 0.5625 0.2030 18250 170 230 155 210 130 175
5/8 11 0.6250 0.2260 20350 210 285 190 260 160 220
18 0.6250 0.2560 23000 240 325 215 290 180 245
3/4 10 0.7500 0.3340 30100 375 510 340 460 280 380
16 0.7500 0.3730 33600 420 570 380 515 315 430
7/8 9 0.8750 0.4620 41600 605 825 545 740 455 620
14 0.8750 0.5090 45800 670 910 600 815 500 680
1 8 1.0000 0.6060 51500 860 1170 770 1045 645 875
12 1.0000 0.6630 59700 995 1355 895 1215 745 1015
1 1/8 7 1.1250 0.7630 68700 1290 1755 1160 1580 965 1310
12 1.1250 0.8560 77000 1445 1965 1300 1770 1085 1475
1 1/4 7 1.2500 0.9690 87200 1815 2470 1635 2225 1365 1855
12 1.2500 1.0730 96600 2015 2740 1810 2460 1510 2055
1 3/8 6 1.3750 1.1550 104000 2385 3245 2145 2915 1785 2430
12 1.3750 1.3150 118100 2705 3680 2435 3310 2030 2760
1 1/2 6 1.5000 1.4050 126500 3165 4305 2845 3870 2370 3225
12 1.5000 1.5800 142200 3555 4835 3200 4350 2665 3625
NO. 5000059 REV. J
3. * ASSEMBLY USES HARDENED WASHER
3120895 – JLG Lift – 1-13

SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREWS

Magni Coating (Ref 4150701)*
Torque
Torque
(Loctite® 242TM or 271TM (Loctite® 262TM
Tensile Clamp Load Torque
Size TPI Bolt Dia
Stress Area See Note 4 (Dry) K = .17 OR Vibra-TITE TM 111 or TM
or Vibra-TITE 131)
140 OR Precoat 85® K=0.15
K=0.16
4 40 0.1120 0.00604
48 0.1120 0.00661
6 32 0.1380 0.00909
40 0.1380 0.01015
8 32 0.1640 0.01400
36 0.1640 0.01474
10 24 0.1900 0.01750
32 0.1900 0.02000
1/4 20 0.2500 0.0318 2860 122 14 114 13
28 0.2500 0.0364 3280 139 16 131 15
In Sq In LB FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m]
5/16 18 0.3125 0.0524 4720 20 25 20 25 20 25
24 0.3125 0.0580 5220 25 35 20 25 20 25
3/8 16 0.3750 0.0775 7000 35 50 35 50 35 50
24 0.3750 0.0878 7900 40 55 40 55 35 50
7/16 14 0.4375 0.1063 9550 60 80 55 75 50 70
20 0.4375 0.1187 10700 65 90 60 80 60 80
1/2 13 0.5000 0.1419 12750 90 120 85 115 80 110
20 0.5000 0.1599 14400 100 135 95 130 90 120
9/16 12 0.5625 0.1820 16400 130 175 125 170 115 155
18 0.5625 0.2030 18250 145 195 135 185 130 175
5/8 11 0.6250 0.2260 20350 180 245 170 230 160 220
18 0.6250 0.2560 23000 205 280 190 260 180 245
3/4 10 0.7500 0.3340 30100 320 435 300 410 280 380
16 0.7500 0.3730 33600 355 485 335 455 315 430
7/8 9 0.8750 0.4620 41600 515 700 485 660 455 620
14 0.8750 0.5090 45800 570 775 535 730 500 680
1 8 1.0000 0.6060 51500 730 995 685 930 645 875
12 1.0000 0.6630 59700 845 1150 795 1080 745 1015
1 1/8 7 1.1250 0.7630 68700 1095 1490 1030 1400 965 1310
12 1.1250 0.8560 77000 1225 1665 1155 1570 1085 1475
1 1/4 7 1.2500 0.9690 87200 1545 2100 1455 1980 1365 1855
12 1.2500 1.0730 96600 1710 2325 1610 2190 1510 2055
1 3/8 6 1.3750 1.1550 104000 2025 2755 1905 2590 1785 2430
12 1.3750 1.3150 118100 2300 3130 2165 2945 2030 2760
1 1/2 6 1.5000 1.4050 126500 2690 3660 2530 3440 2370 3225
12 1.5000 1.5800 142200 3020 4105 2845 3870 2665 3625
NO. 5000059 REV. J
*3. ASSEMBLY USES HARDENED WASHER OR FASTENER IS PLACED AGAINST PLATED STEEL OR RAW ALUMINUM
4. CLAMP LOAD LISTED FOR SHCS IS SAME AS GRADE 8 OR CLASS 10.9 AND DOES NOT REPRESENT FULL STRENGTH
CAPABILITY OF SHCS. IF HIGHER LOAD IS REQUIRED, ADDITIONAL TESTING IS REQUIRED.
1-14 – JLG Lift – 3120895

SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREWS

Zinc Yellow Chromate Fasteners (Ref 4150707)*
Torque
Torque
Torque (Loctite® 242TM or 271TM
Tensile Clamp Load (Loctite® 262TM
Size TPI Bolt Dia
Stress Area See Note 4
(Dry) OR Vibra-TITE TM 111 or TM
or Vibra-TITE 131)
K = .20 140 OR Precoat 85® K=0.15
K=0.18
4 40 0.1120 0.00604
48 0.1120 0.00661
6 32 0.1380 0.00909
40 0.1380 0.01015
8 32 0.1640 0.01400
36 0.1640 0.01474
10 24 0.1900 0.01750
32 0.1900 0.02000
1/4 20 0.2500 0.0318 2860 143 16 129 15
28 0.2500 0.0364 3280 164 19 148 17
In Sq In LB FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m]
5/16 18 0.3125 0.0524 4720 25 35 20 25 20 25
24 0.3125 0.0580 5220 25 35 25 35 20 25
3/8 16 0.3750 0.0775 7000 45 60 40 55 35 50
24 0.3750 0.0878 7900 50 70 45 60 35 50
7/16 14 0.4375 0.1063 9550 70 95 65 90 50 70
20 0.4375 0.1187 10700 80 110 70 95 60 80
1/2 13 0.5000 0.1419 12750 105 145 95 130 80 110
20 0.5000 0.1599 14400 120 165 110 150 90 120
9/16 12 0.5625 0.1820 16400 155 210 140 190 115 155
18 0.5625 0.2030 18250 170 230 155 210 130 175
5/8 11 0.6250 0.2260 20350 210 285 190 260 160 220
18 0.6250 0.2560 23000 240 325 215 290 180 245
3/4 10 0.7500 0.3340 30100 375 510 340 460 280 380
16 0.7500 0.3730 33600 420 570 380 515 315 430
7/8 9 0.8750 0.4620 41600 605 825 545 740 455 620
14 0.8750 0.5090 45800 670 910 600 815 500 680
1 8 1.0000 0.6060 51500 860 1170 775 1055 645 875
12 1.0000 0.6630 59700 995 1355 895 1215 745 1015
1 1/8 7 1.1250 0.7630 68700 1290 1755 1160 1580 965 1310
12 1.1250 0.8560 77000 1445 1965 1300 1770 1085 1475
1 1/4 7 1.2500 0.9690 87200 1815 2470 1635 2225 1365 1855
12 1.2500 1.0730 96600 2015 2740 1810 2460 1510 2055
1 3/8 6 1.3750 1.1550 104000 2385 3245 2145 2915 1785 2430
12 1.3750 1.3150 118100 2705 3680 2435 3310 2030 2760
1 1/2 6 1.5000 1.4050 126500 3165 4305 2845 3870 2370 3225
12 1.5000 1.5800 142200 3555 4835 3200 4350 2665 3625
NO. 5000059 REV. J
*3. ASSEMBLY USES HARDENED WASHER OR FASTENER IS PLACED AGAINST PLATED STEEL OR RAW ALUMINUM
4. CLAMP LOAD LISTED FOR SHCS IS SAME AS GRADE 8 OR CLASS 10.9 AND DOES NOT REPRESENT FULL STRENGTH
CAPABILITY OF SHCS. IF HIGHER LOAD IS REQUIRED, ADDITIONAL TESTING IS REQUIRED.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 1-15

CLASS 8.8 METRIC BOLTS

CLASS 8 METRIC NUTS
Torque
Torque (Loctite®
Tensile Torque
Clamp Torque (Loctite® 262TM 242TM or 271TM
Size PITCH Stress (Dry or Loctite®
Load (Lub) OR Vibra- OR Vibra-
Area 263TM)
TITETM 131) TITETM 111 or
140)
Sq mm KN [N.m] [N.m] [N.m] [N.m]
3 0.5 5.03 2.19 1.3 1.0 1.2 1.4

3.5 0.6 6.78 2.95 2.1 1.6 1.9 2.3
4 0.7 8.78 3.82 3.1 2.3 2.8 3.4
5 0.8 14.20 6.18 6.2 4.6 5.6 6.8
6 1 20.10 8.74 11 7.9 9.4 12
7 1 28.90 12.6 18 13 16 19
8 1.25 36.60 15.9 26 19 23 28
10 1.5 58.00 25.2 50 38 45 55
12 1.75 84.30 36.7 88 66 79 97
14 2 115 50.0 140 105 126 154
16 2 157 68.3 219 164 197 241
18 2.5 192 83.5 301 226 271 331
20 2.5 245 106.5 426 320 383 469
22 2.5 303 132.0 581 436 523 639
24 3 353 153.5 737 553 663 811
27 3 459 199.5 1080 810 970 1130
30 3.5 561 244.0 1460 1100 1320 1530
33 3.5 694 302.0 1990 1490 1790 2090
36 4 817 355.5 2560 1920 2300 2690
42 4.5 1120 487.0 4090 3070 3680 4290
NO. 5000059 REV. J
2. ALL TORQUE VALUES ARE STATIC TORQUE MEASURED PER STANDARD AUDIT
METHODS TOLERANCE = ±10%
*3. ASSEMBLY USES HARDENED WASHER OR FASTENER IS PLACED AGAINST PLATED
STEEL OR RAW ALUMINUM
4. CLAMP LOAD LISTED FOR SHCS IS SAME AS GRADE 8 OR CLASS 10.9 AND DOES NOT
REPRESENT FULL STRENGTH CAPABILITY OF SHCS. IF HIGHER LOAD IS REQUIRED,
ADDITIONAL TESTING IS REQUIRED.
Figure 1-9. Torque Chart (METRIC Fasteners - Sheet 5 of 7)
1-16 – JLG Lift – 3120895

CLASS 10.9 METRIC BOLTS

CLASS 10 METRIC NUTS
CLASS 12.9 SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREWS M3 - M5*
Torque
Torque (Lub OR Loctite® Torque
Tensile
Clamp (Dry or Loctite® 242TM or 271TM OR (Loctite® 262TM OR
Size PITCH Stress
Load 263TM) Vibra-TITE TM 111 or Vibra-TITE TM 131)
Area
K = 0.20 140) K=0.15
K= 0.18
Sq mm KN [N.m] [N.m] [N.m]
3 0.5 5.03 3.13

3.5 0.6 6.78 4.22
4 0.7 8.78 5.47
5 0.8 14.20 8.85
6 1 20.10 12.5
7 1 28.90 18.0 25.2 22.7 18.9
8 1.25 36.60 22.8 36.5 32.8 27.4
10 1.5 58.00 36.1 70 65 55
12 1.75 84.30 52.5 125 115 95
14 2 115 71.6 200 180 150
16 2 157 97.8 315 280 235
18 2.5 192 119.5 430 385 325
20 2.5 245 152.5 610 550 460
22 2.5 303 189.0 830 750 625
24 3 353 222.0 1065 960 800
27 3 459 286.0 1545 1390 1160
30 3.5 561 349.5 2095 1885 1575
33 3.5 694 432.5 2855 2570 2140
36 4 817 509.0 3665 3300 2750
42 4.5 1120 698.0 5865 5275 4395
NO. 5000059 REV. J
3120895 – JLG Lift – 1-17

Magni Coating (Ref 4150701)*
CLASS 12.9 SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREWS

M6 AND ABOVE*
Torque
Torque
Torque (Lub OR Loctite®
Tensile (Loctite® 262TM
Clamp Load (Dry or Loctite® 242TM or 271TM
Size PITCH Stress OR Vibra-TITE TM
See Note 4 263TM) OR Vibra-TITE TM
Area 131)
K = .17 111 or 140)
K = .15
K = .16
Sq mm kN [N.m] [N.m] [N.m]
3 0.5 5.03
3.5 0.6 6.78
4 0.7 8.78
5 0.8 14.20
6 1 20.10 12.5 13 12 11
7 1 28.90 18.0 21 20 19
8 1.25 36.60 22.8 31 29 27
10 1.5 58.00 36.1 61 58 54
12 1.75 84.30 52.5 105 100 95
14 2 115 71.6 170 160 150
16 2 157 97.8 265 250 235
18 2.5 192 119.5 365 345 325
20 2.5 245 152.5 520 490 460
22 2.5 303 189.0 705 665 625
24 3 353 220.0 900 845 790
27 3 459 286.0 1315 1235 1160
30 3.5 561 349.5 1780 1680 1575
33 3.5 694 432.5 2425 2285 2140
36 4 817 509.0 3115 2930 2750
42 4.5 1120 698.0 4985 4690 4395
NO. 5000059 REV. J
1-18 – JLG Lift – 3120895

SECTION 2 - GENERAL
SECTION 2. GENERAL
2.1 MACHINE PREPARATION, INSPECTION, increased as environment, severity and frequency of

usage requires.
AND MAINTENANCE
Reference the JLG Pre-Delivery and Frequent Inspection
General Form and the Inspection and Preventative Maintenance
Schedule for items requiring inspection during the perfor-
This section provides the necessary information needed mance of these inspections. Reference the appropriate
by those personnel that are responsible to place the areas of this manual for servicing and maintenance proce-
machine in operation readiness and maintain its safe dures.
operating condition. For maximum service life and safe
operation, ensure that all the necessary inspections and Annual Machine Inspection
maintenance have been completed before placing the
machine into service. The Annual Machine Inspection must be performed by a
Factory-Certified Service Technician on an annual basis,
Preparation, Inspection, and Maintenance no later than thirteen (13) months from the date of the
prior Annual Machine Inspection. JLG Industries, Inc. rec-
It is important to establish and conform to a comprehen- ognizes a Factory-Certified Service Technician as a per-
sive inspection and preventive maintenance program. The son who has successfully completed the JLG Service
following table outlines the periodic machine inspections Training School for the subject JLG product model. Refer-
and maintenance recommended by JLG Industries, Inc. ence the machine Service and Maintenance Manual and
Consult your national, regional, or local regulations for fur- appropriate JLG inspection form for performance of this
ther requirements for aerial work platforms. The frequency inspection.
of inspections and maintenance must be increased as
Reference the JLG Annual Machine Inspection Form and
environment, severity and frequency of usage requires.
the Inspection and Preventative Maintenance Schedule for
items requiring inspection during the performance of this
Pre-Start Inspection inspection. Reference the appropriate areas of this man-
It is the User’s or Operator’s primary responsibility to per- ual for servicing and maintenance procedures.
form a Pre-Start Inspection of the machine prior to use
For the purpose of receiving safety-related bulletins, it is
daily or at each change of operator. Reference the Opera-
important that JLG Industries, Inc. has updated ownership
tor’s and Safety Manual for completion procedures for the
information for each machine. When performing each
Pre-Start Inspection. The Operator and Safety Manual
Annual Machine Inspection, notify JLG Industries, Inc. of
must be read in its entirety and understood prior to per-
the current machine ownership.
forming the Pre-Start Inspection.
Pre-Delivery Inspection and Frequent Preventative Maintenance

Inspection In conjunction with the specified inspections, mainte-
nance shall be performed by a qualified JLG equipment
The Pre-Delivery Inspection and Frequent Inspection shall mechanic. JLG Industries, Inc. recognizes a qualified JLG
be performed by a qualified JLG equipment mechanic. equipment mechanic as a person who, by possession of a
JLG Industries, Inc. recognizes a qualified JLG equipment recognized degree, certificate, extensive knowledge, train-
mechanic as a person who, by possession of a recog- ing, or experience, has successfully demonstrated the
nized degree, certificate, extensive knowledge, training, or ability and proficiency to service, repair, and maintain the
experience, has successfully demonstrated the ability and subject JLG product model.
proficiency to service, repair, and maintain the subject
Reference the Preventative Maintenance Schedule and
JLG product model.
the appropriate areas of this manual for servicing and
The Pre-Delivery Inspection and Frequent Inspection pro- maintenance procedures. The frequency of service and
cedures are performed in the same manner, but at differ- maintenance must be increased as environment, severity
ent times. The Pre-Delivery Inspection shall be performed and frequency of usage requires.
prior to each sale, lease, or rental delivery. The Frequent
Inspection shall be accomplished for each machine in ser-
vice for 3 months or 150 hours (whichever comes first);
out of service for a period of more than 3 months; or when
purchased used. The frequency of this inspection must be
3120895 – JLG Lift – 2-1

SECTION 2 - GENERAL
Table 2-1. Inspection and Maintenance
Primary Service
Type Frequency Reference
Responsibility Qualification
Pre-Start Inspec- Prior to use each day; or User or Operator User or Operator Operator and Safety Manual
tion At each Operator change.
Pre-Delivery Prior to each sale, lease, or Owner, Dealer, or User Qualified JLG Service and Maintenance
Inspection rental delivery. Mechanic Manual and applicable JLG
inspection form.
Frequent Inspec- In service for 3 months or 150 hours, which- Owner, Dealer, or User Qualified JLG Service and Maintenance
tion ever comes first; or Mechanic Manual and applicable JLG
Out of service for a period of more than 3 inspection form.
months; or
Purchased used.
Annual Machine Annually, no later than 13 months from the Owner, Dealer, or User Factory-Certified Service and Maintenance
Inspection date of the prior inspection. Service Technician Manual and applicable JLG
inspection form.
Preventative At intervals as specified in the Service and Owner, Dealer, or User Qualified JLG Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Maintenance Manual. Mechanic Manual
2.2 SERVICE AND GUIDELINES 2. At any time when air, fuel, or oil lines are discon-
nected, clear adjacent areas as well as the openings
and fittings themselves. As soon as a line or compo-
General nent is disconnected, cap or cover all openings to
The following information is provided to assist you in the prevent entry of foreign matter.
use and application of servicing and maintenance proce-
3. Clean and inspect all parts during servicing or main-
dures contained in this book.
tenance, and assure that all passages and openings
are unobstructed. Cover all parts to keep them
Safety and Workmanship clean. Be sure all parts are clean before they are
installed. New parts should remain in their contain-
Your safety, and that of others, is the first consideration
ers until they are ready to be used.
when engaging in the maintenance of equipment. Always
be conscious of weight. Never attempt to move heavy
parts without the aid of a mechanical device. Do not allow
Components Removal and Installation
heavy objects to rest in an unstable position. When raising 1. Use adjustable lifting devices, whenever possible, if
a portion of the equipment, ensure that adequate support mechanical assistance is required. All slings (chains,
is provided. cables, etc.) should be parallel to each other and as
near perpendicular as possible to top of part being
Cleanliness lifted.
1. The most important single item in preserving the 2. Should it be necessary to remove a component on
long service life of a machine is to keep dirt and for- an angle, keep in mind that the capacity of an eye-
eign materials out of the vital components. Precau- bolt or similar bracket lessens, as the angle between
tions have been taken to safeguard against this. the supporting structure and the component
Shields, covers, seals, and filters are provided to becomes less than 90 degrees.
keep air, fuel, and oil supplies clean; however, these 3. If a part resists removal, check to see whether all
items must be maintained on a scheduled basis in nuts, bolts, cables, brackets, wiring, etc., have been
order to function properly. removed and that no adjacent parts are interfering.
2-2 – JLG Lift – 3120895

SECTION 2 - GENERAL
Component Disassembly and Reassembly Hydraulic Lines and Electrical Wiring

When disassembling or reassembling a component, com- Clearly mark or tag hydraulic lines and electrical wiring, as
plete the procedural steps in sequence. Do not partially well as their receptacles, when disconnecting or removing
disassemble or assemble one part, then start on another. them from the unit. This will assure that they are correctly
Always recheck your work to assure that nothing has been reinstalled.
overlooked. Do not make any adjustments, other than
those recommended, without obtaining proper approval. Hydraulic System
1. Keep the system clean. If evidence of metal or rub-
Pressure-Fit Parts ber particles are found in the hydraulic system, drain
When assembling pressure-fit parts, use an anti-seize or and flush the entire system.
molybdenum disulfide base compound to lubricate the 2. Disassemble and reassemble parts on clean work
mating surface. surface. Clean all metal parts with non-flammable
cleaning solvent. Lubricate components, as
Bearings required, to aid assembly.
1. When a bearing is removed, cover it to keep out dirt Lubrication
and abrasives. Clean bearings in nonflammable
cleaning solvent and allow to drip dry. Compressed Service applicable components with the amount, type,
air can be used but do not spin the bearing. and grade of lubricant recommended in this manual, at
the specified intervals. When recommended lubricants are
2. Discard bearings if the races and balls (or rollers)
not available, consult your local supplier for an equivalent
are pitted, scored, or burned.
that meets or exceeds the specifications listed.
3. If bearing is found to be serviceable, apply a light
coat of oil and wrap it in clean (waxed) paper. Do not Battery
unwrap reusable or new bearings until they are
Clean battery, using a non-metallic brush and a solution of
ready to install.
baking soda and water. Rinse with clean water. After
4. Lubricate new or used serviceable bearings before cleaning, thoroughly dry battery and coat terminals with
installation. When pressing a bearing into a retainer an anti corrosion compound.
or bore, apply pressure to the outer race. If the bear-
ing is to be installed on a shaft, apply pressure to the Lubrication and Servicing
inner race.
Components and assemblies requiring lubrication and
Gaskets servicing are shown in the Lubrication Chart in Section 1.
Check that holes in gaskets align with openings in the

mating parts. If it becomes necessary to hand-fabricate a 2.3 LUBRICATION AND INFORMATION
gasket, use gasket material or stock of equivalent material
and thickness. Be sure to cut holes in the right location, as Hydraulic System
blank gaskets can cause serious system damage.
1. The primary enemy of a hydraulic system is contam-
Bolt Usage and Torque Application ination. Contaminants enter the system by various
means, e.g., using inadequate hydraulic oil, allowing
1. Use bolts of proper length. A bolt which is too long moisture, grease, filings, sealing components, sand,
will bottom before the head is tight against its related etc., to enter when performing maintenance, or by
part. If a bolt is too short, there will not be enough permitting the pump to cavitate due to insufficient
thread area to engage and hold the part properly. system warm-up or leaks in the pump supply (suc-
When replacing bolts, use only those having the tion) lines.
same specifications of the original, or one which is
equivalent. 2. The design and manufacturing tolerances of the
component working parts are very close, therefore,
2. Unless specific torque requirements are given within even the smallest amount of dirt or foreign matter
the text, standard torque values should be used on entering a system can cause wear or damage to the
heat-treated bolts, studs, and steel nuts, in accor- components and generally results in faulty opera-
dance with recommended shop practices. (See tion. Every precaution must be taken to keep
Torque Chart Section 1.) hydraulic oil clean, including reserve oil in storage.
Hydraulic system filters should be checked,
3120895 – JLG Lift – 2-3

SECTION 2 - GENERAL
cleaned, and/or replaced as necessary, at the speci- Industries recommends changing the hydraulic oil
fied intervals required in the Lubrication Chart in annually.
Section 1. Always examine filters for evidence of
2. Use every precaution to keep the hydraulic oil clean.
metal particles.
If the oil must be poured from the original container
3. Cloudy oils indicate a high moisture content which into another, be sure to clean all possible contami-
permits organic growth, resulting in oxidation or cor- nants from the service container. Always clean the
rosion. If this condition occurs, the system must be mesh element of the filter and replace the cartridge
drained, flushed, and refilled with clean oil. any time the system oil is changed.
4. It is not advisable to mix oils of different brands or 3. While the unit is shut down, a good preventive main-
types, as they may not contain the same required tenance measure is to make a thorough inspection
additives or be of comparable viscosities. Good of all hydraulic components, lines, fittings, etc., as
grade mineral oils, with viscosities suited to the well as a functional check of each system, before
ambient temperatures in which the machine is oper- placing the machine back in service.
ating, are recommended for use.
Lubrication Specifications
NOTE: Metal particles may appear in the oil or filters of new
machines due to the wear-in of meshing compo- Specified lubricants, as recommended by the component
nents. manufacturers, are always the best choice, however,
multi-purpose greases usually have the qualities which
Hydraulic Oil meet a variety of single purpose grease requirements.
Should any question arise, regarding the use of greases in
1. Refer to Section 1 for recommendations for viscosity maintenance stock, consult your local supplier for evalua-
ranges. tion. Refer to Section 1 for an explanation of the lubricant
key designations appearing in the Lubrication Chart.
2. JLG recommends Mobilfluid 424 hydraulic oil, which
has an SAE viscosity of 10W-30 and a viscosity
index of 152. 2.4 CYLINDER DRIFT TEST
NOTE: Start-up of hydraulic system with oil temperatures Maximum acceptable cylinder drift is to be measured
below -15 degrees F (-26 degrees C) is not recom- using the following methods.
mended. If it is necessary to start the system in a
sub-zero environment, it will be necessary to heat
the oil with a low density, 100VAC heater to a mini-
Platform Drift
mum temperature of -15 degrees F (-26 degrees C). Measure the drift of the platform to the ground. Lower
booms (if equipped) slightly elevated, upper boom fully
3. The only exception to the above is to drain and fill extended with the rated load in the platform and power off.
the system with Mobil DTE 13 oil or its equivalent. Maximum allowable drift is 2 inches (5 cm) in 10 minutes.
This will allow start up at temperatures down to -20 If the machine does not pass this test, proceed with the
degrees F (-29 degrees C). However, use of this oil following.
will give poor performance at temperatures above
120 degrees F (49 degrees C). Systems using DTE
13 oil should not be operated at temperatures above
Cylinder Drift
200 degrees F (94 degrees C) under any condition.
Table 2-2. Cylinder Drift
Changing Hydraulic Oil Max. Acceptable Drift
Cylinder Bore Diameter
in 10 Minutes
1. Use of any of the recommended crankcase or
hydraulic oils eliminates the need for changing the inches mm inches mm
oil on a regular basis. However, filter elements must 3 76.2 0.026 0.66
be changed after the first 50 hours of operation and
3.5 89 0.019 0.48
every 300 hours thereafter. If it is necessary to
change the oil, use only those oils meeting or 4 101.6 0.015 0.38
exceeding the specifications appearing in this man- 5 127 0.009 0.22
ual. If unable to obtain the same type of oil supplied 6 152.4 0.006 0.15
with the machine, consult local supplier for assis-
tance in selecting the proper equivalent. Avoid mix- 7 177.8 0.005 0.13
ing petroleum and synthetic base oils. JLG
2-4 – JLG Lift – 3120895

SECTION 2 - GENERAL
Drift is to be measured at the cylinder rod with a calibrated 2.6 WELDING ON JLG EQUIPMENT
dial indicator. The cylinder oil must be at ambient temper-
ature and temperature stabilized. NOTE: This instruction applies to repairs, or modifications to
the machine and to welding performed from the
The cylinder must have the normal load, which is the nor- machine on an external structure, or component,
mal platform load applied.
Do the Following When Welding on JLG
If the cylinder passes this test, it is acceptable.
Equipment
NOTE: This information is based on 6 drops per minute cyl-
inder leakage. • Disconnect the battery.
• Ground only to structure being welded.
2.5 PINS AND COMPOSITE BEARING REPAIR Do NOT Do the Following When Welding on
GUIDELINES JLG Equipment
Filament wound bearings.
• Ground on frame and weld on any other area than the
1. Pinned joints should be disassembled and chassis.
inspected if the following occurs: • Ground on turntable and weld on any other area than
a. Excessive sloppiness in joints. the turntable.
b. Noise originating from the joint during operation. • Ground on the platform/support and weld on any other
area than the platform/support.
2. Filament wound bearings should be replaced if any
of the following is observed: • Ground on a specific boom section and weld on any
other area than that specific boom section.
a. Frayed or separated fibers on the liner surface.
• Allow pins, wear pads, wire ropes, bearings, gearing,
b. Cracked or damaged liner backing.
seals, valves, electrical wiring, or hoses to be between
c. Bearings that have moved or spun in their hous- the grounding position and the welded area.
ing.
d. Debris embedded in liner surface.
3. Pins should be replaced if any of the following is FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THE ABOVE REQUIREMENTS MAY
observed (pin should be properly cleaned prior to RESULT IN COMPONENT DAMAGE (I.E. ELECTRONIC MODULES,
inspection): SWING BEARING, COLLECTOR RING, BOOM WIRE ROPES ETC.)
a. Detectable wear in the bearing area.
b. Flaking, pealing, scoring, or scratches on the pin
surface.
c. Rusting of the pin in the bearing area.
4. Re-assembly of pinned joints using filament wound
bearings.
a. Housing should be blown out to remove all dirt
and debris...bearings and bearing housings
must be free of all contamination.
b. Bearing / pins should be cleaned with a solvent
to remove all grease and oil...filament wound
bearing are a dry joint and should not be lubri-
cated.
c. Pins should be inspected to ensure it is free of
burrs, nicks, and scratches which would dam-
age the bearing during installation and opera-
tion.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 2-5

SECTION 2 - GENERAL
Table 2-3. Inspection and Preventive Maintenance Schedule
INTERVAL
AREA Weekly Monthly Pre-Delivery2 Annual4

Pre-Start1 Preventive Preventive or Frequent3
Every 2
(Yearly) Years
Inspection Maintenance Maintenance Inspection Inspection
Boom Assembly 9
Boom Weldments 1,2,4 1,2,4
Hose/Cable Carrier Installations 1,2,9,12 1,2,9,12
Pivot Pins and Pin Retainers 1,2 1,2
Sheaves, Sheave Pins 1,2 1,2
Bearings 1,2 1,2
Wear Pads 1,2 1,2
Covers or Shields 1,2 1,2
Extend/Retract Chain or Cable Systems 1,2,3 1,2,3
Platform Assembly 9
Platform 1,2 1,2
Railing 1,2 1 1,2
Gate 5 1 1,5
Floor 1,2 1 1,2
Rotator 9,5
Lanyard Anchorage Point 2 1,2,10 1,2,10
Turntable Assembly 9
Swing Bearing or Worm Gear 1,2,14 1,2,3,13,1
4
Oil Coupling 9
Swing Drive System
Turntable Lock 1,2,5 1,2,5
Hood, Hood Props, Hood Latches 5 1,2,5
Chassis Assembly 9
Tires 1 16,17 16,17,18 16,17,18
Wheel Nuts/Bolts 1 15 15 15
Wheel Bearings 14,24
Oscillating Axle/Lockout Cylinder Systems 5,8
Outrigger or Extendable Axle Systems 5,8 5,8
Steer Components
Drive Motors
Torque Hubs 11 11
Functions/Controls 9
2-6 – JLG Lift – 3120895

SECTION 2 - GENERAL
INTERVAL

Every 2
(Yearly) Years
Platform Controls 5 5 6 6
Ground Controls 5 5 6 6
Function Control Locks, Guards, or Detents 1,5 1,5 5 5
Footswitch 1,5 5 5
Emergency Stop Switches (Ground & Platform) 5 5 5
Function Limit or Cutout Switch Systems 5 5
Capacity Indicator 5
Drive Brakes 5
Swing Brakes 5
Boom Synchronization/Sequencing Systems 5
Manual Descent or Auxiliary Power 5 5
Power System 9
Engine Idle, Throttle, and RPM 3 3
Engine Fluids (Oil, Coolant, Fuel) 11 9,11 11 11
Air/Fuel Filter 1,7 7 7
Exhaust System 1,9 9 9
Batteries 5 1,9 19
Battery Fluid 11 11 11
Battery Charger 5 5
Fuel Reservoir, Cap, and Breather 11,9 2 1,5 1,5
Hydraulic/Electric System 9
Hydraulic Pumps 1,9 1,2,9
Hydraulic Cylinders 1,9,7 2 1,2,9 1,2,9
Cylinder Attachment Pins and Pin Retainers 1,9 1,2 1,2
Hydraulic Hoses, Lines, and Fittings 1,9 12 1,2,9,12 1,2,9,12
Hydraulic Reservoir, Cap, and Breather 11 1,9 2 1,5 1,5 24
Hydraulic Filter 1,9 7 7
Hydraulic Fluid 11 7,11 7,11
Electrical Connections 1 20 20
Instruments, Gauges, Switches, Lights, Horn 1 5,23
General
Operators and Safety Manuals in Storage Box 21 21 21
ANSI and EMI Manuals/Handbooks Installed 21
Capacity Decals Installed, Secure, Legible 21 21 21
3120895 – JLG Lift – 2-7

SECTION 2 - GENERAL
INTERVAL

Every 2
(Yearly) Years
All Decals/Placards Installed, Secure, Legible 21 21 21

Walk-Around Inspection Performed 21
Annual Machine Inspection Due 21
No Unauthorized Modifications or Additions 21 21
All Relevant Safety Publications Incorporated 21 21
General Structural Condition and Welds 2,4 2,4
All Fasteners, Pins, Shields, and Covers 1,2 1,2
Grease and Lubricate to Specifications 22 22
Function Test of All Systems 21 21 21, 22
Paint and Appearance 7 7
Stamp Inspection Date on Frame 22
Notify JLG of Machine Ownership 22
Footnotes:
1 Prior to use each day; or at each Operator change
2 Prior to each sale, lease, or delivery
3 In service for 3 months or 150 Hours; or Out of service for 3 months or more; or Purchased used
4 Annually, no later than 13 months from the date of the prior inspection
Performance Codes:
1 - Check for proper and secure installation
2 - Visual inspection for damage, cracks, distortion or excessive wear
3 - Check for proper adjustment
4 - Check for cracked or broken welds
5 - Operates Properly
6 - Returns to neutral or "off" position when released
7 - Clean and free of debris
8 - Interlocks function properly
9 - Check for signs of leakage
10 - Decals installed and legible
11 - Check for proper fluid level
12 - Check for chafing and proper routing
13 - Check for proper tolerances
14 - Properly lubricated
15 - Torqued to proper specification
16 - No gouges, excessive wear, or cords showing
17 - Properly inflated and seated around rim
18 - Proper and authorized components
19 - Fully charged
20 - No loose connections, corrosion, or abrasions
21 - Verify
22 - Perform
23 - Sealed Properly
24 - Drain, Clean, Refill
2-8 – JLG Lift – 3120895

SECTION 2 - GENERAL
4150548 D
Figure 2-1. Engine Operating Temperature Specifications - Deutz
3120895 – JLG Lift – 2-9

SECTION 2 - GENERAL
4150548 D
Figure 2-2. Engine Operating Temperature Specifications - Ford
2-10 – JLG Lift – 3120895

SECTION 2 - GENERAL
AMBIENTAIR
TEMPERATURE
4150548 D
Figure 2-3. Engine Operating Temperature Specifications - Caterpillar
3120895 – JLG Lift – 2-11

SECTION 2 - GENERAL
4150548 D
Figure 2-4. Engine Operating Temperature Specifications - GM
2-12 – JLG Lift – 3120895

SECTION 2 - GENERAL
AMBIENTAIR
TEMPERATURE
4150548 D
Figure 2-5. Engine Operating Temperature Specifications - Perkins
3120895 – JLG Lift – 2-13

SECTION 2 - GENERAL
NOTES:
2-14 – JLG Lift – 3120895

SECTION 3. CHASSIS & TURNTABLE
3.1 TIRES & WHEELS recommended by JLG. Due to size variations between
tire brands, both tires on the same axle should be the
same.
Tire Inflation
The air pressure for pneumatic tires must be equal to the Wheel Replacement
air pressure that is stenciled on the side of the JLG prod-
The rims installed on each product model have been
uct or rim decal for safe and proper operational character-
designed for stability requirements which consist of track
istics.
width, tire pressure, and load capacity. Size changes such
as rim width, center piece location, larger or smaller diam-
Tire Damage eter, etc., without written factory recommendations, may
For pneumatic tires, JLG Industries, Inc. recommends that result in an unsafe condition regarding stability.
when any cut, rip, or tear is discovered that exposes side-
wall or tread area cords in the tire, measures must be Wheel Installation
taken to remove the JLG product from service immedi-
It is extremely important to apply and maintain proper
ately. Arrangements must be made for replacement of the
wheel mounting torque.
tire or tire assembly.
For polyurethane foam filled tires, JLG Industries, Inc. rec-
ommends that when any of the following are discovered,
WHEEL NUTS MUST BE INSTALLED AND MAINTAINED AT THE
measures must be taken to remove the JLG product from
PROPER TORQUE TO PREVENT LOOSE WHEELS, BROKEN STUDS,
service immediately and arrangements must be made for
AND POSSIBLE DANGEROUS SEPARATION OF WHEEL FROM THE
replacement of the tire or tire assembly.
AXLE. BE SURE TO USE ONLY THE NUTS MATCHED TO THE CONE
• a smooth, even cut through the cord plies which ANGLE OF THE WHEEL.
exceeds 3 inches (7.5 cm) in total length
Tighten the lug nuts to the proper torque to prevent
• any tears or rips (ragged edges) in the cord plies which wheels from coming loose. Use a torque wrench to tighten
exceeds 1 inch (2.5 cm) in any direction the fasteners. If you do not have a torque wrench, tighten
• any punctures which exceed 1 inch in diameter the fasteners with a lug wrench, then immediately have a
service garage or dealer tighten the lug nuts to the proper
• any damage to the bead area cords of the tire torque. Over-tightening will result in breaking the studs or
If a tire is damaged but is within the above noted criteria, permanently deforming the mounting stud holes in the
the tire must be inspected on a daily basis to insure the wheels. The proper procedure for attaching wheels is as
damage has not propagated beyond the allowable crite- follows:
ria. 1. Start all nuts by hand to prevent cross threading. DO
NOT use a lubricant on threads or nuts.
Tire Replacement
2. Tighten nuts in the following sequence:
JLG recommends a replacement tire be the same size, ply
and brand as originally installed on the machine. Please
refer to the JLG Parts Manual for the part number of the
approved tires for a particular machine model. If not using
a JLG approved replacement tire, we recommend that
replacement tires have the following characteristics:
• Equal or greater ply/load rating and size of original
• Tire tread contact width equal or greater than original
• Wheel diameter, width, and offset dimensions equal to
the original
• Approved for the application by the tire manufacturer
(including inflation pressure and maximum tire load)
Unless specifically approved by JLG Industries Inc. do not
replace a foam filled or ballast filled tire assembly with a
pneumatic tire. When selecting and installing a replace-
ment tire, ensure that all tires are inflated to the pressure
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-1

3. The tightening of the nuts should be done in stages. 10. Compress the disk (59) using a simple fixture or
Following the recommended sequence, tighten nuts other suitable device.
per wheel torque chart.
11. Remove snap ring (66) and release pressure on disk
Table 3-1. Wheel Torque Chart until loose.
12. Remove tool and disk (59).
TORQUE SEQUENCE
1st Stage 2nd Stage 3rd Stage 13. Remove the spring (55) from the input shaft (44)and
turn the unit so that cover (8) is in the up position.
40 ft. lbs. 100 ft. lbs. 170 ft. lbs.
(55 Nm) (130 Nm) (255 Nm) 14. Remove screw plugs (22) and seal rings (21).
15. Remove snap ring (34), cover unit (8) from drive and
4. Wheel nuts should be torqued after first 50 hours of O-ring (33).
operation and after each wheel removal. Check
torque every 3 months or 150 hours of operation. 16. Remove first stage planetary assembly (7).
17. Remove hex. hd. bolts (23) to remove gear (30) and
O-ring (19).
3.2 DRIVE HUB PART NO. 2780243 (2WD
18. Remove Snap rings (15) to pull off planet gears (1)
REAR) PART NO. 2780244 (4WD REAR) together with cylindrical roller bearings (11) from
The final drive consists of two stages with an integrated spindle (60).
disconnect mechanism. Each stage incorporates a set of
matched planetary gears, which provide an equal load of NOTE: Further disassembly of the hub is discouraged. Rein-
distribution. All torque transmitting components are made stallation of the shaft nut (4) requires a special tool
of forged, quenched and tempered high-alloy steels. and a torque of 626 ft lbs (876 Nm) for proper reas-
External gears are carborized. Precision roller bearings sembly. These components WILL fail if not properly
are used exclusively. Two large, tapered roller bearings reassembled.
support the sprocket or wheel loads. A shaft seal protects
the unit against contamination. 19. Inspect the planetary stage assemblies as complete
units. Thoroughly clean and check both the gearing
and the bearings for damage and apply new oil. If
Disassembly gears or bearings need replacing, they must be
1. Position drive so that one of the fill holes is at the replaced as complete units.
bottom of the end cover and drain the gear oil. NOTE: The first stage planetary bearings (10) must be
2. Remove all bolts holding motor and remove motor replaced in sets of three pieces.
from drive.
NOTE: The first stage planetary gears (11) must be
3. Press out seal ring (85) together with O-ring (84) changed as a complete set of four and the manufac-
from the drive. turer recommends changing the sun gear shaft (43)
4. Compress the disc (65) using a simple fixture or along with this set of planets.
other suitable device.
NOTE: The second stage planetary bearings (11) must be
5. Remove snap ring (67) from groove of spindle and replaced in sets of four pieces.
release pressure on disc until loose. Remove tool
and disc (65).
6. Remove the springs (74) from the piston (61)
7. Remove plug (71).
8. Supply air pressure through air channel actually
closed by plug (71) to remove piston (61).
NOTE: Be careful when supplying air pressure. piston (61)

may unexpectedly come out quickly.
9. Remove back-up rings (75), piston seal (76), back-

up rings (77), and piston seal (78).
3-2 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Disassembly of Cover Unit (8) Final Assembly

1. Loosen and remove hex. hd. bolts (53) and remove
1. Install thrust washer (29) in spindle (60).
cover (51).
2. Install O-ring (19) into groove of support ring (6).
2. Remove Shaft rod (56), O-ring (54), and sleeve (52)
3. Install planet gears (1) onto planet pins which are
part of spindle (60).
Disassembly of First Stage Planetary
4. Install snap rings (15) on planet pins of spindle (60)
Assembly in order to fix the planet gears (1).
1. Push the sun gear shaft (43) out of the first stage. 5. Put ring gear (30) onto support ring (6) and fix ring
2. Remove snap rings (14) and press planet pins (5) gear (30) with hex. hd. bolts (23). Torque bolts to
out of planet carrier (7) and planet gears (2). 15.5 ft. lbs.(21.1 Nm).
3. Pull cylindrical roller bearing (10) out of planet gears 6. Insert first stage planetary assembly (7) into drive.
(2). 7. Install O-ring (33) in groove of ring gear (30).
4. Remove snap ring (16) from sun gear (3) and 8. Install end cover unit (8) on shoulder ring gear (30)
remove the thrust washer (49). and fix with snap ring (34).
9. Install seal rings (21) and screw plugs(22).
Disassembly of the Second Stage Planet
10. Before installation of the motor CHECK THAT
Gears (1) THERE IS 1-2 MM. OF CLEARANCE BETWEEN THE
Press cylindrical roller bearings out of planet gears (1). MOTOR SPLINE SHAFT SHOULDER AND THE
COUPLER (62).
11. Install motor and reconnect hydraulic lines.
Assembly of First Stage Planetary Assembly
12. Roll motor so that one fill plug hole is at 12 o’clock
(7) position and the other is a 3 o’clock. Fill hub to bot-
1. Pre-freeze planet pins (5) and install into planet car- tom of 3 o’clock hole with gear oil. Reinstall plugs.
rier (7). 13. After four hours of operation, recheck oil level.
2. Install planet carrier (7) together with planet pins (5)
on sun gear (3), and snap ring (16).
3. Pre-heat thrust washer (49) and install onto sun gear
shaft (43).
4. put sun gear shaft (43) into sun gear (3).
5. Pre-heat stay rings (17) and install onto planet pins
(5).
6. Pre-heat cylindrical roller bearings (10) and install
onto planet pins (5) and fix bearings with snap rings
(14).
Assembly Of End Cover Unit (8)

1. Press sleeve (52) and install O-ring into cover (8).
2. Install shaft rod into cover (8).
3. Install cover into cover (8) and fix cover (51) with
hex. hd. bolts (53). Torque bolts to 6.3 ft. lbs.(8.5
Nm).
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-3

Figure 3-1. Drive Hub (Part No. 2780243-2WD Rear & Part No. 2780244-4WD Rear)
3-4 – JLG Lift – 3120895

3.3 DRIVE HUB PART NO. 2780246 (4WD 11. Inspect the planetary stage assemblies as complete
units. Thoroughly clean and check both the gearing
STEER AXLE PRIOR TO S/N and the bearings for damage and apply new oil. If
0300076633) gears or bearings need replacing, they must be
replaced as complete units.
The final drive consists of two stages with an integrated
disconnect mechanism. Each stage incorporates a set of NOTE: The first stage planetary bearings (10) must be
matched planetary gears, which provide an equal load of replaced in sets of three pieces.
distribution. All torque transmitting components are made
of forged, quenched and tempered high-alloy steels. NOTE: The first stage planetary gears (11) must be
External gears are carborized. Precision roller bearings changed as a complete set of four and the manufac-
are used exclusively. Two large, tapered roller bearings turer recommends changing the sun gear shaft (43)
support the sprocket or wheel loads. A shaft seal protects along with this set of planets.
the unit against contamination.
NOTE: The second stage planetary bearings (11) must be
Disassembly replaced in sets of four pieces.
1. Position drive so that one of the fill holes is at the Disassembly of Cover Unit (8)
bottom of the end cover and drain the gear oil.
1. Loosen and remove hex. hd. bolts (53) and remove
2. Remove all bolts holding motor and remove motor cover (51).
from drive.
2. Remove Shaft rod (56), O-ring (54), and sleeve (52)
3. Compress the disc (59) using a simple fixture or
other suitable device.
Disassembly of First Stage Planetary
4. Remove snap ring (66) and release pressure on disc
until loose. Remove tool and disc (59). Assembly
5. Remove the spring (55) from the input shaft (44)and 1. Push the sun gear shaft (43) out of the first stage.
turn the unit so that cover (8) is in the up position.
2. Remove snap rings (14) and press planet pins (5)
6. Remove screw plugs (22) and seal rings (21). out of planet carrier (7) and planet gears (2).
7. Remove snap ring (34), cover unit (8) from drive and 3. Pull cylindrical roller bearing (10) out of planet gears
O-ring (33). (2).
8. Remove first stage planetary assembly (7). 4. Remove snap ring (16) from sun gear (3) and
remove the thrust washer (49).
9. Remove hex. hd. bolts (23) to remove gear (33) and
O-ring (19).
10. Remove Snap rings (15) to pull off planet gears (1)
Disassembly of the Second Stage Planet
together with cylindrical roller bearings (11) from Gears (1)
spindle (60).
Press cylindrical roller bearings out of planet gears (1).
NOTE: Further disassembly of the hub is discouraged. Rein-
stallation of the shaft nut (4) requires a special tool
and a torque of 626 ft lbs (876 Nm) for proper reas-
sembly. These components WILL fail if not properly
reassembled.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-5

Assembly of First Stage Planetary Assembly Final Assembly

(7) 1. Install thrust washer (29) in spindle (60).
1. Pre-freeze planet pins (5) and install into planet car- 2. Install O-ring (19) into groove of support ring (6).
rier (7).
3. Install planet gears (1) onto planet pins which are
2. Install planet carrier (7) together with planet pins (5) part of spindle (60).
on sun gear (3), and snap ring (16).
4. Install snap rings (15) on planet pins of spindle (60)
3. Pre-heat thrust washer (49) and install onto sun gear in order to fix the planet gears (1).
shaft (43).
5. Put ring gear (30) onto support ring (6) and fix ring
4. put sun gear shaft (43) into sun gear (3). gear (30) with hex. hd. bolts (23). Torque bolts to
15.5 ft. lbs.(21.1 Nm).
5. Pre-heat stay rings (17) and install onto planet pins
(5). 6. Insert first stage planetary assembly (7) into drive.
6. Pre-heat cylindrical roller bearings (10) and install 7. Install O-ring (33) in groove of ring gear (30).
onto planet pins (5) and fix bearings with snap rings
(14). 8. Install end cover unit (8) on shoulder ring gear (30)
and fix with snap ring (34).
Assembly of End Cover Unit (8) 9. Install seal rings (21) and screw plugs(22).
1. Press sleeve (52) and install O-ring into cover (8). 10. Before installation of the motor CHECK THAT
THERE IS 1-2 MM. OF CLEARANCE BETWEEN THE
2. Install shaft rod into cover (8).
MOTOR SPLINE SHAFT SHOULDER AND THE
3. Install cover into cover (8) and fix cover (51) with COUPLER (62).
hex. hd. bolts (53). Torque bolts to 6.3 ft. lbs.(8.5
11. Install motor and reconnect hydraulic lines.
Nm).
12. Roll motor so that one fill plug hole is at 12 o’clock
position and the other is a 3 o’clock. Fill hub to bot-
tom of 3 o’clock hole with gear oil. Reinstall plugs.
13. After four hours of operation, recheck oil level.
3-6 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Figure 3-2. Drive Hub (Part No. 2780246-4WD Steer)
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-7

3.4 TORQUE HUB - 4WD (MACHINES BUILT Oil Information

AFTER S/N 0300076633) 1. 1. TYPE – EP90
On normal applications, use EP90. On applications
Roll and Leak Testing where the lubricant must meet special requirements,
the O.E.M should be able to recommend a suitable
Always roll and leak test Torque-Hubs after assembly to
substitute.
make sure that the unit’s gears and sealants are working
properly. The following information briefly outlines what to 2. OIL TEMPERATURE
look for when performing these tests. Continuous – 160° F [70° C] Intermittent – 200° F
[95° C]
THE ROLL TEST
3. OIL CHANGE
The purpose of a roll test is to determine if the unit’s gears
Initial – After 50 hours or 50,000 revolutions of oper-
are rotating freely and properly. You should be able to
ation. Subsequent – After 1000 hours or (1) year,
rotate the gears in your unit by applying a constant force
whichever comes first.
to the roll checker. If you feel more drag in the gears only
at certain points, then the gears are not rolling freely and NOTE: Higher temperatures make it necessary to change oil
you should examine them for improper installation or more frequently.
defects. Some gear packages roll with more difficulty than
others. Do not be concerned if the gears in your unit seem 4. OIL FILL LEVEL AND VOLUME
to roll hard as long as they roll with consistency Unit mounted horizontal – half full. (See Diagram A.)
Approximate volume - 17 oz. [0.5 1tr)
THE LEAK TEST
The purpose of a leak test is to make sure the unit is air Main Disassembly for ”B” Drives
tight. You can tell if your unit has a leak if the pressure 1. 1. Turn hub (1G) over onto its side, Remove cou-
gauge reading on your air checker starts to fall once you pling (14) from the wide end of spindle (1A).
have pressurized the unit. Leaks will most likely occur at
the main seal or wherever o-rings or gaskets are located. 2. Mark location of shoulder bolt holes on outside of
Usually you can detect the exact location of a leak by ring gear and hub for easy re-alignment when
brushing a soap and water solution around the main seal rebuilding. Remove the four shoulder bolts (13) and
and where o-rings or gaskets meet the exterior of the unit, twelve bolts (12) from cover (6).
then checking for air bubbles. If you detect a leak in a
3. Remove the sixteen flat washers (16) from cover (6).
seal, o-ring, or gasket, replace the part immediately.
4. Lift cover sub-assembly (6) off of ring gear (4), and
Tightening and Torquing Bolts set cover on table, interior side facing up.
If you use an air impact wrench to tighten bolts, take
extreme care to insure that you do NOT tighten the bolts
beyond their indicated torque specification. Never use an CAUTION: BEWARE OF SHARP EDGES IN THE COUNTERBORE
impact wrench to tighten shoulder bolts. Always tighten WHEN YOU REMOVE THE O-RING.
a11 shoulder bolts by hand.
5. Remove o-ring (5) from the counterbore around the
The following steps describe the proper procedure for edge of cover (6A). Discard the o-ring.
tightening and torquing bolts or socket head cap screws
in a bolt circle. NOTE: If o-ring is not in the cover counterbore, it is in the
ring gear counterbore. Remove it from the hub and
1. Tighten (but do not torque) bolt ”A” until snug.
discard it.
2. Go to the opposite side of the bolt circle and tighten
6. Remove thrust washer (11) from the counterbore in
bolt ”B” until equally snug.
top of carrier (3A).
3. Continue around the bolt circle and tighten the
7. Remove input gear (8) from the middle of carrier
remaining bolts.
sub-assembly (3).
4. Now use a torque wrench to apply the specified
8. Lift ring gear (4) off of hub (1G).
torque to bolt ”A”.
9. Lift carrier sub-assembly (3) out of hub (1G).
5. Continue around the bolt circle and apply an equal
torque to the remaining bolts. 10. Remove thrust spacer (9) from input shaft (7) in the
middle of spindle (1A).
3-8 – JLG Lift – 3120895

11. Lift input shaft sub-assembly (7) out of middle of 5. Bearing cone (1F) should be lying loose in wide end
spindle (1A), and stand input shaft (7A) on its of hub (1G). Remove bearing cone (1F) from inside
splined end. hub (1G).
NOTE: If you use a punch and hammer, make sure you do

not strike the counterbore with the punch when you
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES DURING THIS STEP, AND BE AWARE remove the bearing cup.
THAT SPRING AND SPACERS COMPRESSED BY RETAINING RING
MAY POP SUDDENLY OFF SHAFT WHEN YOU REMOVE THE 6. Remove bearing cup (1C) from the counterbore in
RETAINING RING. the small end of hub (1G).
NOTE: If you use a punch and hammer, make sure you do

12. Using retaining ring pliers, remove retaining ring not strike the counterbore with the punch when you
(7B) from the groove on input shaft (7A). remove the bearing cup.
13. Remove one spacer (7D), one spring (7C), and
7. Turn hub (1G) over and lift it out of the flange-sup-
other spacer (7D) from input shaft (7A).
port. Remove bearing cup (1E) from the counterbore
14. Remove thrust washer (11) from around spindle in the wide end of hub (1G).
(1A).
8. Turn hub (1G) over onto its small end. Remove two
15. Lift internal gear (2) out of hub (1G). pipe plugs (1J) from the two pipe plug holes in the
side of hub (1G).
NOTE: If your unit does not have studs, skip this step:
BEWARE OF SHARP EDGES IN COUNTERBORE WHEN YOU
REMOVE THE O-RING. 9. Press the nine studs (1N) out of the stud holes in
hub (1G).
16. Remove o-ring (5) from the counterbore in hub (1G). 10. At this point the hub-spindle disassembly is com-
Discard the o-ring. plete.
17. At this point the main disassembly for ”B” drives is
complete.
Cover Disassembly
1. Remove the two bolts (6C) holding disconnect cap
Hub-Spindle Disassembly (6D) to cover (6A).
NOTE: Start with large end of hub facing up, large end of 2. Remove disconnect cap (6D) from on top of cover
spindle facing down. cap (6B) and cover (6A).
3. Remove the two bolts (6C) holding cover cap (6B) to
cover (6A).
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES DURING THIS STEP.
4. Remove cover cap (6B) from cover (6A).
1. Remove retaining ring (1I) from around spindle (1A) 5. Remove disconnect rod (6K) from cover cap (6B).
ia hub (1G).
6. Pry o-ring (6F) out of the groove inside cover cap
2. Remove spacer (1H) from around spindle (1A) in (6B). Discard the o-ring.
hub (1G).
7. Remove o-ring (6G) from the flange of cover cap
3. Set hub (1G), small end/spindle facing down, up on (6B). Discard the o-ring.
something that will support the hub’s flange while it
lifts hub up so spindle is not resting on anything. 8. Remove pipe plug (6H) from cover (6A).
Carefully press or hammer spindle (1A) down out of 9. At this point the cover disassembly is complete.
hub (1G).
NOTE: If seal (1B) and bearing cone (1D) come out of hub
Carrier Disassembly
and rest on spindle, remove these parts from the NOTE: When you remove the needle rollers from the cluster
spindle and set them aside. Discard the seal. gears, discard the old needle rollers and use new
4. If seal and bearing cone did not come out of the ones during re-assembly.
small end of hub (1G) when you pressed spindle out 1. Using a punch and hammer, drive roll pin (3G) into
of hub, remove seal (1B) and bearing cone (1D) planet shaft (3E).
from the small end of hub (1G). Discard the seal.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-9

NOTE: If you don’t drive the roll pin all the way into the 2. Place one spacer (3D) inside cluster gear (3F) so
planet shaft t, you could damage the carrier when that it rests on top of the needle rollers.
you remove the planet shaft from the carrier.
2. Using a punch and hammer, drive planet shaft (3E)

out of the planet shaft t hole in carrier housing (3A).
3. When you remove planet shaft (3E) from the carrier
housing, one thrust washer (38), one cluster gear
(3F), and one more thrust washer (3B) will come off
of the planet shaft and come to rest inside the car-
rier. Remove these parts from inside the carrier.
4. Remove 16 needle rollers (3C) from inside one end
of cluster gear (3F). Discard the needle rollers.
5. Remove one spacer (3D) from inside cluster gear
(3F). 3. Line the remaining half of cluster gear (3F) with 16
6. Remove the remaining 16 needle rollers (3C) from needle rollers.
the other side of cluster gear (3F). Discard the nee-
dle rollers.
7. Repeat steps 1-6 to remove and disassemble the
two remaining cluster gears.
8. At this point the carrier disassembly is complete.
Assembly of the Carrier

1. Apply grease to the inside of one cluster gear (3F)
and line one half of cluster gear with 16 needle roll-
ers (3C).
4. Set carrier housing (3A) on table, sideways. Insert a

planet shaft (3E), roll pin hole last, into one of the
planet shaft holes from roll-pin-holed side of carrier
housing (3A).
3-10 – JLG Lift – 3120895

5. Place one thrust washer (3B) onto the end of planet 8. Use an alignment punch or similar tool to align the
shaft (3E) inside carrier. Fit tang of thrust washer into roll pin holes in carrier housing (3A) and planet shaft
the slot on the inside edge of the planet shaft hole. (3E).
6. Following the thrust washer, place the cluster gear 9. Drive roll pin (3G) down into the aligned roll pin
(3F), large end toward roll pin hole in carrier hous- holes in carrier housing (3A) and planet shaft (3E).
ing, onto the planet shaft (3E).
10. Repeat steps 1 thru 9 to assemble and install the

7. Following the cluster gear, place one more thrust two remaining cluster gears.
washer (3B) onto planet shaft (3E) through the
11. At this point the carrier sub-assembly is complete.
opposite planet shaft hole in carrier housing (3A).
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-11

Cover Sub-Assembly 4. Set cover (6Aon table, exterior side up. Place cover
cap (6B) onto cover (6A), aligning the pipe plug hole
1. Using the disconnect rod, push o-ring (6F) into the in the cover cap over the pipe plug hole in the cover.
groove inside the cover cap (6B).
5. Place two of the cover cap bolts (6C) into any two
2. Place the o-ring (6G) onto the cover cap (6B) so that bolt hoes that are 180° apart on the cover cap (6B)
it rests against the flange of the cover cap. and tighten bolts.
3. Insert disconnect rod (6E) into cover cap (6B). 6. Using a torque wrench, apply 36 to 49 in. lbs. (4 to 5
Nm) of torque to both bolts (6C).
3-12 – JLG Lift – 3120895

7. With the large end down, place the disconnect cap 10. Apply a light coat of "Never-Seize" to pipe plug (6H)
(6D) onto the cover cap (6B), aligning the pipe plug and tighten it into the pipe plug hole in the cover
hole in the disconnect cap over the pipe plug hole in (6A).
the cover cap.
8. Place the two remaining bolts (6C) into the bolt

Hub-Spindle Sub-Assembly
holes in the disconnect cap (6D), and tighten the NOTE: Make sure the cup sits square with the counterbore
bolts. before pressing.
1. Set hub (1G) onto its large end. Press bearing cup
(1C) into the counterbore in the small end of the hub
(1G).
9. Using a torque wrench, apply 36 to 49 in. lbs. (4 to 5

Nm) of torque to both bolts (6C).
2. Press the nine studs (1N) into the stud holes in hub
(1G).
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-13

3. Apply a light coat of "Never-Seize" to two pipe plugs 6. Press seal (1B) into the small end of hub (1G).
(1J) and tighten them into the two pipe plug holes in
the side of the hub (1G).
7. Oil spindle, then lower hub (1G), small end down,

onto spindle (1A).
NOTE: Make sure the cup sits square with the counterbore
before pressing.
4. Turn hub (1G) over onto its small end. Press bearing
cup (1E) down into the counterbore in the deep end
of the hub (1G).
8. Press bearing cone (1F) onto spindle (1A) in hub

(1G).
5. Set hub (1G) onto its large end. Place bearing cone
(1D) into bearing cup (1C).
3-14 – JLG Lift – 3120895

9. Place spacer (1H) onto spindle (1A) in hub (1G). Main Assembly
BEWARE OF SHARP EDGES IN COUNTERBORE WHEN INSTALLING

THE O-RING
1. Grease o-ring (5) and place it into the counterbore in
hub (1G).
NOTE: O-ring may be stretched or pinched together to make

it fit the counterbore exactly.
NOTE: Make sure the retaining ring is securely seated in the

groove.
10. Place retaining ring (1I) over the spacer onto spindle
(1A) in hub (1G).
2. Oil all exposed surfaces inside hub (1G).
11. At this point the hub-spindle sub-assembly is com-

plete.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-15

3. Place internal gear (2) into hub (1G) so that its inter- 6. Place one spring (7C) onto the smooth end of input
nal splines mesh with the external splines of spindle shaft (7A).
(1A). Oil internal gear (2).
7. Place other spacer (7D) onto the smooth end of

4. Place thrust washer (11) around spindle (1A) so it input shaft (7A).
rests on the bottom of the internal gear (2).
5. Stand input shaft (7A) on its splined end. Place one

spacer (7D) onto the smooth end of input shaft (7A). WEAR SAFETY GLASSES DURING THIS STEP, AND BE AWARE THAT
SPRING AND SPACERS, COMPRESSED BY RETAINING RING, MAY
POP SUDDENLY OFF SHAFT IF THE RING IS RELEASED BEFORE IT
IS PROPERLY IN PLACE.
8. Using retaining ring pliers, insert retaining ring (7B)
into the groove on input shaft (7A) by compressing
the spring and spacers together.
3-16 – JLG Lift – 3120895

9. With large splined end down, place input shaft sub- NOTE: This will hold the punch marks in position while
assembly (7) into spindle (1A). installing the carrier into the hub.
10. Place thrust spacer (9) onto input shaft (7).

13. Place the carrier sub assembly (3) and ring gear (4)
together into mesh with internal gear (2), aligning
the "X" marked shoulder bolt hole in the ring gear (4)
over one of the shoulder bolt holes in the hub. Mark
the location of shoulder bolt holes on the outside of
ring gear and hub.
NOTE: You may lift the ring gear off the hub to align the
shoulder bolt holes. The ring gear and carrier are
installed together only to keep the punch marks on
the carrier in place.
11. Set carrier sub-assembly (3) on a flat work surface

so the large ends of cluster gears (3F) face up.
Locate the punch marks on the face of each cluster
gear (3F) and position them at 12 o’clock.
14. With the internal splines facing up (counterbore end

facing down), place input gear (8) into mesh with
carrier sub-assembly (3).
Figure 3-3. Cluster Gear Punch Marks
12. With "X" marked side facing up, place the ring gear
(4) around cluster gears (3F).
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-17

15. Oil all exposed surfaces inside the hub (1G). Place 17. Place cover sub-assembly (6) onto ring gear (4),
thrust washer (11) into the counterbore in top of the aligning the pipe plug holes according to the align-
carrier. ment prior to disassembly.
18. Place four flatwashers (16) on top of the bolt holes in

the cover sub-assembly.
BEWARE OF SHARP EDGES IN THE COUNTERBORE WHEN YOU
INSTALL THE O-RING.
16. Set the cover (6A) on table, interior side up. Grease
o-ring (5) and place it into the counterbore around
the edge of cover (6A).
NOTE: The o-ring may be stretched or pinched together to

make it fit the counterbore exactly.
3-18 – JLG Lift – 3120895

19. Place shoulder bolts (13) into the four shoulder bolt 21. Place the 12 bolts into the remaining bolt holes in
holes in cover (6) and tighten by hand. cover (6) and tighten.
20. Place the remaining 12 flatwashers (16) onto the 22. Torque the shoulder bolts (13) 18 to 25 ft.lbs. (25 to
remaining bolt holes in cover (6). 34 Nm). Torque bolts (12) 18 to 25 ft.lbs. (25 to 34
Nm).
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-19

23. Turn hub (1G) over onto its side. Insert coupling (14) 26. At this point the main assembly is complete.
into the end of the spindle (1A).
24. Roll test the unit in both clockwise and counterclock-

Tool List
wise directions. Perform the same number of turns The following specialized tools are used to assemble this
in each direction as the ratio of the unit. The ratio is unit. The tool diagrams included in this manual are
the last two digits of the model number on the unit’s intended for the customer who may wish to have a tool
ID tag. made. All tools exist as one piece and must be made from
mild steel All dimensions are given in inches.
NOTE: In order to improve tool life, tools may be carburized

and hardened. If this is done, however, the tools
must be ground on all surfaces labeled with a "G" on
the tool diagram.
1. T-118126 SEAL PRESSING TOOL for SEAL (1B).
25. Leak test the unit at a pressure of 5 psi for 2 to 3

minutes.
3-20 – JLG Lift – 3120895

2. T-138903 ASSEMBLY PRESSING TOOL for CUP 4. T-109691 ASSEMSLY PRESSING TOOL for CONE
(1C) (1F)
* These tools are for specific seals, cups or cones. There

is a specific tool for each cup and cone.
3. T-140433 ASSEMBLY PRESSING TOOL for CUP
(1E)
3.5 RE-ALIGNING TORQUE HUB INPUT
COUPLING
The following procedure applies to torque hubs with inte-
gral brakes.
Equipment Required
1. Hydraulic power supply (hand pump) capable of
producing 200 psi (13.8 bar).
2. Hydraulic fittings to adapt hydraulic supply to brake
release port on hub.
Procedure
1. Using appropriate fittings, connect a line from the
hydraulic power supply to the brake port.
2. Pressurize the brake release port 155 to 200 psi
(10.6 to 13.8 bar) to release the brake.
3. Verify that the brake is released by rotating the input
coupling or hub spindle.
4. Once the brake is released, the input coupling will
be free to re-align with the drive motor.
5. Install the drive motor on the hub, then release the
hydraulic pressure at the brake release port. The
coupling will remain in position.
6. Disconnect the hydraulic power supply and recon-
nect the line going into the brake release port.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-21

3.6 DRIVE BRAKE of 3000 psi (200bar) and check that brake shaft (1) is free
to rotate.
Pre-Installation Checks Remove hydraulic supply from brake, checking to ensure
MECHANICAL that the friction plates (3 & 6) have engaged thus prevent-
ing rotation of brake shaft (1)
Check, That in the handling prior to assembly, the mount-
ing features and other parts of the brake are undamaged.
Ensure that the shaft to which the brake is mounted are
clean and free from burrs and swellings. RELEASE PRESSURE DURING BENCH TESTING SHOULD BE LIM-
ITED TO 2000 PSI (138 BAR) UNLESS BRAKE IS FULLY
HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL INSTALLED USING 2-OFF 1/2” UNC MOUNTING BOLTS IN THE
THROUGH (MOUNTING) HOLES.
To check brake release, connect an appropriate hydraulic
pressure supply set to the required level up to a maximum
1. Brake Shaft 9. Piston 17. O-Ring

2. Housing 10. Deep Groove Ball Bearing 18. Backing Ring
3. Inner Friction Plate 11. Internal Retaining Ring 19. Dowel Pin
4. Pressure Plate 12. Rotary Shaft Seal 20. Hexagon Plug
5. Gasket 13. Socket Head Cap Screw 21. Plastic Plug
6. Outer Plate 14. Shakeproof Washer 21A. Socket Pressure Plug
7. Gasket 15. O-Ring 22. Spring (Natural)
8. Cylinder 16. Backing Ring 23. Spring (Blue)
Figure 3-4. Drive Brake
3-22 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Installation 9.Using arbor press or similar to break Loctite seal,

remove brake shaft (1) from housing (2) and lay
Position 1-off gasket (5) over male pilot on brake housing aside.
(4).
Locate brake shaft (1) and secure brake in position using 10.Reverse housing (2) and press out ball bearing (10).
2-off 1/2” UNC mounting bolts in the through mounting Shaft seal (12) can also be removed if necessary.
(fixing) holes provided.
Connect hydraulic pressure supply to brake pressure inlet Examination
port. Ensure that the hydraulic pressure is set to the All components can now be examined and inspected,
required level up to a maximum of 3000 psi (200 bar) and paying particular attention to the following.
check that the brake disengages and re-engages cor-
rectly. 1.Inspect friction plates (3 & 6) and friction surface on
pressure plate (4) for wear or damage.
Maintenance 2.Examine friction plates (3) and brake shaft (1) for wear
The brake is required to be kept in good working order or damage to splines.
and must be included in the planned maintenance pro-
3.Examine input and output splines of brake shaft (1) for
gram for the equipment to which the brake is installed.
wear or damage.
This must include torque testing together with inspection
and replacement of the working parts such as friction 4.Examine compression springs (22 & 23) for damage or
plates (3 & 6) and, springs (22 & 23). The frequency of fatigue.
inspection depends on the duty demanded of the brake.
5.Check ball bearing (10) for axial float or wear.
Disassembly 6.Examine O-ring seals (15 & 17) and backing rings (16
& 18) for damage.
To remove brake from its installed position, reverse proce-
dure previously described in the installation instructions. 7.Obtain replacement parts as required.
Place the complete brake assembly on a clean, dry work
bench. Assembly
Clean all parts thoroughly.
Remove external gasket (5) as necessary. Reverse procedure previously outlined in Dismantling
NOTE: Refer to Diagrams for the following. instructions taking particular care with.
1.Supporting brake face “A”, remove the six socket head a. Assembly of shaft seal (12).
cap screws and washers (items 13 & 14) in equal b. Assembly of bearing (10).
increments to ensure the spring pressure within the c. Quantity and orientation of springs (22 & 23).
brake is reduced gradually and evenly.
d. Assembly sequence of friction plates (3 & 6).
Alternatively, if press is available, the cylinder hous-
ing (8) can be restrained on face “B” while removing 1.Lightly lubricate rotary shaft seal (12) and assemble to
the six socket head cap screws and washers (13 & housing (2) taking care not to damage seal lip.
14).
The brake assembly can now be fully dismantled 2.Apply ring of Loctite 641 or equivalent adhesive to full
and parts examined. circumference of housing (2) bearing recess adja-
cent to shoulder.
2.Remove cylinder housing (8) and piston (9) subassem- Apply complete coverage of Loctite 641 to outside
bly and dismantle if required, removing O-ring seals diameter of bearing (10) and assemble fully in hous-
(15 & 17) and backing rings (16 & 18) as necessary. ing (2), retaining with internal retaining ring (11).
Remove excess adhesive with clean cloth.
3.Remove gasket (7) from housing (2).
Press shaft (1) through bearing (10), ensuring bear-
4.Remove friction plates (3 & 6) and pressure plate (4). ing inner ring is adequately supported.
5.Remove 2-off dowel pins (19). 3.Assemble correct quantity of springs (22 & 23) in orien-
tation required.
6.Remove springs (22 & 23).
4.Lubricate O-ring seals (15 & 17) with Molykote 55M (or
7.Should it be necessary to replace ball bearing (10) or
equivalent) silicone grease and assemble together
shaft seal (12), reverse remainder of brake sub-
with backing rings (16 & 18) to piston (9). To ensure
assembly, supporting on face “c” of housing (2).
correct brake operation, it is important that the back-
8.Remove internal retaining ring (11).
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-23

ing rings are assembled opposite ti the pressurized 8.Align two holes in cylinder with dowel pins (19) and
side of piston (9). assemble piston & cylinder sub-assembly to remain-
der of brake securing with 6-off socket head cap
5.Correctly orientate piston (9) aligning spaces with the
screws and washers (13 & 14). Torque to 55ft/lbs.
two dowel pin holes and, assemble into cylinder
(75 Nm).
housing (8) taking care not to damage seals and
carefully lay aside. NOTE: The use of a suitable press (hydraulic or arbor)
Pressing down on cylinder end face “B” will ease
6.Loctite 2-off pins (19) in housing (2) followed by pres-
assembly of the socket head cap screws (13).
sure plate (4) and friction plates i.e. an inner (3) fol-
lowed by an outer (6) in correct sequence.
7.Position gasket (7) in correct orientation.
1. Brake Shaft 8. Cylinder 15. O-Ring

2. Housing 9. Piston 16. Backing Ring
3. Inner Friction Plate 10. Deep Groove Ball Bearing 17. O-Ring
4. Pressure Plate 11. Internal Retaining Ring 18. Backing Ring
5. Gasket 12. Rotary Shaft Seal 19. Dowel Pin
6. Outer Plate 13. Socket Head Cap Screw 20. Hexagon Plug
7. Gasket 14. Shakeproof Washer 21. Plastic Plug
21A. Socket Pressure Plug
Figure 3-5. Swing Brake Assembly
3-24 – JLG Lift – 3120895

3.7 DRIVE MOTOR Shaft Seal Replacement

Description REMOVAL
The drive motors are low to medium power, two-position 1. Remove the snap ring (1) retaining the shaft seal
axial piston motors incorporating an integral servo piston. and support washer.
They are designed for operation in both open and closed
circuit applications. The standard control is a direct acting 1
single line hydraulic control. The integral servo piston con-
trols motor displacement. 2
The motors are spring biased to maximum displacement
and hydraulically shifted to minimum displacement. Mini- 3
mum and maximum displacement can be set with fixed
internal stops. The large diameter servo piston allows
smooth acceleration and deceleration with relatively large
circuit orificing.
Bias spring
Servo piston
Minimum
Angle Swashplate
Stop
1. Snap Ring
2. Support Washer
Output 3. Shaft Seal
Cylinder Shaft
Figure 3-7. Removing the Shaft Seal
Block
2. Remove the support washer (2).
Shaft 3. Carefully pry out the shaft seal (3).

Seal
To avoid damaging the shaft during removal, install
Piston a large sheet metal screw into the chuck of a slide
Endcap Slipper Bearing
Valve plate hammer. Drive the screw into the seal surface and
Figure 3-6. Drive Motor Cross Section use the slide hammer to pull the seal.
4. Discard the seal.
INSPECT THE COMPONENTS

Inspect the new seal, the motor housing seal bore, and
the sealing area on the shaft for rust, wear, and contami-
nation. Polish the shaft and clean the housing if neces-
sary.
INSTALLATION
1. Cover the shaft splines with an installation sleeve to
protect the shaft seal during installation.
2. Install a new shaft seal with the cupped side facing
the motor. Press seal into housing until it bottoms
out. Press evenly to avoid binding and damaging
the seal.
3. Install seal support washer.
4. Install snap ring.
5. Remove the installation sleeve.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-25

Loop Flushing Valve INSPECT THE COMPONENTS

Inspect new O-rings and the sealing area for rust, wear, or
REMOVAL contamination. Also check springs and poppet for wear.
1. Using a 11/16 in internal hex wrench remove plug INSTALLATION

(1) and (2).
1. Install orifice poppet (13).
6
9 2. Install shift spool (12).
11
2 3. Install spring retaining washers onto springs (10 and
11/16 in 11).
27 ft.lbs.
(37 Nm) 4. Carefully install centering springs (7, 8, and 9).
5. Install new O-rings (6, 4, and 5).
6. Using a 1/4 in hex wrench torque plug (3) to 20 ft.
lbs. (27 Nm).
12 7. Using a 11/16 in internal hex, torque plugs (2 and 1)

10
to 27 ft.lbs. (37 Nm).
8
4
1 13
11/16 in
27 ft.lbs.
(37 Nm) 7
5/8 in
5 3 20 ft.lbs.
(27 Nm)
1. Plug 6. O-ring 11. Washer

2. Plug 7. Spring 12. Shift Spool
3. Plug 8. Spring 13. Orifice Poppet
4. O-ring 9. Spring
5. O-ring 10. Washer
Figure 3-8. Loop Flushing Spool
2. Using a 1/4 in hex wrench remove plug (3).

3. Remove O-rings (4, 5, and 6).
4. Using pliers, remove centering springs (7, 8, and 9).
5. Remove spring retaining washers (10 and 11).
6. Remove shift spool (12).
7. Remove orifice poppet (13).
3-26 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Troubleshooting
Table 3-2. Excessive Noise and/or Vibration
Item Description Action

Check oil level in reservoir Insufficient hydraulic fluid could lead to cavitation that would Fill the reservoir to the proper level and ensure that oil supply to
and oil supply to the motor. cause system noise. the motor is adequate and the lines are unobstructed.
Check for air in the system. Air trapped within the system lines, or the motor itself, could Ensure that all of the system lines and components are purged
result in cavitation that would cause system noise. of air.
Inspect the output shaft cou- A loose or incorrect shaft coupling will produce vibrations that Ensure that the correct coupling is used and that it fits properly
plings. could result in system noise. onto the shaft.
Inspect the output shaft Misaligned shafts create excessive frictional vibration that Ensure that the shafts are properly aligned.
alignment. could result in system noise.
Hydraulic oil viscosity above Viscosity above acceptable limits will result in cavitation that Replace hydraulic oil with appropriate fluid for operating condi-
limits. would lead to system noise. tions.
Table 3-3. System Operating Hot

Check oil level in reservoir Insufficient amount of hydraulic fluid will not meet the cooling Fill the reservoir to the proper level.
and oil supply to the pump. demands of the system.
Inspect the heat exchanger, If the heat exchanger fails, or becomes obstructed, it may not Ensure that heat exchanger is receiving adequate air flow and
(if so equipped). meet the cooling demands of the system. that the heat exchanger is in good operating condition. Repair
or replace as necessary.
Check the system relief If a system relief valve becomes unseated for an extended Repair or replace any malfunctioning relief valves as applica-
valves. period of time or fails for any other reason, the system could ble and verify that the loads on the machine are not excessive.
become overheated.
Table 3-4. Won’t Shift or Slow to Start

Check the signal line to the Obstructed or restricted flow through the servo control signal Ensure that the signal lines are not obstructed or restricted and
servo control port. lines could result in slow shift or no shift conditions within the that signal pressure is adequate to shift the motor.
motor.
Check that the correct supply Supply and drain orifices determine the shift rate of the motor. Ensure that the proper control orifices are installed in the motor
and drain orifices are prop- The smaller the orifice, the longer the time it takes to shift the and verify that they are not obstructed. Clean or replace as
erly installed, and are not motor. Obstruction will also increase shift times. necessary.
obstructed.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-27

Disassembly
17
NOTE: Removal of the endcap voids warranty.
19
During assembly, coat all moving parts with a film of

clean hydraulic oil. This assures that these parts will
be lubricated during start-up.
15
Replace all O-Rings and gaskets.
It is recommended that all O-rings be replaced. 14

Lightly lubricate all O-rings with clean petroleum jelly
prior to assembly.
6 21
9
5 11
2
7
13 18
3
10 12
16
8
4 16
1
20
14. Lock Nut 18. Cavity Plug

15. O-ring Plug 19. Drain Plug
16. Control Line Plug 20. Drain Plug
17. Control Line Plug 21. Work Port Plug
Figure 3-10. Plugs, Fittings, and Speed Sen-

1. Plug 5. O-ring 9. Spring 12. Shift Spool sor
2. Plug 6. O-ring 10. Washer 13. Orifice Poppet
3. Plug 7. Spring 11. Washer 8. Remove all fittings from the unit. Discard any O-rings
4. O-ring 8. Spring on the fittings.
Figure 3-9. Loop Flushing Spool 9. Using an 11/16 inch hex wrench, loosen the speed
sensor lock nut (14) if equipped. Then remove the
speed sensor using a Vi inch hex wrench. Units with-
1. Using a 11/16 in wrench remove plug (1) and (2).
out speed sensor have an O-ring plug (15) installed
2. Using a 5/8 in hex wrench remove plug (3). in that location; remove it with a Va inch internal hex
wrench.
3. Remove O-rings (4, 5, and 6).
10. Using a 1/4 inch internal hex wrench, remove control
4. Using pliers, remove centering springs (7, 8, and 9). line plugs (16, 17). Discard O-rings. Using a 3 mm
5. Remove spring retaining washers (10 and 11). hex wrench, remove cavity plug (18, if equipped with
two-line control) from X2 cavity.
6. Remove shift spool (12).
11. Using a 5/16 inch internal hex wrench, remove drain
7. Remove orifice poppet (13). plugs (19, 20). Discard O-rings.
12. Using a 9/16 inch internal hex wrench, remove work
port plugs (21, if equipped with axial ports). Discard
O-rings.
3-28 – JLG Lift – 3120895

25
22
27
30
23 29
29
26
24
28
22. Screw
23. End Cap 25. Valve Plate
24. O-ring 26. End Cap
27. O-ring
Figure 3-11. End Cap 28. O-ring
29. Angle Stop
13. Using an 8 mm internal hex wrench, remove the 30. Servo Spring
endcap screws (22).
Figure 3-12. Valve Plate & Rear Shaft Bearing
14. Remove the endcap (23). Remove O-ring (24) from
the housing or endcap.
When the endcap screws are removed, pressure TAKE CARE NOT TO SCRATCH THE SURFACE OF THE VALVE
from the servo spring will cause the endcap to bind PLATE.
on the shaft. Press down on the portion of the end-
cap covering the servo piston and hold the endcap 15. Remove the valve plate (25) and timing pin (26) from
level while removing. the endcap.
Each displacement has a unique valve plate. For

identification, the last two digits of the valve plate
part number are stamped on its surface.
16. Remove and discard the O-rings (27, 28).
17. Remove the rear shaft bearing (29) from the endcap
with a bearing puller.
The bearing may be difficult to remove with a puller.

Try this as an alternative: Pack the bearing cavity
with heavy grease. After the shaft is removed, insert
it into the bearing cavity and tap lightly with a soft
mallet on the splined end. The grease will force the
bearing out. Use caution not to drive the bearing
past the rear shaft journal as the bearing may
become trapped on the shaft and damaged.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-29

18. Remove minimum angle stop (29) and servo spring shaft seal (34). Discard the seal.
(30) from the housing.
To avoid damaging the shaft during seal removal.
Install a large sheet metal screw into the chuck of a
slide hammer. Drive the screw into the seal surface
and use the slide hammer to pull the seal.
31
36
35
37
38
31. Cylinder Kit Assembly
Figure 3-13. Cylinder Kit
19. Turn the housing on its side and remove the cylinder
kit assembly (31). Set the assembly aside, being
careful not to scratch the running surface. 35. Inner Snap Ring
36. Snap Ring
NOTE: Grooves on the surface of the cylinder kit identify its 37. Bearing
displacement: 38. Shaft
Table 3-5. Displacement Identifiers Figure 3-15. Shaft & Front Bearing
# of Grooves Frame L Frame K

21. Remove the inner snap ring (35) and the shaft /
1 25 38 bearing assembly.
2 30 45
22. Remove the snap-ring (36) retaining the shaft front
3 35 -- bearing. Pull the bearing (37) off of the shaft (38).
32
33
34
32. Snap Ring

33. Support Washer
34. Shaft Seal
Figure 3-14. Shaft Seal
20. Turn the housing over and remove the snap ring (32)
retaining the shaft seal and support washer. Remove
the support washer (33) and carefully pry out the
3-30 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Lift here
44
39
45
47
40
48
43
42
49
41
46
53
52
39. Swashplate 50
40. Servo Piston
41. Piston Seal 51
42. O-ring
43. Journal Bearings
Figure 3-16. Swash Plate & Servo Piston

44. Piston 49. Retaining Ring
45. Slipper Retainer 50. Block Spring Washer
23. Turn housing over and remove the swashplate (39) 46. Cylinder Block 51. Spiral Retaining Ring
by lifting on the end opposite the servo lever. 47. Ball Guide 52. Block Spring
24. Remove the servo piston (40). Remove the piston 48. Holddown Pins 53. Inner Block Spring Washer
seal (41) and O-ring (42) from the servo piston. Dis- Figure 3-17. Cylinder Kit Disassembly
card the seal and O-ring.
25. Remove the journal bearings (43) from the housing. 26. Remove pistons (44) and slipper retainer (45) from
If the bearings are to be reused, note the location the cylinder block (46).
and orientation of each bearing for reassembly.
The pistons are not selectively fitted, however units
with high hourly usage may develop wear patterns.
Number the pistons and bores for reassembly if they
are to be reused.
27. Remove the ball guide (47), hold-down pins (48),
and retaining ring (49) from the cylinder block.
NOTE: Most repairs do not require block spring removal.

Perform this procedure only if you suspect problems
with the block spring.
RISK OF PERSONAL INJURY: COMPRESSING THE BLOCK SPRING

REQUIRES FORCE OF ABOUT 80 TO 90 LBF (350 TO 400 N). USE
A PRESS SUFFICIENT TO MAINTAIN THIS FORCE WITH REASON-
ABLE EFFOR T. ENSURE THE SPRING IS SECURE BEFORE
ATTEMPTING TO REMOVE THE SPIRAL RETAINING RING.
RELEASE THE PRESSURE SLOWLY AFTER THE RETAINING RING
IS REMOVED.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-31

28. Turn the block over. Using a press, apply pressure SLIPPERS
on the block spring washer (50) to compress the Inspect the running surface of the slippers. Replace any
block spring. Compress the spring enough to safely piston assemblies with scored or excessively rounded
remove the spiral retaining ring (51). While maintain- slipper edges. Measure the slipper foot thickness.
ing pressure, unwind the spiral retaining ring (51). Replace any piston assemblies with excessively worn slip-
Carefully release the pressure and remove the outer pers. Check the slipper axial end-play. Replace any piston
block spring washer (50), block spring (52), and assemblies with excessive end-play.
inner block spring washer (53) from the cylinder
block. Minimum slipper foot thickness and maximum axial end-
play are given in the table below.
Inspection Table 3-6. Slipper Foot Thickness & End Play
After disassembly, wash all parts (including the end-cap
and housing) thoroughly with clean solvent and allow to Measurement L Frame K Frame
air dry. Blow out oil passages in the housing and endcap Slipper Foot Thickness mm 2.71 4.07
with compressed air. Conduct inspection in a clean area (in.) (0.11) (0.16)
and keep all parts free from contamination. Clean and dry Piston/Slipper End Play 0.15
parts again after any rework or resurfacing. (0.006)
PISTON
Inspect the pistons for damage and discoloration. Discol- CYLINDER BLOCK
ored pistons may indicate excessive heat; do not reuse. Measure the cylinder block height. Replace blocks worn
beyond the minimum height specification. Inspect the run-
ning surface of the cylinder block. Replace or resurface
Maximum end play
worn or scratched blocks. Blocks may be resurfaced to
the specifications shown in the drawing, provided resur-
facing will not reduce the block height below the minimum
Minimum Slipper specification. Table 3-7, Cylinder Block Measurements.
slipper foot
thickness
Table 3-7. Cylinder Block Measurements
Measurement L25 L30 L35 K38 K45

Minimum Cylinder Block Height (A) 50.8 (2.00) 50.8 (2.00) 50.8 (2.00) 54.4 (2.14) 54.4 (2.14)
Cylinder Block Surface Flatness 0.002 0.002 0.002 0.002 0.002
(0.0000079) (0.0000079) (0.0000079) (0.0000079) (0.0000079)
3-32 – JLG Lift – 3120895

BALL GUIDE AND SLIPPER RETAINER Replace swashplate if the difference in thickness from one
Inspect the ball guide and slipper retainer for damage, side to the other exceeds specification.
discoloration, or excessive wear. A discolored ball guide
or slipper retainer indicates excessive heat. Do not reuse.
0.0025 mm
[0.0001 in]
Slipper retainer
25.8 mm
LV [1.015 in]
Ball guide KV 24.6 mm

[0.969 in]
Thickness equality
side to side:
0.05 mm [0.002 in]
VALVE PLATE
The condition of the valve plate is critical to the efficiency
of the motor. Inspect the valve plate surfaces carefully for
excessive wear, grooves, or scratches. Replace or resur-
face grooved or scratched valve plates. Measure the valve
plate thickness and replace if worn beyond the minimum
Inspect the journal bearings for damage or excessive
specification. Valve plates may be resurfaced to the speci-
wear. Replace journal bearings if scratched, warped, or
fications shown in the drawing, provided resurfacing will
excessively worn. The polymer wear layer must be
not reduce the thickness below the minimum specifica-
smooth and intact.
tion.
3.83 mm [0.151 in] min.
SHAFT BEARINGS
0.025 mm
Inspect bearings for excessive wear or contamination.
[0.001 in] Rotate the bearings while feeling for uneven movement.
Bearings should spin smoothly and freely. Replace bear-
ings that appear worn or do not rotate smoothly.
0.0076 mm
[0.00030 in]
convex max
SWASHPLATE AND JOURNAL BEARINGS

Inspect the running face, servo ball-joint, and swashplate SHAFT
journal surfaces for damage or excessive wear. Some Inspect the motor shaft. Look for damage or excessive
material transfer may appear on these surfaces and is wear on the output and block splines. Inspect the bearing
acceptable providing the surface condition meets specifi- surfaces and sealing surface. Replace shafts with dam-
cations shown. Measure the swashplate thickness from aged or excessively worn splines, bearing surfaces, or
the journals to the running face. Replace swashplate if sealing surfaces.
damaged or worn beyond minimum specification.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-33

SERVO PISTON AND MINIMUM ANGLE STOP Assembly

Inspect the minimum angle stop, servo piston head, and
servo piston ball-socket for damage or excessive wear. 1. Install new O-ring (1) and piston seal (2) to the servo
Replace if necessary. piston (3). Install the piston seal over the O-ring.
Installing the piston seal stretches it, making it diffi-

cult to install the servo piston in its bore. Allow 30
minutes for the seal to relax after installation. To
speed up seal relaxation, compress the seal by
installing the piston head into the servo cavity in the
end-cap and let it stand for at least five minutes.
2
3
LOOP FLUSHING SPOOL

Inspect the loop flushing spool. Check for cracks or dam-
age. Replace if necessary.
1. O-ring
2. Piston Seal
3. Servo Piston
Figure 3-18. Servo Piston
2. After piston seal has relaxed, lubricate and install

servo piston into the housing bore. Align the piston
with the ball socket facing the inside of the housing.
RISK OF PERSONAL INJURY: COMPRESSING THE BLOCK SPRING

REQUIRES ABOUT 80 TO 90 LBF (350 TO 400 N) OF FORCE. USE
A PRESS SUFFICIENT TO MAINTAIN THIS FORCE WITH REASON-
ABLE EFFOR T. ENSURE THE SPRING IS SECURE BEFORE
ATTEMPTING TO INSTALL THE SPIRAL RETAINING RING.
RELEASE THE PRESSURE SLOWLY AFTER THE RETAINING RING
IS INSTALLED.
3-34 – JLG Lift – 3120895

3. Install the inner block spring washer (4), block 6. Install the journal bearings (13) into the housing
spring (5), and outer washer (6) into the cylinder seats. Use assembly grease to keep the bearings
block. Using a press, compress the block spring seated during assembly. Ensure the locating nubs
enough to expose the retaining ring groove. Wind drop into the cavities in the seats. If you're reusing
the spiral retaining ring (7) into the groove in the cyl- the bearings, install them in the original location and
inder block. orientation. Lubricate the journal bearings.
11 14
13
12
10
9
8
13
5
13. Journal Bearings
14. Swash Plate
6
Figure 3-20. Swash Plate and Journal Bearing
7
7. Install the swashplate (14) into the housing. Tilt the

swashplate and guide the servo lever ball into its
4. Block Spring Washer 9. Holddown Pins socket in the servo piston rod. Ensure the swash-
5. Block Spring 10. Ball Guide plate seats into the journal bearings and moves
6. Outer Washer 11. Piston freely. Lubricate the running surface of the swash-
7. Spiral Retaining Ring 12. Slipper Retainer plate.
8. Retaining Ring
Figure 3-19. Cylinder Kit Assembly
4. Turn the block over and install the retaining ring (8),
hold-down pins (9), and ball guide (10) to the cylin-
der block.
5. Install the pistons (11) to the slipper retainer (12).
Install the piston/retainer assembly into the cylinder
block. Ensure the concave surface of the retainer
seats on the ball guide. If you're reusing the pistons,
install them to the original block bores. Lubricate the
pistons, slippers, retainer, and ball guide before
assembly. Set the cylinder kit aside on a clean sur-
face until needed.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-35

8. Press front shaft bearing (15) onto shaft (16). Press 10. Verify swashplate and bearings are properly seated.
bearing onto shaft with lettering facing out. Lubricate Install the cylinder kit (19) onto the shaft. Install with
bearing rollers. Install snap-ring (17) onto shaft. the slippers facing the swashplate. Rock the shaft to
align the block splines and slide the cylinder kit into
place. Orient the motor with the shaft pointing down-
ward and verify the cylinder kit, swashplate, journal
bearings, and servo piston are all secure and prop-
erly installed.
19
15
16
19. Cylinder Kit
17 Figure 3-22. Cylinder Kit Installation

18
11. Lubricate and install the servo spring (20), and mini-
15. Front Shaft Bearing mum angle stop (21) into the housing bore.
16. Shaft
17. Snap Ring
18. Snap Ring
Figure 3-21. Shaft and Front Bearing

21
9. While holding the swashplate in place, turn the

20
housing on its side. Install the install shaft/bearing
assembly into housing from the flange end. Install
the snap-ring (18).
20. Servo Spring

21. Minimum Angle Stop
Figure 3-23. Servo Spring and Minimum

Angle Stop
3-36 – JLG Lift – 3120895

12. Press the rear shaft bearing (22) into the endcap. 15. Install the endcap (25) onto the housing with the
Install the bearing with letters facing out. Press until endcap screws (26). Check to ensure the endcap
bearing surface is 0.08 ±0.01 in (2 ±0.25 mm) will properly seat onto the housing without interfer-
above endcap surface. ence. Improper assembly of the internal compo-
nents may prevent the endcap from seating
22
23
3 mm
[0.12 in]
properly. Ensure the O-rings seat properly when
2 mm
[0.08 in] installing the endcap.
26
8 mm
23 35-45 ft.lbs.
(47-61 Nm)
22
24
25
23
22. Rear Shaft Bearing 25. End Cap

23. Timing Pin 26. Screw
24. Valve Plate
Figure 3-25. End Cap
Figure 3-24. Valve Plate and Rear Bearing
16. Using an 8 mm internal hex wrench, tighten the end-
13. Install timing pin (23) into its bore in the endcap. cap screws. Tighten the screws in opposite corners
Install the pin with its groove facing toward or away slowly and evenly to compress the servo spring and
from the shaft. Press the pin until the end protrudes properly seat the endcap. Torque endcap screws
0.12 ±0.01 in (3 ±0.25 mm) above endcap surface. 35-45 ft.lbs. (47-61 Nm).
14. Install the valve plate (24) onto the endcap. Install 17. Before installing the shaft seal, ensure the shaft
the valve plate with the yellow surface toward the turns smoothly with less than 120 in.lbs. (13.5 Nm)
cylinder block. Align the slot in the valve plate with of force. If the shaft does not turn smoothly within
the timing pin. Apply a liberal coat of assembly the specified maximum force, disassemble and
grease to the endcap side of the valve plate to keep check the unit.
it in place during installation.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-37

18. Cover shaft splines with an installation sleeve. Install 19. Install remaining plugs and fittings to the housing.
a new shaft seal (27) with the cup side facing the Refer to the drawing below for wrench sizes and
motor. Press seal into housing until it bottoms out. installation torques.
Press evenly to avoid binding and damaging the 1/4 in
5/16 in
seal. Install seal support washer (28) and snap ring 63 ft.lbs. 33 ft.lbs.
(29). (85 Nm) (45 Nm)
29
28
27
9/16 in
125 ft.lbs.
(170 Nm)
3 mm
27. Shaft Seal 1.5 to 2.5 ft.lbs.
(2.03 to 3.39 Nm)
28. Seal Support Washer
29. Snap Ring
Figure 3-26. Shaft Seal

1/4 in
33 ft.lbs.
(45 Nm)
5/16in
63 ft.lbs.
(85 Nm)
Figure 3-27. Plugs and Fittings Installation
3-38 – JLG Lift – 3120895

20. Install orifice poppet (30). Initial Start-up Procedures

37 Follow this procedure when starting-up a new motor or
36
33
when installing a motor that has been removed.
39 41
34
30 11/16 in Prior to installing the motor, inspect for damage incurred
40 27 ft.lbs. during shipping. Make certain all system components
5/8 in
(37 Nm)
(reservoir, hoses, valves, fittings, heat exchanger, etc.) are
20 ft.lbs. clean prior to filling with fluid.
(27 Nm)
1. Fill the reservoir with recommended hydraulic fluid.
32
31 Always filter fluid through a 10 micron filter when
35 pouring into the reservoir. Never reuse hydraulic
38 fluid.
42 2. Fill the inlet line leading from the pump to the reser-
11/16 in
voir. Check the inlet line for properly tightened fit-
27 ft.lbs.
(37 Nm) tings and be certain it is free of restrictions and air
leaks.
3. Fill the pump and motor housing with clean hydrau-
lic fluid. Pour filtered oil directly into the upper most
case drain port.
30. Orifice Poppet 34. Spring 37. O-ring 40. Plug
31. Shift Spool 35. Spring 38. O-ring 41. Plug 4. To ensure the pump and motor stay filled with oil,
32. Spring 36. Spring 39. O-ring 42. Plug install case drain lines into the upper most case
33. Spring drain ports.
Figure 3-28. Loop Flushing Spool 5. Install a 0 to 500 psi (0 to 35 bar) gauge in the
charge pressure gauge port of the pump to monitor
system pressure during start up.
21. Install shift spool (31).
6. While watching the pressure gauge, run the engine
22. Install spring retaining washers onto springs (32 and at the lowest possible speed until system pressure
33). builds to normal levels (minimum 160 psi [11 bar]).
23. Carefully install centering springs (34, 35, and 36). Once system pressure is established, increase to full
operating speed. If system pressure is not main-
24. Install new O-rings (37, 38, and 39). tained, shut down the prime mover, determine
25. Using a 5/8 in wrench torque plug (40) to 20 ft.lbs. cause, and take corrective action.
(27 Nm). 7. Operate the hydraulic system for at least fifteen min-
26. Using a 11/16 in wrench, torque plugs (41 and 42) to utes under light load conditions.
27 ft.lbs. (37 Nm). 8. Check and adjust control settings as necessary after
installation.
9. Shut down the prime mover and remove the pres-
sure gauge. Replace plug at the charge pressure
gauge port.
10. Check the fluid level in the reservoir; add clean fil-
tered fluid if necessary. The motor is now ready for
operation.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-39

3.8 ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE FOR 3.9 TOE-IN ADJUSTMENT

LOCKOUT VALVE 1. Measure from the same point, on the tire, from the
front side, then on the back side.
1. With the turntable centered, adjust the bracket with
the washers to push the plunger in 5/16” ± 1/16”. 2. The tires must be within 0 ± 0.25" (0 ± 6.35 mm).
2. The ideal adjustment is 3/8”. Do not push the
plunger in more that 3/8”. The extra adjustment is
needed for the turntable bearing play
WASHER
BRACKET
LOCKOUT
VALVE
LOCKOUT
VALVE
OSCILLATION
CYLINDER
SPINDLE
AXLE PIVOT PIN
REF
WITH STEER CYL 2.000”
CENTERED TIE
ROD
PLACE ONE WASHER BETWEEN

STEER LINK AND BOTTOM SIDE
OF TIE ROD. TYPICAL FOR RIGHT
SIDE OF ASSEMBLY.
Figure 3-29. Front Axle
3-40 – JLG Lift – 3120895

3.10 2WD HUB 5. Use the inner cone and a mild steel bar to drive the
seal out of the hub. Take care to ensure the bar
doesn’t damage the bearing cone or cage.
Removal & Disassembly
1. Remove the tire and wheel. Refer to Section 3.1,
Tires & Wheels.
2. Remove the dust cap.
Cleaning & Inspection

1. Remove all the old lubricant from the hub and spin-
dle, then clean them with kerosene or mineral oil.
Inspect the spindle for scoring, bending, thread or
3. Remove the cotter pin securing the castle nut. other damage. File off nicks and burrs. A light
grease coating on the cone seats will make installa-
tion easier and help prevent fretting.
2. Inspect the cups in the housing for pitting, metal
flaking, scoring, rust, or other obvious damage.
Remove the damaged cups with a mild steel bar.
Replace the cups and mating cones. Inspect the
hub bore and cup backing shoulder and remove
nicks and burrs that may prevent the cup from seat-
ing properly.
3. Using a long-bristled brush and kerosene or mineral
oil, wash all the old lubricant off of the bearing
cones. Allow the cones to air dry. Do not spin the
rollers with air as this may damage the cone. Inspect
4. Remove the castle nut. Pull the hub assembly off of the cones for wear, metal flaking, rust, cage dam-
the spindle being careful not to let the outer bearing age, or other visible defects. Replace all damaged
cone fall. The inner bearing and seal will come off cones and mating cups.
with the hub.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-41

2
1. Dust Cap
8 2. Spindle
6 3. Hub
4 4. Inner Bearing Cup
5. Outer Bearing Cup
6. Inner Bearing Cone
7. Outer Bearing Cone
8. Seal
9. Castle Nut
10. Cotter Pin
5
11. Spindle Washer
7
12. Wheel Stud
11
13. Lug Nut
12 9
3
10
13
1
Figure 3-30. 2WD Hub
Assembly & Installation to allow 0.001 to 0.010" end play, then lock the nut
with a new cotter pin.
1. Use a cup driver or mild steel bar to press or drive
the new cup into the hub until it is solidly seated
against the rotor hub shoulder. Be careful not to
FAILURE TO BACK OFF THE ADJUSTING NUT WILL CAUSE THE
damage the cup surfaces. Never use a cone to drive
BEARING TO RUN HOT AND BE DAMAGED WHICH COULD CAUSE
a cup.
THE WHEEL TO LOCK UP OR COME OFF.
2. Re-pack the cones immediately after inspection or
6. Use a dial indicator to measure end play. Mount the
when installing a new cone. A pressure grease
packer is suggested. indicator base as close to the center of the hub as
possible. With the indicator tip against the end of the
spindle, set the indicator at zero. Grasp the hub at 9
o’clock and at 3 o’clock. Push the hub in and out
FAILURE TO CORRECTLY LUBRICATE THE BEARING AND MAIN- oscillating it at the same time to seat the parts. Read
TAIN PROPER LUBRICATION MAY RESULT IN BEARING DAMAGE the bearing end play as the total indicator move-
WHICH COULD CAUSE THE WHEEL TO LOCK UP OR COME OFF. ment.
3. Grease seals must be replaced when they leak or
when bearings are being repacked or replaced.
Install the inner cone in the hub, then the seal. Make
sure the seal lips are pointed in the right direction.
Use the proper seal installation tool.
4. Slide the hub assembly back over the spindle, tak-
ing care not to damage the seal against the spindle
outer end or threads. Insert the grease-packed outer
cone, spindle washer, and castle nut.
5. Tighten the adjusting nut while turning the hub.
When the hub binds slightly, all parts are properly
seated. Back off the nut 1/5 to 1/4 turn or sufficiently
3-42 – JLG Lift – 3120895

3.11 OSCILLATING AXLE BLEEDING 8. Lower machine so both of the lockout cylinders are
oscillated; one extended, the other retracted.
PROCEDURE
9. Use suitable containers to retain any residual
hydraulic fluid, place containers under each lockout
cylinder.
ENSURE PLATFORM IS FULLY LOWERED AND BOOM IS CEN-
10. With DRIVE CONTROLLER activated and engine at
TERED OVER REAR AXLE PRIOR TO BEGINNING BLEEDING PRO-
idle, open all four bleeder screws (two on each lock-
CEDURE.
out cylinder), one at a time, then close bleeder
screws when all air is dissipated (bled).
MAKING SURE MACHINE IS ON A LEVEL SURFACE AND REAR
WHEELS ARE BLOCKED, DISENGAGE DRIVE HUBS. OPTIONAL 11. Using a suitable lifting equipment lift front of
4WD ALL HUBS MUST BE DISENGAGED. machine and remove the 6 in. (15.2 cm) high block.
1. Making sure machine is on a level surface and rear 12. Transfer the 6 in. (15.2 cm) high block to the left front
wheels are blocked, disengage drive hubs. Optional wheel and repeat steps 2 thru 7, substituting the
4WD all hubs must be disengaged. word “right” for “left” in step 5.
2. Make up an adapter with an air regulator, remove 13. Perform oscillating axle lockout test.
filler cap on hydraulic tank and install regulator.
3. Attach air supply to the regulator and set regulator to 3.12 OSCILLATING AXLE LOCKOUT TEST
2 - 5 psi (0.14-0.34 Bar).
LOCKOUT SYSTEM TEST MUST BE PERFORMED QUARTERLY,

DO NOT EXCEED 5 PSI (0.34 BAR) INTO HYDRAULIC TANK. MORE
ANY TIME A SYSTEM COMPONENT IS REPLACED, OR WHEN
THAN 5 PSI (0.34 BAR) WILL CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE HYDRAU-
IMPROPER SYSTEM OPERATION IS SUSPECTED.
LIC TANK.
NOTE: Ensure boom is fully retracted, lowered, and cen-
4. Activate machine hydraulic system from platform tered between drive wheels prior to beginning lock-
control station. out cylinder test.
5. Place LOW ENGINE, HIGH DRIVE SPEED and HIGH
WHEEL MOTOR SPEED control switches to their 1. Place a 6 in. (15.2 cm) high block with ascension
respective HIGH positions. ramp in front of left front wheel.
6. Depress footswitch and activate DRIVE CONTROL- 2. From platform control station, activate machine
LER to “FORWARD” position. hydraulic system.
7. Using a suitable lifting equipment lift front of 3. Place DRIVE control lever to FORWARD position
machine and place a 6 in. (15.2 cm) high block and carefully drive machine up ascension ramp until
under right front wheel. left front wheel is on top of block.
4. Carefully activate SWING control lever and position
boom over right side of machine.
5. With boom over right side of machine, place DRIVE
control lever to REVERSE and drive machine off of
block and ramp.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-43

6. Have an assistant check to see that right front wheel 3.13 SWING BEARING
remains locked in position off of ground.
7. Carefully activate SWING control lever and return Turntable Bearing Mounting Bolt Condition
boom to stowed position (centered between drive Check
wheels). After boom reaches stowed position, acti-
vate DRIVE and lockout cylinders should release NOTE: This check is designed to replace the existing bear-
and allow wheel to rest on ground. ing bolt torque checks on JLG Lifts in service. This
8. Place the 6 in. (15.2 cm) high block with ascension check must be performed after the first 50 hours of
ramp in front of right front wheel. machine operation and every 600 hours of machine
operation thereafter. If during this check any bolts
9. Place DRIVE control lever to FORWARD and care- are found to be missing or loose, replace missing or
fully drive machine up ascension ramp until right loose bolts with new bolts and torque to the value
front wheel is on top of block. specified in the torque chart, after lubricating the bolt
threads with loctite #271. After replacing and
10. Carefully activate SWING control lever and position
retorquing bolt or bolts recheck all existing bolts for
boom over left side of machine.
looseness.
11. With boom over left side of machine, place DRIVE
control lever to REVERSE and drive machine off of Check the frame to bearing. Attach bolts as follows:
block and ramp.
1. Elevate the fully retracted boom to full elevation and
12. Have an assistant check to see that right front wheel rotate platform 90o.
remains locked in position off of ground.
2. Swing turntable over the side.
13. Carefully activate SWING control lever and return
boom to stowed position (centered between drive 3. On the frame, at the rear of the turntable, try to insert
wheels). After boom reaches stowed position, acti- the 0.0015" feeler gauge between the bolt head and
vate DRIVE and lockout cylinders should release hardened washer at the indicated position. (Table 3-
and allow wheel to rest on ground. 31., Swing Bearing Feeler Gauge Check)
If lockout cylinders do not function properly, have qualified 4. Assure that the 0.0015" feeler gauge will not pene-
personnel correct the malfunction prior to any further trate under the bolt head to the bolt shank.
operation. 5. Swing the turntable 90 degrees, and check some
selected bolts at the new position.
6. Continue rotating the turntable at 90 degrees inter-
vals until a sampling of bolts have been checked in
all quadrants.
7. Lower the boom to horizontal and fully extend the
boom.
8. Swing the turntable over the side.
9. On the frame, at the front of the turntable, try to
insert the 0.0015" feeler gauge between the bolt
head and hardened washer at the indicated posi-
tion. (Figure 3-31.)
10. Assure that the 0.0015" feeler gauge will not pene-
trate under the bolt head to the bolt shank.
11. Swing the turntable 90 degrees, and check some
all quadrants.
3-44 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Check the turntable to bearing. Attach bolts as follows: Wear Tolerance

1. Elevate the fully retracted boom to full elevation and
rotate the platform 90o. 1. With the boom positioned over the side of the
machine, the Boom horizontal with telescope fully
2. Swing the turntable over the side. extended, using a magnetic base dial indicator,
3. At turntable rear, try and insert the 0.0015" feeler measure and record the distance between the swing
gauge between the bolt head and hardened washer bearing and turntable front.
at the arrow indicated position. 2. With the boom positioned over the side of the
4. Assure that the 0.0015" feeler gauge will not pene- machine, the Boom fully elevated, retracted, and
trate under the bolt head to the bolt shank. platform rotated 90o, using a magnetic base dial
indicator, measure and record the distance between
5. Swing the turntable 90 degrees, and check some the swing bearing and turntable rear.
all quadrants.
.
Figure 3-32. Swing Bearing Tolerance Measuring Point
3. If a difference greater than 0.057 in. (1.40 mm) is

determined, the swing bearing should be replaced.
Figure 3-31. Swing Bearing Feeler Gauge Check
4. If a difference less than 0.057 in. (1.40 mm) is deter-
mined, and any of the following conditions exist, the
7. Lower the boom to horizontal and fully extend the
bearing should be removed.
boom.
a. Metal particles in the grease.
8. At turntable front, try and insert the 0.0015" feeler
gauge between the bolt head and hardened washer b. Increased drive power.
at the arrow indicated position. c. Noise.
9. Assure that the 0.0015" feeler gauge will not pene- d. Rough rotation.
trate under the bolt head to the bolt shank. 5. If bearing inspection shows no defects, reassemble
10. Swing the turntable 90 degrees, and check some bearing and return to service.
all quadrants.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-45

Replacement of Swing Bearing 4. Using suitable lifting equipment, install bearing/

assembly to frame with soft spot (red) 90 degree rel-
Removal of the swing bearing is as follows: ative to load axis. If reusing old bearing, ensure that
scribed line of outer race of the bearing aligns with
1. Attach an adequate support sling to the boom and
the scribed mark on the frame.
draw all slack from sling. Prop or block the boom if
feasible.
2. Tag and disconnect hydraulic lines running through
JLG INDUSTRIES RECOMMENDS THAT ALL REMOVED GRADE 8
center of turntable and frame. Use a suitable con-
BEARING NUTS AND BOLTS BE DISCARDED AND REPLACED
tainer to retain any residual hydraulic fluid. Cap lines
WITH NEW GRADE 8 NUTS AND BOLTS. SINCE THE SWING BEAR-
and ports.
ING IS THE ONLY STRUCTURAL LINK BETWEEN THE FRAME AND
3. Attach suitable overhead lifting equipment to the TURNTABLE, IT IS IMPERATIVE THAT SUCH REPLACEMENT
base of turntable weldment. HARDWARE MEETS JLG SPECIFICATIONS. USE OF GENUINE JLG
HARDWARE IS HIGHLY RECOMMENDED.
4. Use a suitable tool to scribe a line on the inner race
of the swing bearing and on the underside of the
5. Apply a light coating of Loctite 271 to the new bear-
turntable. This will aid in aligning the bearing upon
ing bolts and loosely install the bolts and washers
installation. Remove bolts, nuts and washers which
through the frame and outer race of bearing.
attach the turntable to the bearing inner race. Dis-
card nuts and bolts.
5. Use the lifting equipment to carefully lift the com-
IF COMPRESSED AIR OR ELECTRICALLY OPERATED IMPACT
plete turntable assembly from the bearing. Ensure
WRENCH IS USED FOR TIGHTENING THE BEARING ATTACHMENT
that no damage occurs to the turntable, bearing or
BOLTS, THE TORQUE SETTING ACCURACY OF THE TOOL SHOULD
frame mounted components.
BE CHECKED PRIOR TO USE.
6. Carefully place the turntable on a suitably supported
trestle. 6. Following the torque sequence diagram shown in
Figure 3-33., Swing Bearing Torque Sequence,
7. Use a suitable tool to scribe a line on the outer race tighten the bolts to an initial torque of 130 ft. lbs.
of the swing bearing and the frame. This line will aid (175 Nm). Then following the same sequence,
in aligning the bearing upon installation. Remove the tighten to a final torque of 190 ft. lbs. (260 Nm).
bolts and washers which attach the outer race of the
bearing to the frame. Discard the bolts. Use suitable 7. Remove lifting equipment from bearing.
lifting equipment to remove the bearing and rotation
8. Use suitable lifting equipment to carefully position
box assembly from the frame; move to a clean, suit-
the turntable assembly above the machine frame.
ably supported work area.
9. Carefully lower the turntable onto the swing bearing.
8. Remove the two capscrews securing the bearing to
Ensure that the scribed line of the inner race of the
the rotation box to separate the two for inspection.
bearing aligns with the scribed mark on the turnta-
Installation of the swing bearing is as follows: ble. If a new swing bearing is used, ensure that the
filler plug fitting is at 90 degrees from the fore and aft
1. Install bearing to turntable with two capscrews, so centerline of the turntable.
that fill plug of bearing is as close to gear as bolt pat- 10. Apply a light coating of Loctite 271 to the new bear-
tern will allow. Do not tighten capscrews. ing bolts and install through the turntable and inner
2. Line up high spot (yellow) of bearing with center race of bearing.
tooth of bull gear. Set backlash to 0.008 - 0.010 inch 11. Following the torque sequence shown in Figure 3-
(0.20 - 0.25 mm). Tighten capscrews as shown in 33., Swing Bearing Torque Sequence tighten the
Figure 3-33., Swing Bearing Torque Sequence bolts to an initial torque of 130 ft. lbs. (175 Nm).
3. Grease bearing with Mobilith SHC Bearing Grease. Then following the same sequence, tighten the bolts
Grease fitting is on inside wall of inner race of bear- to 190 ft. lbs. (260 Nm).
ing. 12. Remove the lifting equipment.
NOTE: If Mobiletac 375NC is not available, Tribol Molub- 13. Route hydraulic lines through center of turntable and
Alloy 936 Open Gear Compound or Mobilith SHC frame and connect as tagged prior to removal.
Bearing Grease or Multi-Purpose Grease (MPG) can
be substituted, however the service interval will be
shorter.
3-46 – JLG Lift – 3120895

14. Using all applicable safety precautions, activate the Swing Drive Installation
hydraulic system and functionally check swing sys-
tem for proper and safe operation
1. Insure that the T/T mounting plate is clean and free
.
of paint runs and drips.
2. Mount swing drive motor to mounting plate.
3. Position Swing drive to location of bearing gear max
eccentric tooth. (high spot) High spot is marked with
yellow paint in tooth.
4. Slide drive motor into swing gear and shim to
achieve +.008”/.012” backlash.(+.20mm /30mm)
5. Torque four 3/4-10 Soc. hd. Cap Scrs. with Loctite
#242 to 285 ft.lbs. (386 Nm).
6. Torque six 5/8-11Hex. hd. Cap Scrs. to 190 ft. lbs.
(260 Nm)
.
Figure 3-33. Swing Bearing Torque Sequence
Swing Bearing Torque Value

Install with Loctite - 190 ft. lbs. (260 Nm).
Figure 3-34. Drive Motor Adjustment
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-47

Figure 3-35. Swing Drive Installation
3-48 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Figure 3-36. Swing Motor
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-49

3.14 SWING BRAKE (PRIOR TO S/N 64802) 3. Remove the piston from the power plate by introduc-
ing low pressure air (15 psi) into the hydraulic inlet.
The multi disc brake is spring loaded to apply the brake Make sure the piston is directed away from the oper-
and hydraulic pressure is required to release or hold off ator. Do not remove O-ring unless replacement is
the brake. Normal operation is to have the brake pressur- necessary because the will be damaged.
ized in the released position with the vehicle hydraulic
system running. Any function which reduces the system Assembly Information
pressure below the release pressure of the brake will
cause the brake to be applied.
THERE MAY BE MORE PARTS IN A SERVICE KIT THEN YOUR

BRAKE REQUIRES. CHECK THE PARTS LIST CAREFULLY FOR THE
FOR CORRECT OPERATION, HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TO THE EXACT QUANTITY.
BRAKE MUST FALL TO ZERO PSI. ANY RESIDUAL BACK PRES-
NOTE: All parts must be thoroughly cleaned prior to reas-
SURE APPLIED TO THE BRAKE WILL DEGRADE FUNCTION AND
sembly.
MAY RESULT IN A HAZARDOUS CONDITION.
Use the reverse of the dissemble procedure with the fol-
Installation lowing notes and additions:
1. Assemble brake between motor and gearbox. Place 1. Worn and damaged O-rings, or worn Teflon backup
mounting gaskets on mounting faces before assem- rings must be replaced prior to reassembly.
bly. If needed, the brake shaft can be rotated by
applying hydraulic pressure to the piston inlet port. 2. Cylinder of the power plate, piston, and O-rings
must be clean and pre-lubed prior to reassembly.
2. Insert four 1/2” dia. bolts (Grade 5) and lock wash-
ers through the motor flange, The gasket, and the 3. Piston Assembly: Assemble piston into power plate
threaded holes in the gear reducer. make sure that using a shop press. Being careful not to damage the
the bolts are not too long so they do not bottom out O-ring or Teflon backup rings. Visually align the cen-
in the gear reducer threaded holes before clamping. ter of the cutouts in the piston with the torque pin
holes in the power plate.
3. To prevent binding, run the bolts in alternately until
snug. Torque the bolts to 75-85 ft. lbs. (102-115 Nm).
4. With brake bolted together, connect inlet hydraulic THE DEPTH THAT THE PISTON IS INSTALLED INTO THE POWER
line. Brake inlet is 1/4” tubing, straight thread O-ring PLATE IS CRITICAL. THE PISTON CUTOUTS MUST BE FLUSH
boss (7-16-20 unf). TO.120 (3 MM) BELOW THE SURFACE OF THE POWER PLATE OR
PISTON WILL COCK RESULTING IN A COMPLETE LOSS OF BRAK-
Brake Disassembly ING.
1. Dissemble in the following order: Bolts (alternately), 4. Bearing Assembly: Use a shop press to press the
power plate, gasket, stationary discs, rotating discs, bearing into the shaft. Press only on the inner race of
primary disc, torque pins, compression springs, and the bearing.
spring retainer.
5. Lip Seal Assembly: Lip of seal must face the bearing
2. Further dissemble is not recommended and should to seal the brake.
not be attempted unless necessary to replace the
6. Rotating, Stationary, Primary Disc Assembly: Rotat-
bearing. The seal, or the shaft. If further dissemble is
ing Disc must be clean. The lining material and mat-
needed, proceed as follows:
ing surfaces of the Stationary Discs must be
NOTE: If the bearing and seal are removed for any reason, thoroughly clean and free from debris. Worn or
both must be replaced. scarred Rotating Discs must be replaced.
7. Install Bolts in the Power Plate. Tighten sequentially,
a. The shaft must be removed by pressing on the one turn at a time, until Power Plate is properly
end of the shaft with a shop press. seated. Torque to 85-90 ft. lbs.(115-122 Nm).
b. Using an appropriate tool. Pry the seal out from
the inside of the brake. Take care not to damage
the bore. Remove the retaining ring and tap out
the bearing with a plastic mallet.
3-50 – JLG Lift – 3120895

1. Housing 9. Gasket 17. Backup Ring

2. Compression Spring 10. Primary Disc 18. O-ring
3. Compression Spring 11. Stationary Disc 19. Rotating Disc
4. Spring Retainer 12. Gasket 20. Torque Pin
5. Bearing 13. Power Plate 21. Hex Plug
6. Shaft 14. Backup Ring 22. Plain Washer (Hardened)
7. Lip Seal 15. O-ring 23. Bolt 1/2-13 Hex Hd.
8. Snap Ring 16. Piston 24. Protective Plug
Figure 3-37. Swing Brake Prior to S/N 64802
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-51

3.15 SWING BRAKE S/N 64802 TO PRESENT 7. Insert dowel pins (15), spring retainer (14) and
springs (13) in cover (16).
Disassembly NOTE: Be sure to use the same number of springs and the
same spring pattern as recorded during disassem-
1. Remove pressure plate (2) from cover (16) by bly.
removing washer head cap screws (1).
8. Position plate (12) on spring (13).
NOTE: Discs (10 & 11) and plate (12) must remain dry dur-
PRESSURE PLATE IS UNDER SPRING TENSION OF APPROXI- ing installation. No oil residue must be allowed to
MATELY 907 KGF (2000 LBS.) THE TWO WASHER HEAD CAP contaminate disc surfaces.
SCREWS MUST BE LOOSENED EVENLY TO RELIEVE THIS FORCE.
IF A HYDRAULIC PRESS IS AVAILABLE, 1361 KGF (3000 LBS.) 9. Install rotor disc (11) and stator disc (10).
MINIMUM, THE PRESSURE PLATE CAN BE HELD IN POSITION
WHILE REMOVING THE WASHER HEAD CAP SCREWS. 10. Install o-ring (4), back-up ring (5), o-ring (7) and
back-up ring (8)on piston (6). Note order of o-rings
2. Remove case seal (3) from cover (16). and back-up rings. Insert piston (6) into pressure
plate (2).
3. Remove piston (6) from pressure plate (2).
NOTE: Be careful not to shear o-rings or back-up rings. Be
4. Remove o-ring (4), back-up ring (5), o-ring (7) and careful not to scratch or mar piston.
back-up ring (8) from piston (6).
5. Remove stack assembly, consisting of stator disc 11. Install new case seal (3) in cover (16).
(10), rotor disc (11) and return plate (12) from cover 12. Position pressure plate (2) on cover (16) alining
(16). dowel pins (15) with holes in pressure plate.
6. Remove dowel pins (15), springs (13) and spring 13. Install washer head cap screws (1) and tighten
retainer (14) from cover (16). evenly to draw pressure plate (2) to cover (16).
Torque washer head cap screws 55 ft. lbs. (74.6
NOTE: Not all models use the same number of springs or
Nm).
spring pattern. Record this information for assembly
purposes. NOTE: A hydraulic press will simplify installation of pressure
plate on cover. Clamp pressure plate in position
7. Remove retaining ring (19) from cover (16). while tightening the washer head cap screws.
8. Remove shaft by pressing or using a soft mallet on
the male end of the shaft (9).
9. Remove retaining ring (20) from cover (16) and IF HYDROSTATIC BENCH TESTING IS PERFORMED ON THE
press out oil seal (17) and bearing (18) if required. BRAKE ASSEMBLY, RELEASE PRESSURE MUST NOT EXCEED
2000 PSI (137.9 BARS) UNLESS TWO ADDITIONAL BOLTS ARE
Assembly USED FOR SUPPLEMENTAL CLAMPING.
NOTE: Lubricate all rubber components from repair kit with

clean type fluid used in the system
.
1. Use an alkaline wash to clean parts before assem-

bly.
2. Press oil seal (17) into cover (16)until it is flush with
bearing shoulder. Note direction of seal.
3. Press bearing (18) into position until it bottoms out
on borestep.
4. Install retaining ring (20) in cover (16).
5. Press shaft (9) into bearing (18) until it bottoms on
the shoulder. Bearing (18) inner race must be sup-
ported during this operation.
6. Install retaining ring (19) on shaft (9).
3-52 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Figure 3-38. Swing Brake S/N 64802 to Present
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-53

3.16 SWING DRIVE TORQUE HUB NOTE: If bearing replacement is necessary, the bearing
cups can be removed with a slide hammer puller or
Disassembly Procedure driven out with a punch.
11. To remove the Cluster Gears (3F) from the Carrier

1. Loosen all 12 cover bolts (12)&(13) and drain the oil (3A), drive the Anti-roll Pin (3G) into the Planet Shaft
from the unit. (3E). The Planet Shaft (3E) may now be tapped out
2. Remove the 12 cover bolts (12)&(13) and lift off the of the Carrier. After Planet Shaft (3E) can be driven
cover (6). Remove and discard the “O” ring (5) from out.
the counterbore of the cover (6). 12. The Cluster Gear (3F) can now be removed from the
3. Remove the Input Gear (8) and Thrust washer (10). Carrier (3A). The Thrust Washers (3B) will be
removed with the Cluster gear (3F).
4. Lift out the Carrier Assembly (3) and top Thrust
Washer (11). This Thrust Washer (11) may stick to 13. The Needle Rollers (3C) and Spacer (3D) are now
the Cover (6). removed from the Cluster Gear (3F).
5. Remove the Input Thrust Spacer (9).

6. Lift out the Internal Gear (2) and thrust Washer (11). WHEN REBUILDING OR REPAIRING THE UNIT, THE RETAINING
The Thrust Washer (11) may stick to the underside RING (11), “O” RINGS (5) AND SEAL (1B) SHOULD ALWAYS BE
of the Carrier (3). REPLACED.
7. Remove the Retaining Ring (1I) from the Output
Shaft (1A) and discard.
EYE PROTECTION SHOULD BE WORN DURING RETAINING RING

REMOVAL.
8. Remove Bearing Shim (1H) from the Output Shaft
(1A).
9. The Output Shaft (1A) may now be pressed out of
the Hub (1G).
10. The Bearing Cups (1C)&(1E) will remain in Hub (1G)
as will Bearing Cone (1F). Bearing Cone (1D) will
remain on the Output Shaft (1A). The Seal (1B) will
be automatically removed during this procedure.
3-54 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Figure 3-39. Swing Torque Hub
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-55

Also at this time locate and mark the 4 counter

beamed holes in the face of the Hub (1G). This is for
Identification later in the assembly.
14. With the Hub Shaft Sub assembly resting on the

Shaft (1A), install Internal Gear (2). The Spline of the
Internal Gear (2) will mesh with the spline of the Out-
put Shaft (1A).
17. Thrust Spacer (9) is installed into the bore of the
Output Shaft (1A). This should be a slip fit and the
Thrust Spaces should rotate in this location.
15. Thrust Washer (11) is installed on the face of the

Output Shaft (1A). Sufficient grease or petroleum
jelly should be used to hold thrust Washer (11) in
18. Place Carrier Assembly (3) on a flat surface with the
place.
large gears (3F) up and positioned as shown. Find
the punch marked tooth on each large gear (3F) and
locate at 12 o’clock (straight-up) from each planet
pin. Marked tooth will be located just under the car-
rier (3A) on upper two gears (3F).
16. Place “O” Ring (5) into Hub counterbore. Use petro-
leum jelly to hold “O” Ring in place.
BEWARE OF SHARP EDGES OF THE COUNTERBORE WHILE SEAT- 19. With shoulder side of Ring Gear (4) facing down,
ING THE “O” RING. place Ring Gear over (into mesh with) large gears.
3-56 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Be sure that punch marks remain in correct location

during Ring gear installation. The side of the Ring
Gear with “X” stamped on it should be up.
22. Thrust Washer (10) is installed onto the Input Gear

(8) and should locate on the gear teeth shoulder.
20. While holding Ring Gear (4) and Cluster Gear (3F) in
mesh, place small side of Cluster Gears (3F) into
mesh with the Internal Gear (13). On the Ring Gear
locate the hole marked “X” over one of the marked
counterbored holes (step 3) in Hub (1G).
NOTE: If gears do not mesh easily or Carrier Assembly

does not rotate freely, then remove the Carrier and
Ring Gear and check the Cluster Gear timing.
23. Thrust Washer (11) is installed into the counterbore

of the Carrier (3).
21. Input Gear (8) is installed, meshing teeth of the large

diameter Cluster Gear (3F). The counterbore on the
Input Gear (3F). The counterbore on the Input Gear
(8) locates on the shoulder of the Thrust Spacer (9).
This is to be a slip fit and operate freely.
24. Place “O” Ring (5) into cover (6) counterbore. Use
petroleum jelly to hold “O” Ring in place.
BEWARE OF SHARP EDGES OF THE COUNTERBORE WHILE SEAT-

ING THIS “O” RING.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-57

25. The Cover (6) is now installed on this assembly. Tak- 28. Torque Shoulder Bolts (13) to 23-27 ft.lbs. (31-37
ing care to correctly align Pipe Plug hole (20) with Nm) and regular Grade 8 Bolts (12) to 23-23 ft.lbs.
those in the Hub (1J), usually 90o to one another. (31-37 Nm)
Locate the 4 counterbore holes in Hub (1G) [marked This completes the assembly. The unit must be filled com-
in Step 3] and install 4 Shoulder Bolts (13). A slight pletely with EP 90 lubricant when mounted vertically
tap with a hammer may be necessary to align Shoul-
der Bolt with Hub (1G) counterbore. Hub Shaft Sub-Assembly Procedure
26. Install regular Grade 8 Bolts (12) into remaining 1. Press Bearing Cone (1D) onto Shaft (1A).
holes.
2. Press Bearing Cup (1C) into Hub (1G) taking care to

27. Pipe Plugs(20) are to be installed into Cover (6) insure cup start square with the bore of Hub (1G).
using a lubricant seal of some sort.
3-58 – JLG Lift – 3120895

3. Invert Hub (1G) and press Bearing Cup (1E) into 6. The Bearing Cone (1F) is an interference fit and has
counterbore of Hub (1G). to be pressed or tapped on.
4. Returning the Hub (1G) to locate on the large diame- 7. Pipe Plugs (1J 7 1K) should be checked and/or
ter end, the Output Shaft (1A) is carefully installed installed at this time in the assembly.
into the Hub (1G).
8. Bearing Spacer (1H) is installed around the Output

5. The Shaft Seal (1B) is installed over the Output Shaft Shaft (1A) and locates on Bearing Cone (1F).
(1A) and into the counterbore of the Hub (1G). Care
should be taken to insure the seal (1B) is being cor-
rectly installed (smooth face up and located just
flush with the counterbore face).
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-59

rod. This will release the preload which was on the

bearings.
Carrier Sub-Assembly Procedure
9. Retaining Ring (1I) installed into the groove provided

in the output Shaft (1A). This retaining Ring (1I)
should never be reused in a repair or rebuild.
1. Apply a coat of grease or petroleum jelly to Cluster

EYE PROTECTION SHOULD BE WORN DURING THIS PROCEDURE. Gear bore.
10. A soft metal punch should be used to insure that this

retaining ring (11) is completely seated in the groove 2. lace sixteen Needle Rollers into Cluster Gear bore.
of the Output Shaft (1A).
EYE PROTECTION SHOULD BE WORN DURING THIS PROCEDURE.
3. Place Spacer Washer into opposite side of Cluster

Gear and against Needle Rollers.
11. Upon completion of step 10, rap the internal end of

the Output Shaft (1A) twice with a piece of soft metal
3-60 – JLG Lift – 3120895

4. Place second set of sixteen Needle Rollers into Clus- 7. Line up Cluster Gear and Thrust Washers with hole
ter Gear. in Carrier and slide Planet Shaft through. Line up
chamfered side of hole in Planet Shaft with pin hole
in Carrier.
5. Apply grease or petroleum jelly to the tang side of

two Thrust Washers. Place Thrust Washers against
bosses in Carrier with washer tang fitting into slot in 8. Drive Anti-Roll Pin flush into Carrier hole, thereby
Carrier outside diameter. locking Planet Shaft into place.
NOTE: Some old style Carriers will not have slots and tangs Repeat these steps for remaining two Cluster Gears
should be located inside boss relief. to complete Carrier Sub Assembly.
3.17 SEMI-TRACK
The semi-track option is available in either soft or hard
track configurations. The semi-track provides increased
traction in rough terrain applications.
Testing the Track

With both sides installed, drive the machine slowly in both
directions to see that the track does not catch or hit any
part of the machine. Test the machine until it can be driven
at top speed and on side slopes without the tracks hitting.
In the first few days after use, check the track frequently to
see that all bolts are staying tight and that no damage is
6. While keeping Thrust Washers in place, slide Cluster being caused to the tires or machine
Gear into Carrier with the larger gear on the side
with the small pin hole.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-61

Removing the Track Adjustment

If the tracks are muddy, it is a good idea to wash them off
or drive the loader through water before removing. If the
tracks are going to be stored in the laid out position just IMPROPER SLACK ADJUSTMENT COULD CAUSE TRACK PARTS
as they come off the machine, then move the machine to TO BREAK.
the storage area to remove the tracks. If the tracks are
going to be rolled up and put on a pallet, it is best to Place a straight edge long enough to reach from the idler
remove them on a hard surface. Remove the bolts that to the drive wheel on the tracks. Measure the maximum
hold the track together. These bolts are accessible over amount of track sag from the high point of the track seg-
the front tires. After the nuts are removed, pound them ment to the bottom of the straight edge. Properly adjusted
flush with the pad. Drive the machine ahead until the bolts track will have approximately 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm)
are at the bottom between tires. Remove the inside bolts slack.
by turning them out with a wrench and punch out the out-
side bolts. Drive the machine ahead and take off the
tracks. If the track is to be rolled up, it is best to set the
track on edge and roll it. Secure the end of the track and
put the loose hardware in the end of the track.
To adjust the slack measurement, move the bolts from the

first hole to the second to create less slack, or from the
second to the first to create more slack.
Assuming Normal Wear

It is normal for the bushing to wear down to the bolt and
for the link hole to wear oblong till it is ready to break out
the end.
3-62 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Table 3-8. Adjustment Chart

Move 1 Hole 2 Holes 3 Holes 4 Holes 5 Holes 6 Holes 7 Holes 8 Holes 9 Holes 10 Holes 11 Holes 12 Holes
Equals 0.81 in 1.62 in 2.43 in 3.25 in 4.06 in 4.87 in 5.68 in 6.50 in 7.31 in 8.12 in 8.93 in 9.75 in
(20.5 (41 mm) (62 mm) (82.5 (103 mm) (124 mm) (144 mm) (165 mm) (186 mm) (206 mm) (227 mm) (248 mm)
mm) mm)
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-63

A E
Figure 3-40. Auxiliary Pump - Sheet 1 of 2
3-64 – JLG Lift – 3120895

1. Motor 11. Seat 21. O-ring

2. Adapter 12. Needle Bearing 22. Gear Housing
3. Setscrew 13. Washer 23. I.D. Label
4. Mounting Gasket 14. Screw 24. Gasket
5. Coupling 15. Retaining Ring 25. Gear Housing
6. Shaft Seal 16. Gear 26. Beta Plug
7. Stator 17. Idler Shaft 27. Screw
8. Cap Assembly 18. Drive Pin 28. Drive Shaft
9. Spring 19. Dowel Pin 29. Plastic Plug
10. Ball 20. Gasket 30. Plastic Plug
A. Torque 96 to 120 inch-pounds (11 to 13.5 Nm)
B. Torque to 84 inch-pounds (9.5 Nm)
C. Torque 144 to 180 inch-pounds (16 to 20 Nm)
D. Torque 180 to 216 inch-pounds (16 to 24 Nm)
E. Torque 114 to 150 inch-pounds (12 to 17 Nm)
Figure 3-41. Auxiliary Pump - Sheet 2 of 2
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-65

3.18 GENERATOR Overload Protection

Every 250 hours
Every 250 hours of operation, check the drive belt for STOP THE ENGINE WHENEVER CHECKING OR INSPECTING THE
proper tension. CIRCUIT BREAKER.
The circuit breaker protects the generator windings from

overload. If the circuit breaker opens, generator output
stops. If the circuit breaker continues to open, check for
faulty equipment connected to the platform receptacles.
1/2 in.
(13 mm)
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
Every 500 hours

Every 500 hours of operation, service the generator
brushes and slip rings. Hostile environments may require
more frequent service.
Inspecting Brushes, Replacing Brushes, and

Cleaning Slip Rings
Refer to Figure 3-42., Inspecting Generator Brushes,
Replacing Brushes, and Cleaning Slip Rings.
INSPECTING BRUSH POSITION

Every 500 hours of service, blow out the inside of the gen-
Inspect brush alignment with slip rings. View alignment
erator. If operating in a hostile environment, clean
through the air vents in the stator barrel. The brushes
monthly.
must ride completely on the slip rings.
INSPECTING BRUSHES
Remove the end panel. Inspect the wires. Remove the
brush holder assembly. Pull the brushes from the holders.
Replace the brushes if damaged, or if the brush is at or

near minimum length.
CLEANING SLIP RINGS

Visually inspect the slip rings. Under normal use, the rings
turn dark brown.
If the slip rings are corroded or their surface is uneven,

remove the belt to turn the shaft by hand for cleaning.
Clean the rings with 220 grit emery paper. Remove as little
material as possible. If the rings are deeply pitted and do
not clean up, consult generator factory service.
Reinstall the belt, brush holder assembly, and end panel.
3-66 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Brush Position On Slip Rings
2
3
Acceptable Unacceptable
Brushes must ride
completely on slip
rings
1/4 in (6 mm)
Or Less - Replace
7/16 in - 1/2 in
2 (11 - 12 mm) New
1. Brush Holder Assembly

2. Brushes
3. Slip Rings
Figure 3-42. Inspecting Generator Brushes, Replacing Brushes, and Cleaning Slip Rings
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-67

3.19 FORD EFI ENGINE • Inspect engine for modifications or aftermarket equip-
ment that can contribute to the symptom; verify that all
electrical and mechanical loads or accessory equip-
Performing Diagnostics ment is “OFF” or disconnected before performing
1. Verify the complaint and determine if it is a deviation diagnosis.
from normal operation. • Inspect engine fluids for correct levels and evidence of
2. Once the complaint has been verified, preliminary leaks.
checks can be done. Conduct a thorough visual • Inspect vacuum hoses for damage, leaks, cracks,
inspection, be alert for unusual sounds or odors, kinks and improper routing, inspect intake manifold
and gather diagnostic trouble code information. sealing surface for a possible vacuum leak.
3. Perform a system check that will verify the proper • Inspect PCV valve for proper installation and operation.
operation of the system in question and check for
• Inspect all wires and harnesses for proper connections
recent information updates.
and routing; bent or broken connector pins; burned,
4. If a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is stored, contact chafed, or pinched wires; and corrosion. Verify that
a JLG distributor to make an effective repair. harness grounds are clean and tight.
5. If no DTC is stored, select the symptom from the • Inspect engine control module (ECM), sensors, and
symptom tables and follow the diagnostic path or actuators for physical damage.
suggestions to complete the repair. • Inspect ECM grounds for cleanliness, tightness, and
6. After the repair has been made and validated for proper location.
proper operation, the old part should be momen- • Inspect fuel system for adequate fuel level, and fuel
tarily re-installed to verify that it was indeed the quality (concerns such as proper octane, contamina-
source of the problem. tion, winter/summer blend).
If no matching symptom is available, analyze the com- • Inspect intake air system and air filter for restrictions.
plaint and develop a plan for diagnostics utilizing the wir-
ing diagrams, technical assistance, and repair history. • Inspect battery condition and starter current draw.
If no evidence of a problem is found after visual/physical
Intermittent conditions may be resolved by using a check
engine check has been performed, proceed to MIL DTC
sheet to pinpoint the circuit or electrical system compo-
retrieval procedure.
nent. Some diagnostic charts contain Diagnostic Aids
which give additional information about a system. Be sure
to use all of the information that is available to you.
EFI Diagnostics (Prior to S/N 61718)
The EFI diagnostics are designed to assist in locating a
Visual/Physical Engine Inspection Check faulty circuit or component. When a malfunction is
detected by the Engine Control Module (ECM), a diagnos-
Perform a careful visual and physical engine inspection
tic trouble code (DTC) is set and the Malfunction Indicator
before performing any diagnostic procedure. Perform all
Lamp (MIL) will be illuminated.
necessary repairs before proceeding with additional diag-
nosis, this can often lead to repairing a problem without
MIL DTC RETRIEVAL
performing unnecessary steps. Use the following guide-
Diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) can be retrieved by
lines when performing a visual/physical inspection check:
pushing and holding the test button on the side of the
ground control box. The Malfunction Indicator Light will
illuminate for 2-3 seconds when the key is positioned to
the on position to act as a self-test. If a DTC is present, the
light will illuminate and stay on.
3-68 – JLG Lift – 3120895

ECM and Sensors

CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor provides a signal
used by the engine control module (ECM) to calculate the
ignition sequence. The CKP sensor initiates the reference
pulses which the ECM uses to calculate RPM and crank-
shaft position.
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR AND

SIGNAL
The camshaft position (CMP) sensor sends a CMP signal
to the ECM. The ECM uses this signal as a “sync pulse” to
trigger the injectors in the proper sequence. The ECM
uses the CMP signal to indicate the position of the #1 pis-
ton during its power stroke. The CMP uses a Hall Effect
sensor to measure piston position. This allows the ECM to
calculate true sequential fuel injection (SFI) mode of oper-
ation. If the ECM detects an incorrect CMP signal while
the engine is running, DTC 53 will set. If the CMP signal is
Figure 3-43. Malfunction Indicator Light and Test Button
lost while the engine is running, the fuel injection system
will shift to a calculated sequential fuel injection mode
When reading Diagnostic Trouble Codes thru the MIL, the based on the last fuel injection pulse, and the engine will
following conditions apply: continue to nun. As long as the fault is present, the engine
• The flashing MIL is on for 0.4 second and off for 0.4 can be restarted. It will run in the previously established
second. injection sequence.
• The MIL is off for 1.2 seconds between digits of two

digit DTCs.
• The MIL is off for 2.4 seconds between DTCs.
• Each DTC repeats 3 times before the next stored DTC
begins flashing.
• Up to 6 DTCs can be stored.
• Once all stored DTCs are flashed, the process repeats
with the first stored DTC.
• DTCs are stored in the order in which they were set.
CLEARING TROUBLE CODES

To clear the trouble codes from the ECM, the electrical
current running to the ECM must be shut off. To do this,
disconnect the negative terminal from the battery for a
period of approximately 15 minutes.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-69

Table 3-9. ECM Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Diagnostic
Trouble Description
Code
11 All Systems OK
12 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Low Voltage
14 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Low Voltage
21 Overspeed
22 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor High Voltage
24 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) High Voltage
31 Fuel Pump Low Voltage
32 Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Low Voltage
33 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor High Voltage
35 Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor High Voltage
41 Fuel Pump High Voltage
42 Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) High Voltage
43 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Low Voltage
45 Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Low Voltage
51 Low Oil Pressure
52 Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Extra/Missing Pulses
53 Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) Sensor Illegal Pattern
54 Engine Control Module (ECM) Fault Illegal Operation
55 Engine Control Module (ECM) Fault Illegal Interruption
56 Engine Control Module (ECM) Fault COP (Computer Operating Properly) Failure
61 System Voltage Low
62 System Voltage High
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) is hot. By measuring the voltage, the ECM calculates the
SENSOR engine coolant temperature. Engine coolant temperature
The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor is a g affects most of the systems that the ECM controls.
thermistor (a resistor which changes value based on tem-
perature) mounted in the engine coolant stream. Low cool- After engine start-up, the temperature should rise steadily
ant temperature produces a high resistance of 100,000 to about 85°C (185°F). it then stabilizes when the thermo-
ohms at -40°C (-40°F). High temperature causes a low stat opens. If the engine has not been run for several
resistance of 70 ohms at 130°C (266°F). The ECM sup- hours (overnight), the engine coolant temperature and
plies a 5-volt signal to the ECT sensor through resistors in intake air temperature displays should be close to each
the ECM and measures the voltage. The signal voltage will
be high when the engine is cold and low when the engine
3-70 – JLG Lift – 3120895

other. A fault in the engine coolant sensor circuit will set HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
DTC 33 or DTC 43. The heated oxygen sensor is mounted in the exhaust
stream where it can monitor the oxygen content of the
exhaust gas. The oxygen present in the exhaust gas
reacts with the sensor to produce a voltage output. This
voltage should constantly fluctuate from approximately
100 mV to 900 mV. The heated oxygen sensor voltage can
be monitored on an IBM PC-compatible computer with
diagnostic software. By monitoring the voltage out-put of
the oxygen sensor, the ECM calculates the pulse width
command for the injectors to produce the proper combus-
tion chamber mixture.
Low HO2S voltage indicates a lean mixture which will

result in a rich command to compensate.
High HO2S voltage indicates a rich mixture which will

result in a lean command to compensate.
ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE PROGRAMMABLE A constant voltage below 200 mV for 10 consecutive sec-
READ ONLY MEMORY (EEPROM) onds will set OTC 32. A constant voltage above 650 mV
The electrically erasable programmable read only mem- for 10 consecutive seconds will set OTC 42.
ory (EEPROM) is a permanent memory chip that is
located within the ECM. The EEPROM contains the pro-
gram and the calibration information that the ECM needs
to control engine operations.
If the ECM is replaced, the new ECM will need to be pro-
grammed. An IBM-compatible computer and software
containing the correct program and calibration for the
application are required to program the ECM.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-71

Figure 3-44. EFI Component Location
3-72 – JLG Lift – 3120895

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR If the ECM detects a voltage that is significantly lower than
The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor is a thermistor the estimated MAP value for 2 or more consecutive sec-
which changes its resistance based on the temperature of onds, DTC 14 will be set. A signal voltage significantly
air entering the engine. Low temperature produces a high higher than the estimated MAP value for 2 or more con-
resistance of 100,000 ohms at -40°C (-40°F). High temper- secutive seconds will set DTC 24.
ature causes a low resistance of 70 ohms at 130°C
(266°F). The ECM supplies a 5-volt signal to the sensor
through a resistor in the ECM and monitors the signal volt-
age. The signal voltage will be high when the incoming air
is cold and low when the incoming air is hot. By measuring
the voltage, the ECM calculates the incoming air tempera-
ture. The IAT sensor signal is used to adjust spark timing
according to the incoming air density. An IBM PC-compati-
ble computer with diagnostic soft-ware can be used to dis-
play the temperature of the air entering the engine. The
temperature should read close to the ambient air tempera-
ture when the engine is cold, and rise as engine compart-
ment temperature increases. If the engine has not been
run for several hours (overnight), the IAT sensor tempera-
ture and engine coolant temperature should read close to
each other. A failure in the IAT sensor circuit will set DTC
35 or DTC 45.
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM)
The ECM controls the following:
• Fuel metering system
• Ignition timing
• On-board diagnostics for engine functions
The ECM constantly observes the information from vari-
ous sensors. The ECM controls the systems that affect
engine performance. The ECM performs the diagnostic
function of the system. It can recognize operational prob-
lems, alert the operator through the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL), and store diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs).
DTCs identify the problem areas to aid the technician in
making repairs.
The ECM supplies either 5 or 12 volts to power various
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP)
sensors or switches. The power is supplied through resis-
SENSOR tances in the ECM which are so huh in value that a test
The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor responds light will not light when connected to the circuit. In some
to changes in intake manifold pressure (vacuum). The cases, even an ordinary shop voltmeter will not give an
MAP sensor signal voltage to the ECM varies from below 2 accurate reading because its resistance is too low. There-
volts at idle (high vacuum) to above 4 volts with the igni- fore, a digital voltmeter with at least 10 meg ohms input
tion ON, engine not running or at wide-open throttle (low impedance is required to ensure accurate voltage read-
vacuum). ings. The ECM controls output circuits such as the fuel
injectors, electronic governor, etc., by control ling the
The MAP sensor is used to determine the following: ground or the power feed circuit through transistors or
• Engine vacuum level for engine control purposes. other solid state devices.
• Barometric pressure (BARO)
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-73

The ECM is designed to maintain exhaust emission levels • When measuring voltages, use only a digital voltmeter
to government mandated standards while providing excel- with an input impedance of at least 10 megohms.
lent operation and fuel efficiency. The ECM monitors
• Do not jump start with more than 12 volts. This could
numerous engine functions via electronic sensors such as
cause damage to the electronic components.
the throttle position (TP) sensor and the heated oxygen
sensor (HO2S). • Do not employ any non-standard practices such as
charging the battery with an arc welder.
• Take proper precautions to avoid static damage to the
ECM. Refer to “Electrostatic Discharge Damage” for
more information.
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR

The throttle position (TP) sensor is a potentiometer con-
nected to the throttle shaft on the throttle body which is
built into the electronic governor. The ECM monitors the
voltage on the signal line and calculates throttle position.
As the throttle valve angle is changed, the TP sensor sig-
nal also changes. At a closed throttle position, the output
of the TP sensor is low. As the throttle valve opens, the
ECM INPUTS/OUTPUTS output increases so that at wide open throttle (WOT), the
Inputs—Operating Conditions output voltage should be above 4 volts.
• Engine Coolant Temperature
The ECM calculates fuel delivery based on throttle valve
• Crankshaft Position angle (operator demand). A broken or loose TP sensor
may cause intermittent bursts of fuel from an injector and
• Exhaust Oxygen Content
unstable idle because the ECM thinks the throttle is mov-
• Manifold Absolute Pressure ing. A hard failure in the TP sensor 5-Volt reference or sig-
• Battery Voltage nal circuits for greater than 2 consecutive seconds will set
either a DTC 12 or DTC 22. A hard failure with the TP sen-
• Throttle Position sor ground circuit for more than two consecutive seconds
• Fuel Pump Voltage may set DTC 22. If either DTC 12 or DTC 22 are set, the
throttle will be forced to a 6% (idle) position.
• Intake Air Temperature
• Camshaft Position
Outputs - System Controlled
• Fuel Control
• Idle Air Control
• Electric Fuel Pump
• Diagnostics:
- Malfunction Indicator Lamp
- Data Link Connector (DLC)
ECM SERVICE PRECAUTIONS

The ECM is designed to withstand normal current draws
associated with engine operation. When servicing the
ECM, observe the following guidelines: USE OF CIRCUIT TESTING TOOLS
• Do not overload any circuit. Do not use a test light to diagnose the engine electrical
systems unless specifically instructed by the diagnostic
• Do not probe wires for testing. This can cause a volt- procedures. A test light can put an excessive load on an
age drop that would be critical to the operation of the ECM circuit and result in component damage. For volt-
ECM. age measurements, use only a digital voltmeter with an
• When testing for opens and shorts, do not ground or input impedance of at least 10 megohms.
apply voltage to any of the ECM's circuits unless
instructed to do so.
3-74 – JLG Lift – 3120895

ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE DAMAGE A fuel injector which is stuck partly open will cause a loss
Electronic components used in the ECM are often of fuel pressure after the engine is shut down, causing
designed to carry very low voltage. Electronic compo- long crank times.
nents are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic
discharge. Less than 100 volts of static electricity can
cause damage to some electronic components. By com-
parison, It takes as much as 4000 volts for a person to feel
the spark of a static discharge.
There are several ways for a person to become statically

charged. The most common methods of charging are by
friction and induction.
FUEL METERING SYSTEM COMPONENTS
An example of charging by friction is a person sliding The fuel metering system is made up of the following
across a seat. parts:
• The fuel injectors
Charge by induction occurs when a person with well-insu-
lated shoes stands near a highly charged object and • The fuel rail
momentarily touches ground. Charges of the same polar- • The fuel pressure regulator/filter assembly
ity are drained off, leaving the person highly charged with
the opposite polarity. Static charges can cause damage, • The electronic governor
therefore it is important to-use care when handling and • The ECM
testing electronic components.
• The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor
To prevent possible electrostatic discharge damage, fol- • The camshaft position (CMP) sensor
low these guidelines:
• The fuel pump
• Do not touch the ECM connector pins or soldered • The fuel pump relay
components on the ECM board.
• Do not open the replacement part package until the BASIC SYSTEM OPERATION
part is ready to be installed. The fuel metering system starts with the fuel in the fuel
tank. The fuel is drawn up to the fuel pump through a pre-
• Before removing the part from the package, ground filter. The electric fuel pump then delivers the fuel to the
the package to a known good ground on the equip- fuel rail through an inane fuel filter. The pump is designed
ment. to provide fuel at a pressure above the pressure needed
• If the part has been handled while sliding across a by the injectors. A fuel pressure regulator in the fuel filter
seat, while sitting down from a standing position, or assembly keeps fuel available to the fuel injectors at a
while walking a distance, touch a known good ground constant pressure. A return line delivers unused fuel back
before installing the part. to the tank.
Fuel System
FUEL INJECTOR
The Electronic Fuel Injection (EFI) fuel injector is a sole-
noid-operated device controlled by the ECM. The ECM
energizes the solenoid, which opens a valve to allow fuel
delivery.
The fuel is injected under pressure in a conical spray pat-

tern at the opening of the intake valve. Excess fuel not
used by the injectors passes through the fuel pressure
regulator before being returned to the fuel tank.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-75

HIGH PRESSURE CIRCUIT - OPERATING PRESSURE 65 PSI.
Figure 3-45. Typical Fuel System
FUEL METERING SYSTEM PURPOSE The ECM monitors signals from several sensors in order
The basic function of the air/fuel metering system is to to determine the fuel needs of the engine. Fuel is deliv-
control the air/fuel delivery to the engine. Fuel is delivered ered under one of several conditions called “modes.” All
to the engine by individual fuel injectors mounted in the modes are controlled by the ECM. Refer to “Open Loop
intake manifold near each intake valve. and Closed Loop Operation” for more information.
The main control sensor is the heated oxygen sensor

(H02S) located in the exhaust system. The H02S tells the
ECM how much oxygen is in the exhaust gas. The ECM
changes the air/fuel ratio to the engine by control-ling the
amount of time that the fuel injector is “ON.” The best mix-
ture to minimize exhaust emissions is 14.7 parts of air to 1
part of gasoline by weight, which provides the most effi-
cient combustion. Because of the constant measuring and
adjusting of the air/fuel ratio, the fuel injection system is
called a “closed loop” system.
3-76 – JLG Lift – 3120895

FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR ELECTRONIC GOVERNOR AND THROTTLE

The fuel pressure regulator is a relief valve mounted in the BODY
fuel filter. It provides a constant fuel pressure of 441 kPa In the 2.5L EFI industrial engine, throttle control is
(64 psi). achieved by using an electronic governor which is con-
trolled by the engine control module (ECM).
If the pressure is too low, poor performance and a DTC 32
will set. If the pressure is too high, excessive odor and/or a
DTC 42 will result.
When replacing the fuel filter, be sure to use an identical

filter/regulator assembly. A standard fuel filter does not
regulate pressure and could cause engine problems or
component damage.
The electronic governor consists of a throttle body, an

electronically-actuated throttle plate, and a built-in throttle
position (TP) sensor. There are two pigtails that exit the
governor body. The 3-wire pigtail connects the TP sensor
to the ECM. Refer to “Throttle Position (TP) Sensor” for
more information.
The 2-wire pigtail carries the throttle signal from the ECM
FUEL PUMP ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT to the governor. Desired engine speeds are stored in the
When the key is first turned “ON,” the ECM energizes the configuration program for each specific application, and
fuel pump relay for two seconds to build up the fuel pres- can be changed with the ECM calibration software. When
sure quickly. If the engine is not started within two sec- an engine speed is selected with the toggle switch, the
onds, the ECM shuts the fuel pump off and waits until the ECM sends the appropriate signal to the governor. This is
engine is cranked. When the engine is cranked and crank- a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signal which cannot be
shaft position signal has been detected by the SECM, the read with conventional diagnostic tools such as a voltme-
ECM supplies 12 volts to the fuel pump relay to energize ter. A 12-volt signal is pulsed on and off at a high rate of
the electric fuel pump. speed. The width of the “on” pulse determines the amount
of throttle opening. The ECM sends a signal with the
An inoperative fuel pump will cause a “no-start” condition. appropriate pulse width to the governor based on the
A fuel pump which does not provide enough pressure will operator's choice of switch settings.
result in poor performance.
The electronic governor also acts as an idle air control
FUEL RAIL (IAC) valve. Changes in engine load are detected by the
The fuel rail is mounted to the top of the engine and dis- ECM by comparing manifold absolute pressure (MAP)
tributes fuel to the individual injectors. Fuel is delivered to with throttle position. When the ECM detects a change in
the fuel inlet tube of the fuel rail by the fuel lines. engine load, it can adjust idle speed by changing the
PWM signal to the governor.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-77

OPEN LOOP AND CLOSED LOOP OPERATION CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
The ECM will operate in the following two modes: The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor provides a signal
used by the engine control module (ECM) to calculate the
• Open loop
ignition sequence. The sensor initiates the reference
• Closed loop pulses which the ECM uses to calculate RPM and crank-
shaft position.
When the engine is first started, the system is in “open
loop” operation. In open loop, the ECM ignores the signal
from the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S). it uses a pre-pro-
grammed routine to calculate the air/fuel ratio based on
inputs from the TP, ECT, and MAP sensors.
The system remains in open loop until the following condi-
tions are met:
• The HO2S has a varying voltage output showing that it
is hot enough to operate properly (this depends on
temperature).
• The ECT has reached 160°F (71°C).
• Seven minutes has elapsed since starting the engine.
After these conditions are met, the engine is said to be
operating in “closed loop.” In closed loop, The ECM con-
tinuously adjusts the air/fuel ratio by responding to signals
from the HO2S (except at wide-open throttle). When the
HO2S reports a lean condition (low sensor signal voltage),
ELECTRONIC IGNITION
the ECM responds by increasing the “on” time of the fuel
The electronic ignition system controls fuel combustion by
injectors, thus enriching the mixture. When the HO2S
providing a spark to ignite the compressed air/fuel w mix-
reports a rich condition (high sensor signal Voltages the
ture at the correct time. To provide optimum engine perfor-
ECM responds by reducing the “on” time of the fuel injec-
mance, fuel economy, and control of exhaust emissions,
tors, thus leaning out the mixture.
the ECM controls the spark advance of the ignition system.
Electronic ignition has the following advantages over a
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
mechanical distributor system:
The CMP sensor uses a variable reactor sensor to detect
camshaft position. The CMP signal is created as piston #1 • No moving parts
is a predetermined number of degrees after top dead cen-
• Less maintenance
ter on the power stroke.
• Remote mounting capability
• No mechanical load on the engine
• More coil cooldown time between firing events
• Elimination of mechanical timing adjustments
• Increased available ignition coil saturation time
3-78 – JLG Lift – 3120895

IGNITION COIL 3.20 THROTTLE CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

The electronic ignition system uses a coil pack with one
ignition coil for each two cylinders in the engine. Each cyl- - DEUTZ ENGINE (PRIOR TO S/N 61718)
inder is paired with its opposing cylinder in the firing order,
so that one cylinder on compression fires simultaneously General
with the opposing cylinder on exhaust. The spark that
The throttle control system on the Deutz engine includes
occurs in the cylinder on the exhaust stroke is referred to
the positional controller and the actuator.
as a “waste spark.”
Four LEDs are incorporated in the controller. They are as
The primary coils in the coil pack are triggered by the
follows:
“Ignition Coil Feed #1” and “Ignition Coil Feed #2” Signals
from the ECM.
• Red - failure: signals a problem with the system -
needs service or adjustment
• Green - clutch engaged; operation normal while sys-
tem is powered.
• Amber - motor extend
• Amber - motor retract
The controller is designed so that when the system volt-
age reaches 10.5 volts, the actuator clutch will be
released and the motor drive turned off in order to prevent
unpredictable operation from occurring.
When a failure condition occurs (i.e. position time-out) the
controller will release the clutch and turn off the actuator
motor. This will prevent unnecessary motor wear.
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM) Table 3-10. Position Controller Truth Table
The ECM is responsible for maintaining proper spark and Control Wiring
fuel injection timing for all operating conditions. To provide
optimum operation and emissions, the ECM monitors the TRIM Actuator Position
Black Red White Green
input signals from the following components in order to POT #
calculate spark timing:
GND OFF X X OFF POSITION
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor (FREEWHEEL)
• Intake air temperature (IAT) sensor 1 GND +12 VDC OFF OFF IDLE - 1200 rpm
• Throttle position sensor 2 GND +12 VDC +12 VDC OFF MID - 1800 rpm
• Crankshaft position sensor 3 GND +12 VDC OFF +12 VDC NOT USED
4 GND +12 VDC +12 VDC +12 VDC HIGH - 2900 RPM
GND = POWER SUPPLY OR BATTERY GROUND

OFF = GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT
X = DON’T CARE
+12 VDC = +12 VOLT POWER SUPPLY OR BATTERY SYSTEM, VIA A 5
AMP FUSE OR CIRCUIT BREAKER
TRIMMER ADJUSTMENTS LED INDICATORS
1 - POSITION 1 CW=RETRACT R - RETRACT INDICA-
2 - POSITION 2 CW=RETRACT TOR (AMBER)
3 - POSITION 3 CW=RETRACT E - EXTEND INDICATOR
4 - POSITION 4 CW=RETRACT (AMBER)
C - CLUTCH INDICATOR
(GREEN)
F - FAILURE INDICATOR
(RED)
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-79

Procedure
NOTE: Never run fuel tank dry. Diesel engines cannot be
restarted after running out of fuel until fuel system
has been air-vented or bled of air. See Deutz Instruc-
tion Manual for procedure.
1. Power the ignition switch at the ground control

panel. Set the idle rpm.
2. Supply 12 volts of power to the white wire on the Clutch engaged actuator retracting
controller. Set the mid engine rpm.
3. Supply 12 volts of power to the white & green wires
on the controller. Set the high engine rpm.
NOTE: Actuator rod travel must stop slightly before lever

makes contact with throttle lever stop. Failure to do
so will burn out actuator.
Controller fault - clutch disengaged and no actuator

movement
Failure Modes
Figure 3-46. Addco Adjustments - Deutz
Immediate Red Light
Controller Status
Clutch engaged no actuator movement
Action:
1. Recycle power to determine if the problem is inter-
mittent.
2. The input voltage must be greater than 10.5 Vdc.
Clutch engaged actuator extending.
3. Check wiring for any damage and correct.
4. Disconnect engine harness and actuator connnec-
tions.
5. If problem reoccurs return unit.
3-80 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Green and either Amber light followed by a red light.

Action:
1. Inspect and clean wiring connections.
2. Examine throttle linkage for any damage or bent
components and correct.
3. With linkage disconnected, check each potentiome-
ter for operation.
4. Reconnect linkage and reset each potentiometer for
or correct operation.
5. If failure continues to occur, replace unit.
Only green light on and no actuator movement
then
Action:
1. Adjust trim potentiometers.
2. If problem continues, replace unit.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-81

When final settings

are completed torque
to 49 in. Lbs. Dry.
Actuator should be free to pivot 1.25 - 1.38 in.
on shoulder bolt when properly installed
shoulder bolt should be installed into
the actuator block with loctite # 242.
Note: Addco actuator must be adjusted

to be sure the mechanical stroke is
centered and has adjustment outside
of the Deutz engine throttle stops.
This will ensure that the electrical
adjustment will be within limits of
the engine throttles mechanical stops.
Lift sleeve on socket end to

disconnect pivot ball to
check adjustment.
Spring Addco retracted

Bracket Engine Throttle (Idle)
Engine Throttle (Mid Eng)
Engine Throttle (Hi Eng)

Addco Extended
Deutz
Ref: Engine
Stops
Figure 3-47. Addco Throttle Actuator
3-82 – JLG Lift – 3120895

3.21 TILT ALARM SWITCH (PRIOR TO S/N 4. Individually push down on one corner at a time;
there should be enough travel to cause the switch to
61718) trip. If the switch does not trip in all three tests, the
flange nuts have been tightened too far. Loosen the
“X” nut and repeat steps (2). through (4)
PERFORM TILT ALARM SWITCH LEVELING PROCEDURE A MINI-
MUM OF EVERY SIX MONTHS TO ENSURE PROPER OPERATION
AND ADJUSTMENT OF SWITCH.
Manual Adjustment
1. Park the machine on a flat, level surface. Ensure
machine is level and tires are filled to rated pressure.
NOTE: Ensure switch mounting bracket is level and securely

attached.
2. Level the base of the indicator by tightening the

three flange nuts through approximately one quarter
of its spring travel. DO NOT ADJUST THE “X” NUT
DURING THE REMAINDER OF THE PROCEDURE.
3. With the electrical connections complete, using bub-
ble level on top of indicator, slowly tighten or loosen
the three flange nuts until indicator is level.
Figure 3-48. Tilt Switch Adjustment
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-83

Figure 3-49. Valve Location - Chassis
3-84 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Figure 3-50. Hyd Tank Installation
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-85

3.22 HYDRAULIC WELDER (225-4) NOTE: Be sure to align coupling.
1. To remove top cover. 9. Slide couplings together and tighten setscrews.

a. Remove 4 screws on each side. 10. Remove back cover from motor and install flow reg-
b. Pull cover upward. ulator on back.
2. To remove end cover. 11. Re-install pressure line, return line and case drain
line.
a. Remove air intake(4 screws).
NOTE: Be sure to put the pressure line into the aluminum
b. Remove 4 screws (5mm x 45mm).
block (flow regulator).
c. Holding receptacle panel to welder disconnect
two orange wires coming from front control.
d. Unplug plastic connector.
IF YOU ACCIDENTALLY REVERSE THE PRESSURE LINE AND THE
Replacement of Weld Transformer RETURN LINE THE FLOW REGULATOR WILL NOT LIMIT THE
FLOW AND ALLOW THE WELDER TO ROTATE AT THE SPEED
1. Remove top cover. DETERMINED BY THE FLOW. IT WILL NOT LIMIT THE SPEED.
THIS COULD CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE TO THE WELDER DUE TO
2. Disconnect three heavy wires (6ga) from weld OVER SPEED.
impedance (transformer).
3. Remove seven position Selecta switch. Replacement of Fine Control
4. Disconnect all wires from seven step Selecta switch. 1. Remove receptacle panel including fine control.
NOTE: Wire numbers to numbers on switch. 2. Disconnect two wires connecting fine control.
5. Un-bolt weld impedance (transformer) from welder. 3. Remove knob from fine control.
6. Mount new transformer. 4. Remove hex nut holding fine control in place.
7. Reconnect the small wires to the seven step Selecta 5. Remove defective fine control and install new fine
switch. control.
NOTE: Be sure wire numbers match terminal umbers. 6. Reconnect wires (polarity doesn’t matter).
7. Re-mount receptacle panel.
8. Reconnect heavy wires.
NOTE: Be sure those connections are very tight.
9. Re-mount top cover.
Replacement of Hydraulic Motor

1. Remove coupling cover.
2. Loosen setscrew in motor coupling.
3. Remove pressure line, return line and case drain
line.
NOTE: Mark pressure line so you don’t accidentally reverse

the two lines.
4. Remove flow regulator from motor (four bolts).

5. Remove motor from motor mount (two bolts).
6. Remove coupling from motor shaft.
7. Install coupling on new motor.
8. Mount motor to motor mount.
3-86 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Rotor Replacement 30. Re-install receptacle panel.

31. Re-install welder on base plate.
1. Remove coupling guard held with two 10/32 screws.
32. Lift motor mount onto welder.
2. Un-bolt motor mount from welder (four each 5/16-18
Screws) NOTE: Be sure coupling jaws are aligned.
3. Loosen setscrew and coupling and remove from 33. Mount with four each 5/16-18 1 inch screws ad lock
welder shaft. washers.
4. Remove two each fan grids. 34. Slide coupling together and tighten setscrews.
5. Un-bolt welder from base. 35. Re-install coupling cover with 2 10/32 screws.
6. Remove receptacle panel.
Replacement of Flow Regulator
7. Remove rails - each held with two 5/16-18 screws.
8. Remove brush holder held with one screw. 1. Remove pressure line from flow regulator.
9. Remove four plastic stop nuts holding front shield 2. Remove case drain line.
(fa housing). 3. Remove four bolts holding flow regulator to motor.
10. With gear puller push out rotor from slip ring side. NOTE: Be sure seals on motor are still in place
11. Remove rotor assembly from stator.
4. Push four bolts threw mounting holes on flow regu-
12. Remove snap ring from shaft end which had cou- lator.
pling on it.
5. Push flow regulator onto back of motor, align four
13. Push rotor out of front shield. bolts, tighten four bolts.
14. Examine bearing and front shield to be sure it does NOTE: Do not over tighten bolts, mounting flange is alumi-
not need to be replaced. num.
15. Push new rotor into front shield.
6. Re-install case drain line.
16. Re-install small snap ring.
7. Re-install pressure line.
17. Be sure snap ring is in groove.
18. Carefully re-install rotor into stator (use rubber mallet Replacement of Exciting Rectifier Bridge
to tap in place).
1. Remove receptacle panel.
19. Re-install four elastic stop nuts.
2. Remove wires from Excitation Bridge and transfer to
20. Tighten elastic stop nuts in a cris/cross manner. replacement Bridge.
21. Turn rotor by hand to make sure it turns freely.
NOTE: Be sure that the positive wire is on the positive termi-
22. If rotor seems not to turn freely, tap the casting with nal and the AC wires are connected to the AC termi-
a small metal hammer on the slip ring end casting. nals.
(this will seat the bearing)
3. Remove defective Rectifier Bridge with one screw in
23. Apply 12 volts to the slip ring for about 20 sec- center.
onds.(this will make sure that the residual magne-
tism is energized) 4. Install new rectifier bridge with same screw.
24. Re-install brush holder. 5. Remount receptacle panel.
25. Check for brush alignment to slip ring.

26. Re-install the rails.
27. Re-install the two fan grids.
28. Heat the coupling to 300 degrees.
29. Install 24mm coupling too welder shaft. The shaft
extrudes at least 1/4 of a inch threw the coupling.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-87

Replacement of Weld Rectifier Bridge 10. Reading should be a 22 ohms ± 3 ohms.

11. Install new brush holder with brushes.
1. Remove top cover ad control panel.
NOTE: Make sure brush holder is seated (dimple in casting).
2. Disconnect three six gauge wires from rectifier
bridge. 12. Check brushes to be on slip rings.
3. Un-bolt rectifier Bridge upward from base. 13. Install tie rap’s to hold wires.
4. One elastic stop nut on each end. 14. Check resistance of rotor (armature) on slip rings.
5. Lift defective Rectifier Bridge upward out of slots. 15. Reading should be a 22 ohms ± 3 ohms.
6. Re-install new bridge.
Replacing Range Switch
7. Insert two elastic stop nuts.
NOTE: Be sure two mounting studs are all the way on bot- 1. Remove top cover held with four screws.
tom of slots. 2. Remove nut holding range switch to front panel.
3. Install range switch in front panel.
NOTE: Be sure key on threaded bushing is pointing the

AS YOU TIGHTEN, THE TWO NUT RECTIFIER BRIDGES MUST BE
same way.
PERFECTLY HORIZONTAL. IF IT TILT FORWARD OR BACKWARD,
IT WILL SHORT OUT AGAINST THE CASE.
4. Move wires from old switch to new switch.
8. Reconnect the three wires. 5. Re-install top cover.
9. Remount the panels and top covers.
Replacing Selector Switch
Replace Brushes on Sky Welder
1. Remove top cover held with four screws.
1. Remove receptacle panel. 2. Remove phillips screw from selector knob.
2. Cut tie raps holding brush holder wires, red & black. 3. Remove two phillips screws from selector switch
3. Unplug red & black from rectifier bridges. front panel.
4. Install wires in same way with new brush holder - red 4. Transfer all wires to new selector switch.
to red and black to black. NOTE: Be careful not to mix up any of the wires.All wires
5. Remove old brush holder by removing one screw have wire markers on them.
holding brush holder.
5. Mount new selector switch to front panel with two
6. Do not lose plastic insulator located behind the phillips screws.
brush holder.
6. Re-install knob, be sure knob pointer aligns with all
7. Check slip rings. markings on front panel.
8. Clean and polish with very fine sandpaper. 7. Re-install top cover.
9. Check resistance of rotor (armature) on slip rings.
3-88 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Replacement of Couplings Voltage Change Over - 120/240 Volt

1. The welder/generator has a connector with 4 wires,
1. Remove coupling held by two 10/32 screws and
located in the lower portion of the welder.
nuts.
2. The wire colors are blue, black, white, and brown.
2. Un-bolt hydraulic motor from motor mount.(Two
each 3/8-16 screws and nuts.) 3. For 120 volt only, connect the blue & black together.
This is the hot leg. Connect brown & white together.
3. Remove motor mount from welder four each 5/16-18
This is neutral.
screws.
4. Loosen setscrews in both couplings.
5. Remove both couplings with gear puller.
6. Push new coupling onto hydraulic motor shaft (.625
bore).
7. Heat 24mm bore coupling to about 300 degrees ad 4. For 120/240 volt, use the blue wire as the hot leg.
slide on generator shaft. Use the white wire as the other hot leg (white to blue
= 240 volt). Connect the black & brown together.
8. Let generator coupling cool.
This is neutral.
9. Install sox spider o welder coupling.
10. Re-install motor mount onto welder, do not over
tighten, the threads are aluminum.
11. Re-align hydraulic motor coupling with welder cou-
pling and re-install hydraulic motor on motor mount.
12. Push couplings together and tighten setscrews in
both couplings.
13. Re-install coupling guard.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-89

3.23 TROUBLESHOOTING OF THE SKY combination between terminals you should get a high and
low reading. If any one of the readings come out the
WELDER same, the bridge is defective.
Low Sky Welder Speed No Output on Weld Receptacles or AC

If the welder/generator is running below 3600 RPM, the Receptacles
welder or generator can not function properly. Low speed
is caused by only three factors. This problem can be caused by many different factors. At
rare occasions a welder/generator could lose it’s residual
1. Low hydraulic flow. magnetism, which will cause the welder to be completely
dead. To re-energize the magnetism remove the recepta-
2. Mis-adjusted flow regulator. cle panel. Locate the two excitator bridges on the bottom
3. Worn hydraulic motor. left and bottom right, pull off the red and black wire com-
ing from the brushes on the left bridge and the red wire
Carefully loosen the lock nut on the adjustment screw and jumped over to the right bottom bridge. With an ohm
on top of the flow regulator located on the ed of the meter check resistance between red and black wire which
hydraulic motor. While monitoring the speed slowly turn will check the resistance off the rotor, this should be about
the adjustment screw with an allen key counterclockwise 22 ohms, try to rotate the rotor while you take the reading
to increase speed. If you do not see an increase by turn- to be sure the brushes are receded, if the reading is inter-
ing the screw a quarter to a half a turn, return the screw to mitted check the resistance at the right on the slip rings. If
the original position and lock the lockout. This was an necessary, remove the brush holder (see brush holder
indication that the flow coming to the regulator is too low. replacement). Apply 12 volts to the terminals on the red
Your problem could be engine speed or a worn hydraulic and black wire coming from the brush holder. Apply 12
pump. If the welder speed increases turn the adjustment volts for about 15 seconds. Re-install wires, re-install
screw so the welder rotates at 3700 RPM no load, lock receptacle panel and start welding.
adjustment nut.
Low Welding Amps No Ac Output but Weld Output

If the welder section functions properly but you have no
Low welding amps can be caused by three components.
AC output remove the receptacle panel and make sure
Excitation Bridge located on the bottom right hand corner
the white four terminal plugs are plugged solid. If they are
- defective. The second component that could cause this
connected all the way, disconnect and take resistance
is an open fine control. Resistance should be 6 ohms. A
reading as follows.
thermal trip i the windings. Disconnect the two AC wires
off the bottom right hand Excitation Bridge (white &
a. Blue to Brown (1.2 ohms)
orange) and take a resistance reading. With the seven-
step selector switch inn the lowest position and range b. Black to White (1.2 ohms)
switch in the highest position you should get about 2 If either one of these two readings is open the AC wind-
ohms. Move the seven-step switch while observing the ings are defective. If they both check out ok, check the
ohmmeter all the way to its highest position. The resis- receptacle and the wires going to the receptacle. To be
tance should increase slightly with every step. You should certain that it is in the receptacle panel wiring, very care-
end up with about 3 ohms. If you do not start off with 2 fully start up the welder and check for 120 volts AC
ohms and the circuit shows open move your ohmmeter between Blue and Brown and again 120 volts AC between
lead over 1 lead to the center terminal on the range Black and White. If you have 120 volts AC pressing at
switch, the other ohm meter lead onto the terminal RL1 on those two readings, you must have a defective receptacle
the seven position switch.If you have a reading, there or receptacle wiring.
about 2 ohms the transformer is ok.To test for the terminal
trip in a winding take a reading between the center post of
the range switch and the white wire you removed from the
Excitation Bridge. You should get 0 ohms. Any other read-
ings on the trip is defective. To check the fine control put
one ohmmeter lead on the seven-step switch terminal
RL1, the other lead on he orange wire you removed from
the Excitation Bridge. You should be able by moving the
fine control up and down adjust the ohmmeter reading
between 0 and 6 ohms. To check the Excitation Bridge,
remove all wires from it and measure forward and back-
ward going around clockwise. In any position and in any
3-90 – JLG Lift – 3120895

3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-91

Figure 3-51. Hydraulic Welder 225-4 (sht 1 of 2)
3-92 – JLG Lift – 3120895

3120895
1. Air Intake. 19. Coupling set 99.
2. Slip ring cover. 20. Bearing.
3. Varistor. 21. Fan.
4A. Single-ph rectifier Bridge. 22. Black top hood.
4B. Single-ph rectifier Bridge. 23. 225 Dc weld impedance (transformer).
5. Slip ring. 24. Welding rectifier bridge.
6. Rails (set). 25. Seven position Step switch (200- 225 DC).
7. Dc brush holder with brushes. 26. Range selector (two position) 200-225 DC.
8. Housing L & stator 225 DC 60 Hz. 27. Step switch knob.
9. Stud M8 x 30. 28. Female 400A welding terminal.
10. Weld receptacle with cover. 29. Male 400A welding terminal.
11. Shaft stay bolt and nut. 30. Receptacle panel only.
– JLG Lift –
12. Bearing. 31. Twistlock receptacle.
13. Rotor (225-250 Amp) 32. AC light.
14. Front Shield. 33. Fine control.
15. Front grid. 34. Receptacle panel complete.
16. Motor mount. 34. Receptacle.
17. Flow regulator CC. 35. Harness.
18. Coupling guard. 36. Hydraulic motor U 19.
Figure 3-52. Hydraulic Welder 225-4 (sht 2 of 2)
3-93
No Output on Weld Receptacle but AC Welder Completely Dead - No AC or Weld

Receptacle Output OK Power
If you have no welding power at all but the AC (120 volts) Make sure welder is at proper speed = 3600RPM. Unplug
is fully operational, this could be caused by three compo- all external connections. A shorted weld cable or genera-
nents. tor accessory plugged in can cause the welder not to
build up. Several components can cause the welder to
a. The welding impedance (transformer). stop functioning completely. This is mainly in the excita-
b. The stator windings. tion circuit. Consisting of the armature (rotor), excitations
bridge (left bottom corner) and auxiliary winding. Check
c. The main welding rectifier bridge.
the resistance of the auxiliary winding by removing the two
Using the electrical diagram check for continuity of the purple wires from the Excitation Bridge located at the left
welding impedance (transformer). By disconnecting the bottom corner. THe reading should be about 1.5 ohms.
three heavy lead wires from the main welding bridge recti- Check the resistance of the armature between the two slip
fier, you can check continuity between those three wires. rings, this should be 22 ohms. Remove all wires for the left
In any combination, the resistance should be between bottom Rectifier Bridge and test for continuity between ter-
one and two ohms. All three readings should be the same. minals. Again, you should get a high and low reading. If
If you have readings that determines that the stator wind- those three main components test ok, try to flash the
ing and impedance winding are in good condition. With armature with a 24 volts circuit (previously explained).
the three wires removed, you can now check resistance of
the main Rectifier Bridge. By measuring resistance
between the three terminals forward and reverse you
Intermittent Welder Operation
always should get a high and low reading, for example; if Welder works properly for a few minutes and then stops
you measure between one and two, if the first reading is operating but returns to full welding power after several
very high the reverse reading should be very low. You can minutes of cooling off.
also check the bridge by taking a resistance reading on
the main welding terminals. Again, you should have a high This will occur when the welder is operated past its duty
and low reading by reversing the leads. cycle or in extreme high ambient temperatures or if welder
cooling circuit is blocked. Be sure air intake is mount to
receptacle panel. Allow fresh air to enter louvered end
cover on welder. A cooling off period of 4-5 times longer if
welder is turned off and sitting still. Running it at its RPM
will speed up the cooling and reset the internal trip.
3-94 – JLG Lift – 3120895

3.24 DEUTZ EMR 2 (S/N 77682 TO PRESENT) The EMR2 is equipped with safety devices and measures
in the hardware and software in order to ensure emer-
The EMR2 consists of the sensors, the control unit and the gency running (Limp home) functions.
actuator. Engine-side controls as well as the JLG Control
System are connected by means of separate cable har- In order to switch the engine off, the EMR2 is switched in a
nesses to the EMR control unit. de-energized fashion over the ignition switch. A strong
spring in the actuator presses the control rod in the de-
The sensors attached to the engine provide the electron- energized condition into the zero position. As a redun-
ics in the control unit with all the relevant physical parame- dancy measure, an additional solenoid serves for switch-
ters In accordance with the information of the current ing off and this, independently of the actuator, also moves
condition of the engine and the preconditions (throttle the control rod in the de-energized condition into the zero
position etc.), the EMR2 controls an actuator that operates position.
the control rod of the injection pump and thus doses the
fuel quantity in accordance with the performance require- After the programming, that is carried out over the
ments. ISO9141 interface, the EMR2 possesses a motor-specific
data set and this is then fixedly assigned to the engine.
The exact position of the regulating rod is reported back Included in this are the various application cases as well
and, if necessary, is corrected, by means of the control as the customer’s wishes regarding a particular scope of
rod travel sensor, situated together with the rotation mag- function.
nets in a housing of the actuator.
Each EMR2 module is matched by serial number to the
engine. Modules cannot be swapped between engines.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-95

CONTROL ROD POSITION

SENSOR/ACTUATOR POWER SUPPLY
COOLANT TEMPERATURE CAMSHAFT SPEED

SENSOR SENSOR
JLG SYSTEM HANDLES ENGINE START/

STOP; EMR2 TAKES CONTROL OF THE
ENGINE AT 700RPM
GLOW PLUG
JLG SYSTEM USES JLG ANALYZER TO

REPORT FAULTS
DIAGNOSIS INTERFACE/CAN-BUS; JLG SYS-

OIL PRESSURE TEM USES THIS TO CONTROL THE ENGINE &
SENSOR FAULT REPORTING.
Figure 3-53. EMR 2 Engine Side Equipment
3-96 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Figure 3-54. Deutz EMR 2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-97

3-98
– JLG Lift –
Figure 3-55. Deutz EMR 2 Vehicle Side Connection Diagram
3120895
3120895
– JLG Lift –
Figure 3-56. Deutz EMR 2 Engine Side Connection Diagram - Sheet 1 of 2
3-99
3-100
– JLG Lift –
Figure 3-57. Deutz EMR 2 Engine Side Connection Diagram - Sheet 2 of 2
3120895
Figure 3-58. EMR 2 Engine Plug Pin Identification
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-101

Figure 3-59. EMR 2 Vehicle Plug Pin Identification
3-102 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Figure 3-60. EMR2 Fault Codes - Sheet 1 of 5
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-103

3-104 – JLG Lift – 3120895

3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-105

3-106 – JLG Lift – 3120895

3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-107

3.25 GM ENGINE GENERAL MAINTENANCE • Check ignition coil and spark plug cables for harden-
ing, cracking, chafing, separation, split boot covers
and proper fit
Maintenance of the Drive Belt
• Replace spark plugs at the proper intervals as pre-
The serpentine drive belt utilizes a spring loaded tensioner scribed in the engine manufacturer’s manual
which keeps the belt properly adjusted. The drive belt is
an integral part of the cooling and charging systems and • Check to make sure all electrical components are fitted
should be inspected frequently. securely
When inspecting the belts check for: • Check the ground and platform control stations to
insure all warning indicator lights are functioning
• Cracks or breaks
• Chunking of the belt Checking/Filling Engine Oil Level
• Splits
• Material hanging from the belt
AN OVERFILLED CRANKCASE (OIL LEVEL OVER THE SPECIFIED
• Glazing and hardening FULL MARK) CAN CAUSE AN OIL LEAK, A FLUCTUATION OR
• Damaged or improperly aligned pulleys DROP IN THE OIL PRESSURE, AND ROCKER ARM "CLATTER" IN
THE ENGINE.
• Improperly performing tensioner
Check the belt tensioner by pressing down on the midway
point of the longest stretch between pulleys. The belt
should not depress beyond 1/2 inch (13mm). If the CARE MUST BE TAKEN WHEN CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL.
depression is more than allowable adjust the tension. OIL LEVEL MUST BE MAINTAINED BETWEEN THE "ADD" MARK
AND "FULL" MARK ON THE DIPSTICK.
To ensure that you are not getting a false reading, make

THE ENGINE MANUFACTURER DOES NOT RECOMMEND THE USE sure the following steps are taken to before check the oil
OF "BELT DRESSING" OR "ANTI SLIPPING AGENTS" ON THE level.
DRIVE BELT.
1. Stop the engine if in use.
Engine Electrical System Maintenance 2. Allow sufficient time (approximately 5 minutes) for
the oil to drain back into the oil pan.
The engine electrical system incorporates computers and
microprocessors to control the engine ignition, fuel con- 3. Remove the dipstick. Wipe with a clean cloth or
trol, and emissions. Due to the sensitivity of the computers paper towel and reinstall. Push the dipstick all the
to good electrical connections periodic inspection of the way into the dipstick tube.
electrical wiring is necessary. When inspecting the electri-
4. Remove the dipstick and note the oil level.
cal system use the following:
5. Oil level must be between the "FULL" and "ADD"
• Check and clean the battery terminal connections and
marks.
insure the connections are tight
• Check the battery for any cracks or damage to the
case
• Check the Positive and Negative battery cables for any
corrosion build up, rubbing or chafing, check connec-
tion on the chassis to insure they are tight
• Check the entire engine wire harness for rubbing chaf-
ing, cuts or damaged connections, repair if necessary
• Check all wire harness connectors to insure they are Figure 3-65. Engine Oil Dip Stick
fully seated and locked
3-108 – JLG Lift – 3120895

6. If the oil level is below the "ADD" mark, proceed to Coolant Fill Procedure - Dual Fuel Engine
Step 7 and 8 and reinstall the dipstick into the dip-
stick tube.
7. Remove the oil filter cap from the valve rocker arm DAMAGE TO THE ENGINE COULD OCCUR IF NOT PROPERLY
cover. FILLED WITH COOLANT. LPG FUELED ENGINES ARE MOST
8. Add the required amount of oil to bring the level up PRONE TO CREATING AN AIR LOCK DURING A COOLANT FILL
to but not over "FULL" mark on the dipstick. OPERATION DUE TO THE ELECTRONIC PRESSURE REGULATOR
(EPR) BEING THE HIGHEST POINT IN THE COOLING SYSTEM. AN
9. Reinstall the oil fill cap to the valve rocker cover and EPR THAT APPEARS TO HAVE FROST FORMING ON IT IS A SIGN
wipe away any excess oil. THAT THE ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM CONTAINS AIR. THE
APPEARANCE AND TEMPERATURE OF THE EPR SHOULD BE
Changing The Engine Oil MONITORED DURING THE COOLANT FILL OPERATION. A WARM
EPR IS AN INDICATION THAT THE COOLING SYSTEM IS PROP-
ERLY FILLED AND FUNCTIONING.
WHEN CHANGING THE OIL, ALWAYS CHANGE THE OIL FILTER.
CHANGE OIL WHEN THE ENGINE IS WARM FROM OPERATION AS
THE OILS WILL FLOW FREELY AND CARRY AWAY MORE IMPU-
RITIES. MAKE SURE ENGINE IS COOL BEFORE PERFORMING ANY MAIN-
TENANCE WORK.
To change the oil use the following steps:
1.Loosen the worm gear clamp on the coolant line run-
1. Start the engine and run until it reaches normal ning into the EPR as shown below and remove the
operating temperature. hose from the EPR. Place a rag under the hose to
2. Stop the engine. prevent coolant from running onto the engine/
machine.
3. Remove the drain plug and allow the oil to drain.
4. Remove and discard the oil filter and its sealing ring.
5. Coat the sealing ring on the filter with clean engine
oil and wipe the sealing surface on the filter
mounting surface to remove any dust, dirt and
debris. Tighten the filter securely (follow the filter
manufacturers instructions). Do not over tighten.
6. Check the sealing ring on drain plug for any dam-
age, replace if necessary, wipe the plug with a clean
rag, and wipe the sealing surface on the pan and
reinstall the pan plug. Do not over tighten.
7. Fill the crankcase with oil.
8. Start the engine and check for oil leaks.
9. Stop the engine and check the oil level to insure the
oil level is at "FULL".
10. Dispose of the oil and filter in a safe manner.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-109

2.Remove the radiator cap. Fill the radiator with coolant 6.Fill radiator with coolant as needed and install the radi-
until coolant starts to appear from the previously ator cap. Next, remove the cap off the coolant recov-
removed hose at the EPR. Reinstall the hose back ery bottle and fill just below the HOT FULL line and
onto the EPR and continue to fill radiator with cool- reinstall the caps.
ant.
3.With the radiator cap still removed, start the engine and
run until the thermostat opens. The thermostat
opens at 170° F (77° C), which can be checked
using the JLG handheld analyzer.
WHILE ENGINE IS RUNNING, AIR AND/OR STEAM MAY BE PRES-

ENT COMING FROM THE RADIATOR. THIS IS NORMAL.
4.After running the engine for 5 minutes after it has

reached operating temperature, shut the engine off
and continue to step 5.
WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING OR WHEN SHUTTING OFF THE

ENGINE, SOME HEATED COOLANT MAY SPILL OUT DUE TO AIR
"BURPING" OUT OF THE SYSTEM WITH THE RADIATOR CAP OFF.
5.Next, verify that the 2 coolant hoses on the EPR are

warm. If they are not warm repeat step 3 and 4, oth-
erwise continue to step 6.
A PROPERLY PURGED COOLING SYSTEM WILL YIELD A WARM

UPPER RADIATOR HOSE AND A WARM EPR HOSE. IF THE UPPER
RADIATOR HOSE AND/OR EPR HOSE ARE NOT WARM TO THE
TOUCH AFTER THE ENGINE HAS RUN FOR 5-8 MINUTES AFTER
REACHING OPERATING TEMPERATURE, THE SYSTEM MAY STILL
CONTAIN AIR. IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO REPEAT THE ABOVE
STEPS.
3-110 – JLG Lift – 3120895

3.26 GM ENGINE DUAL FUEL SYSTEM Fuel Filter

The Dual Fuel system allows the operator to operate the Propane fuel like all other motor fuels is subject to con-
vehicle on either gasoline or LPG by positioning a selector tamination from outside sources. Refueling of the equip-
switch in the operator's platform. When the operator ment’s tank and removal of the tank from the equipment
places the selector switch in the gasoline mode the gaso- can inadvertently introduce dirt and other foreign matter
line fuel pump is energized. While in the gasoline mode into the fuel system. It is therefore necessary to filter the
the LPG fuel lock-off is isolated and will not energize. In fuel prior to entering the fuel system components down-
addition the gasoline injector circuit is enabled and injec- stream of the tank. An inline fuel filter has been installed in
tor pulses are provided to each injector and the ECM cali- the fuel system to remove the dirt and foreign matter from
bration for gasoline is also enabled. When the operator the fuel. The inline filter is replaceable as a unit only. Main-
selects the LPG mode the Low Pressure LPG lock-off is tenance of the filter is critical to proper operation of the
energized and fuel from the LPG tank flows to the Elec- fuel system and should be replaced as Section 1. In
tronic Pressure Regulator (EPR). The EPR receives an severe operating condition more frequent replacement of
electronic signal to position the secondary lever for the the filter may be necessary.
start or run positions and when the engine begins to crank
the mixer air valve will rise and fuel will begin flowing to Electric Lock Off
engine. During this mode the gasoline fuel pump is iso-
lated and will not be activated. The primary components The Electric Lock Off device is an integrated assembly.
of the gasoline dual fuel system are the gasoline tank, When energized the solenoid opens the valve and allows
electric fuel pump and filter, fuel supply line, injector rail the Propane fuel to flow through the device. The valve
and injectors and the fuel pressure regulator. The primary opens during cranking and run cycles of the engine. The
components of the LPG dual fuel system are the LPG fuel lock off supply voltage is controlled by the engine control
tank, in-fuel filter, LPG Low Pressure lock-off, Electronic module (ECM).
Pressure Regulator (EPR) and the fuel mixer module. The
LPG fuel system operates at pressures which range from
14.0 inches (355.60 mm) of water column up to 312 psi
(21.5 BAR).
Components which are shared by both systems include
the Electronic Throttle Control and the ECM. The ECM
contains a dual calibration; one controls the gasoline fuel
system during gasoline operation and one controls the
LPG fuel system during LPG operation.
Figure 3-66. Electric Fuel Lock Off
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-111

EPR Assembly Low Pressure Regulator (LPR)

The EPR assembly is a combination Low Pressure Regu- The LPR is a combination vaporizer, pressure regulating
lator and a Voice Coil Assembly. The Voice coil is an elec- device. The LPR is a negative pressure, two stage regula-
tronic actuator which is controlled by an internal tor that is normally closed when the engine is not running.
microprocessor. The microprocessor provides output data When the engine is cranking or running, a partial vacuum
to the ECM and receives input data over a CAN BUS con- is created in the fuel line which connects the regulator to
nection. The internal microprocessor receives electrical the mixer. This partial vacuum opens the regulator permit-
signals from the Fuel Pressure Sensor FPS and the Fuel ting fuel to flow to the mixer.
Temperature Pressure FTP and communicates the data to
Propane fuel enters the primary port of the LPR and
the ECM. The ECM uses the FPS and FTP data to calcu-
passes through the primary jet and into the primary/
late the location of the secondary lever in the LPR and
exchanger chamber. As the propane passes through the
sends that data back to the EPR via the CAN BUS. The
heat exchanger the fuel expands and creates pressure
internal microprocessor in the EPR will then output a sig-
inside the chamber. The pressure rises as the fuel
nal, which causes the voice coil to move and position the
expands when the pressure rises above 1.5 psi (10.34
secondary lever to the correct location.
kpa), sufficient pressure is exerted on the primary dia-
phragm to cause the diaphragm plate to pivot and press
against the primary valve pin thus closing off the flow of
fuel. This action causes the flow of fuel into the regulator
to be regulated.
When the engine is cranking, sufficient vacuum will be
introduced into the secondary chamber from the mixer
drawing the secondary diaphragm down onto the spring
loaded lever and opening the secondary valve allowing
vaporized fuel to pass to the mixer. This mechanical action
in conjunction with the EPR reactions causes the down-
ward action on the secondary lever causing it to open
wider allowing more fuel to flow to the mixer.
THE VOICE COIL SECTION OF THE EPR ASSEMBLY IS AN EMIS-

SIONS CONTROL DEVICE AND CANNOT BE REBUILT. IF THE COIL
1. Pressure Regulator Section 4. Primary Test Port ASSEMBLY FAILS TO OPERATE PROPERLY, REPLACE IT WITH AN
2. Fuel Inlet 5. Secondary Test Port OEM REPLACEMENT PART ONLY.
3. Coolant Passage 6. Voice Coil Section
Figure 3-67. EPR Assembly
Figure 3-68. Low Pressure Regulators
3-112 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Air Fuel Mixer Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)

The air valve mixer is an air-fuel metering device and is Engine speed and load control is maintained by an ETC
completely self-contained. The mixer is an air valve device. Speed and load control are determined by the
design, utilizing a relatively constant pressure drop to ECM. Defaults programmed into the ECM software and
draw fuel into the mixer from cranking to full load. The throttle position sensors allow the ECM to maintain safe
mixer is mounted in the air stream ahead of the throttle operating control over the engine. The Electronic Throttle
control device. Control device or "throttle body assembly" is connected to
the intake manifold of the engine. The electronic throttle
When the engine begins to crank, it draws in air with the
control device utilizes an electric motor connected to the
air valve covering the inlet, negative pressure begins to
throttle shaft. When the engine is running electrical signals
build. This negative pressure signal is communicated to
are sent from the equipment controls to the engine ECM
the top of the air valve chamber through 4 vacuum ports in
when the operator depresses an equipment function
the air valve assembly. A pressure/force imbalance begins
switch. The ECM then sends an electrical signal to the
to build across the air valve diaphragm between the air
motor on the electronic throttle control to increase or
valve vacuum chamber and the atmospheric pressure
decrease the angle of the throttle blade thus increasing or
below the diaphragm. The air valve vacuum spring is cali-
decreasing the air/fuel flow to the engine.
brated to generate from 4.0 inches (101.6 mm) of water
column at start to as high as 14.0 inches (355.60 mm) of The electronic throttle control device also incorporates
water column at full throttle. The vacuum being created is two internal Throttle Position Sensors (TPS) which provide
referred to as Air Valve Vacuum (AVV). As the air valve output signals to the ECM as to the location of the throttle
vacuum reaches 4.0 inches (101.6mm) of water column, shaft and blade. The TPS information is used by the ECM
the air valve begins to lift against the air valve spring. The to correct speed and load control as well as emission con-
amount of AVV generated is a direct result of the throttle trol.
position. At low engine speed the air valve vacuum is low
and the air valve position is low thus creating a small ven-
turi for the fuel to flow. As the engine speed increase the
AVV increases and the air valve is lifted higher thus creat-
ing a much larger venturi. This air valve vacuum is com-
municated from the mixer venture to the LPR secondary
chamber via the low pressure fuel supply hose. As the
AVV increases in the secondary chamber the secondary
diaphragm is drawn further down forcing the secondary
valve lever to open wider.
Figure 3-70. ETC throttle control device
Figure 3-69. Air Fuel Mixer
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-113

Engine Control Module Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor

To obtain maximum effect from the catalyst and accurate There are two Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensors
control of the air fuel ratio the emission certified engine is (HEGO). The first HEGO is mounted in the exhaust system
equipped with an onboard computer or Engine Control downstream of the engine. It is used to measure the
Unit (ECM). The ECM is a 32 bit controller which receives amount of oxygen present in the exhaust stream and com-
input data from sensors fitted to the engine and fuel sys- municate that to the ECM via an electrical signal. The
tem and then outputs various signals to control engine amount of oxygen present in the exhaust stream indicates
operation. whether the fuel/air ratio is too rich or too lean. If the
HEGO sensor signal indicates that the exhaust stream is
One specific function of the controller is to maintain
too rich the ECM will decrease or lean the fuel mixture dur-
"closed loop fuel control". Closed loop fuel control is
ing engine operation, if the mixture is too lean the ECM
accomplished when the exhaust gas oxygen sensor
will richen the mixture. The ECM continuously monitors
(HEGO) mounted in the exhaust system sends a voltage
the HEGO sensor output. If a rich or lean condition is pres-
signal to the controller. The controller then calculates any
ent for an extended period of time, and the ECM cannot
correction that may need to be made to the air fuel ratio.
correct the condition, the ECM will set a diagnostic code
The controller then outputs signals to the EPR to correct
and turn on the MIL light in control box.
the amount of fuel being supplied to the mixer. At the
same time the ECM may correct the throttle blade position The second HEGO is mounted in the exhaust system after
to correct speed and load of the engine. the muffler. It measures the amount of oxygen in the
exhaust system after the catalyst treatment has been com-
The controller also performs diagnostic functions on the
pleted in the muffler. If the ECM detects that the catalytic
fuel system and notifies the operator of malfunctions by
action in the muffler is not sufficient and fuel correction
turning on a Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) mounted in
cannot correct the malfunction the MIL light is illuminated
the Ground Control Station and the Platform Control Sta-
in the control box and a DTC code will stored in the com-
tion. Malfunctions in the system are identified by a Diag-
puter.
nostic Code number. In addition to notifying the operator
of the malfunction in the system the controller also stores
the information about the malfunction in its memory.
THE HEATED EXHAUST GAS OXYGEN SENSOR IS AN EMISSION
CONTROL DEVICE. IF THE HEGO FAILS TO OPERATE, REPLACE IT
WITH AN OEM REPLACEMENT PART. THE HEGO SENSOR IS SEN-
SITIVE TO SILICONE OR SILICONE BASED PRODUCTS AND CAN
BECOME CONTAMINATED. AVOID USING SILICONE SEALERS OR
HOSES TREATED WITH SILICONE LUBRICANTS IN THE AIR
STREAM OR FUEL LINES.
Figure 3-71. LPG Engine Control Unit (ECM)
Figure 3-73. Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor

(HEGO)
Gasoline Multi Point Fuel Injection System

(MPFI)
The primary components of the Gasoline Multi Point Fuel
Figure 3-72. ECM Assembly Injection (MPFI) fuel system are the fuel tank, electric fuel
pump, fuel pressure and temperature sensor manifold,
fuel filter and fuel rail.
3-114 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Gasoline Fuel Pump Fuel Filter

The Gasoline is stored as a liquid in the fuel tank and in After the fuel is drawn into the fuel pump, the fuel flows
drawn into the fuel system by an electric fuel pump. The through the gasoline fuel filter. The fuel filter will trap small
fuel pump will receive a signal from the ECM to prime the particles as the fuel passes through the filter to remove
fuel system for approximately 2 seconds prior to start. debris and prevents the fuel pressure and temperature
Priming of the fuel system provides for a quicker start, manifold and fuel injectors from becoming damaged.
when the engine begins to crank. Maintenance of the fuel filter is required as indicated in
Section 1.
Gasoline Pressure And Temperature Sensor
Manifold Fuel Injector Rail
Fuel flows from the fuel pressure and temperature mani-
This engine is equipped with a fuel injector rail that does
fold assembly to the fuel rails where the fuel is delivered to
not have a pressure regulator or a return circuit to the fuel
the fuel injectors. The fuel rail also contains a Schrader
tank. Fuel pressure for this engine is regulated by the
valve which is utilized to test the regulated pressure of the
engine’s ECM. The ECM receive fuel pressure and tem-
fuel system.
perature feedback from the gasoline fuel sensor manifold
and uses this information to control the ground side of the
fuel pump. Fuel pressure is regulated by the ECM pulse
Fuel Injector
width modulating (PWM) the fuel pump. The fuel pressure The fuel supply is maintained on the top of the injector
and temperature sensor manifold has a return or "bleed" from the injector rail. The injector is fed a "pulse" signal
circuit that connects back to the fuel tank. This circuit is through the wire harness which causes the injector to
used to bleed off any vapor that develops in the line and open. During regular operating conditions the ECM con-
return a small amount of fuel to the tank. The fuel comes trols the opening and duration of opening of the injector.
from the fuel tank and passes through the fuel pump. Fuel During lower RPM operation the injector signals or
exits the fuel pump, passes through the filter and then "pulses" are less frequent then when the engine is operat-
enters the fuel pressure and temperature manifold assem- ing at higher RPMs. The engine has been calibrated to
bly. Fuel flows through the feed circuit and is delivered to deliver the precise amount of fuel for optimum perfor-
the fuel injector rail. Fuel that enters the bleed circuits mance and emission control.
through they bypass valve in the manifold is returned to
the fuel tank.
Figure 3-74. Gasoline Fuel Pressure and Temperature

Manifold Assembly
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-115

3.27 GM ENGINE FUEL SYSTEM REPAIR Propane Fuel Filter Replacement

Propane Fuel System Pressure Relief
THE PROPANE FUEL SYSTEM OPERATES AT PRESSURES UP TO

312 PSI (21.5 BAR). TO MINIMIZE THE RISK OF FIRE AND PER-
SONAL INJURY, RELIEVE THE PROPANE FUEL SYSTEM PRES-
SURE (WHERE APPLICABLE) BEFORE SERVICING THE PROPANE
FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS.
To relieve propane fuel system pressure:

1. Close the manual shut-off valve on the propane fuel
tank.
2. Start and run the vehicle until the engine stalls.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
1. Electric Lock Off Solenoid 7. Electrical Connector

2. Mounting Plate 8. Fuel Outlet
RESIDUAL VAPOR PRESSURE WILL BE PRESENT IN THE FUEL
3. Housing Seal 9. O-ring
SYSTEM. ENSURE THE WORK AREA IS WELL VENTILATED
4. Filter Magnet 10. Filter
BEFORE DISCONNECTING ANY FUEL LINE.
5. Filter Housing 11. Fuel Inlet
6. Seal 12. Retaining Bolt
Propane Fuel System Leak Test
Figure 3-75. Filter Lock Assembly
REMOVAL
NEVER USE AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE TO CHECK FOR PRO- 1. Relieve the propane fuel system pressure. Refer to
PANE FUEL SYSTEM LEAKS. Propane Fuel System Pressure Relief.
Always inspect the propane fuel system for leaks after per- 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
forming service. Check for leaks at the fittings of the ser- 3. Slowly loosen the Filter housing retaining bolt and
viced or replaced component. Use a commercially remove it.
available liquid leak detector or an electronic leak detec-
tor. When using both methods, use the electronic leak 4. Pull the filter housing from the Electric lock off
detector first to avoid contamination by the liquid leak assembly.
detector.
5. Locate Filter magnet and remove it.
6. Remove the filter from the housing.
7. Remove and discard the housing seal.
8. Remove and discard the retaining bolt seal.
9. Remove and discard mounting plate to lock off O-
ring seal.
INSTALLATION
BE SURE TO REINSTALL THE FILTER MAGNET INTO THE HOUS-

ING BEFORE INSTALLING NEW SEAL.
1. Install the mounting plate to lock off O-ring seal.

2. Install the retaining bolt seal.
3. Install the housing seal.
3-116 – JLG Lift – 3120895

4. Drop the magnet into the bottom of the filter hous- 5. Remove the Electric Lock Off from the regulator.
ing.
6. Remove the lock pin from the vapor fitting on the
5. Install the filter into the housing. regulator housing and remove the fitting and hose
and retain the pin.
6. Install the retaining bolt into the filter housing.
7. Remove the lock pin from the pressure sensor on
7. Install the filter up to the bottom of the electric lock
the regulator housing and remove the Sensor and
off.
retain the pin.
8. Tighten the filter retaining bolt to 106 in lbs (12 Nm).
8. Using a clamp pliers pinch off the hoses on the cool-
9. Open manual shut-off valve. Start the vehicle and ant lines to the regulator
leak check the propane fuel system at each serviced
9. Remove the lock pin from both the water fittings on
fitting Refer to Propane Fuel System Leak Test.
the regulator housing and remove the fittings and
hoses and retain the pin
Electronic Pressure Regulator (EPR)
10. Disconnect the EPR electrical connector
Assembly Replacement
11. Remove the (3) three nuts from the EPR isolators
and the EPR mounting bracket
12. Remove the EPR from the bracket
13. Remove the (3) three mounting isolators
INSTALLATION
DO NOT USE TEFLON TAPE ON ANY FUEL FITTING. USE A LIQUID

PIPE THREAD SEALANT WHEN INSTALLING FITTINGS.
CHECK ALL THE O-RINGS ON THE VAPOR AND WATER FITTINGS

FOR ANY DAMAGE REPLACE IF NECESSARY.
LUBE ALL THE O -RINGS WITH AN O -RING LUBE BEFORE

INSTALLING.
1. Pressure Regulator Section 4. Primary Test Port 1. Install the three (3) rubber isolators to the bottom of
2. Fuel Inlet 5. Secondary Test Port the EPR
3. Coolant Passage 6. Voice Coil Section
2. Install the EPR assembly to the bracket and tighten
the retaining nuts.
The EPR assembly is a made up of two separate compo- NOTE: Do not over tighten the isolators and cause a separa-
nents. The Voice Coil Section is not serviceable and can tion of the isolators.
only be replaced as an assembly. The pressure regulator
section is serviceable and will be detailed in this section. 3. Install the fuel temperature sensor into the regulator
REMOVAL opening and lock in place with the locking pin, con-
nect the electrical connector.
1. Relieve the propane fuel system pressure. Refer to
Propane Fuel System Pressure Relief. 4. Insert the fuel vapor line and fitting into the regulator
port and lock in place with the locking pin.
5. Install both the water hoses and fittings into the reg-
3. Slowly remove the fuel inlet fitting at the Electric ulator and lock in place with the locking pin remove
Lock Off. the clamp pliers from the hoses.
NOTE: Residual vapor pressure will be present in the fuel 6. Install the electric lock off into the regulator inlet and
system. tighten into proper location, connect the electrical
connector.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector to the Electric
Lock off . 7. Connect the fuel supply line and tighten until fully
seated.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-117

8. Connect the EPR electrical connector. Temperature Manifold Absolute Pressure

9. Open the manual valve. (TMAP) Sensor
10. Start the vehicle and leak check the propane fuel
system at each serviced fitting Refer to Propane Fuel
System Leak Test.
Figure 3-77. Pressure Regulator Section Figure 3-78. (TMAP) Sensor & Electronic Throttle
Control (ETC)
PRESSURE REGULATOR SECTION REMOVAL
REMOVAL
1. Remove the EPR refer to EPR Removal Procedure.
1. Disconnect the TMAP electrical connector.
2. Remove the six (6) regulator to voice coil screws
using the special tool and separate the regulator 2. Remove the two retaining bolts.
from the actuator.
3. Remove the TMAP.
INSTALLATION
DO NOT REMOVE THE SECONDARY DIAPHRAGM RETAINING NOTE: Apply a small amount of O-ring lubricant before
PLATE AND DIAPHRAGM THIS WILL VOID THE WARRANTY OF installation.
THE ACTUATOR SECTION.
1. Install in the TMAP.
PRESSURE REGULATOR SECTION INSTALLATION
2. Tighten retaining bolts to 62 lb-in (7 Nm).
1. Install the regulator to the actuator section using the
six (6) retaining screws and tighten 70 in lbs (8 Nm). 3. Start the vehicle and check for proper operation.
2. Install the EPR refer to EPR Installation.
3-118 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Electronic Throttle Control Replacement 2. Install the two quad seals. Install one seal at a time
to insure the seal does not roll. The seal must sit flat
See Figure 3-78. on the throttle body.
REMOVAL
2. Remove the air intake duct.
3. Release the hose clamp on the vapor fuel line and
remove the vapor hose.
4. Disconnect the TMAP electrical connector.
5. Disconnect the electronic throttle control connector.
6. Remove the manifold to throttle body adapter bolts
and remove the throttle body mixer assembly.
7. Pull the throttle body assembly from the adapter.
8. Remove electronic throttle control device.
9. Remove the O-rings gasket and discard. 3. Attach mixer and throttle body together. The two
INSTALLATION parts do not bolt together; they will be secured when
you mount it on the intake. Notice the orientation of
the air inlet and throttle body cover.
LIGHTLY LUBRICATE BOTH THROTTLE CONTROL DEVICE TO

ADAPTER O-RINGS.
1. Install the O-ring on throttle body. Press it down to

the bottom of the surface.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-119

4. Place gasket on intake manifold and attach mixer/ Coolant Hose Replacement
throttle assembly to manifold.
REMOVAL
1. Drain the coolant.
2. Using hose clamp pliers, disconnect both hose
clamps on each hose.
3. Remove the hose from each of the fittings.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: Use hose material and lengths specified by JLG.
1. Install the hose clamps to each hose and set the

clamp back on each hose to make installation eas-
ier.
Figure 3-79. Mixer Assembly
2. Fit the hose to the fittings.
MIXER REPLACEMENT 3. Secure by positioning each of the clamps.
See Figure 3-79. Vapor Hose Replacement

REMOVAL
REMOVAL
1. Using hose clamp pliers disconnect both hose
1. Remove the Throttle control device Refer to Elec-
clamps.
tronic Throttle Body Replacement.
2. Remove the vapor hose from each fitting.
2. Remove the four (4) bolts to the throttle control
device to mixer adapter bolts. INSTALLATION
3. Remove and discard the mixer to adapter gasket.
INSTALLATION
THE VAPOR SUPPLY HOSE IS SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED, DO NOT
USE HOSE MATERIAL OR LENGTH OTHER THAN JLG SPECIFIED
PARTS.
COVER THROTTLE BODY ADAPTER OPENING TO PREVENT
DEBRIS FROM ENTERING ENGINE UNTIL REASSEMBLY. 1. Install hose clamps and set back on each hose.
2. Reinstall the vapor hose to each fitting.
1. Install Mixer to adapter gasket onto the mixer.
3. Reset clamps.
2. Install the mixer to the throttle control device to
mixer adapter and secure with the 4 retaining 4. Start engine and check for leaks.
screws. Tighten 80 lb-in (9 Nm)
3. Install Throttle body. Refer to Electronic Throttle
Control Device Replacement.
4. Start the engine and leak check all fittings and con-
nections.
3-120 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Engine Control Module Replacement 3.28 GM ENGINE LPG FUEL SYSTEM

REMOVAL DIAGNOSIS
1. Disconnect Negative battery cable.
Fuel System Description
2. Remove controller from mounting bracket.
3. Push connector lock back to unlock connector.
4. Unplug controller and remove.
INSTALLATION
THE CONTROLLER IS CALIBRATED FOR EACH ENGINE VERIFY

YOU HAVE THE CORRECT CONTROLLER
1. Plug connector into controller.

2. Push lock into place.
3. Mount controller into mounting bracket.
4. Reconnect the battery cable. To maintain fuel and emission control on the LPG fuel sys-
5. Start engine. tem the Engine Control Units (ECM) relies on numerous
engine sensor and output data from the Electronic Pres-
6. Check for any DTC codes and clear. sure Regulator (EPR). The ECM will then determine the
7. Verify engine is in closed loop and no warning lights target fuel calibration and command the EPR to reposition
are illuminated. the voice coil to the proper position which, subsequently
reposition the secondary lever in the pressure regulator to
Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor maintain proper control. The EPR and ECM will continue
to communicate back and forth during normal operation.
Replacement
In the event that the EPR fails to communicate or the Com-
REMOVAL munications Area Network (CAN) cable fails to transmit
data the regulator will operate in an open loop configura-
1. Disconnect Negative battery cable.
tion. As the air valve vacuum in the mixer venturi is com-
2. Disconnect the O2 sensor electrical connector. municated to the secondary chamber of the regulator the
secondary diaphragm will be drawn in a downwards
3. Using an O2 Sensor socket, remove the O2 Sensor
motion. This downward motion will cause the secondary
and discard.
lever to open thus allowing more fuel to enter the mixer.
INSTALLATION
In the (LPR) the fuel is vaporized and the pressure
reduced in two stages. The first stage reduces the pres-
sure to approximately 1.0 to 3.0 psi (6.8 to 20.6 kPa). The
BEFORE INSTALL THE O2 SENSOR LUBRICATE THREADS WITH second stage reduces the pressure to approximately neg-
ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND GM P/N 5613695 OR EQUIVALENT. ative 1.5" of water column.
AVOID GETTING COMPOUND ON THE SENSOR TIP.
The fuel is then drawn from the secondary chamber of the
1. Install O2 sensor. Tighten to 30 lb-ft (41 Nm). LPR by the vacuum generated by air flowing through the
mixer. This vacuum signal is also used to generate lift for
2. Start engine. the mixer air valve. This vacuum signal is most commonly
3. Check for any DTC codes and clear. referred to as air valve vacuum. In the mixer, the fuel mixes
with the air entering the engine. This air/ fuel mixture is
4. Verify engine is in closed loop and no warning lights then drawn into the engine for combustion.
are illuminated.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-121

Diagnostic Aids Pressure Gauges
This procedure is intended to diagnose a vehicle operat- • IMPCO ITK-2 Test kit
ing on LPG. If the vehicle will not continue to run on LPG, • Water Column Gauge / Manometer (GM 7333-6 or
refer to Hard Start for preliminary checks. Before proceed- equivalent).
ing with this procedure, verify that the vehicle has a suffi-
• 0-10 PSI Gauge
cient quantity of fuel and that liquid fuel is being delivered
to the LPR. Also, ensure that the manual shut off valve on Test Description
the LPG tank is fully opened and that the excess flow valve
The numbers below refer to step numbers on the diagnos-
has not been activated.
tic table.
Tools Required:
5. This step determines if the LPR requires replacement
• 7/16 Open end wrench (for test port plugs)
6. This step determines if the problems are in the mechan-
• DVOM (GM J 39200, Fluke 88 or equivalent). ical side of the Pressure Regulator or the Electronic Voice
• 12 volt test light Coil
Diagnostic Scan Tool 10. This step determines if the Mixer requires replacement
• Diagnostic Display tool. 14. This step determines if the Lock Off requires replace-
ment
17. This step determines if the Fuel Filter requires replace-
ment.
3-122 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Table 3-11. LPF Fuel System Diagnosis
STEP ACTION VALUE(S) YES NO

1 Were you referred to this procedure by a DTC diagnostic chart? -- Go to Step 3 Go to Step 2
2 Perform the On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System Check. -- Gotothe Go to Step 3
Are any DTCs present in the ECM? applicable DTC Table
3 Verify that the LPG fuel tank has a minimum of 1/4 tank of fuel, that the manual -- Go to Step 4 --
valve is open and the tank quick connect is fully engaged
Does the vehicle have fuel?
4 1. Connect a water column gauge or a manometer to the secondary test port of -- Go to Step 5 Go to Step 8
the low pressure regulator (LPR).
2. Start the engine and allow it to reach operating temperature.
Does the engine start and run?
5 With the engine idling, observe the pressure reading for the LPR secondary -1.0" to Go to Step 25 Go to Step 6
pressure. -2.0" w.c
Does the fuel pressure fluctuate rhythmically OUTSIDE the specified range?
6 1. Disconnect the EPR electrical connectors. NOTE: This action will cause a -1.0" to Go to Fuel Control Go to Step 7
DTC to be set by the ECM -2.0" w.c System Diagnosis
2. With the engine idling observe the pressure reading on the secondary test
port.
Is the fuel pressure WITHIN the specified range?
7 1. Inspect the air intake stream between the mixer assembly and the throttle -- Go to Step 26 Go to Step 22
body for leaks.
2. Inspect the fuel hose connection between the LPR and mixer assembly for
damage or leakage.
3. Inspect any vacuum hoses for leaks
Was a problem found and corrected?
8 1. Connect a water column gauge or a manometer to the secondary test port of -- Go to Step 12 Go to Step 9
the low pressure regulator (LPR).
2. Crank the engine and observe the pressure reading for the LPR secondary
pressure.
Does the fuel pressure indicate a vacuum is present?
9 1. Remove Air induction hose to the mixer -- Go to Step 11 Go to Step 10
2. Observe the air valve for movement while the engine is cranking. Note: Move-
ment of the air valve will be minimal at cranking speeds.
Does the air valve move when the engine is cranked?
10 1. Inspect the air intake stream to the mixer assembly and the throttle body for -- Go to Step 26 Go to Step 24
vacuum leaks.
2. Inspect the vacuum hoses from the mixer for proper connection and condition.
Was a problem found and repaired?
11 Inspect the fuel hose connection between the LPR and the mixer assembly for -- Go to Step 26 Go to Step 12
damage or leakage.
Was a problem found and repaired?
12 1. Connect a 0-10 psi gauge to the primary test port of the low pressure regulator 1- 3 PSI Go to Step 22 Go to Step 13
(LPR).
2. Crank the engine and observe the pressure reading for the LPR primary pres-
sure.
Is the fuel pressure ABOVE the specified value?
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-123


13 1. Turn OFF the ignition. -- Go to Step 14 Go to Step 16
2. Disconnect the LPL connector.
3. Install a test light between the pins of the LPL connector.
4. Crank the engine. The test light should illuminate.
Does the test light illuminate?
14 Using a DVOM, check the resistance of the low pressure lock-off (LPL). 12W - 16W Go to Step 15 Go to Step 23
Is the resistance within the specified range?
15 1. Turn the ignition OFF. -- Go to Step 23 Go to Step 17
2. Close the manual shut-off valve on the LPG tank.
CAUTION: When disconnecting LPG fuel lines, liquid LPG may be present. Per-
form this step in a well ventilated area.
3. Loosen the fuel inlet hose fitting at the inlet of the LPL.
Was fuel present when the fitting was loosened?
16 1. Turn OFF the ignition. -- Go to Step 20 Go to Step 21
2. Connect the test light to chassis ground and probe pin A of the LPL connector.
3. Crank the engine. The test light should illuminate.
Does the test light illuminate?
17 1. Remove the LPG fuel filter / LPL. -- Go to Step 19 Go to Step 18
2. Remove the filter from the LPL.
3. Empty the contents of the inlet side of the LPG fuel filter onto a clean surface.
4. Inspect the contents of the LPG fuel filter for an excessive amount of foreign
material or water. If necessary, locate and repair the source of contamination.
5. Verify the LPG fuel filter is not restricted or plugged.
Was a problem found?
18 The fuel supply system or hoses are plugged or restricted, locate and repair the -- Go to Step 26 --
problem.
Is the action complete?
19 Replace the fuel filter. Refer to Fuel Filter Replacement. -- Go to Step 26 --
20 Repair the open in the lock-off ground circuit. -- Go to Step 26 --
21 Repair the open in the lock-off power circuit. -- Go to Step 26 --
22 Replace the low pressure regulator (LPR). Refer to Low Pressure Regulator -- Go to Step 26 --
Replacement.
23 Replace the lock-off. Refer to Lock-off Replacement. -- Go to Step 26 --
24 Replace the mixer assembly. Refer to Fuel Mixer Replacement. -- Go to Step 26 --
3-124 – JLG Lift – 3120895


25 The fuel supply system is operating normally, if a failure of the control solenoids is -- System OK --
suspected. Refer to Fuel Control System Diagnosis.
1. Install the test plug in the LPR secondary chamber.

2. If you were sent to this routine by another diagnostic chart, return to the previ-
ous diagnostic procedure.
26 1. Disconnect all test equipment -- System OK --
2. Install the primary and secondary test port plugs.
3. Start the engine.
4. Using SNOOP or equivalent, leak check the test port plugs.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-125

Table 3-12. Symptom Diagnosis
Checks Action
Important Preliminary Checks
Before Using This Section Before using this section, you should have performed On Board Diagnostic Check and determined that:
1. The Control Module and MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp) are operating correctly.
2. There are no Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) stored, or a DTC exists but without a MIL.
Several of the following symptom procedures call for a careful visual and physical check. The visual and physical checks
are very important. The checks can lead to correcting a problem without further checks that may save valuable time.
LPG Fuel System Check 1. Verify the customer complaint.
2. Locate the correct symptom table.
3. Check the items indicated under that symptom.
4. Operate the vehicle under the conditions the symptom occurs. Verify HEGO switching between lean and rich.
IMPORTANT! Normal HEGO switching indicates the LPG fuel system is in closed loop and operating correctly at
that time.
Visual and Physical Checks Check all ECM system fuses and circuit breakers.
Check the ECM ground for being clean, tight and in its proper location.
Check the vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and proper connections.
Check thoroughly for any type of leak or restriction.
Check for air leaks at all the mounting areas of the intake manifold sealing surfaces.
Check for proper installation of the mixer module assembly.
Check for air leaks at the mixer assembly.
Check the ignition wires for the following conditions:
- Cracking
- Hardness
- Proper routing
- Carbon tracking
Check the wiring for the following items:
- Proper connections, pinches or cuts.
The following symptom tables contain groups of possible causes for each symptom. The order of these procedures is
not important. If the scan tool readings do not indicate the problems, then proceed in a logical order, easiest to check or
most likely to cause first.
Intermittent
DEFINITION: The problem may or may not turn ON the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) or store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).
Preliminary Checks Refer to Important Preliminary Checks.
Do not use the DTC tables. If a fault is an intermittent, the use of the DTC tables may result in the replacement of good
parts.
Faulty Electrical Connections or Faulty electrical connections or wiring can cause most intermittent problems.
Wiring Check the suspected circuit for the following conditions:
- Faulty fuse or circuit breaker
- Connectors poorly mated
- Terminals not fully seated in the connector (backed out)
- Terminals not properly formed or damaged
- Terminal to wires poorly connected
- Terminal tension insufficient.
Carefully remove all the connector terminals in the problem circuit in order to ensure the proper contact tension. If nec-
essary, replace all the connector terminals in the problem circuit in order to ensure the proper contact tension.
Checking for poor terminal to wire connections requires removing the terminal from the connector body.
Operational Test If a visual and physical check does not locate the cause of the problem, drive the vehicle with a scan tool. When the prob-
lem occurs, an abnormal voltage or scan reading indicates the problem may be in that circuit.
3-126 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Checks Action
Intermittent Malfunction Indicator The following components can cause intermittent MIL and no DTC(s):
Lamp (MIL) A defective relay, Control Module driven solenoid, or a switch that can cause electrical system interference. Normally,
the problem will occur when the faulty component is operating.
The improper installation of electrical devices, such as lights, 2-way radios, electric motors, etc.
The ignition secondary voltage shorted to a ground.
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) circuit or the Diagnostic Test Terminal intermittently shorted to ground.
The Control Module grounds.
Loss of DTC Memory To check for the loss of the DTC Memory:
1. Disconnect the TMAP sensor.
2. Idle the engine until the Malfunction Indicator Lamp illuminates.
The ECM should store a TMAP DTC. The TMAP DTC should remain in the memory when the ignition is turned OFF. If the
TMAP DTC does not store and remain, the ECM is faulty
Additional Checks
No Start
DEFINITION: The engine cranks OK but does not start.
Control Module Checks If a scan tool is available:
Check for proper communication with both the ECM
Check the fuse in the ECM battery power circuit. Refer to Engine Controls Schematics.
Check battery power, ignition power and ground circuits to the ECM. Refer to Engine Control Schematics. Verify volt-
age and/or continuity for each circuit.
Sensor Checks Check the TMAP sensor.
Check the Magnetic pickup sensor (RPM).
Fuel System Checks Important: A closed LPG manual fuel shut off valve will create a no start condition.
Check for air intake system leakage between the mixer and the throttle body.
Verify proper operation of the low pressure lock-off solenoids.
Check the fuel system pressures. Refer to the LPG Fuel System Diagnosis.
Check for proper mixer air valve operation.
Ignition System Checks Note: LPG being a gaseous fuel requires higher secondary ignition system voltages for the equivalent gasoline operating
conditions.
Check for the proper ignition voltage output with J 26792 or the equivalent.
Verify that the spark plugs are correct for use with LPG (R42LTS)
Check the spark plugs for the following conditions:
- Wet plugs
- Cracks
- Wear
- Improper gap
- Burned electrodes
- Heavy deposits
Check for bare or shorted ignition wires.
Check for loose ignition coil connections at the coil.
Engine Mechanical Checks Important: The LPG Fuel system works on a fumigation principle of fuel introduction and is more sensitive to intake man-
ifold leakage than the gasoline fuel supply system.
Check for the following:
- Vacuum leaks
- Improper valve timing
- Low compression
- Bent pushrods
- Worn rocker arms
- Broken or weak valve springs
- Worn camshaft lobes.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-127

Checks Action
Exhaust System Checks Check the exhaust system for a possible restriction:
- Inspect the exhaust system for damaged or collapsed pipes
- Inspect the muffler for signs of heat distress or for possible internal failure.
Check for possible plugged catalytic converter. Refer to Restricted Exhaust System Diagnosis
Hard Start
DEFINITION: The engine cranks OK, but does not start for a long time. The engine does eventually run, or may start but immediately dies.
Make sure the vehicle's operator is using the correct starting procedure.
Sensor Checks Check the Engine Coolant Temperature sensor with the scan tool. Compare the engine coolant temperature with the
ambient air temperature on a cold engine. IF the coolant temperature reading is more than 5 degrees greater or less than
the ambient air temperature on a cold engine, check for high resistance in the coolant sensor circuit. Refer to DTC 111
Check the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor.
Check the Throttle position (TPS) sensor.
Fuel System Checks Important: A closed LPG manual fuel shut off valve will create an extended crank OR no start condition.
Verify the excess flow valve in the LPG manual shut-off valve is not tripped.
Check mixer module assembly for proper installation and leakage.
Verify proper operation of the low pressure lock-off solenoids.
Verify proper operation of the EPR
Check for air intake system leakage between the mixer and the throttle body.
Check the fuel system pressures. Refer to the Fuel System Diagnosis.
Ignition System Checks Note: LPG being a gaseous fuel requires higher secondary ignition system voltages for the equivalent gasoline operat-
ing conditions.
Check the spark plugs for the following conditions:
- Wet plugs
- Cracks
- Wear
- Improper gap
- Burned electrodes
- Heavy deposits
Check for bare or shorted ignition wires.
Check for moisture in the distributor cap if applicable.
Check for loose ignition coil connections.
Important:
1. If the engine starts but then immediately stalls, Check the Crankshaft Position (CKP).
2. Check for improper gap, debris or faulty connections.
Engine Mechanical Checks Important: The LPG Fuel system works on a fumigation principle of fuel introduction and is more sensitive to intake man-
Check for the following:
- Vacuum leaks
- Low compression
- Bent pushrods
- Worn rocker arms
Check the intake and exhaust manifolds for casting flash.
3-128 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Checks Action
Check for possible plugged catalytic converter. Refer to Restricted Exhaust System Diagnosis or Exhaust System in
the GM Base Engine Service Manual
Additional Checks
Cuts Out, Misses
DEFINITION: A surging or jerking that follows engine speed, usually more pronounced as the engine load increases which is not normally felt above 1500 RPM.
The exhaust has a steady spitting sound at idle, low speed, or hard acceleration for the fuel starvation that can cause the engine to cut-out.
Ignition System Checks Start the engine.
Wet down the secondary ignition system with water from a spray bottle, and look/listen for arcing or misfiring as you
apply water.
Check for proper ignition output voltage with spark tester J 26792.
Check for a cylinder misfire.
Remove the spark plugs in these cylinders and check for the following conditions:
Insulation cracks
Wear
Improper gap
Burned electrodes
Heavy deposits
Visually/Physically inspect the secondary ignition for the following:
Ignition wires for arcing, cross-firing and proper routing
Ignition coils for cracks or carbon tracking
Engine Mechanical Checks Perform a cylinder compression check.
Check the engine for the following:
- Bent pushrods
- Worn rocker arms
- Broken or weak valve springs.
Check the intake and exhaust manifold passages for casting flash.
Fuel System Checks Check the fuel system - plugged fuel filter, low fuel pressure, etc. Refer to LPG Fuel System Diagnosis.
Check the condition of the wiring to the low pressure lock-off solenoid.
Additional Check Check for Electromagnetic Interference (EMI).
EMI on the reference circuit can cause a missing condition.
Monitoring the engine RPM with a scan tool can detect an EMI.
A sudden increase in the RPM with little change in the actual engine RPM, indicates EMI is present.
If the problem exists, check the routing of the secondary wires and the ground circuit.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-129

Checks Action
Hesitation, Sag, Stumble
DEFINITION: The vehicle has a momentary lack of response when depressing the accelerator. The condition can occur at any vehicle speed. The condition
may cause the engine to stall if it's severe enough.
Fuel System Checks Check the fuel pressure. Refer to LPG Fuel System Diagnosis.
Check for low fuel pressure during a moderate or full throttle acceleration. If the fuel pressure drops below specifica-
tion, there is possibly a faulty low pressure regulator or a restriction in the fuel system.
Check the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor response and accuracy.
Check LPL electrical connection
Check the mixer air valve for sticking or binding.
Check the mixer module assembly for proper installation and leakage.
Check the EPR electrical connections.
Ignition System Checks Note: LPG being a gaseous fuel requires higher secondary ignition system voltages for the equivalent gasoline operating
conditions. If a problem is reported on LPG and not gasoline, do not discount the possibility of a LPG only ignition system
failure and test the system accordingly.
Check for faulty spark plug wires
Check for fouled spark plugs.
Additional Check Check for manifold vacuum or air induction system leaks
Check the generator output voltage.
Backfire
DEFINITION: The fuel ignites in the intake manifold, or in the exhaust system, making a loud popping noise.
Preliminary Check Refer to Important Preliminary Checks.
Ignition System Checks Important! LPG, being a gaseous fuel, requires higher secondary ignition system voltages for the equivalent
gasoline operating conditions. The ignition system must be maintained in peak condition to prevent backfire.
Check for the proper ignition coil output voltage using the spark tester J26792 or the equivalent.
Check the spark plug wires by connecting an ohmmeter to the ends of each wire in question. If the meter reads over
30,000 ohms, replace the wires.
Check the connection at each ignition coil.
Check for deteriorated spark plug wire insulation.
Check the spark plugs. The correct spark plugs for LPG are (R42LTS)
Remove the plugs and inspect them for the following conditions:
- Wet plugs
- Cracks
- Wear
- Improper gap
- Burned electrodes
- Heavy deposits
Engine Mechanical Check Important! The LPG Fuel system works on a fumigation principle of fuel introduction and is more sensitive to intake man-
ifold leakage than a gasoline fuel supply system.
Check the engine for the following:
- Engine compression
- Manifold vacuum leaks
- Intake manifold gaskets
- Sticking or leaking valves
- Exhaust system leakage
Check the intake and exhaust system for casting flash or other restrictions.
Fuel System Checks Perform a fuel system diagnosis. Refer to LPG Fuel System Diagnosis.
3-130 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Checks Action
Lack of Power, Sluggishness, or Sponginess
DEFINITION: The engine delivers less than expected power. There is little or no increase in speed when partially applying the accelerator pedal.
Refer to the LPG Fuel system OBD System Check
Compare the customer's vehicle with a similar unit. Make sure the customer has an actual problem. Do not compare
the power output of the vehicle operating on LPG to a vehicle operating on gasoline as the fuels do have different drive
feel characteristics
Remove the air filter and check for dirt or restriction.
Check the vehicle transmission Refer to the OEM transmission diagnostics.
Fuel System Checks Check for a restricted fuel filter, contaminated fuel, or improper fuel pressure. Refer to LPG Fuel System Diagnosis.
Check for the proper ignition output voltage with the spark tester J 26792 or the equivalent.
Check for proper installation of the mixer module assembly.
Check all air inlet ducts for condition and proper installation.
Check for fuel leaks between the LPR and the mixer.
Verify that the LPG tank manual shut-off valve is fully open.
Verify that liquid fuel (not vapor) is being delivered to the LPR.
Sensor Checks Check the Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor (HEGO) for contamination and performance. Check for proper opera-
tion of the MAP sensor.
Check for proper operation of the TPS sensor.
- Check for possible plugged catalytic converter.
Engine Mechanical Check Check the engine for the following:
Engine compression
Valve timing
Improper or worn camshaft. Refer to Engine Mechanical in the Service Manual.
Additional Check Check the ECM grounds for being clean, tight, and in their proper locations.
If all procedures have been completed and no malfunction has been found, review and inspect the following items:
Visually and physically, inspect all electrical connections within the suspected circuit and/or systems.
Check the scan tool data.
Poor Fuel Economy
DEFINITION: Fuel economy, as measured by refueling records, is noticeably lower than expected. Also, the economy is noticeably lower than it was on this
vehicle at one time, as previously shown by an by refueling records.
Check the air cleaner element (filter) for dirt or being plugged.
Visually (Physically) check the vacuum hoses for splits, kinks, and proper connections.
Check the operators driving habits for the following items:
- Is there excessive idling or stop and go driving?
- Are the tires at the correct air pressure?
- Are excessively heavy loads being carried?
- Is their often rapid acceleration?
Suggest to the owner to fill the fuel tank and to recheck the fuel economy.
Suggest that a different operator use the equipment and record the results.
Fuel System Checks Check the LPR fuel pressure. Refer to LPG Fuel System Diagnosis.
Check the fuel system for leakage.
Sensor Checks Check the Temperature Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) sensor.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-131

Checks Action
Ignition System Checks Verify that the spark plugs are correct for use with LPG (R42LTS)
Check the spark plugs. Remove the plugs and inspect them for the following conditions:
- Wet plugs
- Cracks
- Wear
- Improper gap
- Burned electrodes
- Heavy deposits
Check the ignition wires for the following items:
- Cracking
- Hardness
- Proper connections
Cooling System Checks Check the engine thermostat for always being open or for the wrong heat range
Additional Check Check the transmission shift pattern. Refer to the OEM Transmission Controls section the Service Manual.
Check for dragging brakes.
Rough, Unstable, or Incorrect Idle, Stalling
DEFINITION: The engine runs unevenly at idle. If severe enough, the engine or vehicle may shake. The engine idle speed may vary in RPM. Either condition
may be severe enough to stall the engine.
Preliminary Check Refer to Important Preliminary Checks.
Sensor Checks Check for silicon contamination from fuel or improperly used sealant. The sensor will have a white powdery coating.
The sensor will result in a high but false signal voltage (rich exhaust indication). The ECM will reduce the amount of fuel
delivered to the engine causing a severe driveability problem.
Check the Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor (HEGO) performance:
Check the Temperature Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) sensor response and accuracy.
Fuel System Checks Check for rich or lean symptom that causes the condition. Drive the vehicle at the speed of the complaint. Monitoring
the oxygen sensors will help identify the problem.
Check for a sticking mixer air valve.
Verify proper operation of the EPR.
Perform a cylinder compression test. Refer to Engine Mechanical in the Service Manual.
Check the LPR fuel pressure. Refer to the LPG Fuel System Diagnosis.
Check mixer module assembly for proper installation and connection.
Ignition System Checks Check for the proper ignition output voltage using the spark tester J26792 or the equivalent.
- Wet plugs
- Cracks
- Wear
- Improper gap
- Burned electrodes
- Blistered insulators
- Heavy deposits
Check the spark plug wires by connecting an ohmmeter to the ends of each wire in question. If the meter reads over
30,000 ohms, replace the wires.
Additional Checks Important: The LPG Fuel system works on a fumigation principle of fuel introduction and is more sensitive to intake man-
Check for vacuum leaks. Vacuum leaks can cause a higher than normal idle and low throttle angle control command.
Check the ECM grounds for being clean, tight, and in their proper locations.
Check the battery cables and ground straps. They should be clean and secure. Erratic voltage may cause all sensor
readings to be skewed resulting in poor idle quality.
3-132 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Checks Action
Engine Mechanical Check Check the engine for the following:
- Broken motor mounts
- Low compression
- Bent pushrods
- Worn rocker arms
- Worn camshaft lobes
Surges/Chuggles
DEFINITION: The engine has a power variation under a steady throttle or cruise. The vehicle feels as if it speeds up and slows down with no change in the accel-
erator pedal.
Sensor Checks Check Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor (HEGO) performance.
Fuel System Checks Check for Rich or Lean symptom that causes the condition. Drive the vehicle at the speed of the complaint. Monitoring
the oxygen sensors will help identify the problem.
Check the fuel pressure while the condition exists. Refer to LPG Fuel System Diagnosis.
Verify proper fuel control solenoid operation.
Verify that the LPG manual shut-off valve is fully open.
Check the in-line fuel filter for restrictions.
Ignition System Checks Check for the proper ignition output voltage using the spark tester J26792 or the equivalent.
- Wet plugs
- Cracks
- Wear
- Improper gap
- Burned electrodes
- Heavy deposits
- Check the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor.
Additional Check Check the ECM grounds for being clean, tight, and in their proper locations.
Check the vacuum hoses for kinks or leaks.
Check Transmission
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-133

Table 3-13. DTC to SPN/FMI Cross Reference Chart
DTC Description SPN Code FMI Code

16 Crank Never Synced at Start 636 8
91 Fuel Pump Low Voltage 94 4
92 Fuel Pump High Voltage 94 3
107 MAP Low Voltage 106 4
108 MAP High Pressure 106 16
111 IAT Higher Than Expected 1 105 15
112 IAT Low Voltage 105 4
113 IAT High Voltage 105 3
116 ECT Higher Than Expected 1 110 15
117 ECT Low Voltage 110 4
118 ECT High Voltage 110 3
121 TPS 1 Lower Than TPS 2 51 1
122 TPS 1 Signal Voltage Low 51 4
123 TPS 1 Signal Voltage High 51 3
127 IAT Higher Than Expected 2 105 0
129 BP Low Pressure 108 1
134 EGO 1 Open/Inactive 724 10
154 EGO 2 Open/Inactive 520208 10
171 Adaptive Learn High Gasoline 520200 0
172 Adaptive Learn Low Gasoline 520200 1
182 Fuel Temp Gasoline Low Voltage 174 4
183 Fuel Temp Gasoline High Voltage 174 3
187 Fuel Temp LPG Low Voltage 520240 4
188 Fuel Temp LPG High Voltage 520240 3
217 ECT Higher Than Expected 2 110 0
219 Max Govern Speed Override 515 15
221 TPS 2 Signal Voltage Low 51 0
222 TPS 2 Signal Low Voltage 520251 4
223 TPS 2 Signal High Voltage 520251 3
261 Injector Driver 1 Open 651 5
262 Injector Driver 1 Shorted 651 6
336 Crank Sync Noise 636 2
337 Crank Loss 636 4
341 Cam Sync Noise 723 2
342 Cam Sensor Loss 723 4
420 Gasoline Cat Monitor 520211 10
524 Oil Pressure Low 100 1
3-134 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Table 3-13. DTC to SPN/FMI Cross Reference Chart
DTC Description SPN Code FMI Code

562 System Voltage Low 168 17
563 System Voltage High 168 15
601 Flash Checksum Invalid 628 13
604 RAM Failure 630 12
606 COP Failure 629 31
642 External 5V Reference Low 1079 4
643 External 5V Reference High 1079 3
685 Power Relay Open 1485 5
686 Power Relay Shorted 1485 4
687 Power Relay Short to Power 1485 3
1111 Fuel Rev Limit 515 16
1112 Spark Rev Limit 515 0
1151 Closed Loop Multiplier High LPG 520206 0
1152 Closed Loop Multiplier Low LPG 520206 1
1155 Closed Loop Multiplier High Gasoline 520204 0
1156 Closed Loop Multiplier Low Gasoline 520204 1
1161 Adaptive Learn High LPG 520202 0
1162 Adaptive Learn Low LPG 520202 1
1165 LPG Cat Monitor 520213 10
1171 LPG Pressure Higher Than Expected 520260 0
1172 LPG Pressure Lower Than Expected 520260 1
1173 EPR Comm Lost 520260 31
1174 EPR Voltage Supply High 520260 3
1175 EPR Voltage Supply Low 520260 4
1176 EPR Internal Actuator Fault 520260 12
1177 EPR Internal Circuitry Fault 520260 12
1178 EPR Internal Comm Fault 520260 12
1612 RTI 1 loss 629 31
1613 RTI 2 Loss 629 31
1614 RTI 3 Loss 629 31
1615 A/D Loss 629 31
1616 Invalid Interrupt 629 31
1625 Shutdown Request 1384 31
1626 CAN Tx Failure 639 12
1627 CAN Rx Failure 639 12
1628 CAN Address Conflict Failure 639 13
1629 Loss of TSC 1 639 31
2111 Unable to Reach Lower TPS 51 7
2112 Unable to Reach Higher TPS 51
2135 TPS 1/2 Simultaneous Voltages 51 31
2229 BP Pressure High 108 0
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-135

1. Battery 6. O2 Sensor 11. Gear Pump

2. Coolant Overflow 7. Crankshaft Position Sensor 12. Motor Mount
3. Air Cleaner 8. Oil Drain Valve 13. Start/Aux Power Relays
4. Radiator 9. Muffler 14. Engine Tray Pivot
5. Alternator 10. Piston Pump 15. Auxiliary Pump
Figure 3-81. GM 3.0L Engine - Sheet 1 of 2
3-136 – JLG Lift – 3120895

16. O2 Sensor 21. Oil Filter 26. Mixer

17. Dipstick 22. Water Pump 27. PCV Valve
18. Control Module 23. Coolant Sensor 28. Oil Pressure Switch
19. Starter 24. Pressure Regulator 29. Coil
20. Distributor 25. MAP Sensor 30. Fuel Filter
Figure 3-82. GM 3.0L Engine - Sheet 2 of 2
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-137

3.29 PERKINS ENGINE GENERAL 5. Install a new spring (3).
MAINTENANCE 6. Install the breather cover (2) and the four screws (1).
Tighten the screws.
Replacing the Engine Crankcase Breather
Engine Oil Level - Check
KEEP ALL PARTS CLEAN FROM CONTAMINANTS. CONTAMI-

NANTS MAY CAUSE RAPID WEAR AND SHORTENED COMPONENT HOT OIL AND HOT COMPONENTS CAN CAUSE PERSONAL
LIFE. INJURY. DO NOT ALLOW HOT OIL OR HOT COMPONENTS TO
CONTACT THE SKIN.
NOTE: Perform this maintenance with the engine stopped.
1. Maintain the oil level between "ADD" mark (Y) and

"FULL" mark (X) on oil level gauge (1). Do not fill the
crankcase above "FULL" mark (X).
NOTE: Operating your engine when the oil level is above the
"FULL" mark could cause your crankshaft to dip into
the oil. The air bubbles created from the crankshaft
dipping into the oil reduces the oil's lubricating char-
acteristics and could result in the loss of power.
1. Screws for the breather cover 2. Remove the oil filler cap and add oil, if necessary.
2. Breather cover Clean the oil filler cap. Install the oil filler cap.
3. Spring
4. Diaphragm and plate Engine Oil and Filter - Change
5. Cavity
6. Vent hole
Figure 3-83. Crankcase Breather - Perkins HOT OIL AND HOT COMPONENTS CAN CAUSE PERSONAL
INJURY. DO NOT ALLOW HOT OIL OR HOT COMPONENTS TO
1. Loosen the screws (1) and remove the breather CONTACT THE SKIN.
cover (2) from the valve mechanism cover.
2. Remove the spring (3). Remove the diaphragm and
plate (4). CARE MUST BE TAKEN TO ENSURE THAT FLUIDS ARE CON-
TAINED DURING PERFORMANCE OF INSPECTION, MAINTE-
3. Clean the vent hole (6) and the cavity (5) in the valve NANCE, TESTING, ADJUSTING AND REPAIR OF THE PRODUCT.
mechanism cover. BE PREPARED TO COLLECT THE FLUID WITH SUITABLE CON-
TAINERS BEFORE OPENING ANY COMPARTMENT OR DISASSEM-
BLING ANY COMPONENT CONTAINING FLUIDS.
MAKE SURE THAT THE COMPONENTS OF THE BREATHER
ASSEMBLY ARE INSTALLED CORRECTLY. ENGINE DAMAGE MAY DISPOSE OF ALL FLUIDS ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATIONS
OCCUR IF THE BREATHER ASSEMBLY IS NOT WORKING COR- AND MANDATES.
RECTLY.
NOTE: Keep all parts clean from contaminants.
4. Install a new diaphragm and plate (4) for the
breather assembly into the cavity (5) of the valve Contaminants may cause rapid wear and shortened
mechanism cover. component life.
3-138 – JLG Lift – 3120895

* 2
** 4
* Torque to 10 ft. lbs. (13.5 Nm)

** Torque to 21 ft. lbs. (28.5 Nm)
1. Dipstick 5. Oil Drain Valve

2. Crankcase Breather 6. Oil Filter
3. Coolant Sensor 7. Speed Sensor
4. Oil Pressure Sensor 8. Fuel Filter
Figure 3-84. Perkins Engine
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-139

Do not drain the oil when the engine is cold. As the oil Fuel Filter/Water Separator
cools, suspended waste particles settle on the bottom of
the oil pan. The waste particles are not removed with the
draining cold oil. Drain the crankcase with the engine
stopped. Drain the crankcase with the oil warm. This
draining method allows the waste particles that are sus-
pended in the oil to be drained correctly.
Failure to follow this recommended procedure will cause
the waste particles to be recirculated through the engine
lubrication system with the new oil.
DRAINING THE ENGINE OIL
After the engine has been run at the normal operating
temperature, stop the engine. Turn the drain valve knob
counterclockwise in order to drain the oil. After the oil has
drained, turn the drain valve knob clockwise in order to 1. Cap
close the drain valve. 2. Locking Ring
FILLING THE ENGINE CRANKCASE 3. Element
4. Water Separator Bowl
1. Remove the oil filler cap. Refer to the Operation and 5. Drain
Maintenance Manual for more information on lubri- Figure 3-85. Fuel Filter/Water Separator
cant specifications. Fill the crankcase with the cor-
rect amount of oil. Refer to the Operation and
Maintenance Manual for more information on refill
capacities.
FUEL LEAKED OR SPILLED ONTO HOT SURFACES OR ELECTRI-
CAL COMPONENTS CAN CAUSE A FIRE. TO HELP PREVENT POS-
SIBLE INJURY, TURN THE START SWITCH OFF WHEN CHANGING
UNDERFILLING OR OVERFILLING THE CRANKCASE WITH OIL FUEL FILTERS OR WATER SEPARATOR ELEMENTS. CLEAN UP
CAN CAUSE ENGINE DAMAGE. FUEL SPILLS IMMEDIATELY.
THE WATER SEPARATOR IS NOT A FILTER. THE WATER SEPARA-

TO PREVENT CRANKSHAFT BEARING DAMAGE, CRANK THE
TOR SEPARATES WATER FROM THE FUEL. THE ENGINE SHOULD
ENGINE WITH THE FUEL OFF. THIS WILL FILL THE OIL FILTERS
NEVER BE ALLOWED TO RUN WITH THE WATER SEPARATOR
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE. DO NOT CRANK THE ENGINE
MORE THAN HALF FULL. ENGINE DAMAGE MAY RESULT.
FOR MORE THAN 30 SECONDS.
1. Open the drain at the bottom of the separator. Catch
2. Start the engine and run the engine at "LOW IDLE"
the draining water in a suitable container. Properly
for two minutes. Perform this procedure in order to
dispose of the drained water.
ensure that the lubrication system has oil and that
the oil filters are filled. Inspect the oil filter for oil 2. Close the drain.
leaks.
3. Stop the engine and allow the oil to drain back to the
sump for a minimum often minutes. THE WATER SEPARATOR IS UNDER SUCTION DURING NORMAL
ENGINE OPERATION. ENSURE THE DRAIN VALVE IS SECURELY
4. Remove the oil level gauge in order to check the oil
TIGHTENED TO HELP PREVENT AIR FROM ENTERING THE FUEL
level. Maintain the oil level between the "MIN" and
SYSTEM.
"MAX" marks on the oil level gauge.
3-140 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Setting the Actuator

1. Remove the bolt from the control linkage DURING THIS PROCEDURE IT’S VERY IMPORTANT TO KEEP THE
CONTROL LINKAGE PUSHED AGAINST THE STOP.
3. Once the adjustments have been made to align the

spherical rod end bearing with the control linkage
bolt hole, lengthen the actuator linkage by continu-
ing to turn the spherical rod end and threaded rod 2-
2 ½ turns (1-1 ¼ turns of spherical rod end and 1-1
¼ turns of threaded rod.) This will provide 1/8” (3
mm) preload.
2. With the control linkage pushed against the idle Use a measuring device to ensure the preload is
stop, begin to make adjustments to the actuator link- approximately 1/8” (3 mm), then secure the actuator
age in order to align the bearing of the spherical rod linkage to the control linkage with original bolt and
end with the control linkage bolt hole. When making nut. Make sure the spherical ball is seated in the
linkage adjustments, thread the spherical rod end control linkage bolt hole.
and threaded rod evenly (for every turn of spherical
rod end, turn the threaded rod.) Tighten the 2 nuts on the threaded rod of the actua-
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-141

tor linkage and using two wrenches to prevent bind- 3.30 ENGINE RADIATOR FILL PROCEDURE -
ing of clevis heads.
PERKINS & CATERPILLAR
DUE TO THE CONFIGURATION OF THE COOLING SYSTEM, SOME

ENGINES REQUIRE A SPECIAL RADIATOR FILL PROCEDURE.
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THIS PROCEDURE CAN RESULT IN DAM-
AGE TO THE ENGINE.
THE FOLLOWING FILL PROCEDURE SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED

WHEN THE ENGINE IS COLD.
ENGINE COOLANT IS UNDER PRESSURE. DO NOT REMOVE THE

RADIATOR CAP WHILE THE ENGINE IS WARM.
NOTE: If the radiator cap is removed at any time after the fol-
Speed Sensor Installation lowing steps are performed, coolant will flow out
NOTE: A new speed sensor comes with two hex nuts. regardless of whether the engine is cold or hot.
1.Remove the radiator cap and the reservoir cap.

1. Remove one hex nut from the speed sensor and dis-
card it.
2. Install the speed sensor into the housing until it con-
tacts the flywheel.
2.Fill the radiator to the top. Allow enough time for the
coolant to properly settle into the radiator and add
3. Back off the sensor 1/4 to 3/4 turn and ensure the coolant as necessary to top off the radiator.
sensor flats are vertical and tighten the nut.
3.Install the radiator cap back on the radiator.
3-142 – JLG Lift – 3120895

4.Remove the plug from the adapter and add coolant at 8. Make sure the coolant reaches the hot level line on the
this location until the radiator hose is full of coolant. coolant recovery reservoir. Add coolant as needed.
5.Using sealant JLG P/N 0100020 (Loctite #567), install

the plug back into the adapter.
IF THE RADIATOR CAP IS REMOVED AND COOLANT IS LOST,
6.Remove the fill cap and fill the coolant recovery reser- REPEAT THIS PROCEDURE TO ENSURE THE COOLING SYSTEM
voir to the cold level line. Put the fill cap back on the IS FILLED TO THE PROPER LEVEL.
reservoir when done.
7.Start the engine and run it long enough to bring the

coolant up to operating temperature. Turn off the
engine.
ENGINE COOLANT IS UNDER PRESURE. DO NOT REMOVE THE RADI-

ATOR CAP WHILE THE ENGINE IS WARM.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-143

3.31 DGC DIAGNOSTIC SUPPORT AND Diesel Governor Control (DGC) engine control module
(ECM) for use on industrial engines.
TROUBLE CODE DEFINITIONS
This section defines the diagnostics and recommended
Section Layout
troubleshooting procedures associated with an EControls This section is organized in the following manner:
DTC XXXX- Diagnostic Condition
Block Diagram of Circuit
External Hardware Input/Output- This identifies the hardware that either sends an input
to the ECM or is driven by and ECM output.
Check Condition- This defines what condition to troubleshoot the fault condition.
Fault Condition(s)- This identifies the condition(s) that set the fault.
Corrective Action(s)- This identifies the RECOMMENED corrective action(s) that the
ECM is generally programmed to perform. In some instances, the calibration
engineer(s) may choose to perform a different action.
Emissions or Non-emissions related fault
Text to identify the circuit of interest and its use for control.
Text to describe t he conditions that cause the fault to set.
DTC XXXX- Diagnostic Condition
Note: Helpful tips used to aid troubleshooting
Yes
Troubleshooting flow
chart
No
3-144 – JLG Lift – 3120895

List of Abbreviations in this Section

AL Adaptive Learn LED Light Emitting Diode
BP Barometric Pressure LPG Liquefied Propane Gas
CAN Controller Area Network MAP Manifold Absolute Pressure
CCP CAN Calibration Protocol MGCP Marine Global Control Platform
CHT Cylinder Head Temperature μP Microprocessor
CL Closed Loop Mfg Manufacture
CNG Compressed Natural Gas MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp
DBW Drive-By-Wire NG Natural Gas
DGC Diesel Governor Control OBD On-Board Diagnostics
DM Diagnostic Message OEM Original Equipment Manufacture
DMM Digital Multi-Meter (high impedance) PC Personal Computer
DST Diagnostic Scan Tool PCU Powertrain Control Unit
DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code PFI Port Fuel Injection
DVOM Digital Voltage and Ohm Meter (high impedance) PGN Parameter Group Number
ECI EControls Inc. PWM Pulse Width Modulated
ECIPP EControls Inc. Proprietary Protocol RAM Random Access Memory
ECM Engine Control Module RPM Revolutions Per Minute
ECT Engine Coolant Temperature Rx Receive
ECU Engine Control Unit SAE Society of Automotive Engineering
EDIS EControls Display and Interface Software SA Source Address
EGO Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor, typically heated SPFI Sequential Port Fuel Injection
EMWT Exhaust Manifold Water Temperature SPN Suspect Parameter Number
EPR Electronic Pressure Regulator Tach Tachometer
ERWT Exhaust Manifold Riser Temperature TBI Throttle Body Injection
ETB Electronic Throttle Body TDC Top Dead Center
ETC Electronic Throttle Control TIP Throttle Inlet Pressure
FDR Flight Data Recorder TPS Throttle Position Sensor
FMI Failure Mode Indicator TSC Torque/Speed Control
FO Firing Order Tx Transmit
Universal Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor

FP Fuel Pressure UEGO
(also called wide-range EGO)
FPP Foot Pedal Position VDC Voltage, Direct Current
FRP Fuel Rail Pressure VR Variable Reluctance

FRT Fuel Rail Temperature Vsw Switched, Ignition Voltage
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-145

FSS Fault Snapshot WGP Waste-Gate Pressure
FT Fuel Temperature
GCP Global Control Platform
Heavy-Duty Global Control Platform

HDGCP
(On-Road Heavy-Duty)
HEGO Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor (same as HO2S)
HO2S Heated Oxygen Sensor (same as HEGO)
IAC Idle Air Control
IAT Intake Air Temperature
ICAV Instant Crank Angle Velocity
IVS Idle Validation Switch
Light-Duty Global Control Platform (Industrial, Smart/

LDGCP
Logic Coil)
Fault Code Broadcast • DM12: Emissions-Related Active Diagnostic Trouble

Codes
All diagnostic trouble codes are broadcast through EDIS
• DM19: Calibration Information
for display on a PC. EDIS can acquire the data from the
ECU via CAN using the EControls Inc. Proprietary Proto- All diagnostic trouble codes broadcast over CAN will be
col (ECIPP). Faults may also be acquired over the CAN SAE J1939 DM1 and DM2 formatted messages. DGC
network through CAN J1939-based scan tools or multi- ECMs are compliant with J1939 OBD-M, supporting the
function display units. Diagnostic Messages above as well as user indicators and
CAN data defined in the OBD-M protocol. Faults available
Diagnostic Trouble Codes for broadcast and their respective SPN/FMI numbers are
dependent on the application and engine calibration.
The numeric diagnostic trouble codes assigned to the There are 4 CAN SPN/FMI lists available in the DGC soft-
faults in this manual are cross-referenced to SAE.s "Rec- ware set, contact EControls Inc. for a list of CAN SPN/
ommended Practice for Diagnostic Trouble Code Defini- FMIs.
tions" (SAE J2012). While these codes are recommended,
customers may define their own codes by assigning a The data capture at the occurrence of a fault, known in the
new number to the flash code in the diagnostic calibra- ECM as fault snapshot (FSS), is available upon DM4
tion. This will assign both the DTC as displayed in EDIS as request. The following bytes are supported for DM4 if con-
well as the flash code output on the MIL output pin. EDIS figured in the ECM software:
may be used to connect to the DGC ECM via CAN.
• Byte 1: Freeze Frame Length
CAN • Byte 2-6: SPN, FMI, SPN Conversion Method, and
Occurrence
The DGC supports SAE J1939 CAN based diagnostic
support. This includes: • Byte 7: Manifold Absolute Pressure
• DM1: Active Diagnostic Trouble Codes • Byte 8-9: Engine Speed
• DM2: Previously Active Diagnostic Trouble Codes • Byte 10: Engine Load (MAP based estimate)
• DM3: Diagnostic Data Clear/Reset of Previously Active • Byte 11: Engine Coolant Temperature
DTCs • Byte 14: # of starts since fault was last active
• DM4: Freeze Frame Parameters • Byte 15: Index into FSS_storage table for Fault Snap
• DM5: Diagnostic Readiness (bytes 1, 2, and 3 are sup- Shot retrieval
ported) Resetting active and previously active DTCs is handled
• DM11: Diagnostic Data Clear/Reset For Active DTCs through DM11 and DM3, respectively DM1 and DM2 lamp
indicators are assigned to each fault based on the fault.s
diagnostic action as defined in the calibration. The lamps
3-146 – JLG Lift – 3120895

are assigned based on the configuration outlined in Table MIL Output

3-14.
The MIL output is used to convey fault information to the
Table 3-14. J1939 Diagnostic Lamp Configuration equipment operator. The MIL is always on (grounded)
when the system is in a key-on (Vsw), engine-off state.
ECI DIAGNOSTIC ACTION J1939 LAMP This provides assurance that the output is functional. If a
DTC is logged as previously-active (historic), the MIL will
MIL MIL send a single flash for the “Blink on-time” every “Blink off-
Soft Warning Amber time.”
Hard Warning, Low Rev Limit,

Red Stop
Diagnostic Calibration Configuration and
Shutdown
Corrective Actions
Power Derate 1 & 2 Protect
Each fault within the DGC is capable of being uniquely
None (use in combination with configured in the engine.s diagnostic calibration to cause
Forced Idle one or more corrective actions while a given fault is active.
other action)
Table 2 identifies the configuration options and corrective
actions available for configuration of each fault. The
desired action is set by the OEM calibration engineers.
Table 3-15. Diagnostic Corrective Actions
CORRECTIVE ACTION DESCRIPTION
Enable Enables the fault for fault detection
Shutdown Cause an engine shutdown when fault becomes active
Never Forget Retain fault as historic/previously active until cleared by a technician and does not allow historic fault to be “auto-cleared”
Turn on MIL Turn on MIL output when fault becomes active
CL Disable Disable closed-loop while the fault is active
CL Disable Key- Cyc Disable closed-loop while the fault is active and for the remainder of the key cycle
AL Disable Disable adaptive learn while the fault is active
AL Disable Key-Cyc Disable adaptive learn while the fault is active and for the remainder of the key cycle
Limit TPS to the Power Derate 1 percent set in the diagnostic calibration while the fault is active. The Power Derate 1 TPS
Power Derate 1
percent should be set higher than Power Derate 2 as Power Derate 2 adds a higher level of protection.
Limit TPS to the Power Derate 2 percent set in the diagnostic calibration while the fault is active. If the calibration is set to
Power Derate 2 “Latched for Key-Cycle” Power Derate 2 remains active until engine speed and FPP conditions are satisfied. The Power
Derate 2 TPS percent should be set lower than Power Derate 1 as Power Derate 2 adds a higher level of protection.
Limit RPM to the Low Rev Limit speed set in the diagnostic calibration while the fault is active. If the calibration is set to
Low Rev Limit
“Latched for Key-Cycle” Low Rev Limit remains active until engine speed and FPP conditions are satisfied.
Limit RPM to the Forced Idle speed set in the diagnostic calibration while the fault is active and for the remainder of the key
Forced Idle
cycle
Soft Warning Turn on the soft warning output when the fault becomes active
Hard Warning Turn on the hard warning output when the fault becomes active
Run fault detection/checking while the engine is in a key-on, engine-off condition. NOTE: It is recommended that this fea-
Stopped Check
ture only be used for general sensor faults (high/low voltage) and some output drivers
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-147

Fault/Diagnostic Trouble Code Interaction may not be active in real-time. Once a fault has become
active, it is immediately logged as historic and a snapshot
All fault and diagnostic information is managed through and flight data log is saved. Figure 3-86. shows an exam-
the Faults page. Interaction includes viewing fault mes- ple of the fault page when an active fault has been gener-
sages, downloading fault data (fault snapshot and flight ated. Notice that the fault is present in both the active and
data recorder), erasing faults from memory, and defining historic lists and the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has
variables for fault data logging. been illuminated. Figure 3-87. shows an example of the
fault page with a historic fault stored in memory.
Faults are separated into two categories, Active and His-
toric. Active faults are active in real-time and historic faults
have been generated at some instance in time that may or
Base Fault snapshot

variable definitions
(CAN NOT be altered)
Custom Fault Snapshot

variable definitions (User
Defined)
Base Flight Data

Recorder variable
definitions (CAN
NOT be altered)
Custom Flight Data
Recorder variable
definitions (User Defined)
Figure 3-86. Faults Page with Active Fault Message
3-148 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Figure 3-87. Faults Page with Historic Fault Message
Once an active fault has occurred two sets of data are Both sets of data are accessed from the Historic Fault
recorded, fault snapshot and flight data recorder. The fault Information interface and can be saved to the PC upon
snapshot (FSS) is a sample of data taken at the instance retrieval. Base variables for FSS and FDR are generally
the fault triggered. Variables included in the FSS are defined by the OEM to include variables most often refer-
defined in the Snapshot Base and Snapshot Custom Defi- enced during fault diagnosis. The base definitions are not
nition fields found on the Faults Page. A FSS is saved with fault dependent. Additional variables may be selected for
each of the first eight (8) faults for the first time the fault capture during a fault occurrence through a single, left-
becomes active. Conversely, the flight data recorder click of the custom table and selecting the desired vari-
(FDR) is a ten-second stream of data that includes eight- ables from a list. An example of custom fault variable defi-
seconds prior and two-seconds after triggering the fault. nitions is shown in Figure 3-88.
An FDR is saved for each of the first two (2) faults for the
first time the fault becomes active. Variables included in
the FDR are defined in the Flight Data Base and Flight
Data Custom Definition fields found on the Faults Page.
The memory location of the FDR is RAM, therefore this
data is only available if the ECM has not lost battery
power. In addition, if there is a “Dirty Flash Page” in the
ECM, the FDR data will not be available. The memory
location of the FSS data is EEPROM and is retained when
the ECM loses battery power.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-149

Figure 3-88. Custom Fault Variable Interface
Accessing fault information is accomplished through a Figure 3-91. shows the Flight Data Recorder interface after
double left-click of the fault LED in the historic fault list. View Flight Data Recorder is selected. The FDR captures a
This produces the Historic Fault Information interface ten second (eight seconds prior and two seconds after
shown in Figure 3-89. From this interface the user can generating the fault) strip of data for base and custom
interpret a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) message, iden- variables. FDR data is presented in an interface similar to
tify whether or not the fault occurred during the current the Plot interface for a quick graphical presentation. From
key cycle, identify if the fault caused the engine to shut- this interface, the FDR data may be saved to the PC in
down, determine how many key cycles have occurred text, tab-delimited format with an .fdr file extension. Once
since the fault was last active, clear selected or all historic saved to PC, FDR data may be reviewed using any graph-
faults, and view snapshot and flight data. Table 3-16 out- ical post-processing software capable of handling tab-
lines the options displayed in the Historic Fault Informa- delimited formatting.
tion screen. Historic faults are not overwritten if the same
Fault information may be manually erased using the
fault becomes active, storing data from the original active
“Clear” button functions. Once a “Clear” function has
fault.
been selected, the dialog prompt shown in Figure 3-92.
Figure 3-90. is an example of a fault snapshot after View will be displayed. Choosing YES deletes all fault informa-
Fault Snapshot is selected. Data is presented in two col- tion from the ECM.
umns, base and custom variables. Once retrieved, the
FSS data may be saved to the PC in text format with an
.fss extension. A FSS saved to a PC may be reviewed in
any ASCII based software program.
3-150 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Figure 3-89. Historic Fault Information Interface
Table 3-16. Historic Fault Information Interface Functions
Fault Description Message Box Customized text that references the DTC flash code and describes the fault.
Fault During Key Cycle Checkbox Informs that the fault occurred during the current key-on event.
Fault Caused Engine Shutdown Checkbox Informs that the fault caused the engine to shutdown.
Key Cycles Since Fault Active Indicator Displays the amount of key-on events since the fault was last active.
Clear This Fault Button* Erases the selected historic fault from the ECM.
Clear All Faults Button* Erases all historic faults from the ECM.
View Snap Shot Data Button Retrieves a data “snap shot” from the ECM for variables defined in the base and custom
snapshot variable definition lists. An example of a fault snap shot is shown in Figure 5.
View Flight Data Recorder Data Button Retrieves a 10-second data strip chart (8 seconds prior, 2seconds after fault trigger) from
the ECM for variables defined in the base and custom flight data recorder definition lists. An
example of a fault snap shot is shown in Figure 6.
Close Button Exits the Historic Fault Information interface. DOES NOT cancel or clear any faults.
* Snapshot and flight data recorder data for historic faults is erased after the prompt shown in Figure 3-92. is satisfied
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-151

Figure 3-90. Snapshot Data Interface
Figure 3-91. Flight Data Recorder Interface
3-152 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Figure 3-92. Clear Faults Prompt
DBW Diagnostic Test

The DGC engine control module incorporates a diagnos-
tic test that may be used to verify proper drive-by-wire
throttle actuator operation. This diagnostic test is software
selectable through the EDIS using the ECIPP protocol.
This test permits full-authority operation of an electronic
throttle via the throttle command input while the engine is
in the “Stopped” state only. The ECM reverts to normal
operation if “Off” state is selected, ignition voltage is lost,
or engine speed is sensed.
To enable the test, go to the DBW page of the EDIS. Set
“DBW test mode” to “Enabled”. Double-click on the “TPS
Command” setting and enter the desired DBW throttle
actuator position. Under normal operation, the throttle
actuator should move to the position entered. To disable
the test, set “DBW test mode” to “Off.”
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-153

3.32 DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE FAULT

DESCRIPTIONS
DTC 116- ECT Higher Than Expected Stage 1
• Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Diagnostic Aids

• Check Condition-Engine Running If the "ECT High Voltage" fault is also present, follow the
• Fault Condition-Engine Coolant Temperature reading troubleshooting procedures for that fault as it may have
or estimate greater than the stage 1 limit when operat- caused "ECT Higher Than Expected 1."
ing at a speed greater than defined in the diagnostic If the cooling system utilizes an air-to-water heat
calibration exchanger (radiator) and fan:
• Corrective Action(s): Sound audible warning or illumi-
• Check that the radiator has a proper amount of ethyl-
nate secondary warning lamp, disable adaptive learn
ene glycol/water and that the radiator is not leaking
fueling correction during active fault. Recommend a
power derate 1/2 and/or a low rev limit to protect • Ensure that there is no trapped air in the cooling path
engine from possible damage. • Inspect the cooling system (radiator and hoses) for
• Non-emissions related fault cracks and ensure connections are leak free
The Engine Coolant Temperature sensor is a thermistor • Check that the fan is operating properly
(temperature sensitive resistor) located in the engine cool- • Check that the thermostat is not stuck closed
ant. Some engines use a CHT sensor that is located in the
coolant in the cylinder head. Some engines use an ECT If the cooling system utilizes a water-to-water heat
(Engine Coolant Temperature) sensor that is located in the exchanger:
coolant near the thermostat. If the engine is equipped with • Check that the heat exchanger has a proper amount of
a CHT sensor then the ECT value is estimated. If equipped ethylene glycol/water and that the heat exchanger is
with an ECT sensor then the CHT value is estimated. They not leaking
are used for engine airflow calculation, ignition timing con-
trol, to enable certain features, and for engine protection. • Ensure that there is no trapped air in the cooling path
The ECM provides a voltage divider circuit so when the • Inspect the cooling system (radiator and hoses) for
sensor reading is cool the sensor reads higher voltage, cracks and ensure connections are leak free
and lower when warm.
• Check that the raw water pickup is not blocked/
This fault will help protect the engine in the event of over restricted by debris and that the hose is tightly con-
temperature. When the coolant exceeds x deg. F and nected
engine RPM exceeds y RPM for the latch time this fault will
set. • Check that the thermostat is not stuck closed
• Check that the raw water pump/impeller is tact and that
it is not restricted
3-154 – JLG Lift – 3120895

DTC 117- ECT/CHT Low Voltage
• Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor The Engine Coolant Temperature sensor is a thermistor
(temperature sensitive resistor) located in the engine cool-
• Check Condition-Engine Running
ant. Some engines use an ECT sensor that is located in
• Fault Condition-CHT/ECT sensor voltage less than the the coolant near the thermostat. Some engines use a CHT
limit defined in the diagnostic calibration (Cylinder Head Temperature) sensor that is located in the
• Corrective Action(s)- Sound audible warning or illumi- coolant in the cylinder head. If the engine is equipped with
nate secondary warning lamp, disable adaptive learn an ECT sensor then the CHT value is estimated. If
fueling correction during active fault, or any combina- equipped with a CHT sensor then the ECT value is esti-
tion thereof as defined in calibration. Recommend a mated. The ECM provides a voltage divider circuit so that
power derate 1/2 to reduce the possibility of engine when the coolant is cool, the signal reads higher voltage,
damage due to the inability to sense temperature. and lower when warm.
• Non-emissions related fault This fault will set if the signal voltage is less than the limit
defined in the diagnostic calibration anytime the engine is
running. The limit is generally set to 0.10 VDC. The ECM
will use a default value for the CHT/ECT sensor in the
event of this fault.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-155

3-156 – JLG Lift – 3120895

DTC 118- ECT/CHT High Voltage
• Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor The Engine Coolant Temperature sensor is a thermistor
ant. Some engines use an ECT sensor that is located in
• Fault Condition-CHT/ECT sensor voltage higher than the coolant near the thermostat. Some engines use a CHT
the limit defined in the diagnostic calibration (Cylinder Head Temperature) sensor that is located in the
• Corrective Action(s)- Sound audible warning or illumi- coolant in the cylinder head. If the engine is equipped with
nate secondary warning lamp, disable adaptive learn an ECT sensor then the CHT value is estimated. If
fueling correction during active fault, or any combina- equipped with a CHT sensor then the ECT value is esti-
tion thereof as defined in calibration. Recommend a mated. The ECM provides a voltage divider circuit so that
power derate 1/2 to reduce the possibility of engine when the coolant is cool, the signal reads higher voltage,
damage due to the inability to sense temperature. and lower when warm.
• Non-emissions related fault This fault will set if the signal voltage is higher than the
high voltage limit as defined in the diagnostic calibration
anytime the engine is running. The limit is generally set to
4.90 VDC. In many cases, this condition is caused by the
CHT/ECT sensor being disconnected from the engine har-
ness, an open-circuit or short-to-power of the CHT/ECT
circuit in the wire harness, or a failure of the sensor. The
ECM will use a default value for the CHT/ECT sensor in
the event of this fault.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-157

3-158 – JLG Lift – 3120895

DTC 122- TPS1 Signal Voltage Low
DBW+
+ 1
Motor H-Bridge
DBW-
- 2
TPS1 5V_ext
16
Vs=+5 VDC
TPS SER +
12
Serial
xmitter TPS SER -
13
ECM
5V_rtn
19
Electronic Throttle
Actuator w/Serial
Position Feedback
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-159

• Throttle Position Sensor 1 There are two types of throttle actuators;

• Check Condition-Key On, Engine Off 1) actuator with analog position feedback and
• Fault Condition-TPS1 sensor voltage lower than the 2) actuator with digital position feedback
limit defined in the diagnostic calibration
The first type, with analog position feedback, provides an
• Corrective Action(s): Sound audible warning or illumi- analog return signal between 0 and 5 volts that is propor-
nate secondary warning lamp, shutdown engine tional to the throttle actuator position. The second type,
• Non-emissions related fault with digital position feedback, provides a serial data signal
to the ECM with the throttle actuator position voltage level
In the case of a diesel engine, an actuator controls a fuel encoded in the data stream.
injection pump, directly affecting the fueling level into the
cylinders. This may be by direct manipulation of the fuel This fault will set if TPS1 voltage is lower than the low volt-
injection pump rack or by manipulation of the mechanical age limit as defined in the diagnostic calibration at any
governor control level or "throttle arm." In the DGC ECM operating condition while the engine is cranking or run-
and EDIS, references to the throttle and throttle position ning. The limit is generally set to 4.90 VDC. In many
sensor refer to these fuel injection pump control actuators cases, this condition is caused by the TPS sensor being
and their position feedback sensors. When the fuel injec- disconnected from the engine harness, an open-circuit or
tion pump is electronically controlled it can be used to short-to-ground of the TPS circuit in the wire harness, or a
control the idle stability and limit engine speed based on failure of the sensor. This fault should be configured to
operating conditions. trigger an engine shutdown and the engine will not start
with this fault active.
The Throttle Position Sensor uses either;
1) a variable resistor and voltage divider circuit or
2) a non-contact hall-effect sensor to determine throttle
actuator position, and is located within the throttle actua-
tor.
3-160 – JLG Lift – 3120895

3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-161

DTC 123- TPS1 Signal Voltage High
DBW+
+ 1
Motor H-Bridge
DBW-
- 2
TPS1 5V_ext
16
Vs=+5 VDC
TPS SER +
12
Serial
xmitter TPS SER -
13
ECM
5V_rtn
19
Electronic Throttle
Actuator w/Serial
Position Feedback
• Throttle Position Sensor 1 and their position feedback sensors. When the fuel injec-
tion pump is electronically controlled it can be used to
• Check Condition-Key On, Engine Off
control the idle stability and limit engine speed based on
• Fault Condition-TPS1 sensor voltage higher than the operating conditions.
limit defined in the diagnostic calibration
The Throttle Position Sensor uses either;
nate secondary warning lamp, shutdown engine 1) a variable resistor and voltage divider circuit or
• Non-emissions related fault 2) a non-contact hall-effect sensor to determine throttle

actuator position, and is located within the throttle actua-
In the case of a diesel engine, an actuator controls a fuel tor.
injection pump, directly affecting the fueling level into the
cylinders. This may be by direct manipulation of the fuel There are two types of throttle actuators, 1) actuator with
injection pump rack or by manipulation of the mechanical analog position feedback and 2) actuator with digital posi-
governor control level or "throttle arm." In the DGC ECM tion feedback. The first type, with analog position feed-
and EDIS, references to the throttle and throttle position back, provides an analog return signal between 0 and 5
sensor refer to these fuel injection pump control actuators volts that is proportional to the throttle actuator position.
3-162 – JLG Lift – 3120895

The second type, with digital position feedback, provides ally set to 4.90 VDC. In many cases, this condition is
a serial data signal to the ECM with the throttle actuator caused by a short-to-power of the TPS circuit in the wire
position voltage level encoded in the data stream. harness or a failure of the sensor. This fault should be con-
figured to trigger an engine shutdown and the engine will
This fault will set if TPS1 voltage is higher than the limit set
not start with this fault active.
in the diagnostic calibration at any operating condition
while the engine is cranking or running. The limit is gener-
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-163

DTC 217- ECT Higher Than Expected 2
• Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Diagnostic Aids

If the "ECT High Voltage" fault is also present, follow the
• Fault Condition-Engine Coolant Temperature reading troubleshooting procedures for that fault as it may have
or estimate greater than the stage 2 limit when operat- caused "ECT Higher Than Expected 2."
ing at a speed greater than defined in the diagnostic
calibration If the cooling system utilizes an air-to-water heat
exchanger (radiator) and fan:
• Corrective Action(s)- Sound audible warning or illumi-
nate secondary warning lamp, disable adaptive learn • Check that the radiator has a proper amount of ethyl-
fueling correction during active fault. Recommend a ene glycol/water and that the radiator is not leaking
power derate 2 and/or a forced idle or engine shut- • Ensure that there is no trapped air in the cooling path
down to protect engine from possible damage.
• Inspect the cooling system (radiator and hoses) for
• Non-emissions related fault cracks and ensure connections are leak free
The Engine Coolant Temperature sensor is a thermistor • Check that the fan is operating properly
• Check that the thermostat is not stuck closed
ant. Some engines use a CHT sensor that is located in the
coolant in the cylinder head. Some engines use an ECT If the cooling system utilizes a water-to-water heat
(Engine Coolant Temperature) sensor that is located in the exchanger:
coolant near the thermostat. If the engine is equipped with • Check that the heat exchanger has a proper amount of
a CHT sensor then the ECT value is estimated. If equipped ethylene glycol/water and that the heat exchanger is
with an ECT sensor then the CHT value is estimated. The not leaking
ECM provides a voltage divider circuit so when the sensor
reading is cool the sensor reads higher voltage, and lower • Ensure that there is no trapped air in the cooling path
when warm. • Inspect the cooling system (radiator and hoses) for
cracks and ensure connections are leak free
This fault will help protect the engine in the event of over
temperature. When the coolant exceeds x deg. F and • Check that the raw water pickup is not blocked/
engine RPM exceeds y RPM for the latch time this fault will restricted by debris and that the hose is tightly con-
set. nected
• Check that the thermostat is not stuck closed
• Check that the raw water pump/impeller is tact and that
it is not restricted
3-164 – JLG Lift – 3120895

DTC 219- RPM Higher Than Max Allowed

Governed Speed
DBW+
+ 1
Motor H-Bridge
DBW-
- 2
TPS1 5V_ext
16
Vs=+5 VDC
TPS SER +
12
Serial
xmitter TPS SER -
13
ECM
5V_rtn
19
Electronic Throttle
Actuator w/Serial
Position Feedback
• Max Govern Speed Override- Crankshaft Position Sen- speeds programmed by the user. This fault is designed to
sor help prevent engine or equipment damage.
• Check Condition-Engine Running The throttle will be lowered in order to govern the engine
• Fault Condition-Engine speed greater than the max to the speed set in the diagnostic calibration.
governor override speed as defined in the diagnostic DTC 219- RPM Higher Than Max Allowed Governed
calibration Speed (continued)
nate secondary warning lamp, reduce throttle to limit
Diagnostic Aids
speed. Recommend closed loop and adaptive learn NOTE: If any other DTCs are present, diagnose those first.
fueling correction remains active during fault.
• Ensure that no programmed governor speeds exceed
• Non-emissions related fault the limit set in the diagnostic calibration for Max Gov
This fault will set anytime the engine RPM exceeds the Override Speed
limit set in the diagnostic calibration for the latch time or • Check mechanical operation of the throttle actuator
more. This speed overrides any higher max governor
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-165

DTC 336- Crank Signal Input Noise
• Crankshaft Position sensor The ECM must see a valid crankshaft position signal while
running. If no signal is present, the signal amplitude is too
• Check Condition- Key On, Engine On
high (due to improper air gap with respect to trigger
• Fault Condition- Electrical noise or irregular crank pat- wheel), or an irregular crank pattern is detected causing
tern detected causing x number of crank resynchroni- the ECM to resynchronize x times for y ms or longer as
zation events as defined in the diagnostic calibration defined in the diagnostic calibration, this fault will set.
• Corrective Action(s)- Illuminate MIL and/or sound audi- Irregular crank patterns can be detected by the ECM due
ble warning or illuminate secondary warning lamp and to electrical noise, poor machining of trigger wheel, or trig-
disable adaptive fueling correction for remainder of ger wheel runout and/or gear lash.
key-cycle. Ensure crank circuit used with VR/magnetic pick-up sen-
• Emissions related fault sors are properly twisted.
The crankshaft position sensor is a magnetic sensor (vari-

able reluctant/magnetic pick-up or halleffect) installed in
the engine block adjacent to a "coded" trigger wheel
located on the crankshaft. The sensor-trigger wheel com-
bination is used to determine crankshaft position (with
respect to TDC cylinder #1 compression) and the rota-
tional engine speed. Determination of the crankshaft posi-
tion and speed is necessary to properly activate the
ignition, fuel injection, and throttle governing systems for
precise engine control.
3-166 – JLG Lift – 3120895

• Key On, Engine Running

• System Mode= “Running”
Operate engine at condition

that set fault based on fault
snapshot
Yes Is crank sensor a VR/ No Check wiring and electrical connections

Does DTC 336 reset ?
magnetic pick-up? between crankshaft position sensor and ECM
No Yes
No
Is the wiring OK? Repair wireharness
Intermittent fault
Yes
Faulty wireharness No Is wiring between sensor
(twist circuit) and ECM properly twisted?
• Poor system ground
• Bad crankshaft position sensor
• Bad ECM
Yes
Yes
Increase the air gap between Does fault only occur at
sensor and trigger wheel high operating speeds?
No
Check wiring and electrical connections

between crankshaft position sensor and ECM
No
Repair wireharness Is the wiring OK?
Yes
• Poor system ground

• Bad crankshaft position sensor
• Bad ECM
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-167

DTC 337- Loss of Crank Input Signal
• Crankshaft Position sensor The ECM must see a valid crankshaft position signal while
running. If no signal is present while x cam pulses con-
• Check Condition- Key On, Engine On
tinue the fault will set. The engine typically stalls or dies as
• Fault Condition- Loss of crankshaft position signal a result of this fault condition due to the lack of crankshaft
while valid camshaft position signals continue for x speed input resulting in the inability to control ignition tim-
number of cam pulses as defined in the diagnostic cal- ing.
ibration
Diagnostic Aids
• Corrective Action(s)- Illuminate MIL and/or sound audi-
ble warning or illuminate secondary warning lamp • Check that crankshaft position sensor is securely con-
nected to harness
• Emissions related fault
• Check that crankshaft position sensor is securely
The crankshaft position sensor is a magnetic sensor (vari- installed into engine block
able reluctant/magnetic pick-up or halleffect) installed in
the engine block adjacent to a ¡§coded¡¨ trigger wheel • Check crankshaft position sensor circuit wiring for
located on the crankshaft. The sensor-trigger wheel com- open circuit
bination is used to determine crankshaft position (with
respect to TDC cylinder #1 compression) and the rota-
tional engine speed. Determination of the crankshaft posi-
tion and speed is necessary to properly activate the
ignition, fuel injection, and throttle governing systems for
precise engine control.
3-168 – JLG Lift – 3120895

DTC 521- Oil Pressure Sender/Switch High

Pressure
• Engine Oil Pressure symptom of a failed oil pressure switch. The ECM can
monitor oil pressure indication when the engine is
• Check Condition- Key on, Engine on (or Engine off)
stopped for this failure mode.
• Fault Condition- For sender types, oil pressure higher
than x psia while engine speed is greater that y RPM. For sender types, this fault sets if the engine oil pressure is
For switch types, oil pressure is indicating high when higher than x psia and engine speed greater than y RPM
the engine has been stopped for more than n seconds. as defined in the diagnostic calibration. For switch types,
this fault sets if the engine oil pressure is indicating high
• Corrective Action(s)- Illuminate MIL and/or sound audi- when the engine is stopped for more than n seconds.
ble warning or illuminate secondary warning lamp, Recommend a power derate and/or low rev limit to help
possibly configure for power derate 1 or low rev limit prevent possible engine damage and reduce oil pressure.
• Non-emissions related fault
The ECM can be configured to monitor oil pressure
through a proportional transducer or through a switch. Oil
pressure monitoring is important to prevent engine dam-
age due to low oil pressure resulting in higher friction and
lack of lubrication. In addition, high oil pressure can be
undesirable because it can cause oil to leak past seals
and rings, can be a result of a restriction in the oil flow
path, or can be a sign of a malfunctioning oiling system.
Additionally for normally-open type oil pressure switches,
a high pressure indication while the engine is off is a
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-169

Normally Open Switch
• Key-On, Engine Off

• System Mode= “Stopped”
• Key Off
No • Disconnect harness from Oil Pressure switch
Does DTC 524 • Check continuity through switch to ground.
reset ?
Yes
Intermittent Problem
No • Oil Pressure circuit shorted-to-ground in harness

Is switch closed?
• Faulty ECM
Yes
• Faulty Oil Pressure Switch (short circuit)

• Faulty engine oiling system (verify with
mechanical gauge)
Normally Closed Switch
• Key-On, Engine Off

• System Mode= “Stopped”
• Key Off
No • Disconnect harness from Oil Pressure switch
Does DTC 524 • Check continuity through switch to ground.
reset ?
Yes
No • Oil Pressure circuit shorted-to-ground in harness

Is switch open?
• Faulty ECM
Yes

mechanical gauge)
3-170 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Sensor/Transducer Type
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-171

DTC 524- Oil Pressure Low
• Engine Oil Pressure For systems that use a transducer, this fault sets if the
engine oil pressure is less than x psia and engine speed is
• Check Condition- Key on, Engine on
greater than y RPM after the engine has been running for
• Fault Condition- Engine oil pressure lower than z seconds as defined in the diagnostic calibration. For
expected while engine has been running for a mini- systems that use a switch this fault can be configured two
mum amount of time while engine speed is above different ways. It may use a normally closed switch or a
some limit as defined in the diagnostic calibration normally open switch. If the switch is normally open, the
• Corrective Action(s)- Illuminate MIL and/or sound audi- fault will set if the circuit becomes grounded. If the switch
ble warning or illuminate secondary warning lamp, is normally closed, the fault will set if the circuit becomes
generally configured to derate the engine and trigger open. Go to the Faults page in EDIS to determine how the
an engine shutdown input is configured. ("Open=OK" is normally open and
"Ground=OK" is normally closed). The engine will should
• Non-emissions related fault be configured to derate or force idle and/or shut down in
The ECM can be configured to monitor oil pressure the event of this fault to help prevent possible damage.
through a proportional transducer or through a switch. Oil
pressure monitoring is important to prevent engine dam-
age due to low oil pressure resulting in higher friction and
lack of lubrication. In addition, high oil pressure can be
undesirable because it can cause oil to leak past seals
and rings, can be a result of a restriction in the oil flow
path, or can be a sign of a malfunctioning oiling system.
3-172 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Normally Open Switch
• Key-On, Engine On
• Key Off
• Disconnect harness from Oil Pressure switch
• Warm engine at idle to normal • Clear DTC 524
operating temperature • Key On, Engine On
• Increase RPM above limit set • System Mode= “Running”
in diagnostic calibration • Operate engine et idle for at least one minute
• Increase RPM above limit set in diagnostic calibration
Yes
Does DTC 524
reset ?
Yes • Oil Pressure circuit shorted-to-ground in harness
Does DTC 524
reset? • Faulty ECM
No
No
mechanical gauge)
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-173

Normally Closed Switch
• Key-On, Engine On
• Key Off
• Disconnect harness from Oil Pressure switch
• Jumper Oil Pressure signal wire to ground
• Warm engine at idle to normal • Clear DTC 524
operating temperature • Key On, Engine On
• Increase RPM above limit set • System Mode= “Running”
in diagnostic calibration • Operate engine et idle for at least one minute
• Increase RPM above limit set in diagnostic calibration
• Disconnect wireharness header from ECM

• Carefully remove yellow lock from header
Yes at device output terminal
Does DTC 524 • CAREFULLY check resistance between
reset ? Oil Pressure signal at ECM header and
Does DTC 524 Yes signal at sensor. NOTE: DO NOT
reset? INSERT probe or object into terminals
No as this will cause the terminal to
spread and may no longer make
No contact with ECM pin. Spread pins will
void warranty! Probe on the side of
Intermittent Problem terminal.
• Faulty Oil Pressure Switch (open circuit)
mechanical gauge)
• Faulty connection at sensor Yes Does DMM indicate a

• Faulty ECM resistance < 5.0 ohms?
No
• Faulty harness
(open circuit)
3-174 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Sensor/Transducer Type
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-175

DTC 562- Battery Voltage (VBat) Low
• System voltage to ECM The battery voltage powers the ECM and must be within
limits to correctly operate throttle actuator, power sup-
• Check Condition- Key on, Engine on
plies, and other powered devices that the ECM controls.
• Fault Condition- Battery voltage to ECM less than x
volts while the engine is operating at y RPM or greater This fault will set if the ECM detects system voltage less
as defined in the diagnostic calibration than x volts while the engine is operating at y RPM as
defined in the diagnostic calibration as the alternator
• Corrective Action(s)- Illuminate MIL and/or sound audi- should be charging the system.
ble warning or illuminate secondary warning lamp, dis-
able adaptive fueling correction for remainder of key
cycle
3-176 – JLG Lift – 3120895

3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-177

DTC 563- Battery Voltage (VBat) High
• System voltage to ECM The battery voltage powers the ECM and must be within
limits to correctly operate throttle acutator, power sup-
• Check Condition- Key on, Engine Cranking or Running
plies, and other powered devices that the ECM controls.
• Fault Condition- Battery voltage to ECM greater than x
volts while the engine is running as defined in the diag- This fault will set if the ECM detects system voltage
nostic calibration greater than x volts while the engine is running or cranking
as defined in the diagnostic calibration.
ble warning or illuminate secondary warning lamp, dis-
able adaptive fueling correction for remainder of key
cycle
3-178 – JLG Lift – 3120895

3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-179

DTC 601- Microprocessor Failure - FLASH
• Engine Control Module- Flash Memory The ECM has checks that must be satisfied each time an
instruction is executed. Several different things can hap-
• Check Condition- Key on
pen within the microprocessor that will cause this fault.
• Fault Condition- Internal microprocessor error
If this fault sets, the ECM will reset itself and log the code.
• Corrective Action(s)- Illuminate MIL and/or sound audi- The fault should be configured to never forget and will not
ble warning or illuminate secondary warning lamp, dis- self-erase and will not clear until a technician performs
able adaptive fueling correction for remainder of key diagnostics and manually clears the code. This fault
cycle, recommend power derate 2 and low rev limit to should be configured to set a power derate 2 and low rev
reduce possible engine damage and/or overspeed limit to reduce possible engine damage and reduce possi-
condition bility of an overspeed condition. A fault of flash memory
• Non-emissions related fault can occur for any calibration variable set and thus could
cause undesirable operation.
3-180 – JLG Lift – 3120895

3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-181

DTC 604- Microprocessor Failure - RAM
• Engine Control Module- Random Access Memory Random Access Memory is located within the micropro-
cessor and can be read from or written to at any time.
Data stored in RAM include DTCs (when fault configura-
• Fault Condition- Internal ECM microprocessor memory tion is set to "Battery Power Retained"), adaptive fuel learn
access failure tables, octane adaptation table, misfire adaption tables,
• Corrective Action(s)- Illuminate MIL and/or sound audi- and closed loop fuel multipliers. The ECM has checks that
ble warning or illuminate secondary warning lamp, dis- must be satisfied each time an instruction is executed.
able adaptive fueling correction for remainder of key This fault will set if the ECM detects a problem accessing
cycle, recommend power derate 2 and low rev limit to or writing information to RAM and should be configured to
reduce possible engine damage and/or overspeed set a power derate 2 and low rev limit to reduce possible
condition engine damage and reduce possibility of an overspeed
• Non-emissions related fault condition. If this fault sets, the ECM will reset itself and log
the code. This fault should be erased by a technician after
diagnostics are performed. The fault should be configured
to never forget and will not self-erase.
3-182 – JLG Lift – 3120895

3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-183

DTC 606- Microprocessor Failure - COP
• Engine Control Module The ECM has checks that must be satisfied each time an
• Fault Condition- Internal microprocessor error
If this fault sets, the ECM will reset itself and log the code.
• Corrective Action(s) - Illuminate MIL and/or sound The fault should be configured to never forget and will not
audible warning or illuminate secondary warning lamp, self-erase and will not clear until a technician performs
disable adaptive fueling correction for remainder of key diagnostics and manually clears the code. This fault
cycle, recommend power derate 2 and low rev limit to should be configured to set a power derate 2 and low rev
reduce possible engine damage and/or overspeed limit to reduce possible engine damage and reduce possi-
condition bility of an overspeed condition.
3-184 – JLG Lift – 3120895

3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-185

DTC 642- 5 Volt External Low Voltage
DBW+
+ 1
Motor H-Bridge
DBW-
- 2
TPS1 5V_ext
16
Vs=+5 VDC
TPS SER +
12
Serial
xmitter TPS SER -
13
ECM
5V_rtn
19
Electronic Throttle
Actuator w/Serial
Position Feedback
3-186 – JLG Lift – 3120895

• Engine Control Module Diagnostic Aids

• Check Condition- Key on • Measure the 5-volt output of the ECM while cycling the
• Fault Condition- ECM 5-volt output is below the accept- key on and the engine stopped. Verify that the output is
able limit lower than the fault thresholds configured in the diag-
nostic calibration.
ble warning or illuminate secondary warning lamp • Inspect the 5-Volt output circuit in the wire harness and
look for shorts to ground or other harness circuits.
• Disconnect each device powered by the 5-volt output
The ECM supplies 5-volt power to sensors, switches, and of the ECM one-at-a-time. Powered devices may
actuators external to the ECM. By supplying the power to include the throttle actuator, smart sensors, smart actu-
these devices, the ECM can accurately measure their out- ators, etc. After disconnecting device, observe the sys-
put relative to its own ground reference. The ECM can tem fault and determine if the fault has cleared. If the
also control when the devices are active and put the fault clears, troubleshoot the disconnected device for
devices in a low or no power state based on the current failures.
operating condition of the engine or vehicle.
• With all 5-volt powered devices disconnected, look for
If this fault sets, something other than the ECM is drawing a change in the fault state and measure the 5-volt out-
the 5-volt power output of the ECM below an acceptable put of the ECM and verify it is within acceptable limits.
threshold. This may be due to a short in the wire harness,
malfunctioning device, or failure of the ECM power output
circuitry.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-187

DTC 643- 5 Volt External High Voltage
DBW+
+ 1
Motor H-Bridge
DBW-
- 2
TPS1 5V_ext
16
Vs=+5 VDC
TPS SER +
12
Serial
xmitter TPS SER -
13
ECM
5V_rtn
19
Electronic Throttle
Actuator w/Serial
Position Feedback
3-188 – JLG Lift – 3120895

• Engine Control Module Diagnostic Aids

• Check Condition- Key on • Measure the 5-volt output of the ECM while cycling the
• Fault Condition- ECM 5-volt output is above the key on and the engine stopped. Verify that the output is
acceptable limit lower than the fault thresholds configured in the diag-
nostic calibration.
ble warning or illuminate secondary warning lamp • Inspect the 5-Volt output circuit in the wire harness and
look for shorts to ground or other harness circuits.
• Disconnect each device powered by the 5-volt output
The ECM supplies 5-volt power to sensors, switches, and of the ECM one-at-a-time. Powered devices may
actuators external to the ECM. By supplying the power to include the throttle actuator, smart sensors, smart actu-
these devices, the ECM can accurately measure their out- ators, etc. After disconnecting device, observe the sys-
put relative to its own ground reference. The ECM can tem fault and determine if the fault has cleared. If the
also control when the devices are active and put the fault clears, troubleshoot the disconnected device for
devices in a low or no power state based on the current failures.
operating condition of the engine or vehicle.
• With all 5-volt powered devices disconnected, look for a
If this fault sets, something other than the ECM is drawing change in the fault state and measure the 5-volt output
the 5-volt power output of the ECM above an acceptable of the ECM and verify it is within acceptable limits.
threshold. This may be due to a short in the wire harness,
malfunctioning device, or failure of the ECM power output
circuitry.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-189

DTC 1612- Microprocessor Failure - RTI 1
• Fault Condition- Internal microprocessor error The ECM will reset itself in the event this fault is set, and
• MIL- On until code is cleared by technician the MIL will be on until the code is cleared. This fault
should be erased after diagnosis by removing battery
• Adaptive- Disabled for the remainder of the key-on power. It will not self-erase.
cycle
During this active fault, Power Derate (level 2) will be
• Closed Loop- Enabled enforced. When this is enforced, maximum throttle posi-
• Power Derate (level 2 until fault is cleared manually) tion will be 20%. This is enforced until the fault is manually
cleared.
3-190 – JLG Lift – 3120895

cycle
cleared.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-191

SFC 555- RTI 2 Loss
Key On - Engine Running

System Data Mode
Check all power and

Clear System Fault
ground circuits to ECM
Does SFC 555 reset Yes

with engine idling?
Yes Replace ECM with known
Are all circuits ok?
good part and retest
No
No
Fault is intermittent
Repair wiring to
ECM and retest
3-192 – JLG Lift – 3120895

cycle
cleared.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-193

SFC 556- RTI 3 Loss

System Data Mode
Check all power and

Clear System Fault
Yes
Does SFC 556 reset

with engine idling?
No
No
Repair wiring to
ECM and retest
3-194 – JLG Lift – 3120895

DTC 1615- Microprocessor Failure - A/D
cycle
cleared.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-195

SFC 513- A/D Loss

System Data Mode
Check all power and

Clear System Fault
Yes
Does SFC 513 reset

with engine idling?
Yes
Replace ECM with known
No
No
Repair wiring to
ECM and retest
3-196 – JLG Lift – 3120895

DTC 1616- Microprocessor Failure -

interrupt
cycle
cleared.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-197

SFC 512- Invalid Interrupt

System Data Mode
Check all power and

Clear System Fault
Yes
Does SFC 512 reset

with engine idling?
No
No
Repair wiring to
ECM and retest
3-198 – JLG Lift – 3120895

DTC 1625- CAN J1939 Shutdown Request
• Controller Area Network In some situations, external controllers may send a

request to the ECM to shutdown engine operation and
• Check Condition- Key On, Engine Off and/or Running
stop the engine. This request may be sent in response to
• Fault Condition- ECM has received shutdown message a safety related condition in the vehicle.
from another CAN device and is shutdown on request.
This fault will set if the ECM receives the J1939 shutdown
• Corrective Action(s)- Illuminate MIL, sound audible request via the CAN interface. This is the expected behav-
warning or illuminate secondary warning lamp ior.
• Non-emissions related fault Diagnostic Aids
• The ECM has shutdown the engine upon command by
a external controller. This is the requested and
expected behavior.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-199

DTC 1626- CAN J1939 Transmit (Tx) Fault
• Controller Area Network Diagnostic Aids

• Check Condition- Key On, Engine Off and/or Running • Verify that all CAN devices are powered and are prop-
• Fault Condition- ECM CAN transceiver transmit error erly grounded
counts greater than the limit defined in the diagnostic • Verify that the CAN network is properly terminated
calibration (must be < 125 failures)
• Check CAN wire routing with respect to noise sources
• Corrective Action(s)- Illuminate MIL, sound audible (ignition coils, spark plug coil wires, etc.) and shield if
warning or illuminate secondary warning lamp necessary
• Non-emissions related fault • Check CAN (+) and (-) wires for short circuits
The Controller Area Network (CAN) is a serial communica-
tion network used to transmit and receive data between
intelligent devices. Systems that utilize CAN communica-
tion include smart actuators, smart sensors, dash panels
and gauges, and other microcomputers. Each smart sen-
sor, actuator, or controller incorporates a CAN transceiver
that interprets logic level signals on the network and trans-
lates the information into digital data.
This fault will set if CAN communication is enabled and the
ECM transceiver broadcasts a number of packets (as
defined in the diagnostic calibration, must be set to less
than 125 failures) to the network that are not received.
3-200 – JLG Lift – 3120895

DTC 1627- CAN J1939 Receive (Rx) Fault
• Controller Area Network Diagnostic Aids

• Check Condition- Key On, Engine Off and/or Running • Verify that all CAN devices are powered and are prop-
• Fault Condition- ECM CAN transceiver receive error erly grounded
counts greater than the limit defined in the diagnostic • Verify that the CAN network is properly terminated
calibration (must be < 125 failures)
• Corrective Action(s)- Illuminate MIL, sound audible (ignition coils, spark plug coil wires, etc.) and shield if
warning or illuminate secondary warning lamp necessary
• Non-emissions related fault • Check CAN (+) and (-) wires for short circuits
The Controller Area Network (CAN) is a serial communica-
tion network used to transmit and receive data between
intelligent devices. Systems that utilize CAN communica-
tion include smart actuators, smart sensors, dash panels
and gauges, and other microcomputers. Each smart sen-
sor, actuator, or controller incorporates a CAN transceiver
that interprets logic level signals on the network and trans-
lates the information into digital data.
This fault will set if CAN communication is enabled and the
ECM transceiver is expecting to see network traffic and
either does not see traffic (as defined in the diagnostic cal-
ibration, must be set to less than 125 failures).
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-201

DTC 1628- CAN Address Conflict Failure
• CAN device(s) The Controller Area Network serves as a communication

portal between intelligent devices. These devices may be
• Check Condition- Key On, Engine on
but are not limited to other engine ECMs (slave), diagnos-
• Fault Condition- two or more devices on the network tic tools, "smart" gauges, "smart" sensors, powertrain con-
that contain the same SA trol units, vehicle controllers, actuators, etc. The network
• Corrective Action(s)- Sound audible warning or illumi- permits several devices to communicate with each other
nate secondary warning lamp receiving and broadcasting commands as programmed.
This type of network allows devices to be added to an
• Non-emissions related fault entire system through only two conductors and permits all
other devices to broadcast and receive commands to and
from the device when properly commanded.
This fault indicates that there are two (2) or more devices
on the network that use the same source address.
3-202 – JLG Lift – 3120895

3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-203

DTC 1629- J1939 TSC1 Message Reciept

Loss
• Controller Area Network J1939 TSC1 may be used to send a commanded (or
desired) engine speed to the ECM. If configured, the ECM
• Check Condition- Key On, Engine Running
will govern the engine speed to this commanded speed if
• Fault Condition- ECM is expecting to receive J1939 possible. When operating in this mode, the ECM expects
TSC1 messages and has not received a message for to receive TSC1 messages on a regular interval. When this
more than n seconds (as defined in the diagnostic cali- message is not received, the ECM must operate the
bration). engine at a default idle speed until commanded to do oth-
• Corrective Action(s)- Illuminate MIL, sound audible erwise.
warning or illuminate secondary warning lamp. Govern This fault will set if CAN communication is enabled, the
engine speed at a forced idle. engine is running, and no TSC1 messages are received
• Non-emissions related fault over the CAN bus for more than n seconds (as determined
by the diagnostic calibration).
Diagnostic Aids
• Verify that that the CAN device generating the TSC1
message is powered and properly grounded
• Verify that the CAN network is properly terminated
(ignition coils, spark plug coil wires, etc.) and shield if
necessary
• Check CAN (+) and (-) wires for short circuits
3-204 – JLG Lift – 3120895

DTC 1652- TPS1 Loss of Communications
• Throttle Actuator (with serial/digital position feedback) In the case of a throttle actuator with serial/digital position
feedback, the ECM receives a constant data stream from
• Check Condition- Key On, Engine Running and/or
the throttle actuator. If the communication is absent or
Stopped
interrupted, the ECM can no longer control the position of
• Fault Condition- ECM is expecting to receive throttle the throttle.
position information from the throttle actuator and is
not. This fault will set if the key is on, the throttle actuator is
receiving power, and the ECM is not receiving digital infor-
• Corrective Action(s)- Illuminate MIL, sound audible mation from the actuator.
warning or illuminate secondary warning lamp. Shut-
down engine. Diagnostic Aids
• Non-emissions related fault • Verify that the throttle actuator 5V supply voltage is
present at the actuator.
• Check for a all four TPS feedback wires for short cir-
cuits.
• Check TPS SER+ and TPS SER- wire routing with
respect to noise sources (ignition coils, spark plug coil
wires, etc.) and shield if necessary.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-205

DTC 2111- Unable to Reach Lower TPS
DBW+
+ 1
Motor H-Bridge
DBW-
- 2
TPS1 5V_ext
16
Vs=+5 VDC
TPS SER +
12
Serial
xmitter TPS SER -
13
ECM
5V_rtn
19
Electronic Throttle
Actuator w/Serial
Position Feedback
• Throttle Position Sensor control the idle stability and limit engine speed based on
operating conditions.
• Check Condition-Cranking or Running
• Fault Condition-Throttle command is 20% less than The Throttle Position Sensor uses either 1) a variable
throttle position for 200ms or longer resistor and voltage divider circuit or 2) a non-contact hall-
effect sensor to determine throttle actuator position, and is
• MIL-On during active fault located within the throttle actuator.
• Engine Shut Down There are two types of throttle actuators, 1) actuator with
In the case of a diesel engine, an actuator controls a fuel analog position feedback and 2) actuator with digital posi-
injection pump, directly affecting the fueling level into the tion feedback. The first type, with analog position feed-
cylinders. This may be by direct manipulation of the fuel back, provides an analog return signal between 0 and 5
injection pump rack or by manipulation of the mechanical volts that is proportional to the throttle actuator position.
governor control level or "throttle arm." In the DGC ECM The second type, with digital position feedback, provides
and EDIS, references to the throttle and throttle position a serial data signal to the ECM with the throttle actuator
sensor refer to these fuel injection pump control actuators position voltage level encoded in the data stream.
and their position feedback sensors. When the fuel injec- This fault will set if the throttle command is 20% less than
tion pump is electronically controlled it can be used to the actual throttle position. During this active fault the MIL
light will be on and the engine will shut down.
3-206 – JLG Lift – 3120895

3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-207

DTC 2112- Unable to Reach Higher TPS
DBW+
+ 1
Motor H-Bridge
DBW-
- 2
TPS1 5V_ext
16
Vs=+5 VDC
TPS SER +
12
Serial
xmitter TPS SER -
13
ECM
5V_rtn
19
Electronic Throttle
Actuator w/Serial
Position Feedback
• Throttle Position Sensor control the idle stability and limit engine speed based on
operating conditions.
• Check Condition-Cranking or Running
• Fault Condition-Throttle command is 20% more than The Throttle Position Sensor uses either 1) a variable
actual throttle position resistor and voltage divider circuit or 2) a non-contact hall-
effect sensor to determine throttle actuator position, and is
• MIL-On during active fault located within the throttle actuator.
• Engine Shut Down There are two types of throttle actuators, 1) actuator with
In the case of a diesel engine, an actuator controls a fuel analog position feedback and 2) actuator with digital posi-
injection pump, directly affecting the fueling level into the tion feedback. The first type, with analog position feed-
cylinders. This may be by direct manipulation of the fuel back, provides an analog return signal between 0 and 5
injection pump rack or by manipulation of the mechanical volts that is proportional to the throttle actuator position.
governor control level or "throttle arm." In the DGC ECM The second type, with digital position feedback, provides
and EDIS, references to the throttle and throttle position a serial data signal to the ECM with the throttle actuator
sensor refer to these fuel injection pump control actuators position voltage level encoded in the data stream.
and their position feedback sensors. When the fuel injec- This fault will set if the throttle command is 20% or more
tion pump is electronically controlled it can be used to than the actual throttle position. During this active fault the
MIL light will be on and the engine will shut down.
3-208 – JLG Lift – 3120895

DTC 9999- Throttle Actuator Failsafe Spring

Failure
DBW+
+ 1
Motor H-Bridge
DBW-
- 2
TPS1 5V_ext
16
Vs=+5 VDC
TPS SER +
12
Serial
xmitter TPS SER -
13
ECM
5V_rtn
19
Electronic Throttle
Actuator w/Serial
Position Feedback
• Throttle Actuator the ECM detects the throttle position to be above x volts
when the key is off (as determined by the diagnostic cali-
• Check Condition- Key Off, Engine Stopped
bration), it will power up the actuator and attempt to drive
• Fault Condition- When the key is off (or the actuator is it to a zero position. This should ensure that the engine is
unpowered), the ECM is expecting the failsafe spring in stopped.
the actuator to return the throttle position to near 0%. If
the throttle does not reach this position when the actu- This fault will set if the throttle does not return to a near 0%
ator is powered, a fault is generated. position with the key is off.
• Corrective Action(s)- Illuminate MIL, sound audible Diagnostic Aids

warning or illuminate secondary warning lamp. Govern
• Disconnect the throttle actuator from the wire harness.
the engine speed to a forced idle speed.
Remove the throttle actuator from the engine and man-
• Non-emissions related fault ually move it. Verify that the internal spring forces the
throttle back to near 0% position.
The throttle actuator has a return spring that causes the
throttle to move to a near 0% position when powered off. • Inspect the throttle arm or fuel rack on the fuel pump.
This causes the engine to shutdown following a key off. If Verify that it is not stuck.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-209

DTC to SPN/FMI Table
FAULT DTC SET

DESCRIPTION
INDEX SPN FMI
2 DTC 118: ECT voltage high 110 3
3 DTC 117: ECT voltage low 110 4
4 DTC 116: ECT higher than expected stage 1 110 15
9 DTC 563: Vbat voltage high 168 15
10 DTC 562: Vbat voltage low 168 17
11 DTC 643: Sensor supply voltage 1 high 1079 3
12 DTC 642: Sensor supply voltage 1 low 1079 4
13 DTC 123: TPS1 voltage high 51 3
14 DTC 122: TPS1 voltage low 51 4
29 DTC 524: Oil pressure low 100 1
86 DTC 217: ECT higher than expected stage 2 110 0
89 DTC 2112: Unable to reach higher TPS 51 7
90 DTC 2111: Unable to reach lower TPS 51 7
96 DTC 336: CRANK input signal noise 636 2
98 DTC 606: Microprocessor failure - COP 629 31
99 DTC 1612: Microprocessor failure - RTI 1 629 31
102 DTC 1615: Microprocessor failure - A/D 629 31
103 DTC 1616: Microprocessor failure - Interrupt 629 31
104 DTC 601: Microprocessor failure - FLASH 628 13
105 DTC 604: Microprocessor failure - RAM 630 12
106 DTC 219: RPM higher than max allowed govern speed 515 15
144 DTC 337: Crank signal loss 636 4
145 DTC 1625: J1939 shutdown request 1384 31
146 DTC 1626: CAN-J1939 Tx fault 639 12
147 DTC 1627: CAN-J1939 Rx fault 639 12
175 DTC 1628: J1939 CAN address / engine-number conflict 639 13
188 DTC 521: Oil pressure high 100 0
189 DTC 1652: TPS1 loss of communications 51 9
190 DTC 1629: CAN-J1939 TSC1 Parameter Rx Fault 695 9
191 DTC 1113: Unable to achieve lower RPM 515 31
192 DTC 9999: TPS1 failsafe spring failure 51 7
3-210 – JLG Lift – 3120895

A
NOTE: The outlet pipe must be centered within 1/4" (6.35 mm)
minimum clearance to the exhaust venturi all around the
venturi’s perimeter. If the exhaust pipe touches the venturi,
it will transfer heat and melt the hood. If the exhaust pipe
is not centered, adjust the muffler or outlet as needed to
achieve the necessary clearance.
C
A. Exhaust Venturi
B. 1/4" (6.35 mm) minimum clearance all around.
C. 3/4" (19.05 mm) minimum engagement
D. Exhaust Pipe Outlet
Figure 3-93. Exhaust Venturi Adjustment
3120895 – JLG Lift – 3-211

NOTES:
3-212 – JLG Lift – 3120895

SECTION 4. BOOM & PLATFORM
4.1 BOOM
Removal
1. Remove the platform and platform support as fol-
lows:
a. Disconnect electrical cable from the platform
control console.
b. Using an overhead crane or suitable lifting
device, use nylon support straps to support the
platform/support.
Figure 4-2. Support - Rear Entry Platform
NOTE: When removing the retaining pin from the rod end of
the level cylinder, make sure the cylinder is properly
supported.
c. Remove bolts and keeper pins that secure the

retaining pins attaching the platform support to
the boom. Using a suitable brass drift and ham-
mer, remove the retaining pins from the platform
support and boom nose.
Figure 4-1. Support - Side Entry Platform
NOTE: The platform/support assembly will weigh approxi-

mately 220 to 370 lbs. (100 to 170 kg) depending
upon platform configuration. These values DO NOT
reflect any optional equipment attached to the plat-
form.
2. Remove the boom from the turntable as follows:
3120895 – JLG Lift – 4-1

a. Disconnect wiring harness from ground control Disassembly

harness connector.
1. Using a portable power source, attach hose to tele-
scope cylinder port block. Using all applicable
safety precautions, activate hydraulic system and
HYDRAULIC LINES AND PORTS SHOULD BE CAPPED IMMEDI-
extend cylinder to gain access to cylinder rod retain-
ATELY AFTER DISCONNECTING LINES TO AVOID ENTRY OF CON-
ing pin. Shut down hydraulic system.
TAMINANTS INTO SYSTEM.
2. Carefully disconnect hydraulic hose from retract port
b. Tag and disconnect hydraulic lines from boom of cylinder. There will be initial weeping of hydraulic
to control valve. Use a suitable container to fluid which can be caught in a suitable container.
catch escaping hydraulic fluid. Cap all hydraulic After initial discharge, there should be no further
lines and ports. leakage from the retract port.
c. Using a suitable lifting device, adequately sup- 3. Remove hardware securing telescope cylinder to
port boom weight along entire length. the fly boom section, then remove pin from fly.
NOTE: The 400S boom weighs approximately 985 lbs. (447
kg). The 460SJ boom weighs approximately 1250
lbs. (567 kg).
d. Remove the bolts and keeper pins securing the

lift cylinder pivot pin. Using a suitable brass drift
and hammer, remove the pivot pin from the
lower boom.
4. Remove hardware securing telescope cylinder to

the base boom section.
Figure 4-3. Location of Components - Boom Removal
e. Remove hardware securing the boom pivot pin. 5. Using a suitable lifting device, remove telescope cyl-
Using a suitable brass drift and hammer, remove inder from boom sections.
pin from the turntable.
NOTE: The telescope cylinder weighs approximately 324
f. Carefully lift boom assembly clear of turntable lbs. (147 kg).
and lower to ground or suitable supported work
surface. 6. Tag all hoses and wires from front of fly boom and
bottom of base boom for reassembly.
4-2 – JLG Lift – 3120895

7. Remove hardware securing the front wear pads on 10. If necessary, remove the wear pads from the rear of
base boom section, remove wear pads. the fly boom section.
8. Remove hardware securing the powertrack to the

front end of the fly boom section.
9. Using a suitable lifting device, remove fly boom from
boom section. 11. Remove hydraulic lines and electrical cables from
powertrack.
NOTE: The fly boom section weighs approximately 430 lbs.
(195 kg). 12. Remove hardware securing powertrack to the base
boom section. Remove powertrack.
Inspection
1. Inspect all boom pivot pins for wear, scoring or other
damage, and for tapering or ovality. Replace pins as
necessary.
2. Inspect lift cylinder pins for wear, scoring or other
damage, and for tapering or ovality. Ensure pin sur-
faces are protected prior to installation. Replace pins
as necessary.
3. Inspect telescope cylinder rod attach pin for wear,
scoring or other damage. Replace pin as necessary.
4. Inspect inner diameter of boom pivot bushings for
scoring, distortion, wear or other damage. Replace
bushings as necessary.
5. Inspect wear pads for wear.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 4-3

6. Inspect all threaded components for damage such 6. Connect a suitable auxiliary hydraulic power source
as stretching, thread deformation, or twisting. to the telescope cylinder port block.
Replace as necessary.
7. Extend the telescope cylinder the distance of the
7. Inspect structural units of boom assembly for bend- two attach points.
ing, cracking, separation of welds, or other damage.
8. Secure the sling and lifting device at the telescope
Replace boom sections as necessary.
cylinder’s approximate center of gravity, and lift the
cylinder to the aft end of the boom assembly.
Assembly
NOTE: The telescope cylinder weighs approximately 324
1. Install power track to the attach point on the base
lbs. (147 kg).
boom section. Secure power track with the attaching
hardware.
9. Slowly slide the telescope cylinder into boom
2. Install hydraulic lines and electrical cables into the assembly, align rod end with attach point in fly sec-
power track as tagged during disassembly. tion. Insert pin and secure with retaining ring.
3. Install wear pads to the rear of the fly section.
10. Align bolt holes at aft end of base boom section with
telescope cylinder port block. Secure telescope cyl-
inder with hardware.
4. Using suitable lifting equipment, slide fly section into

the base section until the telescope cylinder attach
point aligns with holes in side of base section.
NOTE: The fly boom section weighs approximately 430 lbs.

11. Install wear pads at end of base boom section.
(195 kg).
Using shims, adjust the adjustable wear pads to
zero clearance. Adjust pads alternately side to side,
5. Measure the distance between the telescope cylin-
der port block attach point on base boom section
and the attach point on fly boom section.
4-4 – JLG Lift – 3120895

so that fly boom section is centered in base boom 6. Install the platform to the boom assembly.
section.
7. Connect all hosing and wiring at platform control

station.
8. Using all safety precautions, operate machine sys-
tems and extend and retract boom for four or five
cycles.
9. Shut down machine systems and check for leakage.
12. Retract boom section fully. Using shims, adjust wear Cylinder Checking Procedure
pads at aft end of boom section to zero clearance.
Adjust pads alternately side to side, so that fly boom
section is centered in base boom section.
13. Disconnect auxiliary power source from telescope
cylinder.
Installation
1. Using suitable lifting equipment, position boom
assembly on turntable so that boom pivot holes in
both boom and turntable are aligned.
2. Install boom pivot pin, ensuring that location of the
hole in pivot pin aligns with attach point on upright.
3. Using all applicable safety precautions, operate lift-
ing equipment in order to position boom lift cylinder
so that holes in cylinder rod end are aligned with the
one in the turntable. Insert cylinder pins.
4. If necessary, gently tap pins into position with a soft
headed mallet, ensuring that attach holes in pins are
aligned with attach holes in boom structure. Secure
with hardware.
5. Connect all hosing and wiring.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 4-5

4.2 ARTICULATING JIB 4.3 LIMIT SWITCH ADJUSTMENTS

See Figure 4-5., Figure 4-6., Figure 4-7., and Figure 4-8.
Removal
1. Place the Articulating Jib in a horizontal position and Boom Horizontal Limit Switch
support the complete assembly with adequate
blocking. 1. Place machine on level surface.
2. Raise boom to 10 degrees horizontal. Limit switch
should activate before this point.
3. Lower the boom until limit switch resets. this should
be 1 degree above to 4 degrees below horizontal.
NOTE: Angle indicator should be placed on the top flat sur-

face of the boom, near the pivot point.
Dual Capacity Angle Limit Switch

1. Place machine on level surface.
2. Raise main boom to 10 degrees above horizontal.
Figure 4-4. Articulating Jib limit switch should activate before this point.
3. Lower main boom until limit switch resets. this
2. Remove the Platform as outlined under Section 4.1,
should be 1 degree above to 4 degrees below hori-
Boom, Removal.
zontal.
3. Tag and disconnect the hydraulic lines running to
NOTE: Angle indicator should be placed approx. 2 ft. from
the Jib. Use a suitable container to collect any resid-
the main boom pivot pin and the attach point on the
ual fluid. Cap the hydraulic lines and ports.
main boom. Tower angle switch must be reset before
4. Remove the hardware securing the Jib pivot pin at main boom angle switch can be activated.
the boom. Using a suitable brass drift and hammer,
remove the pin from the fly boom. Use a suitable lift- 4. Raise, extend, retract, and lower boom. Check for
ing device and remove the Jib. smooth operation.
Boom Length Limit Switch

1. Place machine on a level surface.
2. Raise boom to approximate horizontal.
3. Extend the retracted fly boom. See Figure 4-5., Fig-
ure 4-6., or Figure 4-7. as applicable for the proper
dimension for switch activation.
4-6 – JLG Lift – 3120895

CAPACITY SWITCH TO ACTIVATE ABOVE HORIZONTAL SWITCH

WHEN BASE BOOM IS RAISED 47° TO ACTIVATE WHEN BASE
TO 55° ABOVE HORIZONTAL. BOOM IS RAISED 5° TO 10°
SWITCH TO RESET WHEN BASE ABOVE HORIZONTAL. SWITCH
BOOM LOWERED 47° BELOW TO TO RESET WHEN BASE BOOM
52° ABOVE HORIZONTAL. LOWERED 1° BELOW TO 4°
ABOVE HORIZONTAL.
DETAIL A
SEE DETAIL B
SEE DETAIL A
SWITCH TO ACTIVATE WHEN BOOM IS EXTENDED NOTE: The target angle to switch from 500 to
84.375" ± 1" (214.3 ± 2.5 cm). 1000 lbs. (230 to 450 kg) is 47°, but not
SEE VIEW A FOR SWITCH ORIENTATION. below 47° angle.
MOUNTING
SURFACE
90.0° SUGGESTED
INITIAL ARM
POSITION SETTING
DETAIL B
VIEW A
0271164-F
Figure 4-5. Limit Switches - 500 / 1000 LB (230 / 450 kg) Capacity
3120895 – JLG Lift – 4-7

CAPACITY SWITCH TO ACTIVATE ABOVE HORIZONTAL SWITCH

WHEN BASE BOOM IS RAISED 47° TO ACTIVATE WHEN BASE
TO 55° ABOVE HORIZONTAL. BOOM IS RAISED 5° TO 10°
SWITCH TO RESET WHEN BASE ABOVE HORIZONTAL. SWITCH
BOOM LOWERED 47° BELOW TO TO RESET WHEN BASE BOOM
52° ABOVE HORIZONTAL. LOWERED 1° BELOW TO 4°
ABOVE HORIZONTAL.
DETAIL A
SEE DETAIL B
SEE DETAIL A
SWITCH TO ACTIVATE WHEN BOOM IS EXTENDED NOTE: The target angle to switch from 750 to
135.975" ± 1" (345.3 ± 2.5 cm). 1000 lbs. (230 to 450 kg) is 47°, but not
SEE VIEW A FOR SWITCH ORIENTATION. below 47° angle.
MOUNTING
SURFACE
90.0° SUGGESTED
INITIAL ARM
POSITION SETTING
DETAIL B
VIEW A
0271165-F
Figure 4-6. Limit Switches - 750 LB (340 kg) Capacity
4-8 – JLG Lift – 3120895

ABOVE HORIZONTAL SWITCH

TO ACTIVATE WHEN BASE
BOOM IS RAISED 5° TO 10°
ABOVE HORIZONTAL. SWITCH
TO RESET WHEN BASE BOOM
LOWERED 1° BELOW TO 4°
ABOVE HORIZONTAL.
DETAIL A
SEE DETAIL B
SEE DETAIL A
SWITCH TO ACTIVATE WHEN BOOM IS EXTENDED

84.375" ± 1" (214.3 ± 2.5 cm).
SEE VIEW A FOR SWITCH ORIENTATION.
MOUNTING
SURFACE
90.0° SUGGESTED
INITIAL ARM
POSITION SETTING
DETAIL B
VIEW A
0271163-F
Figure 4-7. Limit Switches - CE Machines
3120895 – JLG Lift – 4-9

ABOVE HORIZONTAL SWITCH

TO ACTIVATE WHEN BASE
BOOM IS RAISED 5° TO 10°
ABOVE HORIZONTAL. SWITCH
TO RESET WHEN BASE BOOM
LOWERED 1° BELOW TO 4°
ABOVE HORIZONTAL.
DETAIL A
SEE DETAIL A
0271166-D
Figure 4-8. Limit Switches - 460SJ
4.4 DRIVE CARD SETUP PROCEDURES horizontal. Results should be recorded for a 50 ft. course.
Drive Forward, Record Time. Drive Reverse, Record Time.
Machine Orientation When Doing Speed Platform Rotate: Platform level and completely rotated
Tests one direction. Rotate the opposite direction, Record Time.
Rotate the other direction, Record Time.
Lift: Boom Retracted. Telescope Retracted. Lift Up,
Record Time, Lift Down, Record Time. Articulating Jib: Platform level and centered with the
boom. Start with the Jib down. Jib Up, Record Time. Jib
Swing: Boom at Full Elevation. Telescope Retracted. Down, Record Time.
Swing the Turntable 360°, Record Time. Swing the Oppo-
Lower Lift: Upper Boom horizontal. Telescoped In. Lower
site Direction 360°, Record Time.
Lift Up, Record Time. Lower Lift Down, Record Time.
Telescope: Boom at Full Elevation; Telescope Retracted;
Telescope Out, Record Time. Telescope In, Record Time. Test Notes
Drive: Test to be done on a smooth level surface. Drive 1.Stop watch should be started with the function, not with
Select Switch should be set at High Speed, High Engine. the controller or switch.
Start approximately 25 ft. (7.62 m) from starting point so
that the unit is at maximum speed when starting the test. 2.All speed tests are run from the platform. These speeds
Results should be recorded for a 200 ft. (60.96 m) course. do not reflect the ground control operation.
Drive Forward, record time. Drive Reverse, Record Time. 3.The platform speed knob control must be at full speed
Drive (Above Horizontal): Test should be done on a (turned clockwise completely).
smooth level surface. Drive Select Switch should be set to 4.Function speeds may vary due to cold, thick hydraulic
Low Speed, Low Engine. The Platform Speed Knob oil. Test should be run with the oil temperature
should be selected out of the creep speed. This verifies above 100° F (38° C).
that the switches are working when the boom is above
4-10 – JLG Lift – 3120895

NOTE: The following procedures are to be used as a begin- output. To set the maximum current for the “A” out-
ning basis for controller adjustment. After completing put, hold the joystick in its maximum position. Turn
the procedure, final adjustments are to be made P3 clockwise until the meter reading equals the set-
based on the machines function speed. ting in table #1. Follow the same procedure for the
“B” output. Use P8 for the minimum current adjust-
Table 4-1. Function Speeds ment and P7 for the maximum current adjustment.
Function Speed 4.Set the ramp up and the ramp down times. Step 2 must
Function be performed before continuing with procedure.
In Seconds
Power up the card, but do not start the engine. Place
Lift the current meter in series with the “A” output. Move
Up 26-32 the joystick from the center position to the extreme
Down 19-25 position. Watch the meter for the time it takes the
output to go to from 0 current to maximum current.
Swing Speed
This is the ramp up time. Adjust P1 until this time
Full 360 70-90 matches the time given in table 2. Rotating the
Telescope adjustment potentiometer clockwise will increase
Extend 18-23 the ramp time. To set the ramp down time, hold the
Retract 23-29
joystick in the extreme position. Release the joystick
and watch the meter for the time it takes the output
Platform Rotation to go from the maximum current setting to 0 current.
Left 9-15 Adjust P2 until this time matches the time in table 2.
Right 9-15 Rotating the adjustment potentiometer clockwise
Jib Boom (460SJ) will increase the ramp time. Follow the same proce-
dure for the “B” output. Use P5 for the ramp up
Up 17-23
adjustment and P6 for the ramp down adjustment.
Down 13-20
Drive Speed (2WD) Flow Control Card
27-32 @ 200ft.
1.Set the input potentiometer. Power up the card, but do
Drive Speed (4WD) not start the engine. Place the common lead of a
46-115 @ 50ft. voltmeter on pin #15 and place the other lead on pin
#8. Rotate the potentiometer and verify the input to
Lift, Swing, and Drive Cards the card is 3.8 volts when the input potentiometer is
in its minimum position. Rotate the input potentiom-
1.Center the input potentiometers. Power up the card, eter to its maximum position and verify the input to
but do not start the engine. Place the common lead the card is 0 volts.
of a voltmeter on pin #6 and place the other lead on
2.Set the minimum and maximum current settings. The
pin #8. Rotate the potentiometer, leaving the joy-
input potentiometer must function properly before
stick in the center position, until the voltmeter reads
continuing with this procedure. Turn P3 counter
2.5 volts. Secure the set screw on the potentiometer.
clockwise until the adjustment pot starts clicking.
When the potentiometer is centered and the joystick
Place a current meter in series with the “A” output.
is in the center position, LED #3 should not be illu-
Rotate the input potentiometer to its minimum set-
minated.
ting and operate the telescope function. Adjust P4
2.Install test harness JLG P/N 4922012. until the meter reading matches the setting in table
1. This sets the minimum current setting for the card.
3.Set the minimum and maximum currents. The input Rotate the input potentiometer to its extreme posi-
potentiometer must be centered before continuing tion and operate the telescope function. Turn P3
with this procedure. Power up the card, but do not clockwise until the meter reading matches the set-
start the engine. Place the current meter in series ting in Table 1. This sets the maximum current for the
with the “A” output. Turn P3 counter clockwise until card.
the adjustment potentiometer starts to click. This will
set to maximum current to its lowest value. Move the 3. Set the ramp up and the ramp down times. Step 2
joystick until LED #3 illuminates and hold the stick in must be completed before continuing with this pro-
this position. Adjust P4 until the meter equals the cedure. Power up the card, but do not start the
setting given in table #1. Rotating the adjustment engine. Place the current meter in series with the “A”
potentiometer clockwise will increase the current. output. Turn the input potentiometer to its extreme
This will set the minimum current setting for the “A” position and operate the telescope function. Watch
3120895 – JLG Lift – 4-11

the meter for the time it takes the output to go from 0 Table 4-3. Flow Control Card Ramp Time
current to maximum current. This is ramp up time.
Adjust P1 until this time matches the time in table 2. Function Ramp Time
Rotating the adjustment potentiometer clockwise
will increase ramp time. To set the ramp down time, Lift Up Ramp Up Time = 2:00 sec.
hold the telescope function switch and watch the Ramp Down Time = 2:00 sec.
time it takes the output to go from the maximum cur-
rent down to 0 current. This is the ramp down time. Lift Down Ramp Up Time = 3:00 sec.
Adjust P2 until this time matches the setting in table Ramp Down Time = 2:00 sec.
2. Rotating the adjustment potentiometer clockwise
Swing Right Ramp Up Time = 3:50 sec.
will increase the ramp time.
Ramp Down Time = 2:00 sec.
Swing Left Ramp Up Time = 3:50 sec.

Ramp Down Time = 2:00 sec.
Drive Forward Ramp Up Time = none

Ramp Down Time =none
Drive Reverse Ramp Up Time =none

Ramp Down Time = none
Flow Control Ramp Up Time = 3:00 sec.

(Tele, Rotate, Jib) Ramp Down Time = 0:00 sec.
NOTE: No ramp needed for drive forward and reverse. THe

drive pump is a slow reacting pump with internally
built in ramp up and down times.
Figure 4-9. Control Card
Table 4-2. Flow Control Card Settings
S Models
Function Minimum Current Maximum Current
Lift Up 400 mA 1320 mA
Lift Down 500 mA 1500 mA
Swing Right 400 mA 935 mA
Swing Left 400 mA 935 mA
Flow Control 700 mA 1600 mA
Drive Forward (Deutz) 820 mA 1120 mA
Drive Reverse (Deutz) 820 mA 1120 mA
Drive Forward (Ford) 820 mA 1200 mA
Drive Reverse (Ford) 820 mA 1200 mA
4-12 – JLG Lift – 3120895

4.5 HELAC ROTARY ACTUATOR

Theory Of Operation
The rotary actuator is a simple mechanism that uses the
sliding spline operating concept to convert linear piston
motion into powerful shaft rotation. Each actuator is com-
posed of a housing with integrated gear teeth (01) and
only two moving parts: the central shaft with integrated
bearing tube and mounting flange (02), and the annular
piston sleeve (03). Helical spline teeth machined on the
shaft engage matching splines on the in-side diameter of
the piston. The outside diameter of the piston carries a
second set of splines, of opposite hand, which engage
with matching splines in the housing. As hydraulic pres-
sure is applied, the piston is displaced axially within the
housing -similar to the operation of a hydraulic cylinder
while the splines cause the shaft to rotate. When the con-
trol valve is closed, oil is trapped inside the actuator, pre-
venting piston movement and locking the shaft in position.
The shaft is supported radially by the large upper radial
bearing and the lower radial bearing. Axially, the shaft is
NOTE: Bars indicate starting positions of piston and shaft.
separated from the housing by the upper and lower thrust
Arrows indicate direction they will rotate. The hous-
washers. The end cap is adjusted for axial clearance and
ing with integral ring gear remains stationary.
locked in position by set screws or pins.
As fluid pressure is applied, the piston is displaced
axially while the helical gearing causes the piston
and shaft to rotate simultaneously. The double helix
design compounds rotation: shaft rotation is about
twice that of the piston.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 4-13

1. Housing 200. T-Seal 304. Thrust Washer

2. Shaft 202. T-Seal 304.1. Wiper Seal
3. Piston Sleeve 204. O-Ring 400. Stop Tube (Optional)
4. End Cap 205. Cup Seal 401. Counterbalance Valve
109. Lock Pin 207. Back-Up
113. Cap Screw 302. Wear Guide
Figure 4-10. Rotary Actuator (Exploded View)
4-14 – JLG Lift – 3120895

1. Housing 200. T-Seal 304. Thrust Washer

2. Shaft 202. T-Seal 304.1. Wiper Seal
3. Piston Sleeve 204. O-Ring 400. Stop Tube (Optional)
4. End Cap 205. Cup Seal 401. Counterbalance Valve
109. Lock Pin 207. Back-Up
113. Cap Screw 302. Wear Guide
Figure 4-11. Cutaway View
3120895 – JLG Lift – 4-15

Tools Required for Assembly/Disassembly Disassembly

Upon assembly and disassembly of the actuator there are
basic tools required. The tools and their intended func-
tions are as follows:
1. Flashlight- helps examine timing marks, component
failure and overall condition.
2. Felt Marker- match mark the timing marks and out-
line troubled areas.
3. Allen wrench- removal of port plugs and setscrews.
4. Box knife- removal of seals.
5. Seal tool- assembly and disassembly of seals and
wear guides.
6. Pry bar- removal of end cap and manual rotation of 1. Remove the cap screws (113) over end cap lock
shaft. pins (109).
7. Rubber mallet- removal and installation of shaft and
piston sleeve assembly.
8. Nylon drift- installation of piston sleeve.
9. End cap dowel pins- removal and installation of end
cap (sold with Helac seal kit).
2. Using a 1/8” (3.18mm) drill bit, drill a hole in the cen-

ter of each lock pin to a depth of approximately 3/
16” (4.76mm).
The seal tool is merely a customized standard flat head-

screwdriver. To make this tool you will need to heat the flat
3. Remove the lock pins using an “Easy Out” (a size
end with a torch. Secure the heated end of the screwdriver
#2 is shown). If the pin will not come out with the
in a vice and physically bend the heated end to a slight
“Easy Out”, use 5/16” drill bit to a depth of 1/2”
radius. Once the radius is achieved round off all sharp
(12.7mm)todrill out the entire pin.
edges of the heated end by using a grinder. There may be
some slight modifications for your own personal prefer-
ence.
4-16 – JLG Lift – 3120895

4. Install the end cap (4) removal tools provided with 7. Remove the stop tube if included. The stop tube is
the Helac seal kit. an available option to limit the rotation of the actua-
tor.
5. Using a metal bar, or something similar, un-screw

the end cap (4) by turning it counter clock-wise.
8. Every actuator has timing marks for proper engage-

ment.
6. Remove the end cap (4) and set aside for later
inspection.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 4-17

9. Prior to removing the shaft, (2), use a felt marker to 12. To remove the piston (3) use a rubber mallet and a
clearly indicate the timing marks between shaft and plastic mandrel so the piston is no damaged.
piston. This will greatly simplify timing during assem-
bly.
13. At the point when the piston gear teeth come out of
engagement with the housing gear teeth, mark the
10. Remove the shaft (2). It may be necessary to strike piston and housing with a marker as shown.
the threaded end of the shaft with a rubber mallet.
14. Remove the o-ring (204) and backup ring (207) from
11. Before removing the piston (3), mark the housing (1) end cap (4) and set aside for inspection.
ring gear in relation to the piston O.D. gear. There
should now be timing marks on the housing (1) ring
gear, the piston (3) and the shaft (2).
4-18 – JLG Lift – 3120895

15. Remove the wear guides (302) from the end cap (4) 18. Remove the wiper seal (304.1) from its groove in the
and shaft (2). end cap (4) and shaft (2).
16. To remove the main pressure seals (205), it is easi- 19. Remove the piston O.D. seal (202).
est to cut them using a sharp razor blade being
careful not to damage the seal groove.
20. Remove the piston I.D. seal (200). You may now pro-
ceed to the inspection process.
17. Remove the thrust washers (304), from the end cap
(4) and shaft (2).
3120895 – JLG Lift – 4-19

Inspection Assembly
1. Clean all parts in a solvent tank and dry with com- 1. Gather all the components and tools into one loca-
pressed air prior to inspecting. Carefully inspect all tion prior to re-assembly. Use the cut away drawing
critical areas for any surface finish abnormalities: to reference the seal orientations.
Seal grooves, bearing grooves, thrust surfaces, rod
surface, housing bore and gear teeth.
2. Install the thrust washer (304) onto shaft (2) and end
cap (4).
2. Inspect the thrust washers (304) for rough or worn
edges and surfaces. Measure it’s thickness to make
sure it is within specifications (Not less than 0.092”
or 2.34 mm).
3. Install the wiper seal (304.1/green O-ring) into it’s

groove on the shaft (2) and end cap (4) around the
outside edge of the thrust washer (304).
3. Inspect the wear guide condition and measure thick-

ness (not less than 0.123” or 3.12 mm).
4-20 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Beginning with the inner seal (200) insert one end of b/u
4. Using a seal tool install the main pressure seal (205)
ring in the lower groove and feed the rest in using a circu-
onto shaft (2) and end cap (4). Use the seal tool in a
lar motion. Make sure the wedged ends overlap correctly.
circular motion.
Repeat this step for the outer seal (202).
5. Install the wear guide (302) on the end cap (4) and
7. Insert the piston (3) into the housing (1) as shown,
shaft (2).
until the outer piston seal (202) is touching inside
the housing bore.
6. Install the inner T-seal (200) into the piston (3) using
a circular motion. Install the outer T-seal (202) by
8. Looking from the angle shown, rotate the piston (3)
stretching it around the groove in a circular motion.
until the marks you put on the piston and the hous-
Each T-seal has 2 back-up rings (see drawing for ori-
ing (1) during disassembly line up as shown. Using
entation).
a rubber mallet, tap the piston into the housing up to
the point where the gear teeth meet.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 4-21

9. Looking from the opposite end of the housing (1) 12. Install 2 bolts in the threaded holes in the flange.
you can see if your timing marks are lining up. When Using a bar, rotate the shaft in a clockwise direction
they do, tap the piston (3) in until the gear teeth until the wear guides are seated inside the housing
mesh together. Tap the piston into the housing the bore.
rest of the way until it bottoms out.
13. Install the stop tube onto the shaft end. Stop tube is
10. Install the shaft (2) into the piston (3). Be careful not an available option to limit the rotation of an actua-
to damage the seals. Do not engage the piston gear tor.
teeth yet.
14. Coat the threads on the end of the shaft with anti-
11. Looking from the view shown, use the existing tim- seize grease to prevent galling.
ing marks to line up the gear teeth on the shaft (2)
with the gear teeth on the inside of the piston (3).
Now tap the flange end of the shaft with a rubber
mallet until the gear teeth engage.
4-22 – JLG Lift – 3120895

15. Install the O-ring (204) and back-up ring (207) into 18. Place the lock pins (109) provided in the Helac seal
the inner seal groove on the end cap (4). kit in the holes with the dimple side up. Then, using
a punch, tap the lock pins to the bottom of the hole.
16. Thread the end cap (4) onto the shaft (2) end. Make
sure the wear guide stays in place on the end cap as 19. Insert the set screws (113) over the lock pins.
it is threaded into the housing (1). Tighten them to 25 in. lbs. (2.825 Nm).
Installing Counterbalance Valve

Refer to Figure 4-12., Rotator Counterbalance Valve.
1. Make sure the surface of the actuator is clean, free
of any contamination and foreign debris including
old Loctite.
2. Make sure the new valve has the O-rings in the
counterbores of the valve to seal it to the actuator
housing.
3. The bolts that come with the valve are grade 8 bolts.
New bolts should be installed with a new valve. Loc-
tite #242 should be applied to the shank of the three
17. Tighten the end cap (4). In most cases the original bolts at the time of installation.
holes for the lock pins will line up. 4. Torque the 1/4-inch bolts 110 to 120 inch pounds
(12.4 to 13.5 Nm). Do not torque over 125 inch
pounds (14.1 Nm). Torque the 5/16-inch bolts 140
inch pounds (15.8 Nm). Do not torque over 145 inch
pounds (16.3 Nm).
3120895 – JLG Lift – 4-23

Figure 4-12. Rotator Counterbalance Valve
4-24 – JLG Lift – 3120895

SECTION 5. HYDRAULICS
5.1 CYLINDERS - THEORY OF OPERATION 7. If extend port leakage is less than 6-8 drops per min-
ute, carefully reconnect hose to extend port, than
activate cylinder through one complete cycle and
Systems Incorporating Double Acting check for leaks. If leakage continues at a rate of 6-8
Cylinders drops per minute or more, cylinder repairs must be
made.
Cylinders are of the double acting type. Systems incorpo-
rating double acting cylinders are as follows: Slave Level,
Master Level, Lift, Telescope, Axle Lockout and Steer. A
Cylinders With Dual Counterbalance Valves
double acting cylinder is one that requires oil flow to oper- Slave Level, Lift, and Telescope
ate the cylinder rod in both directions. Directing oil (by
actuating the corresponding control valve to the piston
side of the cylinder) forces the piston to travel toward the
rod end of the barrel, extending the cylinder rod (piston OPERATE ALL FUNCTIONS FROM GROUND CONTROL STATION
attached to rod). When the oil flow is stopped, movement ONLY.
of rod will stop. By directing oil to the rod side of the cylin-
der, the piston will be forced in the opposite direction and 1. Using all applicable safety precautions, activate
the cylinder rod will retract. hydraulic system.
Systems Incorporating Holding Valves

IF WORKING ON THE PLATFORM LEVEL CYLINDER, STROKE
Holding valves are used in the - Lift, Telescope, Lockout,
PLATFORM LEVEL CYLINDER FORWARD UNTIL PLATFORM SITS
and Slave Level circuits to prevent retraction of the cylin-
AT A 45 DEGREES ANGLE.
der rod should a hydraulic line rupture or a leak develop
between the cylinder and its related control valve. 2. Shut down hydraulic system and allow machine to
sit for 10-15 minutes. Move control lever for applica-
ble cylinder in each direction. This is done to relieve
5.2 CYLINDER REPAIR pressure in the hydraulic lines. Carefully remove
hydraulic hoses from appropriate cylinder port
Cylinders Without Counterbalance Valves block.
Master Cylinder and Steer Cylinder 3. There will be initial weeping of hydraulic fluid, which
can be caught in a suitable container. After the initial
1. Using all applicable safety precautions, activate discharge, there should be no further leakage from
engine and fully extend cylinder to be checked. Shut the ports. If leakage continues at a rate of 6-8 drops
down engine. per minute or more, the counterbalance valve is
defective and must be replaced.
2. Carefully disconnect hydraulic hoses from retract
port of cylinder. There will be some initial weeping of 4. To check piston seals, carefully remove the counter-
hydraulic fluid which can be caught in a suitable balance valve from the retract port. After initial dis-
container. After the initial discharge, there should be charge, there should be no further leakage from the
no further drainage from the retract port. ports. If leakage occurs at a rate of 6-8 drops per
minute or more, the piston seals are defective and
3. Activate engine and extend cylinder. must be replaced.
4. If cylinder retract port leakage is less than 6-8 drops 5. If no repairs are necessary or when repairs have
per minute, carefully reconnect hose to port and been made, replace counterbalance valve and care-
retract cylinder. If leakage continues at a rate of 6-8 fully connect hydraulic hoses to cylinder port block.
drops per minute or more, cylinder repair must be
made. 6. If used, remove lifting device from upright or remove
prop from below main boom, activate hydraulic sys-
5. With cylinder fully retracted, shut down engine and tem and run cylinder through one complete cycle to
carefully disconnect hydraulic hose from cylinder check for leaks.
extend port.
6. Activate engine and retract cylinder. Check extend
port for leakage.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 5-1

Figure 5-1. Boom Prop Configuration

NOTE: The following are general procedures that apply to .
all of the cylinders on this machine. Procedures that

apply to a specific cylinder will be so noted.
Disassembly
DISASSEMBLY OF THE CYLINDER SHOULD BE PERFORMED ON A

CLEAN WORK SURFACE IN A DIRT FREE WORK AREA.
1. Connect a suitable auxiliary hydraulic power source

to the cylinder port block fitting.
DO NOT FULLY EXTEND CYLINDER TO THE END OF STROKE.

RETRACT CYLINDER SLIGHTLY TO AVOID TRAPPING PRESSURE. Figure 5-2. Cylinder Barrel Support
2. Operate the hydraulic power source and extend the
cylinder. Shut down and disconnect the power 5. Mark cylinder head and barrel with a center punch
source. Adequately support the cylinder rod, if appli- for easy realignment. Using an allen wrench, loosen
cable. the cylinder head retainer cap screws, and remove
cap screws from cylinder barrel.
3. If applicable, remove the cartridge-type holding
valve and fittings from the cylinder port block. Dis-
card o-rings.
4. Place the cylinder barrel into a suitable holding fix-
ture
5-2 – JLG Lift – 3120895

10. Insert the cap screw(s) in the threaded holes in the

outer piece of the tapered bushing. Progressively
tighten the cap screw(s) until the bushing is loose
on the piston.
11. Remove the bushing from the piston.
Figure 5-3. Capscrew Removal
6. Attach a suitable pulling device to the cylinder rod

port block end or cylinder rod end, as applicable.
EXTREME CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN WHEN REMOVING THE CYL-

Figure 5-5. Tapered Bushing Removal
INDER ROD, HEAD, AND PISTON. AVOID PULLING THE ROD OFF-
CENTER, WHICH COULD CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE PISTON AND
12. Screw the piston CCW, by hand, and remove the
CYLINDER BARREL SURFACES.
piston from cylinder rod.
7. With the barrel clamped securely, apply pressure to 13. Remove and discard the piston o-rings, seal rings,
the rod pulling device and carefully withdraw the and backup rings.
complete rod assembly from the cylinder barrel
14. Remove piston spacer, if applicable, from the rod.
15. Remove the rod from the holding fixture. Remove
the cylinder head gland and retainer plate, if applica-
ble. Discard the o-rings, back-up rings, rod seals,
and wiper seals.
Cleaning and Inspection

1. Clean all parts thoroughly in an approved cleaning
solvent.
2. Inspect the cylinder rod for scoring, tapering, ovality,
or other damage. If necessary, dress rod with
Scotch Brite or equivalent. Replace rod if necessary.
3. Inspect threaded portion of rod for excessive dam-
age. Dress threads as necessary.
4. Inspect inner surface of cylinder barrel tube for scor-
ing or other damage. Check inside diameter for
tapering or ovality. Replace if necessary.
5. Inspect threaded portion of barrel for damage. Dress
Figure 5-4. Cylinder Rod Support threads as necessary.
8. Using suitable protection, clamp the cylinder rod in 6. Inspect piston surface for damage and scoring and
a vise or similar holding fixture as close to the piston for distortion. Dress piston surface or replace piston
as possible. as necessary.
9. Loosen and remove the cap screw(s), if applicable, 7. Inspect threaded portion of piston for damage.
which attach the tapered bushing to the piston. Dress threads as necessary.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 5-3

8. Inspect seal and o-ring grooves in piston for burrs

and sharp edges. Dress applicable surfaces as nec- Assembly
essary.
NOTE: Prior to cylinder assembly, ensure that the proper
9. Inspect cylinder head inside diameter for scoring or cylinder seal kit is used. See your JLG Parts Manual.
other damage and for ovality and tapering. Replace
as necessary. Apply a light film of hydraulic oil to all components
10. Inspect threaded portion of head for damage. Dress prior to assembly.
threads as necessary.
1. A special tool is used to install a new rod seal into
11. Inspect seal and o-ring grooves in head for burrs the applicable cylinder head gland groove.
and sharp edges. Dress applicable surfaces as nec-
essary.
12. Inspect cylinder head outside diameter for scoring
or other damage and ovality and tapering. Replace
as necessary.
13. If applicable, inspect rod and barrel bearings for
signs of correct excessive wear or damage. Replace
as necessary.
a. Thoroughly clean hole, (steel bushing) of burrs,
dirt etc. to facilitate bearing installation.
b. Inspect steel bushing for wear or other damage.
If steel bushing is worn or damaged, rod/barrel
must be replaced.
c. Lubricate inside of the steel bushing with WD 40
prior to bearing installation.
Figure 5-7. Rod Seal Installation
d. Using an arbor of the correct size, carefully
press the bearing into steel bushing.
NOTE: Install pin into the composite bearing dry. Lubrication

is not required with nickel plated pins and bearings. WHEN INSTALLING “POLY-PAK” PISTON SEALS, ENSURE SEALS
ARE INSTALLED PROPERLY. REFER TO WIPER SEAL INSTALLA-
TION FOR CORRECT SEAL ORIENTATION. IMPROPER SEAL
INSTALLATION COULD RESULT IN CYLINDER LEAKAGE AND
IMPROPER CYLINDER OPERATION.
2. Use a soft mallet to tap a new wiper seal into the

applicable cylinder head gland groove. Install a new
wear ring into the applicable cylinder head gland
groove.
Figure 5-6. Composite Bearing Installation
14. Inspect travel limiting collar or spacer for burrs and

sharp edges. If necessary, dress inside diameter
surface with Scotch Brite or equivalent.
15. If applicable, inspect port block fittings and holding
valve. Replace as necessary.
16. Inspect the oil ports for blockage or the presence of
dirt or other foreign material. Repair as necessary.
17. If applicable, inspect piston rings for cracks or other
damage. Replace as necessary.
5-4 – JLG Lift – 3120895

16
19
14
16
15
1
3
4
10
6
7
11
9
8
12
13
20
10
1684139 D
1. Barrel 5. Wear Ring 9. Seal 13. Bolt 17. Loctite #242

2. Not Used 6. O-ring 10. Rod 14. Valve Cartridge 18. Locking Primer
3. Wear Ring 7. Backup Ring 11. Cap 15. Bleeder Valve 19. O-ring Plug
4. T-Seal 8. Wiper 12. Washer Ring 16. Bushing 20. Bushing
Figure 5-8. Axle Lockout Cylinder
3120895 – JLG Lift – 5-5

5-6
– JLG Lift –
1. Barrel 5. Tapered Bushing 11. Loctite #242 17. Wear Ring 23. Valve Cartridge
1A. Bushing 6. Spacer 12. Locking Primer 18. O-ring 24. O-ring Plug
2. Rod 7. Valve Cartridge 13. Seal 19. Backup Ring 25. Screw
2A. Bushing 8. O-ring Plug 14. Lock Ring 20. Rod Seal 26. Loctite RC609
3. Piston 9. Capscrew 15. O-ring 21. Wiper
4. Head 10. Washer Ring 16. Backup Ring 22. Not Used
Figure 5-9. Platform Level Cylinder
3120895
6 8 1A
1
8
8
6
26
11
14
9
15
10
15
14
16
17
12
16
18
19
2
22 5
20
21
3
4
5A
1683609 G
1. Barrel 5. Rod 9. O-ring Plug 14. Lock Ring 19. Backup Ring 24. Locking Primer
1A. Bushing 5A. Bushing 10. Piston 15. Piston Seal 20. Seal 25. Not Used
2. Head 6. Valve Cartridge 11. Tapered Bushing 16. O-ring 21. Wiper 26. Capscrew
3. Ring Washer 7. Not Used 12. Tube Spacer 17. Backup Ring 22. Wear Ring
4. Bolt 8. O-ring Plug 13. Not Used 18. O-ring 23. Loctite #242
Figure 5-10. Jib Lift Cylinder (460SJ)
3120895 – JLG Lift – 5-7

26
8
12
6
29***
13
4
5
15
24
15
19
18
20
18
20 9
25
27* 16
21
17 1,2**,28
7 22
2**,3**,23
10
11
6
* Prior to S/N 78894
** Prior to S/N 102048
*** Torque to 20 ft.lbs. (27 Nm) Max 6
1683776 E
1. Loctite #242 7. Head 13. Plug 19. Seal 25. Tube Spacer
2. Locking Primer 8. Barrel 14. Not Used 20. O-ring 26. Counterbalance Valve
3. Loctite 9. Piston 15. Wear Ring 21. O-ring 27. Setscrew
4. Bolt 10. Wear Ring 16. Wear Ring 22. Poly Seal 28. Capscrew
5. Tapered Bushing 11. Cylinder Rod 17. Backup Ring 23. Wiper 29. Cartridge Valve
6. Composite Bushing 12. Plug 18. Backup Ring 24. T-Seal
Figure 5-11. Lift Cylinder
5-8 – JLG Lift – 3120895

10
4
5
14
13
12
13
14
16
15
16
24
18
19
17
17
7 9
20
21
22
23
6
1684284 B
1. Loctite #242 6. Bushing 11. Not Used 16. Backup Ring 21. Wiper
2. Locking Primer 7. Head 12. Piston 17. Wear Ring 22. Washer Ring
3. Not Used 8. Barrel 13. Hydrolock Ring 18. O-ring 23. Capscrew
4. Bolt 9. Rod 14. Guidelock Ring 19. Backup Ring 24. Tube Spacer
5. Tapered Bushing 10. O-ring Plug 15. O-ring 20. Poly Seal
Figure 5-12. Master Cylinder
3120895 – JLG Lift – 5-9

11
12
3
9
7
10
8
8
10
7
9
3
12
2 11
13 1684412 A
1. Barrel 6. Wear Ring 11. Wiper

2. Rod 7. Backup Ring 12. Seal
3. Cylinder Head 8. Wear Ring 13. T-Seal
4. Anti-Seize 9. O-ring
5. Not Used 10. O-ring
Figure 5-13. Steer Cylinder
5-10 – JLG Lift – 3120895

30 31
3120895
25
29
4
6
12 22
12
10
14
17
14
29
27
16
13 23
– JLG Lift –
18
21
9 32
5
7
19
20 24 26
5
32
23
1684194 C
1. Loctite #242 7. Head 13. Wear Ring 18. O-ring 23. Wear Pad 28. Not Used
2. Locking Primer 8. Barrel 14. Backup Ring 19. Rod Seal 24. Mounting Plate 29. O-ring Plug
3. Loctite 9. Rod 15. Not Used 20. Wiper 25. Capscrew 30. Valve
4. Bolt 10. Piston 16. O-ring 21. Backup Ring 26. Capscrew 31. O-ring Plug
5. Bolt 11. Not Used 17. O-ring 22. Seal 27. Tube Spacer 32. Flatwasher
6. Tapered Bushing 12. Wear Ring
Figure 5-14. Telescope Cylinder
5-11
Figure 5-15. Wiper Seal Installation
3. Place a new o-ring and back-up seal in the applica-

ble outside diameter groove of the cylinder head.
.
Figure 5-17. Piston Seal Kit Installation.
8. Using suitable protection, clamp the cylinder rod in

a vise or similar holding fixture as close to piston as
possible.
9. Carefully thread the piston on the cylinder rod hand
tight, ensuring that the o-ring and back-up rings are
not damaged or dislodged.
10. Thread piston onto rod until it abuts the spacer end
and install the tapered bushing.
Figure 5-16. Installation of Head Seal Kit
NOTE: When installing the tapered bushing, piston and mat-
4. Install washer ring onto rod, carefully install the head ing end of rod must be free of oil.
gland on the rod, ensuring that the wiper and rod
seals are not damaged or dislodged. Push the head NOTE: When rebuilding the steer, axle oscillation, level cyl-
along the rod to the rod end, as applicable. inder, lift cylinder, or e.a.r. cylinders, tighten securely.
5. Carefully slide the piston spacer on the rod. (See Table 5-1, Cylinder Head and Tapered Bushing
Torque Specifications).
6. If applicable, correctly place new o-ring in the inner
piston diameter groove. (The backup ring side fac- 11. Assemble the tapered bushing loosely into the pis-
ing the O-ring is grooved.) ton and insert JLG cap screws (not vendor cap-
screws) through the drilled holes in the bushing and
7. If applicable, correctly place new seals and guide
into the tapped holes in the piston.
lock rings in the outer piston diameter groove. (A
tube, with I.D. slightly larger than the O.D.of the pis-
ton is recommended to install the solid seal.)
NOTE: The backup rings for the solid seal have a radius on
one side. This side faces the solid seal.(See magni-
fied insert in Figure 5-17.)The split of seals and
backup rings are to be positioned so as not to be in
alignment with each other.
5-12 – JLG Lift – 3120895

15. Remove the cylinder rod from the holding fixture.

16. Place new guide locks and seals in the applicable
outside diameter grooves of the cylinder piston.
(See Figure 5-17., Piston Seal Kit Installation.)
Figure 5-20. Poly-Pak Piston Seal Installation
Figure 5-18. Tapered Bushing Installation 17. Position the cylinder barrel in a suitable holding fix-
ture.
12. Tighten the capscrews evenly and progressively in
rotation to the specified torque value. (See Table 5-1,
Cylinder Head and Tapered Bushing Torque Specifi- EXTREME CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN WHEN INSTALLING THE CYL-
cations.) INDER ROD, HEAD, AND PISTON. AVOID PULLING THE ROD OFF-
13. After the screws have been torqued, tap the tapered CENTER, WHICH COULD CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE PISTON AND
bushing with a hammer (16 to 24 oz.) and brass CYLINDER BARREL SURFACES.
shaft (approximately 3/4” in diameter) as follows;
18. With barrel clamped securely, and while adequately
a. Place the shaft against the cylinder rod and in supporting the rod, insert the piston end into the
contact with the bushing in the spaces between barrel cylinder. Ensure that the piston loading o-ring
the capscrews. and seal ring are not damaged or dislodged.
b. Tap each space once; this means the tapered 19. Continue pushing the rod into the barrel until the cyl-
bushing is tapped 3 times as there are 3 spaces inder head gland can be inserted into the barrel cyl-
between the capscrews. inder.
.
20. Secure the cylinder head gland using the washer

ring and socket head bolts. See Figure 5-1, Cylinder
Head and Tapered Bushing Torque Specifications
Figure 5-21. Rod Assembly Installation

Figure 5-19. Seating the Tapered Bearing
21. After the cylinder has been reassembled, the rod
14. Retorque the capscrews evenly and progressively in should be pushed all the way in (fully retracted) prior
rotation to the specified torque value. (See Table 5-1, to the reinstallation of any holding valve or valves.
Cylinder Head and Tapered Bushing Torque Specifi-
cations.)
3120895 – JLG Lift – 5-13

NOTE: If applicable, install the cartridge-type holding valve

and fittings in the rod port block, using new o-rings
as applicable. (See Table 5-2, Holding Valve Torque IF THE CYLINDER IS TO BE TESTED PRIOR TO INSTALLATION ON
Specification.) THE MACHINE, EXTREME CARE SHOULD BE USED TO INSURE
THAT THE OUTER END OF THE ROD IS SUPPORTED. USE EITHER
Table 5-1. Cylinder Head and Tapered Bushing Torque A TRAVELING OVERHEAD HOIST, FORK-LIFT, OR OTHER MEANS
Specifications TO SUPPORT THE OVERHANGING WEIGHT OF THE EXTENDING
ROD.
Head Torque Value Tapered Bushing
Description
(Wet) Torque Value (Wet)
Lift Cylinder 120 ft. lbs. 9 ft. lbs 5.3 VALVES - THEORY OF OPERATION
(162 Nm) (12 Nm)
Lift Cylinder (SJ) 30 ft. lbs. 5 ft. lbs
Solenoid Control Valve
(41 Nm) (7 Nm) Control valves used are four-way three-position solenoid
30 ft. lbs 9 ft. lbs valves of the sliding spool design. When a circuit is acti-
Tele Cylinder vated and the control valve solenoid energizes, the spool
(41 Nm) (12 Nm)
is shifted and the corresponding work port opens to per-
50 ft. lbs. 9 ft. lbs mit oil flow to the component in the selected circuit with
Level Cylinder
(68 Nm) (12 Nm) the opposite work port opening to reservoir. Once the cir-
50 ft. lbs. 9 ft. lbs cuit is deactivated (control returned to neutral) the valve
Master Cylinder spool returns to neutral (center) and oil flow is then
(68 Nm) (12 Nm)
directed through the valve body and returns to reservoir. A
50 ft. lbs. 9 ft. lbs typical control valve consist of the valve body, sliding
Level Cylinder (SJ)
(68 Nm) (12 Nm) spool, and two solenoid assemblies. The spool is
Axle Oscillation 30 ft. lbs. machine fitted in the bore of the valve body. Lands on the
N/A
Cylinder (41 Nm) spool divide the bore into various chambers, which, when
the spool is shifted, align with corresponding ports in the
30 ft. lbs.
Steer Cylinder N/A valve body open to common flow. At the same time other
(41 Nm)
ports would be blocked to flow. The spool is spring loaded
to center position, therefore when the control is released,
Table 5-2. Holding Valve Torque Specification. the spool automatically returns to neutral, prohibiting any
flow through the circuit.
Description Torque Value
30-35 ft.lbs.
SUN - 7/8 HEX M20 x 1.5 THDS.
(41-48 Nm)
45-50 ft.lbs.
SUN - 1 1/8 HEX 1-14 UNS THDS.
(61-68 Nm)
150-160 ft.lbs.
SUN - 1 1/4 HEX M36 x 2 THDS.
(204-217 Nm)
50-55 ft.lbs.
RACINE - 1 1/8 HEX 1 1/16-12 THDS.
(68-75 Nm)
75-80 ft.lbs.
RACINE - 1 3/8 HEX 1 3/16-12 THDS.
(102-109 Nm)
100-110 ft.lbs.
RACINE - 1 7/8 HEX 1 5/8-12 THDS.
(136-149 Nm)
5-14 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Figure 5-22. Main Valve
3120895 – JLG Lift – 5-15

Ft-Lbs. Nm
1 18-20 24.5-27.2
2 4-5 6.5-9.5
3 25-27 34-36.7
4 5 9.5
Figure 5-23. Main Valve Cartridge Torque Values
5-16 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Relief Valves ings are acceptable if within +/- 5% of specified pres-

sures.
Relief valves are installed at various points within the
hydraulic system to protect associated systems and com- NOTE: Engine RPM’s must be correct. Mid engine 1800,
ponents against excessive pressure. Excessive pressure and High engine 2800 for Deutz engines; 2900 for
can be developed when a cylinder reaches its limit of Ford engines. The adjustable resistor at the ground
travel and the flow of pressurized fluid continues from the control for lift and swing should be set to maximum
system control. The relief valve provides an alternate path speed for these functions while setting pressures.
for the continuing flow from the pump, thus preventing After this procedure is done, it can be reset.
rupture of the cylinder, hydraulic line or fitting. Complete
failure of the system pump is also avoided by relieving cir- 1. Bang-Bang Main Relief Valve;
cuit pressure. The relief valve is installed in the circuit
between the pump outlet (pressure line) and the cylinder This valve will be reset at the end of this procedure. In
of the circuit, generally as an integral part of the system order to be able to set other pressures, we need to set this
valve bank. Relief pressures are set slightly higher than valve to 3000 psi. Install a high pressure gauge at the port
the load requirement, with the valve diverting excess marked “M1” located behind the tank port. Activate tele-
pump delivery back to the reservoir when operating pres- scope in. Adjust the valve to 3000 psi, located on top of
sure of the component is reached. main valve, 3rd relief valve to the left of the tank port. Turn
1.Remove the boom from the turntable as follows: clockwise to increase and counterclockwise to decrease.
a. Disconnect wiring harness from ground control 2. Steer;

harness connector.
Install a high pressure gauge at the port marked “M5”.
Activate steer and adjust the relief valve to 2500 psi. The
HYDRAULIC LINES AND PORTS SHOULD BE CAPPED IMMEDI- relief valve is located on the top of the main valve, the 5th.
ATELY AFTER DISCONNECTING LINES TO AVOID ENTRY OF CON- relief valve down from the tank port. Turn clockwise to
TAMINANTS INTO SYSTEM. increase and counterclockwise to decrease.
b. Tag and disconnect hydraulic lines from boom 3. Platform Level Up;
to control valve. Use a suitable container to
retain any residual hydraulic fluid. Cap all Install a high pressure gauge at the port marked “M3,
hydraulic lines and ports. located on the front face of the block at the top right cor-
ner. There is pressure trapped at this test port. To release
c. Using a suitable lifting equipment, adequately this pressure, activate level down to the end of stroke. (the
support boom weight along entire length. pressure in the up side goes to 0) This will allow you to
d. Remove the bolts and keeper pins securing the snap a gauge on this port. Activate level up to the end of
lift cylinder pivot pin. Using a suitable brass drift stroke, you should read 2800 psi. The level up relief valve
and hammer, remove the pivot pin from the is located on the top of the main valve and is the 1st. relief
lower boom. valve to the left of the tank port. Turn clockwise to
e. Remove hardware securing the level link pivot increase, and counterclockwise to decrease.
pin. Using a suitable brass drift and hammer,
remove the pin from the level link and turntable. 4. Platform Level Down;
f. Remove hardware securing the boom pivot pin. Install a high pressure gauge at the port marked “M4,
Using a suitable brass drift and hammer, remove located at the front face, bottom right corner. To get a
pin from the turntable. gauge on this point, activate level up to the end of stroke,
Using all applicable safety precautions, carefully lift boom (the pressure in the down side goes to 0)allowing you to
assembly clear of turntable and lower to ground or suit- snap on a gauge. Activate level down to the end of stroke,
able supported work surface. you should read 1800 psi. The level down relief valve is
located on the top of the main valve and is the 2nd. relief
valve to the left of the tank port. Turn clockwise to
5.4 PRESSURE SETTING PROCEDURES increase, and counterclockwise to decrease.
Cold temperatures have a significant impact on pressure
readings.JLG Industries Inc. recommends operating the 5. Articulating Jib Up;
machine until hydraulic system has warmed to normal
operating temperatures prior to checking pressures. We Install a high pressure gauge on “M” port of jib block,
also recommend using a calibrated gauge. Pressure read- located on the left side of the main valve. Activate jib up,
reading should be 2500 psi. The up relief valve is the front
3120895 – JLG Lift – 5-17

cartridge on the jib block. Turn clockwise to increase, 5.5 HYDRAULIC MOTOR REPAIR (H SERIES
counterclockwise to decrease.
CHAR-LYNN)
6. Articulating Jib Down; Cleanliness is extremely important when repairing these
Install a high pressure gauge on the “M” port of the jib motors. Work in a clean area. Before disconnecting lines,
block, located on the left side of the main valve. Activate clean port area of motor. Remove key when used. Check
jib down, reading should be 1200 psi. The down relief shaft and key slot. Remove burrs, nicks, and sharp edges.
valve is the back cartridge on the jib block. Turn clockwise Before disassembly, drain oil from motor. Then plug ports
to increase, counterclockwise to decrease. and thoroughly clean exterior of motor.
7. The Bang-Bang Main Relief Valve; Although not all drawings show the motor in a vise, we
recommend that you keep the motor in a vise during dis-
This valve will need to be reset from 3000 psi to 2500 psi. assembly. Follow the clamping procedure explained
Install a high pressure gauge at the port marked “M1” throughout the manual.
located behind the tank port. Activate telescope in. Adjust
the valve to 2500 psi. This valve is located on the top of Disassembly
the main valve, the 3ard. relief valve to the left of the tank
1. Place motor in a vise and clamp across edge of
port. Turn clockwise to increase, counterclockwise to
flange with output shaft down. When clamping, use
decrease.
protection devise on vise such as special soft jaws,
pieces of rubber or board.
8. The Proportional Main relief valve;
Install a high pressure gauge at the port marked “M2”
located on top of the main valve in front of the tank port.
This relief valve is located on top of the main valve and is
the 4th. relief valve to the left of the tank port. Adjust valve
to 2750 psi. This is done by raising the boom to the end of
stroke, or removing the hoses from ports #9 and #10 of
the main valve and plugging the hoses and capping the
ports. Activate lift up to read 2750 psi. Turn clockwise to
increase and counterclockwise to decrease. Leave the
hoses plugged and ports capped for lift down.
9. Lift Down;
Install a high pressure gauge at the port marked “M2”,
located on top of the main valve in front of the tank port.
The relief valve is located on top of the main valve and is
the 6th. relief valve to the left of the tank port. This relief
valve should be adjusted to 1600 psi. Activate lift down.
Turn clockwise to increase, counterclockwise to decrease.
Connect the hoses to the lift section.
10. Swing;
2. Remove cap screws and seal washers (when appli-
Left and right swing are done with (1) adjustment. Install a cable).
high pressure gauge at the port marked “MS”, located on
the front face of the main valve at far left corner. The relief
valve is located on top of the main valve and is the #7
relief valve to the left of the tank port. adjust relief valve to
1600 psi. This can done by using the turntable lock, or
removing the wires from the swing valve, or by removing
the hoses from ports #11 and #12 of the main valve,
plugging the hoses and capping the ports. Activate swing
in either direction. Turn clockwise to increase, counter-
clockwise to decrease.
5-18 – JLG Lift – 3120895

3. Remove end cap. clamping pressure on side of housing causes distor-

tion.
4. Remove seal from end cap.
5. Remove gerotor.
6. Remove seal from gerotor.
14. Remove cap screws from mounting flange. These

screws are assembled with Loctite to hold them in
7. Remove driver spacer if applicable. place.
The screws will require 300- 400 in-lbs (11 Nm) of
torque to break loose and 100 in-lbs to remove. Do
not use impact wrench on Loctite screws. This could
result in rounded heads or broken sockets.
NOTE: If torque higher than given above is required to break

screws loose, apply heat according to following
instructions:
When heated, Loctite partially melts. This reduces torque

required to remove screw. Use small propane torch to
heat small area of housing where screws enters. Be care-
ful not to overheat housing and damage motor. Gradually
apply torque to screw with socket wrench as heat is
8. Remove drive. applied for 8 to 10 seconds. Continue turning screw until it
9. Remove spacer plate. is completely removed.
10. Remove seal from housing. 15. Carefully remove flange from housing.
11. Remove output shaft from housing.

12. Remove needle thrust bearing from shaft or hous-
ing.
13. Reposition motor in vise. Clamp across ports as
shown. Do not clamp on side of housing. Excessive
3120895 – JLG Lift – 5-19

17. A metal plug, with seal, plugs a machining hole in

the housing. It is not necessary to remove plug and
SOME MOTORS MAY HAVE A QUAD SEAL AND BACK - UP RING replace seal unless leakage occurs around plug. To
IN PLACE OF THE PRESSURE SEAL. THE QUAD SEAL AND BACK - remove plug, insert 3/16 in. (5mm) hex key through
UP RING ARE NO LONGER AVAILABLE AND ARE REPLACED BY port opening and push it out. The 009 plug is not
THE PRESSURE SEAL. THEY ARE INTERCHANGEABLE, BUT SOME interchangeable with 007 and 008 plugs.
PRECAUTIONS MUST BE TAKEN TO INSURE PROPER INSTALLA-
TION. FOLLOW THE REASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS.
16. Exclusion seal, back -up ring, pressure seal and seal
will come off with flange. Use seal removal tool, to
remove exclusion and pressure seals.
Reassembly Shaft End

Check all mating surfaces. Replace any parts with
scratches or burrs that could cause leakage or damage.
Clean all metal parts in clean solvent. Blow dry with air. Do
not wipe parts with cloth or paper towel because lint or
other matter could get into hydraulic system and cause
damage.
Check around key slot and chamfered area of shaft for
BE CAREFUL NOT TO SCRATCH SEAL CAVITY O.D. THIS COULD burrs, nicks or sharp edges that could damage seals dur-
CREATE A LEAK PATH. ing reassembly. Remove nicks or burrs with a hard
smooth stone (such as an Arkansas stone). Do not file or
grind motor parts.
NOTE: Lubricate all seals with petroleum jelly. Use new

seals when reassembly motor. Refer to parts list 6-
121 for proper seal kit numbers.
DO NOT STRETCH SEALS BEFORE INSTALLING THEM.
Cleanliness is extremely important in the successful appli-

cation of Loctite. Before Loctite can be applied, the parts
should be cleaned as follows:
NOTE: Fully cured Loctite resists most solvents, oils, gaso-

line and kerosene and is not affected by cleaning
operations. It is not necessary to remove cured Loc-
tite that is securely bonded in tapped holes; however,
any loose particles of cured Loctite should be
removed.
a. Wash the housing in solvent to remove oils,

grease and debris. Pay particular attention to
four tapped holes on flange end.
b. Blow dry with compressed air. Clean and dry
tapped holes.
5-20 – JLG Lift – 3120895

c. Wire brush screw threads ton remove cured 4. Install exclusion seal in flange. Carefully press exclu-
Loctite and other debris. Discard any screws sion seal into place.
that have damaged threads or rounded heads.
d. Wash screws with non - petroleum base solvent.
Blow dry with compressed air.
1. If you remove plug and seal, lubricate new seal and
install on plug. Some plugs have two o-ring grooves
but require only one o-ring. Install o-ring groove
closest to end of plug. Push plug into housing so
plug and housing are flush. Be careful not to dam-
age seal.
5. Visually check seal seat in mounting flange for

scratches or other marks that might damage the
pressure seal. Check for cracks in flange that could
cause leakage.
6. Lubricate I.D. of seal tube and O.D of shaft pressure
seal with light film of clean petroleum jelly. Align
small I.d. end of seal tube with seal seat in mounting
flange. Install back - up ring and pressure seal in
tube with lips of seal face up. See Figure 2-46. Insert
seal driver in tube and firmly push seal seat with a
rotating action.
2. Lubricate output shaft with hydraulic oil, then install
shaft in housing.
AFTER INSTALLING SEAL IN FLANGE, EXAMINE SEAL CONDI-
TION. IF DAMAGED OR IMPROPERLY INSTALLED, YOU MUST
DO NOT PERMIT OIL TO GET INTO THE FOUR TAPPED HOLES. REPLACE IT BEFORE CONTINUING WITH REASSEMBLY.
3. Install needle thrust bearing, then bearing race on 7. Install 1 5/16 in. (49 mm) I.D. seal in flange.
shaft. Pull shaft part way out of the housing. Push all
8. It is recommended to apply a light coat of Loctite
three parts in housing together. The bearing race
Primer NF in tapped holes of housing. Allow primer
must rotate freely when in position.
to air dry for at least 1 minute. Do not force dry with
air jet; the primer will blow away.
Use of primer is optional. With primer, Loctite curing

time is approximately 15 minutes. Without primer,
curing time is approximately 6 hours.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 5-21

9. Apply 3 or 4 drops of Loctite sealant at top of thread 11. After removing bullet, clamp motor in vise as shown
for each of four holes in housing.Do not allow parts in Figure 2-49. Make sure shaft cannot fall out. Install
with Loctite applied to come in contact with any dry screws and alternately torque them immediately
metal parts other than those for assembly. Wipe off to 250 in-lbs (28 Nm). If you use primer, allow to cure
excess Loctite from housing face, using a non - for 10 to 15 minutes. Without primer, allow 6 hours
petroleum base solvent. curing time before subjecting motor to high torque
reversals. On all other applications, you can run
Do not apply Loctite to threads more than 15 min- motor immediately.
utes before installing screws. If housing for more
than 15 minutes, repeat application. No additional If you use new screws, make sure they are the cor-
cleaning or removal of previously applied Loctite is rect length: 7/8 in. (22mm) under head length. See
necessary. parts list for correct part number.
10. Before installing flange and seal assembly over

shaft, place protective sleeve or bullet over shaft.
Then lubricate space between exclusion seal and
pressure seal, as well as lips of both seals. Gerotor End
Install flange. Rotate flange slowly while pushing 1. Reposition motor with gerotor end up, then clamp
down over shaft. Be careful not to invert or damage across ports. Do not clamp on side of housing.
seals.
TO AID INSTALLATION OF SEALS, APPLY LIGHT COAT OF CLEAN

PETROLEUM JELLY TP SEALS. DO NOT STRETCH SEALS BEFORE
INSTALLING THEM IN GROOVE.
2. Pour approximately 35 cc of clean hydraulic oil in

output shaft cavity.
3. Install 2 7/8 in. (73 mm) I.D. seal in housing seal
groove. Avoid twisting seal.
5-22 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Timing Procedure Reverse Rotation

a. Install drive. Use felt tip marker to mark one Align any star valley with marked tooth.
tooth. Align this tooth with timing dot on shaft.
NOTE: If drive is not symmetrical, install lager splined end

into shaft.
b. Install spacer plate.

c. Install 2 7/8 in. (73 mm) I.D. seal in gerotor seal
groove. Carefully place gerotor on spacer plate,
seal side toward spacer plate.
Standard Rotation
Align any star point with tooth marked on drive.
15. Rotate gerotor to line up with bolt holes. Be careful

not to disengage star from drive or disturb gerotor
seal.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 5-23

16. Install drive spacer if applicable. 18. Install cap screws and seal washers (if applicable) in
end cap. Pretighten screws to 40 in-lbs (4 Nm).
17. Install 2 7/8 in. (73 mm) seal in end cap. Carefully
Make sure seals are properly seated. Then torque
place end cap on gerotor.
screws 235 - 250 in - lbs (27 - 28 Nm) in sequence.
Figure 5-24. Char-Lynn H Series Hydraulic Motor
5-24 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Figure 5-25. Variable Displacement Hydraulic Pump.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 5-25

5.6 HYDRAULIC PUMP “NEUTRAL” OR NULL 5.7 NON-FEEDBACK, PROPORTIONAL

ADJUSTMENT ELECTRICAL CONTROL - NFPE
The pump neutral or null adjustment sets the position of The Non-Feedback Proportional Electric (NFPE) control is
the servo piston and pump swash plate relative to the con- a hydraulic control in which an electric input signal acti-
trolling mechanism. vates one of two solenoids which port charge pressure to
either side of the pump servo control cylinder.
Series 42 pumps equipped with an (NFPE) control have a

THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE REQUIRES THE MACHINE TO BE special servo cylinder capable of providing proportional
DISABLED (WHEELS RAISED OFF OF THE GROUND, WORK FUNC- control with an electric input.
TION DISCONNECTED, ETC.) WHILE PERFORMING THE PROCE-
The pump displacement is proportional to the solenoid
DURE IN ORDER TO PREVENT INJURY TO THE TECHNICIAN AND
signal current, but is also dependent upon the pump input
OTHER PERSONNEL.
speed and system pressure. This characteristic provides a
1. Disconnect machine function.(raise wheels off power limiting function by reducing the pump swash plate
ground, or chock wheels and disconnect hubs) angle as system pressure increases. A typical response
characteristic is shown in the accompanying graph.
2. Connect a hose between gauge ports M4 and M5 to
equalize the pressure on both ends of the servo pis- Features and Benefits of the NFPE Control
ton.
3. Install pressure gauges in gauge ports M1 and M2 1. Electric Control.
to measure system pressure. 2. Eliminates mechanical linkage for flexibility of con-
trol design.
4. Start the engine and operate at Mid speed.
5. Loosen the pump “neutral” or null adjustment seal 3. Power limiting characteristic reduces machine
lock nut. Turn the pump “neutral” adjustment screw power requirements.
until the system pressure gauge readings are equal. 4. Smooth operation.
6. Turn the adjustment screw clockwise until one of the
gauges registers an increase in system pressure.
Input Signal requirements
Note the position of the adjustment screw. Turn the The (NFPE) control requires a pulse-width-modulated
screw counterclockwise until the other gauge regis- (PWM) input current to optimize performance. The recom-
ters an increase in system pressure. Note the posi- mended PWM frequency is 200Hz. The minimum PWM
tion of the adjustment screw.
frequency is 80Hz. Coil resistance is 5.6 Ohms at 22oC
7. Turn the adjustment screw clockwise to a position (72oF).
half-way between the position noted above. The sys-
tem pressure gauges should indicate equal pres-
sures.
Table 5-3. Pump Flow Direction with NFPE Control
8. While holding the adjustment screw in position,
Torque the seal lock-nut 15-19 ft. lb.(20 Nm-25 Input Shaft Rotation
Nm).L
CW CCW
9. Stop the prime mover and remove the hose between
gauge ports M4 and M5. Remove the pressure Higher Pressure into Control Port A B A B
gauges installed in gauge ports M1 and M2. Rein-
stall the plugs in the gauge ports. Port “A” Flow In Out Out In
10. Reconnect work function. Port “B” Flow Out In In Out
High Servo Gauge Port M4 M5 M4 M5
5-26 – JLG Lift – 3120895

5.8 HYDRAULIC COMPONENT START-UP NOTE: In most cases, the reservoir is above the pump inlet
so that the pressure head created by the higher oil
PROCEDURES AND level helps to keep the inlet pressures within an
RECOMMENDATIONS acceptable range and prevent high vacuum levels.
However, due to hose routing or low reservoir loca-
From a hydrostatic component standpoint, the goal at tions, there may be air trapped within this line. It is
system start up is to put into functional operation, the important to assure that the air is bled from this line.
hydrostatic system in such a way as to preserve the This can be accomplished by loosening the hose at
designed life span of the system. The following start-up the fitting closest the pump. When oil begins to flow,
procedure should be adhered to whenever a new pump the line is full, the air has been purged, and the fitting
or motor is initially installed into a machine, or a system is can be retightened to its specified torque. If the tank
restarted after either a pump or motor has been removed needs to be pressurized in order to start the flow of
and/or replaced. oil, a vacuum reading should be taken at the inlet of
the pump during operation in order to verify that the
pump is not being asked to draw an inlet vacuum
THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE MAY REQUIRE THE MACHINE TO higher than it is capable of.
BE DISABLED (WHEELS RAISED OFF THE GROUND, WORK FUNC-
TIONS DISCONNECTED, ETC.) WHILE PERFORMING THE PROCE- Be certain to fill the pump and/or motor housing with
DURE IN ORDER TO PREVENT INJURY. TAKE NECESSARY SAFETY clean hydraulic fluid prior to start up. Fill the housing by
PRECAUTIONS BEFORE MOVING THE VEHICLE/MACHINE. pouring filtered oil into the upper case drain port.
Prior to installing the pump and/or motor, inspect the NOTE: It is highly recommended to use the highest possible
unit(s) for damage that may have been incurred during case drain port, this ensures that the housing con-
shipping and handling. Make certain that all system com- tains as much oil as possible and offers the greatest
ponents (reservoir, hoses, valves, fittings, heat exchanger, amount of lubrication to the internal components.
etc.) are clean prior to filling with fluid.
Fill the reservoir with recommended hydraulic fluid. This NOTE: In initial start-up conditions, it may be convenient to
fluid should be passed through a 10 micron (nominal, no fill the housing, just prior to installing the case drain
bypass) filter prior to entering the reservoir. The use of line. Component, (especially motor), location may be
contaminated fluid will cause damage to the components, such that access to the case drain port after installa-
which may result in unexpected vehicle/machine move- tion is not realistic.
ment.
NOTE: Make certain that the oil being used to fill the compo-
NOTE: If a pump or motor is being replaced due to internal nent housing is as clean as possible, and store the
damage, the remaining units (pump or motors) need fill container in such a way as to prevent it from
to be inspected for damage and contamination, and becoming contaminated.
the entire hydraulic system will need to be flushed
and the fluid replaced. Failure to do so may cause Install a 60 bar (or 1000 psi) pressure gauge in the charge
considerable damage to the entire system. pressure gauge port in order to monitor the charge pres-
sure during start-up.
The inlet line leading from the reservoir to the pump must
be filled prior to start-up. Check the inlet line for property
tightened fittings and make sure it is free of restrictions
and air leaks.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 5-27

It is recommended that the external control input signal, Once charge pressure has been established, increase
(electrical connections for EDC), be disconnected at the speed to normal operating RPM. Charge pressure should
pump control until after initial start-up. This will ensure that be as indicated in the pump model code. If charge pres-
the pump remains in its neutral position. sure is inadequate, shut down and determine the cause
for improper pressure.
DO NOT START THE ENGINE UNLESS PUMP IS IN THE NEUTRAL

POSITION (0 DEGREES SWASHPLATE ANGLE). TAKE PRECAU- INADEQUATE CHARGE PRESSURE WILL AFFECT THE OPERA-
TIONS TO PREVENT MACHINE MOVEMENT IN CASE PUMP IS TOR'S ABILITY TO CONTROL THE MACHINE.
ACTUATED DURING INITIAL START-UP. Shut down the engine and connect the external control
"Jog" or slowly rotate the engine until charge pressure input signal. Also reconnect the machine function(s), if
starts to rise. Start the engine and run at the lowest possi- disconnected earlier. Start the engine, checking to be cer-
ble RPM until charge pressure has been established. tain the pump remains in neutral. With the engine at nor-
Excess air should be bled from the system lines as close mal operating RPM, slowly check for forward and reverse
to the motors as possible. machine operation.
NOTE: With the engine on low idle, "crack", (loosen-don't Charge pressure may slightly decrease during forward or
remove), the system lines at the motor(s). Continue reverse operation. Continue to cycle slowly between for-
to run the engine at low idle and tighten the system ward and reverse for at least five minutes.
lines as soon as oil is observed to leak from them.
Shut down engine, remove gauges, and plug ports.
When oil is observed to "leak" at the motor the line is
Check reservoir level and add filtered fluid if needed.
full, the air has been purged, and the system hoses
should be retightened to their specified torque. The machine is now ready for operation.
5-28 – JLG Lift – 3120895

SECTION 6. JLG CONTROL SYSTEM (S/N 61718 TO PRESENT)
6.1 INTRODUCTION The upper lift, swing, and drive are controlled by individual
joysticks, with steering being controlled by a rocker switch
built into the top the drive joystick. To activate Drive, Lift,
and Swing simply pull up on the slide lock location on the
WHEN INSTALLING A NEW GROUND MODULE CONTROLLER ON joystick and move the handle into the direction desired.
THE MACHINE, IT WILL BE NECESSARY TO PROGRAM THE CON-
TROLLER FOR THE PROPER MACHINE CONFIGURATION, INCLUD- The control system will control the voltage output to the
ING OPTIONS. valves and pump, as programmed for smooth operation
and maximum cycle time. Ground control speeds for all
boom functions can also be programmed into the control
system.
IT IS A GOOD PRACTICE TO AVOID PRESSURE-WASHING ELEC-
TRICAL/ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS. SHOULD PRESSURE- The JLG Control System controller has a built in LED to
WASHING BE UTILIZED TO WASH AREAS CONTAINING ELECTRI- indicate any faults. The system stores recent faults which
CAL/ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS, JLG INDUSTRIES, INC. REC- may be accessed for troubleshooting. Optional equip-
OMMENDS A MAXIMUM PRESSURE OF 750 PSI (52 BAR) AT A ment includes a soft touch system, head and tail lights,
MINIMUM DISTANCE OF 12 INCHES (30.5 CM) AWAY FROM and ground alarm. These options may be added later but
THESE COMPONENTS. IF ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC COMPO- must be programmed into the control system when
NENTS ARE SPRAYED, SPRAYING MUST NOT BE DIRECT AND BE installed.
FOR BRIEF TIME PERIODS TO AVOID HEAVY SATURATION. The Control System may be accessed utilizing a custom
designed, hand held analyzer (Analyzer, JLG part no.
The JLG designed Control System is a 12 volt based 1600244 & Cable, JLG part no. 1600633) which will dis-
motor control unit installed on the boom lift. play two lines of information at a time, by scrolling through
The JLG Control System has reduced the need for the program.
exposed terminal strips, diodes and trimpots and provides
NOTE: Each module has a label with the JLG part number
simplicity in viewing and adjusting the various personality
and a serial number which contains a date code.
settings for smooth control of: acceleration, deceleration,
creep, min speed, and max.-speed for all boom, drive,
and steering functions.
Analyzer Display
Enter Key
Escape Key
Stores and selects Top Level, Sub
To return home or access
Level, and item menus
previous menu
Left & Right Arrow Keys

Up & Down Arrow Keys Used to move between Top Level,
Value Selector
Sub Level, and item menus
Figure 6-1. Hand Held Analyzer
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-1

Figure 6-2. ADE Block Diagram
6-2 – JLG Lift – 3120895

6.2 TO CONNECT THE JLG CONTROL The top level menus are as follows:
SYSTEM ANALYZER HELP

DIAGNOSTICS
1. Connect the four pin end of the cable supplied with SYSTEM TEST
the analyzer, to the controller module located in the ACCESS LEVEL
platform box or at the controller module in the PERSONALITIES
ground control box and connect the remaining end MACHINE SETUP
of the cable to the analyzer. CALIBRATIONS (view only)
NOTE: The cable has a four pin connector at each end of If you press ENTER, at the HELP: PRESS ENTER display,
the cable; the cable cannot be connected back- and a fault is present, the analyzer display will scroll the
wards. fault across the screen. If there was no fault detected, the
display will read: HELP: EVERYTHING OK. If powered up
2. Power up the Control System by turning the lower at the ground station, the display will read: GROUND OK.
key to the platform or ground position and pulling
If ENTER is pressed again, the display moves to the fol-
both emergency stop buttons on.
lowing display:
6.3 USING THE ANALYZER

With the machine power on and the analyzer connected
properly, the analyzer will display the following:
LOGGED HELP
1: POWER CYCLE (0/0)
At this point, the analyzer will display the last fault the sys-
tem has seen, if any are present. You may scroll through
HELP: the fault logs to view what the last 25 faults were. Use the
PRESS ENTER right and left arrow keys to scroll through the fault logs. To
return to the beginning, press ESC. two times. POWER
At this point, using the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys, you CYCLE (0/0) indicates a power up.
can move between the top level menu items. To select a
displayed menu item, press ENTER. To cancel a selected
menu item, press ESC.; then you will be able to scroll
using the right and left arrow keys to select a different
menu item.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-3

PLATFORM CONNECTION
GROUND CONTROL CONNECTION
Figure 6-3. Analyzer Connecting Points
6-4 – JLG Lift – 3120895

When a top level menu is selected, a new set of menu

items may be offered: for example:
DRIVE
BOOM
SYSTEM
DATALOG
VERSIONS
Pressing ENTER with any of the above displayed menus,
will display additional sub-menus within the selected
menu. In some cases, such as DRIVE, the next level is the
parameter or information to be changed. Refer to the flow
chart for what menus are available within the top level
menus. You may only view the personality settings for
selected menus while in access level 2. Remember, you
may always cancel a selected menu item by pressing the
ESC. key.
6.4 CHANGING THE ACCESS LEVEL OF THE

HAND HELD ANALYZER
When the analyzer is first connected, you will be in access
level 2 which enables you to only view most settings
which cannot be changed until you enter a password to MENU:
advance to a lower level. This ensures that a setting can- ACCESS LEVEL 2
not be accidentally altered. To change the access level,
Press ENTER to select the ACCESS LEVEL menu.
the correct password must be entered. To enter the pass-
word, scroll to the ACCESS LEVEL menu. For example: Using the UP or DOWN arrow keys, enter the first digit of
the password, 3.
Then using the RIGHT arrow key, position the cursor to
the right one space to enter the second digit of the pass-
word.
Use the UP or DOWN arrow key to enter the second digit
of the password which is 33271.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-5

Figure 6-4. Control Module Location
6-6 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Once the correct password is displayed, press ENTER. 6.5 ADJUSTING PARAMETERS USING THE
The access level should display the following, if the pass-
word was entered correctly: HAND HELD ANALYZER
Once you have gained access to level 1, and a personality
item is selected, press the UP or DOWN arrow keys to
adjust its value, for example:
MENU:
ACCESS LEVEL 1
Repeat the above steps if the correct access level is not
displayed or you can not adjust the personality settings. PERSONALITIES:
DRIVE ACCEL 1.0s
There will be a minimum and maximum for the value to
ensure efficient operation. The Value will not increase if
the UP arrow is pressed when at the maximum value nor
will the value decrease if the DOWN arrow is pressed and
the value is at the minimum value for any particular per-
sonality. If the value does not change when pressing the
up and won arrows, check the access level to ensure you
are at access level 1.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-7

6.6 MACHINE SETUP

When a machine digit item is selected, press the UP or ITS IS A GOOD PRACTICE TO AVOID PRESSURE-WASHING ELEC-
DOWN arrow keys to adjust its value, for example: TRICAL/ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS. SHOULD PRESSURE-
WASHING BE UTILIZED TO WASH AREAS CONTAINING ELECTRI-
CAL/ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS, JLG INDUSTRIES INC. RECOM-
MENDS A MAXIMUM PRESSURE OF 750 PSI (52 BAR) AT A
MINIMUM DISTANCE OF 12 INCHES (30.5CM) AWAY FROM
THESE COMPONENTS. IF ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC COMPO-
NENTS ARE SPRAYED, SPRAYING MUST NOT BE DIRECT AND BE
FOR BRIEF TIME PERIODS TO AVOID HEAVY SATURATION.
6.7 LEVEL VEHICLE DESCRIPTION
A NEW TILT MODULE WILL ACT AS IF IT IS TILTED ALL OF THE

TIME UNTIL THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE IS PERFORMED.
DO NOT CALIBRATE THE LEVEL SENSOR EXCEPT ON A LEVEL

SURFACE.
GROUND ALARM:
2 = LIFT DOWN
The effect of the machine digit value is displayed along
with its value. The above display would be selected if the
machine was equipped with a ground alarm and you
wanted it to sound when lifting down. There are certain
settings allowed to install optional features or select the
machine model.
When selection the machine model to match the size of
the machine, the personality settings will all default to the
factory recommended setting.
NOTE: Refer to Table 6-1, Personality Ranges/Defaults, and

in this Service Manual for the recommended factory
settings.
NOTE: Password 33271 will give you access to level 1,

which will permit you to change all machine person- Place machine in stowed position with the boom between
ality settings. the rear wheels.
There is a setting that JLG strongly recommends that you To level machine chose:
do not change. This setting is so noted below:
CALIBRATION:
ELEVATION CUTBACK TILT SENSOR
Press ENTER.
When prompted, swing machine 180°
CHANGING THIS SETTING MAY ADVERSELY AFFECT THE PER-
FORMANCE OF YOUR MACHINE. Press ENTER.
6-8 – JLG Lift – 3120895

3120895
ACCESS LEVEL:
CODE 33271
MENU: ACCESS LEVEL: TO

ACCESS LEVEL 1 CODE 00000 PERSONALITIES:
TOWER LIFT
MENU: PERSONALITIES: PERSONALITIES: PERSONALITIES: PERSONALITIES: PERSONALITIES: PERSONALITIES:

PERSONALITIES DRIVE STEER LEFT TRACK RIGHT TRACK MAIN LIFT SWING
DRIVE: STEER: LEFT TRACK: RIGHT TRACK: MAIN LIFT: SWING:

ACCEL X.XS MAX SPEED X% ACCEL X.XS ACCEL X.XS ACCEL X.XS ACCEL X.XS
DRIVE: LEFT TRACK: RIGHT TRACK: MAIN LIFT: SWING:

DECEL X.XS DECEL X.XS DECEL X.XS DECEL X.XS DECEL X.XS

MIN FORWARD X% MIN FORWARD X% MIN FORWARD X% MIN UP X% MIN LEFT X%
MAX FORWARD X% MAX FORWARD X% MAX FORWARD X% MAX UP X% MAX LEFT X%
– JLG Lift –
MIN REVERSE X% MIN REVERSE X% MIN REVERSE X% CREEP UP X% CREEP LEFT X%
MAX REVERSE X% MAX REVERSE X% MAX REVERSE X% MIN DOWN X% MIN RIGHT X%

ELEV. MAX X% ELEV F MAX X% ELEV F MAX X% MAX DOWN X% MAX RIGHT X%
CREEP MAX X% ELEV R MAX X% ELEV R MAX X% CREEP DOWN X% CREEP RIGHT X%
LEFT TRACK: RIGHT TRACK:

CREEP F MAX X% CREEP F MAX X%
LEFT TRACK: RIGHT TRACK:

CREEP R MAX X% CREEP R MAX X%
TO Note: Some screens may not be available depending upon machine configuration.
MENU:
MACHINE SETUP
Figure 6-5. Analyzer Flow Chart, Prior to Version 5.X Software - Sheet 1 of 4
6-9
6-10
FROM
PERSONALITIES:
SWING
PERSONALITIES: PERSONALITIES: PERSONALITIES: PERSONALITIES: PERSONALITIES: PERSONALITIES: PERSONALITIES: PERSONALITIES:

TOWER LIFT UPPER TELESCOPE TOWER TELESCOPE BASKET LEVEL BASKET ROTATE JIB LIFT GROUND MODE GEN SET/WELDER
TOWER LIFT: UPPER TELESCOPE: TOWER TELESCOPE: BASKET LEVEL: BASKET ROTATE: JIB LIFT: GROUND MODE: GEN SET/WELDER:
ACCEL X.XS ACCEL X.XS ACCEL X.XS ACCEL X.XS ACCEL X.XS ACCEL X.XS U. LIFT UP X% ENGINE 1800 RPM
TOWER LIFT: UPPER TELESCOPE: TOWER TELESCOPE: BASKET LEVEL: BASKET ROTATE: JIB LIFT: GROUND MODE:
DECEL X.XS DECEL X.XS DECEL X.XS DECEL X.XS DECEL X.XS DECEL X.XS U. LIFT DOWN X%
MIN UP X% MIN IN X% MIN IN X% MIN UP X% MIN LEFT X% MIN UP X% SWING X%
MAX UP X% MAX IN X% MAX IN X% MAX UP X% MAX LEFT X% MAX UP X% BASKET LEVEL X%
– JLG Lift –
MIN DOWN X% MIN OUT X% MIN OUT X% MIN DOWN X% MIN RIGHT X% MIN DOWN X% BASKET ROTATE X%
MAX DOWN X% MAX OUT X% MAX OUT X% MAX DOWN X% MAX RIGHT X% MAX DOWN X% UPPER TELE X%
GROUND MODE:
TOWER TELE X%
GROUND MODE:
T. LIFT UP X%
GROUND MODE:
T. LIFT DN X%
GROUND MODE:
JIB (U/D) X%
3120895
3120895
FROM
MENU:
PERSONALITIES
MENU: MODEL NUMBER: ENGINE: GLOW PLUG: ENGINE SHUTDOWN: TILT: TOWER LIFT: TOWER TELE: JIB: 4 WHEEL STEER:
MACHINE SETUP 1=400 1=FORD EFI GAS 0=NO GLOW PLUGS 1=SHUTDOWN 1=5 DEG 0=NO 0=NO 0=NO 0=NO
MODEL NUMBER: ENGINE: GLOW PLUG: ENGINE SHUTDOWN: TILT: TOWER LIFT: TOWER TELE: JIB: 4 WHEEL STEER:
2=450 2=FORD EFI D/F 15=15 SECONDS 0=NO 2=4 DEG 1=YES 1=YES 0=YES 0=YES
TO MODEL NUMBER: ENGINE: TILT:

MENU: 3=600 3=DEUTZ F4 3=3 DEG
CALIBRATIONS
MODEL NUMBER: ENGINE: TILT:
4=601 4=DEUTZ F3 4=4 DEG + CUT
MODEL NUMBER: ENGINE: TILT:

5=800A 5=CAT. 3024C 5=3 DEG + CUT
MODEL NUMBER: ENGINE:

6=800S 6=CAT. 3044C
MODEL NUMBER:
9=600C
MODEL NUMBER:
10=510A
– JLG Lift –
MODEL NUMBER:
11=740A
SOFT TOUCH: GEN SET/WELDER: H & T LIGHTS: CABLE SWITCH: LOAD: LOAD TYPE: FUNCTION CUTOUT: GROUND ALARM: T PROX SWITCHES: DRIVE: FLYWHEEL TEETH:
0=NO 0=NO 0=NO 0=NO 0=NO 0=1 ON ROTATOR 0=NO 0=NO 0=NO 0=4WD 0=133 TEETH
SOFT TOUCH: GEN SET/WELDER: H & T LIGHTS: CABLE SWITCH: LOAD: LOAD TYPE: FUNCTION CUTOUT: GROUND ALARM: T PROX SWITCHES: DRIVE: FLYWHEEL TEETH:
1=YES 1=BELT DRIVE 1=YES 1=YES 1=WARN ONLY 1=4 UNDER BASKET 1=BOOM CUTOUT 1=DRIVE 1=YES 1=2WD 1=110 TEETH
GEN SET/WELDER: LOAD: FUNCTION CUTOUT: GROUND ALARM:

2=HYD. DRIVE 2=CUTOUT PLAT 2=DRIVE CUTOUT 2=LIFT DOWN
LOAD: FUNCTION CUTOUT: GROUND ALARM:

3=CUTOUT ALL 3=DRIVE CUT E&T 3=BOOM & DRIVE
LOAD:
4=SPECIAL 1
6-11
6-12
– JLG Lift –
3120895
3120895
– JLG Lift –
NOTE: Some screens may not be available depending upon machine configuration.
Figure 6-9. Analyzer Flow Chart, Version 5.X Software - Sheet 1 of 4
6-13
6-14 – JLG Lift – 3120895

3120895
FROM:
MENU:
PERSONALITIES
MENU: MODEL NUMBER: MARKET: ENGINE: FLYWHEEL TEETH: GLOW PLUG: STARTER LOCKOUT: ENGINE SHUTDOWN: TILT: JIB: 4 WHEEL STEER: SOFT TOUCH:
MACHINE SETUP 400S ANSI USA FORD EFI GAS 110 TEETH NO GLOW PLUGS DISABLED ENABLED 5 DEGREES NO NO NO
MODEL NUMBER: MARKET: ENGINE: FLYWHEEL TEETH: GLOW PLUG: STARTER LOCKOUT: ENGINE SHUTDOWN: TILT: JIB: 4 WHEEL STEER: SOFT TOUCH:
450A ANSI EXPORT FORD EFI D/F 133 TEETH AIR INTAKE ENABLED DISABLED 4 DEGREES YES YES YES
MODEL NUMBER: MARKET: ENGINE: GLOW PLUG: TILT:
510A CSA DEUTZ F4 TIER1 IN-CYLINDER 3 DEGREES
TO: MODEL NUMBER: MARKET: ENGINE: TILT:

MENU: 600S CE DEUTZ F3 TIER1 4 DEGREES + CUT
CALIBRATIONS
MODEL NUMBER: MARKET: ENGINE: TILT:
600A AUSTRALIA CAT. 3024C 3 DEGREES + CUT
MODEL NUMBER: MARKET: ENGINE:
600SC JAPAN CAT. 3044C
601S PERKINS 404C
740A DEUTZ F4 TIER2
800A DEUTZ F3 TIER2
800S FORD GAS TIER2
– JLG Lift –
ENGINE:
FORD D/F TIER2
ENGINE:
DEUTZ ECM
ENGINE:
DUAL FUEL ECM
GEN SET/WELDER: GEN SET CUTOUT: H & T LIGHTS: CABLE SWITCH: LOAD SYSTEM: LOAD SENSOR: FUNCTION CUTOUT: GROUND ALARM: DRIVE: TEMPERATURE: LEVELING MODE:
NO MOTION ENABLED NO NO NO 4 UNDER PLATFORM NO NO 4WD CELSIUS ALL FUNCTIONS
GEN SET/WELDER: GEN SET CUTOUT: H & T LIGHTS: CABLE SWITCH: LOAD SYSTEM: LOAD SENSOR: FUNCTION CUTOUT: GROUND ALARM: DRIVE: TEMPERATURE: LEVELING MODE:
BELT DRIVE MOTION CUTOUT YES YES WARN ONLY 1 ON ROTATOR BOOM CUTOUT DRIVE 2WD FAHRENHEIT LIFT/TELESCOPE
LOAD SYSTEM: FUNCTION CUTOUT: GROUND ALARM: DRIVE:
CUTOUT PLATFORM DRIVE CUTOUT DESCENT 2WD W/ 2-SPEED
LOAD SYSTEM: FUNCTION CUTOUT: GROUND ALARM:
CUTOUT ALL DRIVE CUT E&T MOTION
LOAD SYSTEM:
SPECIAL 1
6-15
6-16
FROM:
MENU:
MACHINE SETUP
MENU: CALIBRATIONS: CALIBRATIONS: CALIBRATIONS: CALIBRATIONS: CALIBRATIONS:

CALIBRATIONS TILT SENSOR UMS SENSOR DEUTZ SETUP LEVEL UP CRKPT LEVEL DOWN CRKPT
TILT SENSOR UMS SENSOR: DEUTZ SETUP LEVEL UP CRKPT LEVEL DOWN CRKPT
CALIBRATE? CALIBRATE? SETUP X CALIBRATE? CALIBRATE?
MENU: HELP:
HELP:PRESS ENTER GROUND MODE OK
MENU: DIAGNOSTICS: DIAGNOSTICS: DIAGNOSTICS: DIAGNOSTICS: CREEP DIAGNOSTICS: DIAGNOSTICS: DIAGNOSTICS: DIAGNOSTICS: DIAGNOSTICS: DIAGNOSTICS:
DIAGNOSTICS DRIVE/STEER BOOM FUNCTIONS ENGINE SYSTEM SWITCH: CLOSED UMS LOAD CAN STATISTICS CALIBRATION DATA DATALOG VERSIONS
JOYSTICK DRIVE: JOYSTICK LIFT: START SEQUENCE: GROUND MODULE CREEP MODE: CHASSIS TILT PLATFORM LOAD CAN STATISTICS CALIBRATION DATA DATALOG: GROUND MODULE
FORWARD XXX% MAIN UP XXX% NOT ACTIVE BATTERY: XX.XV OFF ANGLE XXX.X STATE:OK RX/SEC: X LOAD ZERO: XXX ON: XXH XXM SOFTWARE: P5.0
JOYSTICK STEER: JOYSTICK SWING: AIR FILTER PLATFORM MODULE CHASSIS TILT: UMS TO TURNTABLE PERCENT OF MAX CAN STATISTICS CALABRATION DATA DATALOG: GROUND MODULE
LEFT XXX% LEFT XXX% SWITCH: OPEN BATTERY: XX.XV XX.X DEGREES ANGLE XXX.X LOAD: XXXX% TX/SEC: X LOAD 500LB: XXX ENGINE: XH XM CNST. DATA: PX.X
DRIVE OUTPUT: LIFT OUTPUT: BATTERY VOLTAGE: AMBIENT AUXILIARY POWER UMS INCLINATION CAPACITY ANGLE CAN STATISTICS CALIBRATION DATA DATALOG: GROUND MODULE
FORWARD XXX% MAIN UP XXX% XX.XV TEMPERATURE:XXXC SWITCH: OPEN ANGLE XXX.X SWITCH: CLOSED BUS OFF: X PLATFORM UP: XXX DRIVE: XH XM HARDWARE: REV X
STEER OUTPUT: SWING OUTPUT: COOLANT PLATFORM SELECT HORN UMS STATUS: CAPACITY LENGTH CAN STATISTICS CALABRATION DATA DATALOG: GROUND MODULE
LEFT XXX% LEFT XXX% TEMPERATURE:XXXC KEYSWITCH: OPEN SWITCH: OPEN NORMAL SWITCH: CLOSED PASSIVE: 1 PLATFORM DN: XXX LIFT: XH XM S/N: XXXXXX
LEFT TRACK PLATFORM LEVEL: ELECTRIC FAN GROUND SELECT RETURN HYDRAULIC CAN STATISTICS DATALOG: PLATFORM MODULE
OUTPUT: FWD XXX% UP XXX% OUTPUT: OFF KEYSWITCH:CLOSED FILTER: OPEN MSG ERROR: XXXX SWING: XH XM SOFTWARE: P5.0
RIGHT TRACK PLATFORM ROTATE: ELECTRIC FUEL STATION CONTROL: CHARGE PUMP DATALOG: PLATFORM MODULE
OUTPUT: FWD XXX% RIGHT XXX% PUMP OUTPUT: OFF GROUND FILTER: OPEN TELE: XH XM HARDWARE: REV X
– JLG Lift –
STEER TYPE: MAIN TELESCOPE: ENGINE OIL FOOTSWITCH INPUT SOFT TOUCH LIMIT DATALOG: PLATFORM MODULE
NORMAL IN XXX% PRESSURE:XXXXPSI GROUND: OPEN SWITCH: OPEN MAX TEMP: XXC S/N: XXXXXX
BRAKES STATUS: TOWER TELESCOPE: FUEL SELECTION FOOTSWITCH INPUT SOFT TOUCH DATALOG: PROPULSION MOD.
LOCKED IN XXX% SWITCH:GAS PLATFORM: CLOSED OVERRIDE: OPEN MIN TEMP: XXC SOFTWARE: PX.X
CREEP TOWER LIFT: FUEL SELECTION TRANSPORT GENSET/WELDER DATALOG: ANALYZER:

SWITCH: CLOSED DOWN XXX% STATUS:GAS SWITCHES: OPEN SWITCH: OPEN MAX VOLTS: XX.XV ANALYZER V6.3
CREEP MODE: JIB LIFT: AMBIENT TRANSPORT MODE: LIGHTS DATALOG:

OFF UP XXX% TEMPERATURE:XXXC OUT OF TRANSPORT SWITCH: OPEN RENTAL: XH XM
2-SPEED PLATFORM CONTROL FUEL LEVEL END OF STROKE PLATFORM TILT1 DATALOG:
SWITCH: OPEN VALVE: OFF SENSOR: OK PROXIMITY: OPEN ANGLE: XX.X DEG ERASE RENTAL?
2-SPEED VALVE FUNCTION SPEED: STARTER TOWER LIFT PLATFORM TILT2

OUTPUT: OFF PUMP POT XXX% CRANK TIME: XX S PROXIMITY:CLOSED ANGLE: XX.X DEG
HIGH ENGINE CREEP ENGINE SPEED TOWER TELESCOPE PLATFORM TILT1

SWITCH: OPEN SWITCH: CLOSED ACTUAL: XXXX RPM PROXIMITY:CLOSED VOLTAGE: XXXX MV
DRIVE MODE: CREEP MODE: ENGINE SPEED TOWER POSITION: PLATFORM TILT2
MID ENGINE OFF TARGET: XXXX RPM UP/RETRACTED VOLTAGE: XXXX MV
CABLE BREAK CHASSIS TILT:

SWITCH: CLOSED X-AXIS XX.X
CHASSIS TILT:
Y-AXIS XX.X
MENU: SYSTEM TEST:

SYSTEM TEST ACTIVATE?
3120895
6.8 MACHINE PERSONALITY SETTINGS NOTE: Personality settings can be adjusted within the
adjustment range in order to achieve optimum
machine performance.
Table 6-1. Personality Ranges/Defaults
FUNCTION PERSONALITY RANGE DEFAULTS
DRIVE ACCELeration 0.1s to 5.0s 2.0
DECELeration 0.1s to 3.0s 0.5
Forward MINimum speed 0 to 35% 29
Forward MAXimum speed 0 to 100% 49
Reverse MINimum speed 0 to 35% 29
Reverse MAXimum speed 0 to 100% 48
ELEVATED MAXimum speed 0 to 50% 35
CREEP MAXimum speed 0 to 50% 40
Engine RPM 800 to 2900 1800
LIFT ACCELeration 0.1 to 5.0 2.3
DECELeration 0.1 to 3.0 1.1
MlNimum UP speed 0 to 60% 41
MAXimum UP speed 0 to 100 80
CREEP Maximum UP speed 0 to 65 49
MINimum DOWN speed 0 to 60 43
MAXimum DOWN speed 0 to 100 80
CREEP maximum DOWN speed 0 to 75 49
SWING ACCELeration 0.1 to 5.0s 4.8
DECELeration 0.1 to 3.0s 2.0
MINimum LEFT speed 0 to 50% 40
MAXimum LEFT speed 0 to 100% 65
CREEP maximum LEFT speed 0 to 65% 49
MINimum RIGHT speed 0 to 50% 37
MAXimum RIGHT speed 0 to 100% 63
CREEP maximum RIGHT speed 0 to 65% 46
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-17

TELEscope ACCELeration 0.1 to 5.0 2.8
MINimum IN speed 0 to 65 60
MAXimum IN speed 0 to 100 100
MINimum OUT speed 0 to 65 55
MAXimum OUT speed 0 to 100 80
BASKET LEVEL ACCELeration 0.1 to 5.0 2.5
MINimum UP speed 0 to 65 48
MlNimum DOWN speed 0 to 65 47
BASKET ROTATE ACCELeration 0.1 to 5.0 1.5
MlNimum LEFT speed 0 to 65 47
MAXimum LEFT speed 0 to 100 65
MINimum RIGHT speed 0 to 65 46
MAXimum RIGHT speed 0 to 100 65
JIB Lift ACCELeration 0.1 to 5.0 4.2
Lift DECELeration 0.1 to 3.0 1.0
MINimum UP speed 0 to 65 65
MINimum DOWN speed 0 to 65 47
STEER MAXimum speed 0 to 100 71
6-18 – JLG Lift – 3120895

GROUND MODE LIFT UP speed 0 to 100 60
LIFT DOWN speed 0 to 100 60
SWING speed 0 to 100 60
TELEscope speed 0 to 100 70
BASKET ROTATE speed 0 to 100 55
BASKET LEVEL speed 0 to 100 54
JIB LIFT speed 0 to 100 55

4150365-3
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-19

Table 6-2. Help Fault Codes, Displayed Faults, and Descriptions - Prior to S/N 66995
Fault Flash Communicated (Displayed on

Description Priority
Code Analyzer) Fault
None No flash code is indicated for the following help messages. They are intended to hint at a possible problem 1
if the vehicle is not behaving as expected.
EVERYTHING OK The “normal” help message in platform mode
GROUND MODE OK The “normal” help message in ground mode
DRIVING AT CREEP - TILTED Drive speed is limited to creep because the vehicle is tilted.
FSW OPEN A drive or boom function has been selected but footswitch is open.
RUNNING AT CREEP - CREEP All function speeds are limited to creep because the creep switch is
SWITCH OPEN open.
RUNNING AT CREEP - TILTED All function speeds are limited to creep because the vehicle is tilted
AND ABOVE ELEVATION and above elevation.
RUNNING AT CUTBACK - ABOVE Drive speed is limited to “ELEVATED MAX” because the vehicle is
ELEVATION above elevation.
TESTS ACTIVE – RECYCLE EMS The system tests have been activated; normal vehicle operation is
TO END not allowed.
1/1 Flash code 1/1 indicates a “sleep” mode.

NOT REQUIRED
2/1 Flash code 2/1 indicates problems with footswitch. 2
FSW FAULTY The two foot switch signals do not agree. EMS recycle required.
KEYSWITCH FAULTY Both platform and ground modes are selected simultaneously
2/2 Flash code 2/2 indicates problems with drive & steer selection. 3
DRIVE JOYSTICK FAULTY The drive joystick center tap is out of valid range, or the wiper is wire-
off.
DRIVE LOCKED – JOYSTICK Drive was selected before and during footswitch closure.
MOVED BEFORE EMS/FSW
FSW INTERLOCK TRIPPED Footswitch was closed for seven seconds with no function selected.
STEER LOCKED – SELECTED Steer was selected before and during footswitch closure.
BEFORE EMS/FSW
STEER SWITCHES FAULTY Both steer switches are active together.
WAITING FOR FSW TO BE OPEN Footswitch was closed when platform mode was selected.
JOYSTICK FAULTS – CHECK More than one of the drive, lift, and swing joystick center tap or wiper
PLATFORM BOX WIRING voltages is out of range. This is probably due to a short-circuit across
a joystick pot.
6-20 – JLG Lift – 3120895

2/3 Flash code 2/3 indicates problems with boom function selection. 3
LIFT/SWING JOYSTICK FAULTY The lift or swing joystick center tap is out of valid range, or the wiper
is wire-off.
LIFT/SWING LOCKED - Platform upper lift or swing was selected before and during foot-
JOYSTICK MOVED BEFORE switch closure.
EMS/FSW
PUMP POT FAULTY The pump pot is open-circuit; all platform boom functions except
upper lift & swing will run at creep.
PUMP SWITCHES FAULTY - A boom function (lower lift, telescope, basket level, basket rotate,
CHECK DIAGNOSTICS/BOOM jib) has both directions selected together.
PUMP SWITCHES LOCKED - A platform boom function (lower lift, telescope, basket level, basket
SELECTED BEFORE EMS/FSW rotate, jib) was selected before key switch or footswitch closure.
PUMP SWITCHED LOCKED - A ground boom function (lower lift, telescope, basket level, basket
SELECTED BEFORE EMS rotate, jib) was selected before key switch.
SWING/LIFT JOYSTICK FAULTY The swing joystick center tap is out of valid range, or the wiper is
wire-off.
2/4 Flash code 2/4 indicates that steering digital inputs are faulty.
NOT REQUIRED
2/5 Flash code 2/5 indicates that a function is prevented due to a cutout. 4
BOOM PREVENTED - DRIVE A boom function is selected while a drive function is selected and
SELECTED drive cutout is configured to prevent simultaneous drive & boom
operation.
DRIVE PREVENTED - ABOVE Drive is selected while above elevation and drive cutout is configured
ELEVATION to prevent drive.
DRIVE PREVENTED - BOOM Drive is selected while a boom function is selected and drive cutout is
MOVEMENT SELECTED configured to prevent simultaneous drive & boom operation.
DRIVE PREVENTED - TILTED & Drive is selected while tilted and above elevation and tilt is configured
ABOVE ELEVATION to cutout drive.
BOOM PREVENTED – FUNCTION A boom function is selected while function cutout is active and con-
CUTOUT ACTIVE figured to cutout boom functions.
BOOM & DRIVE PREVENTED- Drive or a boom function is selected while function cutout is active
FUNCTION CUTOUT ACTIVE and configured to cutout all functions.
2/7 Flash code 2/7 indicates that the accelerator input is faulty.
NOT REQUIRED
2/8 Flash code 2/8 indicates that the hydraulic filter is being bypassed. 5
RETURN FILTER BYPASSED Hydraulic return filter clogged
CHARGE PUMP FILTER Charge pump filter clogged

BYPASSED
3/1 Flash code 3/1 indicates that a contactor did not close when energized.
NOT REQUIRED
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-21

3/2 Flash code 3/2 indicates that a contactor did not open when energized.
NOT REQUIRED
3/3 Flash code 3/3 indicates that a driver is short-circuit. 6
ADD DRIVER FAULTS
3/5 Flash code 3/5 indicates a brake pressure problem. 7

NOT REQUIRED
4/2 Flash code 4/2 indicates that the engine is over temperature. NOT REQUIRED 8
4/3 Flash code 4/3 indicates problems with the engine 9
ENGINE TEMP GREATER THAN

130C (266° F)
AIR FILTER BYPASSED Air filter clogged
NO aLTERNATOR OUTPUT The measured battery voltage is less than 12.5 VDC
OIL PRESSURE LESS THAN O.5

BAR (8PSI)
4/4 Flash code 4/4 indicates problems with the battery supply. 7
BATTERY LOW Battery voltage is below 11V. This is a warning - the controller does
not shut down.
BATTERY TOO HIGH - SYSTEM Battery voltage is above 18V. EMS recycle required.
SHUT DOWN
BATTERY TOO LOW - SYSTEM Battery voltage is below 6V. EMS recycle required.
SHUT DOWN
5/5 Flash code 5/5 indicates problems with vehicle engine RPM or the encoder. 8
SPEED SENSOR READING Speed sensor is indicating an impossible number of pulses. This is
INVALID SPEED probably due to a faulty speed sensor.
SPEED INPUT LOST This indicates that the control system has determined that the diesel
engine speed input to the system has been lost. This is probably due
to wiring problems at the ground module or a faulty speed sensor.
ENGINE SPEED DOES NOT This indicates that the control system has determine that the diesel
MATCH COMMAND engine governor has stuck. This is probably due to electrical or
mechanical problems with the governor.
6/6 Flash code 6/6 indicates problems with the CAN bus. 10
CAN BUS FAILURE: The ground module or platform module is not receiving. This is prob-
ably due to wiring problems between the platform and ground mod-
ules.
7/7 Flash code 7/7 indicates problems with a motor.

NOT REQUIRED
6-22 – JLG Lift – 3120895

9/9 Flash code 9/9 indicates problems with the controller. 11
PLATFORM MODULE FAILURE: Platform module V(Low) FET has failed

hwfs CODE 1
GROUND MODULE FAILURE: Ground module V(Low) FET has failed

hwfs CODE 1
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-23

Table 6-3. Help Fault Codes, Displayed Faults, and Descriptions - S/N 66995 to Present

None No flash code is indicated for the following help messages. They are intended
1
to hint at a possible problem if the vehicle is not behaving as expected.
EVERYTHING OK The “normal” help message in platform mode
GROUND MODE OK The “normal” help message in ground mode
FSW OPEN A drive or boom function has been selected but footswitch is open.
RUNNING AT CREEP — CREEP All function speeds are limited to creep because the creep switch is open.
SWITCH OPEN
RUNNING AT CREEP — TILTED AND All boom function speeds are limited to creep because the vehicle is tilted and
ABOVE ELEVATION above elevation.
RUNNING AT CUTBACK — OUT OF Drive speed is limited to “ELEVATED MAX” because the vehicle is out of trans-
TRANSPORT POSITION port position.
CHASSIS TILT SENSOR OUT OF The chassis tilt sensor has indicated a tilt angle greater than 19 degrees for
RANGE more than 4 seconds. Not reported during 2 second power-up.
LOAD SENSOR READING UNDER The load sensor is reading 20% or more under the calibrated zero point. This
WEIGHT fault may occur if the basket is resting on the ground. Not reported during 2 sec-
ond power-up.
ENVELOPE ENCROACHED — Only occurs on machines with envelope control. The system has detected an
HYDRAULICS SUSPENDED envelope violation
OVER MOMENT — HYDRAULICS SUS- Only occurs on machines with moment control. The system has detected an
PENDED over moment violation.
UNDER MOMENT — HYDRAULICS Only occurs on machines with moment control. The system has detected an
SUSPENDED under moment violation.
1/1 Flash code 1/1 indicates a “sleep” mode.
NOT REQUIRED
2/1 Flash code 2/1 indicates problems with footswitch. 2
FSW FAULTY The two footswitch inputs have read the same state for more than one second.
An EMS cycle is required.
KEYSWITCH FAULTY Both platform and ground modes are selected simultaneously
6-24 – JLG Lift – 3120895


2/2 Flash code 2/2 indicates problems with drive & steer selection. Except 3
where noted, these faults are not reported during 2 second power-up
sequence.
DRIVE LOCKED — JOYSTICK MOVED Drive was selected before and during footswitch closure. Can be reported dur-
BEFORE FOOTSWITCH ing power-up sequence.
FSW INTERLOCK TRIPPED Footswitch was closed for seven seconds with no function selected. Can be
reported during power-up sequence.
STEER LOCKED — SELECTED Steer was selected before and during footswitch closure.
BEFORE FOOTSWITCH
STEER SWITCHES FAULTY Both steer switches are active at the same time.
D/S JOY. OUT OF RANGE LOW Resistive joysticks: These faults do not occur.
D/S JOY. OUT OF RANGE LOW Resistive joysticks: These faults do not occur.
D/S JOY. OUT OF RANGE HIGH Resistive joysticks: These faults do not occur if the Vref voltage is below 8.1
volts. If Vref is above 7.7 volts, Vref is operating out of tolerance or a short to
battery has occurred.
D/S JOY. CENTER TAP BAD Resistive joysticks: These faults occur when the center tap voltage is not
between 3.08 volts and 3.83 volts. Due to resistor tolerances there is a +/-.1 volt
range around these values where the fault may be indicated.
WAITING FOR FSW TO BE OPEN Footswitch was closed when platform mode was selected. Can be reported
during power-up sequence.
FOOTSWITCH SELECTED BEFORE The user attempted to start the machine with the
START footswitch engaged.
2/3 Flash code 2/3 indicates problems with boom function selection. 3
LIFT/SWING LOCKED — JOYSTICK Platform upper lift or swing was selected before and during footswitch closure.
MOVED BEFORE FOOTSWITCH
PUMP SWITCHES FAULTY — CHECK A boom function (lower lift, telescope, basket level, basket rotate, jib) has both
DIAGNOSTICS/BOOM directions selected together.
PUMP SWITCHES LOCKED — A platform boom function (lower lift, telescope, basket level, basket rotate, jib)
SELECTED BEFORE FOOTSWITCH was selected before key switch or footswitch closure.
PUMP SWITCHES LOCKED — A ground boom function (lower lift, telescope, basket level, basket rotate, jib)
SELECTED BEFORE AUX POWER was selected before aux power.
l/s joy. out of range low Resistive joysticks: These faults do not occur.
l/s joy. out of range high Resistive joysticks: These faults do not occur if the Vref voltage is below 8.1
volts. If Vref is above 7.7 volts, Vref is operating out of tolerance or a short to
battery has occurred.
l/s joy. center tap bad Resistive joysticks: These faults occur when the center tap voltage is not
between 3.08 volts and 3.83 volts. Due to resistor tolerances there is a +/-.1 volt
range around these values where the fault may be indicated.
PUMP SWITCHES LOCKED — This fault occurs when a hydraulic function switch is closed before the start
SELECTED BEFORE START SWITCH switch is closed.
FOOTSWITCH SELECTED BEFORE The user attempted to start the machine with the footswitch engaged.
START
2/4 Flash code 2/4 indicates that steering digital inputs are faulty.
NOT REQUIRED
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-25


2/5 Flash code 2/5 indicates that a function is prevented due to a cutout. 4
BOOM PREVENTED — DRIVE A boom function is selected while a drive function is selected and drive cutout is
SELECTED configured to prevent simultaneous drive & boom operation.
DRIVE PREVENTED — ABOVE ELEVA- Drive is selected while above elevation and drive cutout is configured to pre-
TION vent drive.
DRIVE PREVENTED — BOOM Drive is selected while a boom function is selected and drive cutout is config-
SELECTED ured to prevent simultaneous drive & boom operation.
DRIVE PREVENTED — TILTED & Drive is selected while tilted and above elevation and tilt is configured to cutout
ABOVE ELEVATION drive.
JIB SWING PREVENTED — IN 1000# The user is trying to jib swing in 1000# mode, which is not allowed.
MODE
CAN DONGLE ATTACHED — HYDRAU- The system allows the user to operate all hydraulics with very limited restric-
LICS NOT RESTRICTED tions.
MODEL CHANGED — HYDRAULICS User changed the model number using the analyzer. User must cycle power 11
SUSPENDED — CYCLE EMS before the hydraulics system will be active again.
BACKUP BLAM COMMUNICATIONS The serial backup communications link to the BLAM module is active
ACTIVE
DISCONNECT ANALYZER AND The ground module has detected that it needs to use the RS232 backup com-
CYCLE EMS TO PERFORM BOOM munications link to the BLAM module but an analyzer is connected. Remove
RETRIEVAL the analyzer and cycle power
FUNCTIONS LOCKED OUT - PLAT- Reported if the major version of the platform module does not match the major
FORM MODULE SOFTWARE VER- version of the ground module
SION IMPROPER
FUNCTIONS LOCKED OUT - CHASSIS Reported if the major version of the chassis module does not match the major
MODULE SOFTWARE VERSION version of the ground module
IMPROPER
FUNCTIONS LOCKED OUT - BLAM Reported if the major version of the BLAM module does not match the major
MODULE SOFTWARE VERSION version of the ground module
IMPROPER
2/7 Flash code 2/7 indicates that the accelerator input is faulty.
NOT REQUIRED
2/8 Flash code 2/8 indicates a problem with a hydraulic filter. Not reported 5
during 2 second power-up.
RETURN FILTER BYPASSED Hydraulic return filter clogged
charge pump filter bypassed Charge pump filter clogged
3/1 Flash code 3/1 indicates that a contactor did not close when energized.
NOT REQUIRED
3/2 Flash code 3/2 indicates that a contactor did not open when energized.
NOT REQUIRED
6-26 – JLG Lift – 3120895


3/3 Flash code 3/3 indicates a driver problem. All driver faults are detected in 6
a similar manner. Open circuit faults are detected when the analog feed-
back reads too high and the output is commanded off. Short to ground is
detected when the analog feedback reads low and the output is com-
manded on. Short to battery is detected when the analog feedback reads
Vbat and the output is commanded off. Not reported during 2 second
power-up. An EMS cycle is required.
RIGHT FORWARD DRIVE PUMP Only occurs on machines with a chassis module.
SHORT TO GROUND
SHORT TO BATTERY
OPEN CIRCUIT
RIGHT REVERSE DRIVE PUMP Only occurs on machines with a chassis module.
SHORT TO GROUND
RIGHT REVERSE DRIVE PUMP Only occurs on machines with a chassis module.
SHORT TO BATTERY
RIGHT REVERSE DRIVE PUMP OPEN Only occurs on machines with a chassis module.
CIRCUIT
LEFT FORWARD DRIVE PUMP Only occurs on machines with a chassis module.
SHORT TO GROUND
LEFT FORWARD DRIVE PUMP Only occurs on machines with a chassis module.
SHORT TO BATTERY
LEFT FORWARD DRIVE PUMP OPEN Only occurs on machines with a chassis module.
CIRCUIT
LEFT REVERSE DRIVE PUMP SHORT Only occurs on machines with a chassis module.
TO GROUND
LEFT REVERSE DRIVE PUMP SHORT Only occurs on machines with a chassis module.
TO BATTERY
LEFT REVERSE DRIVE PUMP OPEN Only occurs on machines with a chassis module.
CIRCUIT
ALTERNATOR/ECM POWER SHORT
TO GROUND
HOUR METER SHORT TO GROUND
HOUR METER SHORT TO BATTERY
HORN SHORT TO GROUND
HORN OPEN CIRCUIT
HORN SHORT TO BATTERY
AUX POWER SHORT TO GROUND
AUX POWER OPEN CIRCUIT
AUX POWER SHORT TO BATTERY
GLOW PLUG SHORT TO GROUND Only occurs on machines with glow plugs configured.
GLOW PLUG OPEN CIRCUIT Only occurs on machines with glow plugs configured.
GLOW PLUG SHORT TO BATTERY Only occurs on machines with glow plugs configured.
LP LOCK SHORT TO GROUND Only occurs on machines with dual-fuel engines.
LP LOCK OPEN CIRCUIT Only occurs on machines with dual-fuel engines.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-27


LP LOCK SHORT TO BATTERY Only occurs on machines with dual-fuel engines.
LP START ASSIST SHORT TO Only occurs on machines with dual-fuel engines.
GROUND
LP START ASSIST OPEN CIRCUIT Only occurs on machines with dual-fuel engines.
LP START ASSIST SHORT TO BAT- Only occurs on machines with dual-fuel engines.
TERY
MAIN DUMP SHORT TO GROUND
MAIN DUMP OPEN CIRCUIT
MAIN DUMP SHORT TO BATTERY
PARKING BRAKE SHORT TO
GROUND
PARKING BRAKE OPEN CIRCUIT
PARKING BRAKE SHORT TO BAT-
TERY
START SOLENOID SHORT TO Only occurs on machines with diesel engines.
GROUND
START SOLENOID OPEN CIRCUIT Only occurs on machines with diesel engines.
START SOLENOID SHORT TO BAT- Only occurs on machines with diesel engines.
TERY
MAIN LIFT APU SHORT TO GROUND Only occurs on the 1250AJP machine
MAIN LIFT APU OPEN CIRCUIT Only occurs on the 1250AJP machine
MAIN LIFT APU SHORT TO BATTERY Only occurs on the 1250AJP machine
MAIN LIFT PILOT PRESSURE FAIL- Only occurs on the 1250AJP machine
URE
NO MAIN LIFT PILOT PRESSURE Only occurs on the 1250AJP machine
MAIN LIFT PILOT PRESSURE Only occurs on the 1250AJP machine
SWITCH FAILURE
STEER DUMP SHORT TO GROUND
STEER DUMP OPEN CIRCUIT
STEER DUMP SHORT TO BATTERY
TWO SPEED SHORT TO GROUND
TWO SPEED OPEN CIRCUIT
TWO SPEED SHORT TO BATTERY
GROUND ALARM SHORT TO Only occurs on machines with ground alarm configured.
GROUND
GROUND ALARM OPEN CIRCUIT Only occurs on machines with ground alarm configured.
GROUND ALARM SHORT TO BAT- Only occurs on machines with ground alarm configured.
TERY
GEN SET/WELDER SHORT TO Only occurs on machines with a generator configured.
GROUND
GEN SET/WELDER OPEN CIRCUIT Only occurs on machines with a generator configured.
GEN SET/WELDER SHORT TO BAT- Only occurs on machines with a generator configured.
TERY
HEAD TAIL LIGHT SHORT TO Only occurs on machines with the headlights option configured.
GROUND
6-28 – JLG Lift – 3120895


HEAD TAIL LIGHT OPEN CIRCUIT Only occurs on machines with the headlights option configured.
HEAD TAIL LIGHT SHORT TO BAT- Only occurs on machines with the headlights option configured.
TERY
BASKET UP OVERRIDE SHORT TO Only occurs on machines with electronic leveling systems.
GROUND
BASKET UP OVERRIDE OPEN CIR- Only occurs on machines with electronic leveling systems.
CUIT
BASKET UP OVERRIDE SHORT TO Only occurs on machines with electronic leveling systems.
BATTERY
BASKET UP SHORT TO GROUND
BASKET UP OPEN CIRCUIT
BASKET UP SHORT TO BATTERY
BASKET DOWN SHORT TO GROUND
BASKET DOWN OPEN CIRCUIT
BASKET DOWN SHORT TO BATTERY
BASKET DOWN OVERRIDE SHORT Only occurs on machines with electronic leveling systems.
TO GROUND
BASKET DOWN OVERRIDE OPEN Only occurs on machines with electronic leveling systems.
CIRCUIT
BASKET DOWN OVERRIDE SHORT Only occurs on machines with electronic leveling systems.
TO BATTERY
TOWER LIFT APU VALVE STUCK Only occurs on 1250AJP
OPEN
TOWER LIFT ENABLE STUCK OPEN Only occurs on 1250AJP
TOWER LIFT ENABLE SHORT TO Only occurs on 1250AJP
GROUND
TOWER LIFT ENABLE OPEN CIRCUIT Only occurs on 1250AJP
TOWER LIFT ENABLE SHORT TO Only occurs on 1250AJP
BATTERY
TOWER TELESCOPE APU SHORT TO Only occurs on 1250AJP
GROUND
TOWER TELESCOPE APU OPEN CIR- Only occurs on 1250AJP
CUIT
TOWER TELESCOPE APU SHORT TO Only occurs on 1250AJP
BATTERY
BASKET LEFT OPEN CIRCUIT
BASKET LEFT SHORT TO BATTERY
BASKET LEFT SHORT TO GROUND
BASKET RIGHT SHORT TO GROUND
BASKET RIGHT OPEN CIRCUIT
BASKET RIGHT SHORT TO BATTERY
JIB UP SHORT TO GROUND
JIB UP OPEN CIRCUIT
JIB UP SHORT TO BATTERY
JIB DOWN SHORT TO GROUND
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-29


JIB DOWN OPEN CIRCUIT
JIB DOWN SHORT TO BATTERY
JIB LEFT SHORT TO GROUND
JIB LEFT OPEN CIRCUIT
JIB LEFT SHORT TO BATTERY
JIB RIGHT SHORT TO GROUND
JIB RIGHT OPEN CIRCUIT
JIB RIGHT SHORT TO BATTERY
TOWER UP SHORT TO GROUND
TOWER UP OPEN CIRCUIT
TOWER UP SHORT TO BATTERY
TOWER DOWN SHORT TO GROUND
TOWER DOWN OPEN CIRCUIT
TOWER DOWN SHORT TO BATTERY
TOWER IN SHORT TO GROUND
TOWER IN OPEN CIRCUIT
TOWER IN SHORT TO BATTERY
TOWER OUT SHORT TO GROUND
TOWER OUT OPEN CIRCUIT
TOWER OUT SHORT TO BATTERY
MAIN IN SHORT TO GROUND
MAIN IN OPEN CIRCUIT
MAIN IN SHORT TO BATTERY
MAIN OUT SHORT TO GROUND
MAIN OUT OPEN CIRCUIT
MAIN OUT SHORT TO BATTERY
LIFT UP DUMP SHORT TO GROUND
LIFT UP DUMP OPEN CIRCUIT
LIFT UP DUMP SHORT TO BATTERY
LIFT DOWN HOLDING SHORT TO
GROUND
LIFT DOWN HOLDING OPEN CIRCUIT
LIFT DOWN HOLDING SHORT TO
BATTERY
LIFT PILOT VALVE SHORT TO Only occurs on machines with gravity lift down.
GROUND
LIFT PILOT VALVE SHORT TO BAT- Only occurs on machines with gravity lift down.
TERY
LIFT PILOT VALVE OPEN CIRCUIT Only occurs on machines with gravity lift down.
LIFT DOWN AUX VALVE SHORT TO Only occurs on machines with gravity lift down.
GROUND
LIFT DOWN AUX VALVE SHORT TO Only occurs on machines with gravity lift down.
BATTERY
6-30 – JLG Lift – 3120895


LIFT DOWN AUX VALVE OPEN CIR- Only occurs on machines with gravity lift down.
CUIT
TOWER LIFT APU SHORT TO Only occurs on 1250AJP
GROUND
TOWER LIFT APU OPEN CIRCUIT Only occurs on 1250AJP
TOWER LIFT APU SHORT TO BAT- Only occurs on 1250AJP
TERY
MAIN LIFT ENABLE SHORT TO Only occurs on 1250AJP
GROUND
MAIN LIFT ENABLE OPEN CIRCUIT Only occurs on 1250AJP
MAIN LIFT ENABLE SHORT TO BAT- Only occurs on 1250AJP
TERY
TOWER TELE APU VALVE STUCK Only occurs on 1250AJP
OPEN
TOWER TELE ENABLE STUCK OPEN Only occurs on 1250AJP
TOWER TELE APU SHORT TO Only occurs on 1250AJP
GROUND
TOWER TELE APU OPEN CIRCUIT Only occurs on 1250AJP
TOWER TELE APU SHORT TO BAT- Only occurs on 1250AJP
TERY
PVG VALVE SHORT TO GROUND Only occurs on 1250AJP
PVG VALVE OPEN CIRCUIT Only occurs on 1250AJP
PVG VALVE SHORT TO BATTERY Only occurs on 1250AJP
FOX SPARE OUTPUT SHORT TO Only occurs on Fox machines.
GROUND
FOX SPARE OUTPUT SHORT TO BAT- Only occurs on Fox machines.
TERY
FOX SPARE OUTPUT OPEN CIRCUIT Only occurs on Fox machines.
HOUR METER OPEN CIRCUIT This fault cannot be detected during normal operation. It may be reported dur-
ing self test.
RESTRICTED TO TRANSPORT — Only occurs on machines with electrically released oscillating axles config-
AXLE LOCKOUT VALVE STB OR OC ured. A short to battery or open circuit has been detected on the axle lockout
valve and the machine is restricted to transport position.
RESTRICTED TO TRANSPORT — Only occurs on machines with electrically released oscillating axles config-
PARKING BRAKE STB ured. A short to battery has been detected on the parking brake valve and the
machine is restricted to transport position.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-31


3/4 Flash code 3/4 indicates a driver problem on a platform valve block valve 6
driver. All driver faults are detected in a similar manner. Open circuit
faults are detected when the analog feedback reads too high and the out-
put is commanded off. Short to ground is detected when the analog feed-
back reads low and the output is commanded on. Short to battery is
detected when the analog feedback reads Vbat and the output is com-
manded off. Not reported during 2 second power-up. An EMS cycle is
required.
BASKET UP SHORT TO BATTERY
BASKET UP SHORT TO GROUND
BASKET UP OPEN CIRCUIT
BASKET UP SHORT TO BATTERY OR Only occurs on machines with electronic basket leveling
OPEN CIRCUIT
BASKET DOWN SHORT TO BATTERY
BASKET DOWN SHORT TO GROUND
bASKET DOWN OPEN CIRCUIT
BASKET DOWN SHORT TO BATTERY Only occurs on machines with electronic basket leveling.
OR OPEN CIRCUIT
BASKET LEFT SHORT TO BATTERY
BASKER LEFT SHORT TO GROUND
BASKET LEFT OPEN CIRCUIT
BASKET RIGHT SHORT TO BATTERY
BASKET RIGHT SHORT TO GROUND
BASKET RIGHT OPEN CIRCUIT
JIB UP SHORT TO BATTERY
JIB UP SHORT TO GROUND
JIB UP OPEN CIRCUIT
JIB DOWN SHORT TO BATTERY
JIB DOWN SHORT TO GROUND
JIB DOWN OPEN CIRCUIT
JIB LEFT SHORT TO BATTERY
JIB LEFT SHORT TO GROUND
JIB LEFT OPEN CIRCUIT
JIB RIGHT SHORT TO BATTERY
JIB RIGHT SHORT TO GROUND
JIB RIGHT OPEN CIRCUIT
PLATFORM CONTROL VALVE SHORT Only occurs on machines with electronic basket leveling
TO BATTERY
PLATFORM CONTROL VALVE SHORT Only occurs on machines with electronic basket leveling
TO GROUND
PLATFORM CONTROL VALVE OPEN Only occurs on machines with electronic basket leveling
CIRCUIT
3/5 Flash code 3/5 indicates a brake pressure problem.
NOT REQUIRED
6-32 – JLG Lift – 3120895


4/2 Flash code 4/2 indicates that the engine is over temperature. NOT
REQUIRED
4/3 Flash code 4/3 indicates problems with the engine. Except where noted, 9
these faults are not reported during 2 second power-up sequence.
HIGH ENGINE TEMP Occurs when the engine temperature is above 117 degrees Celsius for the
Ford engines, and above 130 degrees Celsius for the Deutz engines.
AIR FILTER BYPASSED Air filter clogged
NO ALTERNATOR OUTPUT The engine has been running for 15 seconds or more and the battery voltage is
still below 11.5 volts.
LOW OIL PRESSURE If a Deutz engine is configured, the oil pressure is below 8 PSI and the engine
has been running for at least 10 seconds. If a Ford engine is configured, the
Ford ECM has reported a low oil pressure fault.
OIL PRESSURE SHORT TO BATTERY If a Deutz engine is configured, this indicates that the oil pressure sensor is
reading above 6.6 volts.
OIL PRESSURE SHORT TO GROUND If a Deutz engine is configured, this indicates that the oil pressure sensor is
reading below 0.1 volts for more than 5 seconds. This fault is not detected dur-
ing crank.
COOLANT TEMPERATURE SHORT If a Deutz engine is configured, this indicates that the coolant temperature is
TO GROUND reading below 0.1 volts.
FORD FAULT CODE ## All Ford fault codes except 63 are simply passed through from the FORD ECM.
They only occur if a Ford engine is selected in the machine configuration digits.
Can be reported during power-up sequence.
ENGINE FAULT CODE : All J1939 CANBUS ECMs will report fault messaging in this format. The SPN
###(SPN) :###(FMI) number represents what is broken and FMI number represents how the com-
ponent is broken.
FORD FAULT CODE UNKNOWN An unrecognized Ford ECM fault code has been received. Can be reported
during power-up sequence.
485 COMMUNICATIONS LOST This fault only occurs with a Ford engine. It occurs when no responses are
received from the ECM for 2.5 seconds. Can be reported during power-up
sequence.
FUEL SENSOR SHORT TO BATTERY Indicates that the fuel sensor is reading above 4.3 volts.
FUEL SENSOR SHORT TO GROUND Indicates that the fuel sensor is reading below 0.2 volts.
WRONG ENGINE SELECTED — ECM Indicates an Engine Control Module (ECM) has been detected on the CAN-
PRESENT BUS. This fault will only be applicable when non-CANBUS engine setups are
configured.
ECM CAN COMMUNICATION LOST The engine is configured to have a CANBUS controlled engine and the JLG
system does not detect the presence of an ECM. This fault can be the result of
the power lost to the ECM or a break in the CANBUS communications connec-
tion from the ECM to the JLG system.
4/4 Flash code 4/4 indicates problems with the battery supply. Not reported 7
during 2 second power-up.
BATTERY LOW Battery voltage is below 11V for more than 5 seconds. This fault is not detected
during crank. This is a warning — the controller does not shut down.
BATTERY TOO HIGH — SYSTEM SHUT Battery voltage is above 16V. EMS recycle required.
DOWN
BATTERY TOO LOW — SYSTEM SHUT Battery voltage is below 9V.
DOWN
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-33


4/5 Flash code 4/5 indicates problems with the S-D CAN based PVG valves
currently used on the 1250AJP only. 7
MAIN LIFT PVG COMMUNICATIONS CAN communications lost with the Main Lift PVG valve.
tower lift pvg communications CAN communications lost with the Tower Lift PVG valve.
tOWER TELESCOPE PVG COMUNI- CAN communications lost with the Tower Telescope PVG valve.
CATIONS
MAIN LIFT PVG internal fault Main boom lift pvg valve has an internal fault.
tower lift pvg internal fault Tower boom lift pvg valve has an internal fault.
tOWER TELESCOPE PVG internal fault Tower boom telescope pvg valve has an internal fault.
MAIN LIFT PVG VALVE HIGH VOLT- Main boom lift pvg valve has detected high excitation voltage.
AGE
TOWER LIFT PVG VALVE HIGH VOLT- Tower boom lift pvg valve has detected high excitation voltage.
AGE
TOWER TELESCOPE PVG VALVE Tower boom telescope pvg valve has detected high excitation voltage.
HIGH VOLTAGE
MAIN LIFT PVG VALVE LOW VOLTAGE Main boom lift pvg valve has detected low excitation voltage.
TOWER LIFT PVG VALVE LOW VOLT- Tower boom lift pvg valve has detected low excitation voltage.
AGE
TOWER TELESCOPE PVG VALVE Tower boom telescope pvg valve has detected low excitation voltage.
LOW VOLTAGE
MAIN LIFT PVG VALVE STUCK NEU- Main boom lift pvg valve detected its' spool is stuck in the neutral position.
TRAL
TOWER LIFT PVG VALVE STUCK Tower boom lift pvg valve detected its' spool is stuck in the neutral position.
NEUTRAL
TOWER TELESCOPE PVG VALVE Tower boom telescope pvg valve detected its' spool is stuck in the neutral posi-
STUCK NEUTRAL tion.
MAIN LIFT PVG VALVE STUCK Main boom lift pvg valve detected its' spool is stuck in the extended position.
EXTENDED
TOWER LIFT PVG VALVE STUCK Tower boom lift pvg valve detected its' spool is stuck in the extended position.
EXTENDED
TOWER TELESCOPE PVG VALVE Tower boom telescope pvg valve detected its' spool is stuck in the extended
STUCK EXTENDED position.
MAIN LIFT PVG VALVE STUCK Main boom lift pvg valve detected its' spool is stuck in the retracted position.
RETRACTED
TOWER LIFT PVG VALVE STUCK Tower boom lift pvg valve detected its' spool is stuck in the retracted position.
RETRACTED
TOWER TELESCOPE PVG VALVE Tower boom telescope pvg valve detected its' spool is stuck in the retracted
STUCK RETRACTED position.
MAIN LIFT PVG VALVE OBSTRUCTED Main boom lift pvg valve detected its' spool could not achieve command.
TOWER LIFT PVG VALVE Tower boom lift pvg valve detected its' spool could not achieve command.
OBSTRUCTED
TOWER TELESCOPE PVG VALVE Tower boom telescope pvg valve detected its' spool could not achieve com-
OBSTRUCTED mand.
6-34 – JLG Lift – 3120895


MAIN LIFT PVG VALVE COMMAND Main boom lift pvg valve received an invalid command from the control system.
IMPROPER
TOWER LIFT PVG VALVE COMMAND Tower boom lift pvg valve received an invalid command from the control sys-
IMPROPER tem.
TOWER TELESCOPE PVG VALVE Tower boom telescope pvg valve received an invalid command from the control
COMMAND IMPROPER system.
MAIN LIFT PVG VALVE TIMEOUT Main boom lift pvg valve has not received a position command in 250mS.
TOWER TELESCOPE PVG VALVE Tower boom lift pvg valve has not received a position command in 250mS.
TIMEOUT
TOWER TELESCOPE PVG VALVE Tower boom telescope pvg has not received a position command in 250mS.
TIMEOUT
MAIN LIFT PVG VALVE SETUP FAULT Main boom lift pvg valve setup data is incorrect. Requires a valve calibration.
TOWER LIFT PVG VALVE SETUP Tower boom lift pvg valve setup data is incorrect. Requires a valve calibration.
FAULT
TOWER TELESCOPE PVG VALVE Tower boom telescope pvg valve setup data is incorrect. Requires a valve cali-
SETUP FAULT bration.
MAIN LIFT PVG VALVE SENT UNREC- Main boom lift pvg valve sent an unrecognized fault.
OGNIZED FAULT
TOWER LIFT PVG VALVE SENT Tower boom lift pvg valve sent an unrecognized fault.
UNRECOGNIZED FAULT
TOWER TELESCOPE PVG VALVE Tower boom telescope pvg valve sent an unrecognized fault.
SENT UNRECOGNIZED FAULT
MAIN LIFT PVG VALVE PARAMETERS The main lift pvg valves spool data is incorrect. Requires a valve calibration.
INCORRECT
TOWER LIFT PVG VALVE PARAME- The tower lift pvg valves spool data is incorrect. Requires a valve calibration.
TERS INCORRECT
TOWER TELESCOPE PVG VALVE The tower telescope pvg valves spool data is incorrect. Requires a valve cali-
PARAMETERS INCORRECT bration.
MAIN LIFT PVG VALVE LOCATION Main lift pvg valve was hosed wrong or the wiring was incorrect during calibra-
IMPROPER tion.
TOWER LIFT PVG VALVE LOCATION Tower lift pvg valve was hosed wrong or the wiring was incorrect during calibra-
IMPROPER tion.
TOWER TELESCOPE PVG VALVE Tower telescope pvg valve was hosed wrong or the wiring was incorrect during
LOCATION IMPROPER calibration.
MAIN LIFT PVG VALVE WIRING The power wire for the main lift pvg valve is not wired to that valve.
INCORRECT
TOWER LIFT PVG VALVE WIRING The power wire for the tower lift pvg valve is not wired to that valve.
INCORRECT
TOWER TELESCOPE PVG VALVE The power wire for the tower telescope pvg valve is not wired to that valve.
WIRING INCORRECT
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-35


5/5 Flash code 5/5 indicates problems with vehicle engine RPM or the 8
encoder. Not reported during 2 second power-up.
SPEED SENSOR READING INVALID This fault is detected with diesel engines only. The RPM pickup is indicating a
SPEED speed that greater than 4000 RPM or approximately 8875 Hz.
SPEED INPUT LOST This fault is detected with diesel engines only. It occurs if there is no RPM
detected and the oil pressure input is reading above 8 PSI for more than three
seconds. This is probably due to wiring problems at the ground module or a
faulty speed sensor.
6/6 Flash code 6/6 indicates problems with the CAN bus. 10
PLATFORM CAN COMMUNICATIONS The ground module or platform module is not receiving CAN messages. This is
LOST probably due to wiring problems between the platform and ground modules.
BLAM CAN COMMUNICATIONS LOST Only occurs on machines with a BLAM. The ground module or BLAM module is
not receiving CAN messages. This is probably due to wiring problems between
the BLAM and ground modules.
CHASSIS CAN COMMUNICATIONS Only occurs on machines with a chassis module. The ground module or chas-
LOST sis module is not receiving CAN messages. This is probably due to wiring prob-
lems between the chassis and ground modules.
CYLINDER LOAD PIN CAN COMMUNI- Only occurs on machines with a cylinder load pin. The ground module or cylin-
CATIONS LOST der load pin is not receiving CAN messages. This is probably due to wiring
problems between the cylinder load pin and ground module.
EXCESSIVE CAN BUS COMMUNICA- More than 500 Bus Off or more than 500 Bus Passive conditions has been
TION ERRORS detected by the Ground Module in the current power cycle.
MAIN ANGL1 CAN COMMUNICA- The control system lost CAN communications with main boom angle sensor #1
TIONS LOST (1250AJP only)
MAIN ANGL2 CAN COMMUNICA- The control system lost CAN communications with main boom angle sensor #2
TIONS LOST (1250AJP only)
7/7 Flash code 7/7 indicates problems with a motor.
NOT REQUIRED
8/1 Flash code 8/1 indicates problems with the Chassis tilt detection system. 10
CHASSIS TILT SENSOR NOT CALI- The leveling (zeroing) calibration has not been performed for the chassis tilt
BRATED sensor.
8/2 Flash code 8/2 indicates problems with the platform load sensing sys- 10
tem.
LOAD SENSOR NOT CALIBRATED The calibration procedure has not been performed for the load sensor.
6-36 – JLG Lift – 3120895


8/3 Flash code 8/3 indicates problems with the Basket Leveling system. 10
BASKET LEVELING CRACKPOINT UP Only occurs on machines with electronic leveling systems. Indicates that the
NOT CALIBRATED basket up valve crackpoint has not been calibrated
BASKET LEVELING CRACKPOINT Only occurs on machines with electronic leveling systems. Indicates that the
DOWN NOT CALIBRATED basket down valve crackpoint has not been calibrated
BASKET LEVELING SENSOR 1 NOT Only occurs on machines with electronic leveling systems. Indicates that the
ZERO CALIBRATED primary basket leveling tilt sensor has not been calibrated.
BASKET LEVELING SENSOR 1 ZERO Only occurs on machines with electronic leveling systems. Indicates that the
OUT OF RANGE primary basket leveling tilt sensor zero is outside of the allowable range
BASKET LEVELING SENSOR 1 Only occurs on machines with electronic leveling systems. Indicates that the
SHORT TO BATTERY primary basket leveling tilt sensor is shorted to battery. An EMS cycle is
required.
SHORT TO GROUND OR OPEN CIR- primary basket leveling tilt sensor is either shorted to ground or is not con-
CUIT nected. An EMS cycle is required.
BASKET LEVELING SENSOR 2 NOT Only occurs on machines with electronic leveling systems. Indicates that the
ZERO CALIBRATED secondary basket leveling tilt sensor is not zero calibrated.
BASKET LEVELING SENSOR 2 ZERO Only occurs on machines with electronic leveling systems. Indicates that the
OUT OF RANGE secondary basket leveling system tilt sensor zero is outside the allowable
range.
SHORT TO BATTERY secondary basket leveling tilt sensor is shorted to battery. An EMS cycle is
required.
SHORT TO GROUND OR OPEN CIR- secondary basket leveling tilt sensor is either shorted to ground or not con-
CUIT nected. An EMS cycle is required.
BASKET LEVELING TILT REFERENCE Only occurs on machines with electronic leveling systems. Indicates that the
1 OUT OF RANGE reference voltage for the primary basket leveling tilt sensor is outside the
expected range (4.9 to 5.1 volts). An EMS cycle is required.
BASKET LEVELING TILT REFERENCE Only occurs on machines with electronic leveling systems. Indicates that the
2 OUT OF RANGE reference voltage for the secondary basket leveling tilt sensor is outside the
expected range. (4.9 to 5.1 volts). An EMS cycle is required.
BASKET LEVELING TILT SENSOR Only occurs on machines with electronic leveling systems. Indicates that the
DIFFERENCE TOO GREAT basket leveling tilt readings both appear to be good but their measurements do
not agree within a specified adjustable tolerance. An EMS cycle is required.
BASKET LEVELING SYSTEM TIME- Only occurs on machines with electronic leveling systems. Indicates that the
OUT basket was not able to maintain the desired level within an adjustable range for
and adjustable time
BASKET LEVELING OVERRIDE ON User has forced basket leveling on through Access Level 0.
BASKET LEVELING OVERRIDE OFF User has forced basket leveling off through Access Level 0.
BASKET LEVELING TILT SENSOR 1 Communications have been lost with a serial leveling sensor. Only on 1200S
COMMUNICATIONS LOST and 1350S models. An EMS cycle is required.
BASKET LEVELING TILT SENSOR 2 Communications have been lost with a serial leveling sensor. Only on 1200S
COMMUNICATIONS LOST and 1350S models. An EMS cycle is required.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-37


8/4 Flash code 8/4 indicates problems with the envelope system. Only occur 10
on machines with envelope control.
BOOM ANGLE SENSOR DISAGREE- The boom angle sensors are reporting angles that differ too greatly. An EMS
MENT cycle is required.
BOOM LENGTH SWITCH FAILED The boom length switch inputs are reporting the same state. An EMS cycle is
required.
BOOM LENGTH SWITCH/SENSOR The boom length switch and sensor differ in their reports of extended or
DISAGREEMENT retracted. An EMS cycle is required.
BOOM LENGTH SENSOR NOT The boom length sensor has not detected a change in length while the user is
DETECTING LENGTH CHANGE commanding telescope. An EMS cycle is required.
BOOM LENGTH SENSOR OUT OF Indicates that the voltage for the boom length sensor is above the expected
RANGE HIGH range.
BOOM LENGTH SENSOR OUT OF Indicates that the voltage for the boom length sensor is below the expected
RANGE LOW range.
BOOM LENGTH SENSOR VALUE OUT Indicates the length reported for the boom length sensor is above the expected
OF RANGE HIGH range. An EMS cycle is required.
BOOM LENGTH SENSOR VALUE OUT Indicates the length reported for the boom length sensor is below the expected
OF RANGE LOW range. An EMS cycle is required.
BOOM ANGLE SENSOR #1 COMMU- Boom angle sensor #1 lost communications with the BLAM. An EMS cycle is
NICATIONS FAULT required.
BOOM ANGLE SENSOR #2 COMMU- Boom angle sensor #2 lost communications with the BLAM. An EMS cycle is
NICATIONS FAULT required.
ANGLE SENSOR #1 INVALID ANGLE An EMS cycle is required.
ANGLE SENSOR #2 INVALID ANGLE An EMS cycle is required.
WRONG TELE RESPONSE The boom telescope is contrary to the user command
WRONG LIFT RESPONSE The boom lift is contrary to the user command
TOWER ANGLE SENSOR DISAGREE- The tower angle sensors are reporting angles that differ too greatly. An EMS
MENT cycle is required.
TOWER LENGTH SENSOR DIS- The tower length sensors are reporting angles that differ too greatly. An EMS
AGREEMENT cycle is required.
MAIN ANGLE SENSOR DISAGREE- The main boom angle sensors are reporting angles that differ too greatly. An
MENT EMS cycle is required.
BOOM LENGTH SENSOR #1 OUT OF Reported from the BLAM, indicates tower length sensor one value is out of
RANGE HIGH range high.
BOOM LENGTH SENSOR #1 OUT OF Reported from the BLAM, indicates tower length sensor one value is out of
RANGE LOW range low.
BOOM LENGTH SENSOR #2 OUT OF Reported from the BLAM, indicates tower length sensor two value is out of
RANGE HIGH range high.
BOOM LENGTH SENSOR #2 OUT OF Reported from the BLAM, indicates tower length sensor two value is out of
RANGE LOW range low.
TWR LENGTH SENSOR NOT Tower tele is being commanded and the length sensors are not changing
DETECTING LENGTH CHANGE value.
TWR LENGTH MOVEMENT WITHOUT Tower length is changing without a tower tele command
CMD
TWR LENGTH SENSOR ONE VALUE This fault is reported by the Ground module when the length sensor value is
OUT OF RANGE HIGH outside the constant data limit
6-38 – JLG Lift – 3120895


TWR LENGTH SENSOR ONE VALUE This fault is reported by the Ground module when the length sensor value is
OUT OF RANGE LOW outside the constant data limit
TWR LENGTH SENSOR TWO VALUE This fault is reported by the Ground module when the length sensor value is
OUT OF RANGE HIGH outside the constant data limit
TWR LENGTH SENSOR TWO VALUE This fault is reported by the Ground module when the length sensor value is
OUT OF RANGE LOW outside the constant data limit
TWR ANGL1 INVALID ANGLE Tower boom angle sensor #1 out of range
TWR ANGL2 INVALID ANGLE Tower boom angle sensor #2 out of range
INVALID ANGLE SENSOR #1 MODEL Wrong tower angle sensor Mfgr. Installed on a 1250AJP (Must be a Rieker, not
Spectron)
INVALID ANGLE SENSOR #2 MODEL Wrong tower angle sensor Mfgr. Installed on a 1250AJP (Must be a Rieker, not
Spectron)
MAIN ANGL1 INVALID ANGLE Main boom angle sensor #1 out of range
MAIN ANGL2 INVALID ANGLE Main boom angle sensor #2 out of range
MAIN ANGLE SENSOR NOT DETECT- The main boom is being commanded to move and the main angle sensors are
ING ANGLE CHANGE not detecting any movement
MAIN ANGLE MOVEMENT WITHOUT The main boom angle is changing without a main lift command
CMD
WRONG TWR TELE RESPONSE The tower telescope is moving in the opposite direction the user is command-
ing.
WRONG TWR LIFT RESPONSE The tower lift is moving in the opposite direction the user is commanding
TWR CYL ANGLE SENSOR OUT OF The tower cylinder angle sensor is below 4721 A/D counts
RANGE LOW
TWR CYL ANGLE SENSOR OUT OF The tower cylinder angle sensor is above 29535 A/D counts.
RANGE HIGH
TWR CYL ANGLE NOT DETECTING The cylinder angle is not changing during a tower lift up/down user command.
ANGLE CHANGE
TWR CYL ANGLE MOVEMENT WITH- The cylinder angle is changing without a tower lift command
OUT CMD
MAIN TRN ANGLE SW FAILED The system detected a disagreement of the N.O. vs N.C. contacts on the main
boom angle switch.
TWR TRN SW DISAGREEMENT The system detected a disagreement between the tower boom length switch
and the tower length sensors.
TRN DUAL CAP SWITCHES BAD The system detected both the Dual capacity and the transport switches are
bad.
TRN DUAL CAP BAD TRANSITION The system detected that the Dual capacity or the transport switches changed
state out of order.
MAIN TRN LEN SW DISAGREEMENT The system detected a disagreement between the main boom transport length
switches.
DCAP LEN SW DISAGREEMENT The system detected a disagreement between the main boom dual capacity
length switches.
MAIN BOOM TRN ANGLE SW/SEN- The system detected a disagreement between the main boom transport angle
SOR DISAGREEMENT switch and the main boom angle sensors.
CYL ANGLE SENSOR/SW DISAGREE- The system detected a disagreement of the tower angle input from the BLAM
MENT and the tower cylinder angle sensor.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-39


8/5 Flash code 8/5 indicates problems with the moment or load pin system. 10
Only occur on machines with moment or load pin control. An EMS cycle
is required.
MOMENT PIN HORIZONTAL FORCE The horizontal force is out of the allowed range.
OUT OF RANGE
MOMENT PIN VERTICAL FORCE OUT The vertical force is out of the allowed range.
OF RANGE
LOAD PIN HORIZONTAL FORCE OUT The horizontal force is out of the allowed range.
OF RANGE
LOAD PIN VERTICAL FORCE OUT OF The vertical force is out of the allowed range.
RANGE
MOMENT PIN SENSOR FAULT The moment pin has reported a fault flag.
LOAD PIN SENSOR FAULT The load pin has reported a fault flag.
NEW MOMENT PIN DETECTED A moment pin was detected on the system different from the one used to cali-
FAULT brate the machine.
NEW LOAD PIN DETECTED FAULT A load pin was detected on the system different from the one used to calibrate
the machine.
6-40 – JLG Lift – 3120895


8/6 Flash code 8/6 indicates problems with the steering system. Except as 10
noted, an EMS cycle is required.
RESTRICTED TO TRANSPORT — OSC Only occurs on machines with electrically released oscillating axles config-
AXLE PRESS SW DISAGREEMENT ured. The oscillating axle pressure switch indicates pressure while the
machine is not driving or does not indicate pressure while the machine is driv-
ing and the machine is restricted to transport position.
AXLE EXT STB OR OC A short to battery or open circuit was detected on the axles extension valve.
AXLE EXT STG A short to ground was detected on the axles extension valve.
AXLE RET STB OR OC A short to battery or open circuit was detected on the axles retract valve.
AXLE RET STG A short to ground was detected on the axles retract valve.
RT FNT STEER RT STB OR OC A short to battery or open circuit has been detected on the right front steer right
valve.
RT FNT STEER RT STG A short to ground has been detected on the right front steer right valve.
RT FNT STEER LT STB OR OC A short to battery or open circuit has been detected on the right front steer left
valve.
RT FNT STEER LT STG A short to ground has been detected on the right front steer left valve.
LT FNT STEER RT STB OR OC A short to battery or open circuit has been detected on the left front steer right
valve.
LT FNT STEER RT STG A short to ground has been detected on the left front steer right valve.
LT FNT STEER LT STB OR OC A short to battery or open circuit has been detected on the left front steer left
valve.
LT FNT STEER LT STG A short to ground has been detected on the left front steer left valve.
RT REAR STEER RT STB OR OC A short to battery or open circuit has been detected on the right rear steer right
valve.
RT REAR STEER RT STG A short to ground has been detected on the right rear steer right valve.
RT REAR STEER LT STB OR OC A short to battery or open circuit has been detected on the right rear steer left
valve.
RT REAR STEER LT STG A short to ground has been detected on the right rear steer left valve.
LT REAR STEER RT STB OR OC A short to battery or open circuit has been detected on the left rear steer right
valve.
LT REAR STEER RT STG A short to ground has been detected on the left rear steer left valve.
LT REAR STEER LT STB OR OC A short to battery or open circuit has been detected on the left rear steer left
valve.
LT REAR STEER LT STG A short to ground has been detected on the left rear steer left valve.
FRONT LEFT WHEEL FAULT — CHECK This indicates that the steering angle sensor has become decoupled.
MOUNTING
FRONT RIGHT WHEEL FAULT — This indicates that the steering angle sensor has become decoupled.
CHECK MOUNTING
REAR LEFT WHEEL FAULT — CHECK This indicates that the steering angle sensor has become decoupled.
MOUNTING
REAR RIGHT WHEEL FAULT — CHECK This indicates that the steering angle sensor has become decoupled.
MOUNTING
FRONT LEFT WHEEL BLOCKED The wheel is not responding to steer commands. Fault clears when condition
clears.
FRONT RIGHT WHEEL BLOCKED The wheel is not responding to steer commands. Fault clears when condition
clears.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-41


REAR LEFT WHEEL BLOCKED The wheel is not responding to steer commands. Fault clears when condition
clears.
REAR RIGHT WHEEL BLOCKED The wheel is not responding to steer commands. Fault clears when condition
clears.
FRONT LEFT WHEEL SENSOR OUT A short to ground or open circuit has been detected on the steering angle sen-
OF RANGE LOW sor.
FRONT LEFT WHEEL SENSOR OUT A short to battery has been detected on the steering angle sensor.
OF RANGE HIGH
FRONT RIGHT WHEEL SENSOR OUT A short to ground or open circuit has been detected on the steering angle sen-
OF RANGE LOW sor.
FRONT RIGHT WHEEL SENSOR OUT A short to battery has been detected on the steering angle sensor.
OF RANGE HIGH
REAR LEFT WHEEL SENSOR OUT OF A short to ground or open circuit has been detected on the steering angle sen-
RANGE LOW sor.
REAR LEFT WHEEL SENSOR OUT OF A short to battery has been detected on the steering angle sensor.
RANGE HIGH
REAR RIGHT WHEEL SENSOR OUT A short to ground or open circuit has been detected on the steering angle sen-
OF RANGE LOW sor.
REAR RIGHT WHEEL SENSOR OUT A short to battery has been detected on the steering angle sensor.
OF RANGE HIGH
8/7 Flash code 8/7 indicates new main angle sensors 10
NEW MAIN ANGL1 SENSOR The system detected a different main angle #1 sensor than it was calibrated
DETECTED with. (1250AJP only.)
NEW MAIN ANGL2 SENSOR The system detected a different main angle #2 sensor than it was calibrated
DETECTED with. (1250AJP only.)
6-42 – JLG Lift – 3120895


9/9 Flash code 9/9 indicates problems with the controller or the user dis- 11
abling safety systems from Access Level 0.
PLATFORM MODULE SOFTWARE Platform module code is too old to support the EIM or BPE load sensor and the
UPDATE REQUIRED machine is configured to use one of these two sensors. The PM code must be
updated to a newer version.
GROUND MODULE CONSTANT DATA The ground module has old constant data that is not compatible with the cur-
UPDATE REQUIRED rent ground module software. The GM constant data must be updated to a
newer version. An EMS cycle is required.
HIGH RESOLUTION A2D FAILURE — The ADS1213 chip in the platform module has stopped asserting its interrupt
INTERRUPT LOST (DRDY) line for some reason. An EMS cycle is required.
HIGH RESOLUTION A2D FAILURE- The ADS1213 has needed to be reset 3 or more times. An EMS cycle is
REINIT LIMIT required.
PLATFORM MODULE FAILURE: hwfs Platform module V(Low) FET has failed. An EMS cycle is required.
CODE 1
GROUND MODULE FAILURE: hwfs Ground module V(Low) FET has failed. An EMS cycle is required.
CODE 1
GROUND SENSOR REF VOLTAGE These faults occur when the seven volt reference voltage used for the joy-
OUT OF RANGE sticks, sensors, etc goes out of range. Not reported during 2 second power-up.
GROUND MODULE FAILURE: hIGH This fault occurs when there is a fault with the hardware based high side driver
SIDE DRIVER CUTOUT FAULTY cutout circuit. An EMS cycle is required.
PLATFORM SENSOR REF VOLTAGE These faults occur when the seven volt reference voltage used for the joy-
OUT OF RANGE sticks, sensors, etc goes out of range. Not reported during 2 second power-up.
EEPROM FAILURE — CHECK ALL SET- A critical failure occurred with the EEPROM. Personalities, machine configura-
TINGS tion digits, etc may be reset to default values and should be checked. An EMS
cycle is required.
CHASSIS TILT SENSOR NOT GAIN Indicates that the chassis tilt sensor calibration information has been lost.
CALIBRATED Machine will indicate that it is tilted at all times. This calibration data is pro-
grammed into the unit at the factory.
CHASSIS TILT SENSOR GAIN OUT OF Indicates that the chassis tilt sensor calibration has become corrupted. This
RANGE calibration data is programmed into the unit at the factory.
ENVELOPE CONTROL DISABLED Only occurs on machines with envelope control. The user has forced envelope
control off with the analyzer from Access Level 0.
MOMENT CONTROL DISABLED Only occurs on machines with envelope control. The user has forced moment
control off with the analyzer from Access Level 0.
STEER SENSORS NOT CALIBRATED Only occurs on machines with a chassis module. The steer sensors require a
calibration that has not yet been performed.
BOOM SENSORS NOT CALIBRATED Only occurs on machines with a BLAM module. The boom sensors require a
calibration that has not yet been performed.
LIFT CRACKPOINTS NOT CALI- Only occurs on 1200S and 1350S machines. The lift valves require a calibra-
BRATED tion that has not yet been performed.
TELESCOPE CRACKPOINTS NOT Only occurs on 1200S and 1350S machines. The telescope valves require a
CALIBRATED calibration that has not yet been performed.
DRIVE CRACKPOINTS NOT CALI- Only occurs on 1200S and 1350S machines. The drive valves require a cali-
BRATED bration that has not yet been performed.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-43


BLAM SENSOR SUPPLY OUT OF Indicates that the supply voltage for the boom angle sensors is above the
RANGE HIGH expected range. An EMS cycle is required.
BLAM SENSOR SUPPLY OUT OF Indicates that the supply voltage for the boom angle sensors is below the
RANGE LOW expected range. An EMS cycle is required.
LENGTH SENSOR REF VOLTAGE Indicates that the supply voltage for the boom length sensors is above the
HIGH expected range. An EMS cycle is required.
LENGTH SENSOR REF VOLTAGE Indicates that the supply voltage for the boom length sensors is below the
LOW expected range. An EMS cycle is required.
BLAM HIGH RES A/D FAILURE The high resolution Analog to digital converter in the BLAM module has failed.
CHASSIS SENSOR SUPPLY OUT OF Indicates that the supply voltage for chassis sensors is below the expected
RANGE LOW range. An EMS cycle is required.
CHASSIS SENSOR SUPPLY OUT OF Indicates that the supply voltage for chassis sensors is above the expected
RANGE HIGH range. An EMS cycle is required.
BLAM BACKUP COMMUNICATIONS Reported if the backup communications link to the BLAM failed the test at
LINK FAULTY startup.
BLAM BACKUP COMMUNICATIONS The backup communications link to the BLAM module was activated but could
LOST - HYDRAULICS SUSPENDED not establish/maintain communications with the BLAM.
4150461-E
6-44 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Table 6-4. Machine Configuration Programming Information Prior to Software Version P5.3
Configuration Digit Number Description Default Number
MODEL NUMBER: 1 400S 1

1 2 450A
3 510A
4 600S
5 600A
6 600SC
7 601S
8 740A
9 800A
10 800S
MARKET: 0 ANSI USA 0

2 1 ANSI EXPORT
2 CSA
3 CE
4 AUSTRALIA
5 JAPAN
ENGINE: 1 FORD EFI GAS: Ford LRG425 EFI Gas (Tier 1) 7

3*
* Engine selections vary 2 FORD EFI D/F: Ford LRG425 EFI dual fuel (Tier 1)
depending on model selec-
tion. 3 DEUTZ F4 TIER1: Deutz F4M1011F Diesel (Tier 1)
4 DEUTZ F3 TIER1: Deutz F3M1011F Diesel (Tier 1)
5 CAT. 3024C: CAT 3024C Diesel (Tier 2)
7 PERKINS 404C (Tier 2)
8 DEUTZ F4 TIER2: Deutz F4M2011 Diesel (Tier 2)
10 FORD GAS TIER2: Ford LRG425 EFI Gas (Tier 2)
11 FORD D/F TIER2: Ford LRG425 EFI Dual Fuel (Tier 2)
12 DEUTZ ECM: Engine Control Module - ECM
13 DUAL FUEL ECM: GM/PSI 3.0L Dual Fuel (Tier 2)
FLYWHEEL TEETH: 0 133 TEETH: 133 flywheel teeth. 1

4*
* This menu item is only visible if 1 110 TEETH: 110 flywheel teeth.
Deutz engine selections 3 or 4 are
selected.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-45

GLOW PLUG: 0 NO GLOW PLUGS: No glow plugs installed. 1

5
1 W/O STARTER LOCK: Automatic pre-glow time determined by ambient air temperature;
engine start can be attempted at any time during pre-glow.
2 W/ STARTER LOCK: Automatic pre-glow time determined by ambient air temperature;

engine start is NOT permitted until pre-glow is finished.
ENGINE SHUTDOWN: 0 DISABLED: No engine shutdown. 1

6
1 ENABLED: Shutdown engine when coolant temperature is greater than 110 deg. C or the
oil pressure is less than 8 psi.
TILT: 1 5 DEGREES: Reduces the maximum speed of all boom functions to creep when tilted 1
7* more than 5 degrees and above elevation; also reduces drive speed to creep.
* Certain market selections
will limit tilt options. 2 4 DEGREES: Reduces the maximum speed of all boom functions to creep when tilted
more than 4 degrees and above elevation; also reduces drive speed to creep.
3 3 DEGREES: Reduces the maximum speed of all boom functions to creep when tilted
more than 3 degrees and above elevation; also reduces drive speed to creep.
4 4 DEGREES + CUT: Reduces the maximum speed of all boom functions to creep when
tilted more than 4 degrees and above elevation; also disallows tower lift up, tower tele-
scope out, drive, main telescope out and main lift up.
Note: Any of the selections above will light the tilt lamp when a tilted condition occurs and
will sound the platform alarm when the machine is also above elevation.
JIB: 0 NO: No jib installed. 0

8*
* Only visible under certain 1 YES: Jib installed which has up and down movements only.
model selections
4 WHEEL STEER: 0 NO: No four-wheel steer installed. 0

9*
* Only visible under certain 1 YES: Four-wheel steer installed.
model selections.
SOFT TOUCH: 0 NO: No soft touch system installed. 0

10*
* Only visible under certain 1 YES: Soft touch system installed.
model selections.
GEN SET/WELDER: 0 NO: No generator installed. 0

11
1 BELT DRIVE: Belt driven setup.
6-46 – JLG Lift – 3120895

GEN SET CUTOUT: 0 MOTION ENABLED: Motion enabled when generator is ON. 0
12*
* Only visible if Gen Set / 1 MOTION CUTOUT: Motion cutout in platform mode only.
Welder Menu selection is not 0.
H & T LIGHTS: 0 NO: No head and tail lights installed. 0

13
1 YES: Head and tail lights installed.
CABLE SWITCH: 0 NO: No broken cable switch installed. 0

14*
* Only visible under certain 1 YES: Broken cable switch installed.
model selections.
* Certain market and model
selections will alter the default
setting.
LOAD SYSTEM: 0 NO: No load sensor installed. 0

15*
* Only visible under certain 1 WARN ONLY: Functions in creep, overload lamp lit, platform alarm beeps (5 sec ON, 2
model selections. sec OFF).
* Certain market selections will
limit load system options or 2 CUTOUT PLATFORM: All functions cutout, overload lamp lit, platform alarm beeps (5
alter default setting.
sec ON, 2 sec OFF).
3 CUTOUT ALL: All functions cutout, flash overload light (500mS on, 500mS off), platform
alarm beeps (5 sec ON, 2 sec OFF).
4 SPECIAL 1: Functions in creep, overload lamp lit, disables main telescope out & main lift
up, platform alarm beeps (5 sec ON, 2 sec OFF).
LOAD SENSOR: 0 1 ON ROTATOR: Use the on-board load sensor for all models except those which use the 1
16* Leveling Platform Module.
* Only visible if Load Sensor
Menu selection is not 0. 1 4 UNDER PLATFORM: Use the EIM for load sensing.
* Market selections will limit
certain load sensor options.
FUNCTION CUTOUT: 0 NO: No drive cutout. 0

17*
* Only visible under certain 1 BOOM CUTOUT: Boom function cutout while driving above elevation.
market selections.
* Certain market selections 2 DRIVE CUTOUT: Drive cutout above elevation.
will limit function cutout options
or alter default setting.
3 DRIVE CUT E&T: Drive cutout above elevation and tilted.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-47

GROUND ALARM: 0 NO: No ground alarm installed. 0

18*
* Certain market selections will 1 DRIVE: Travel alarm sounds when the drive function is active (Option).
alter default setting.
2 DESCENT: Descent alarm sounds when lift down is active (Option).
3 MOTION: Motion alarm sounds when any function is active (Option).
DRIVE: 0 4WD: Four wheel drive. 0

19*
* Only visible under certain 1 2WD: Two wheel drive.
model selections.
2 2WD W/ 2-SPEED: Two wheel drive with 2-speed valve.
TEMPERATURE: 0 CELSIUS: Celsius unit selection. 1
20
1 FAHRENHEIT: Fahrenheit unit selection.
LEVELING MODE: 0 ALL FUNCTIONS: Platform level with all functions. 0

21*
* Only visible on 800S models. 1 LEVEL LIFT/TELESCOPE: Platform level on lift and telescope only.
4150364-14
6-48 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Table 6-5. Machine Configuration Programming Information Software Version P5.3 to P6.1
Configuration Label/ Default

Number Description
Digit Number

1
2 450A
3 510A
4 600S
5 600A
6 600SC
7 601S
8 740A
9 800A
10 800S

2
1 ANSI EXPORT
2 CSA
3 CE
4 AUSTRALIA
5 JAPAN
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-49


Number Description
Digit Number

3*
12 DEUTZ ECM: Engine Control Module - ECM

4*
* This menu item is only 1 110 TEETH: 110 flywheel teeth.
visible if Deutz engine
selections 3 or 4 are
selected.

5
1 AIR INTAKE: Glow plugs installed in the air intake on the manifold.
2 IN-CYLINDER: Glow plugs installed in each cylinder.
STARTER LOCKOUT: 0 DISABLED: Automatic pre-glow time determined by ambient air temperature; engine 0
6 start can be attempted at any time during pre-glow.
1 ENABLED: Automatic pre-glow time determined by ambient air temperature; engine

start is NOT permitted until pre-glow is finished.
6-50 – JLG Lift – 3120895


Number Description
Digit Number

7
oil pressure is less than 8 PSI.
will limit tilt options and alter 2 4 DEGREES: Reduces the maximum speed of all boom functions to creep when tilted
default setting. more than 4 degrees and above elevation; also reduces drive speed to creep.
Note: Any of the selections 3 3 DEGREES: Reduces the maximum speed of all boom functions to creep when tilted
above will light the tilt lamp more than 3 degrees and above elevation; also reduces drive speed to creep.
when a tilted condition
occurs and will sound the 4 4 DEGREES + CUT: Reduces the maximum speed of all boom functions to creep when
platform alarm when the tilted more than 4 degrees and above elevation; also disallows tower lift up, tower tele-
machine is also above ele- scope out, drive, main telescope out and main lift up.
vation.

9*
model selections.

10*
model selections.

11*
model selections.

12
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-51


Number Description
Digit Number
13*
Welder Menu selection is
not 0.

14

15*
model selections.
* Certain market and
model selections will alter
the default setting.

16*
market selections. sec OFF).
will limit load system 2 CUTOUT PLATFORM: All functions cutout, overload lamp lit, platform alarm beeps (5
options or alter default set- sec ON, 2 sec OFF).
ting.
* Only visible if Load Sen-
sor Menu selection is not 0 1 4 UNDER PLATFORM: Use the EIM for load sensing.
and under certain market
selections.
will limit load sensor
options.
6-52 – JLG Lift – 3120895


Number Description
Digit Number

18*
market selections.
* Certain market selections 2 DRIVE CUTOUT: Drive & steer cutout above elevation.
will limit function cutout
options or alter default set- 3 DRIVE CUT E&T: Drive & steer cutout above elevation and tilted.
ting.

19*
* Certain market selections 1 DRIVE: Travel alarm sounds when the drive function is active (Option).
will alter default setting.

20*
model selections.

21*
* Certain market selections 1 FAHRENHEIT: Fahrenheit unit selection.

22*
* Only visible on 800S 1 LEVEL LIFT/TELESCOPE: Platform level on lift and telescope only.
models.
4150364-18
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-53

Table 6-6. Machine Configuration Programming Information Software Version P6.1 to Present

Number Description
Digit Number

1
2 450A
3 510A
4 600S
5 600A
6 600SC
7 601S
8 740A
9 800A
10 800S

2
1 ANSI EXPORT
2 CSA
3 CE
4 AUSTRALIA
5 JAPAN
6-54 – JLG Lift – 3120895


Number Description
Digit Number

3*
12 DEUTZ ECM: Engine Control Module - ECM (Tier 2 and Tier 3)
14 PERKINS ECM
15 CAT ECM

4*
* This menu item is only 1 110 TEETH: 110 flywheel teeth.
visible if Deutz engine
selections 3 or 4 are
selected.

5
1 AIR INTAKE: Glow plugs installed in the air intake on the manifold.
2 IN-CYLINDER: Glow plugs installed in each cylinder.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-55


Number Description
Digit Number
STARTER LOCKOUT: 0 DISABLED: Automatic pre-glow time determined by ambient air temperature; engine 0
6 start can be attempted at any time during pre-glow.
1 ENABLED: Automatic pre-glow time determined by ambient air temperature; engine

start is NOT permitted until pre-glow is finished.

7
oil pressure is less than 8 PSI.
will limit tilt options and alter 2 4 DEGREES: Reduces the maximum speed of all boom functions to creep when tilted
default setting. more than 4 degrees and above elevation; also reduces drive speed to creep.
Note: Any of the selections 3 3 DEGREES: Reduces the maximum speed of all boom functions to creep when tilted
above will light the tilt lamp more than 3 degrees and above elevation; also reduces drive speed to creep.
when a tilted condition
occurs and will sound the 4 4 DEGREES + CUT: Reduces the maximum speed of all boom functions to creep when
platform alarm when the tilted more than 4 degrees and above elevation; also disallows tower lift up, tower tele-
machine is also above ele- scope out, drive, main telescope out and main lift up.
vation.

9*
model selections.

10*
model selections.

11*
model selections.
6-56 – JLG Lift – 3120895


Number Description
Digit Number

12
13*
Welder Menu selection is
not 0.

14

15*
model selections.
* Certain market and
model selections will alter
the default setting.

16*
market selections. sec OFF).
will limit load system 2 CUTOUT PLATFORM: All functions cutout, overload lamp lit, platform alarm beeps (5
options or alter default set- sec ON, 2 sec OFF).
ting.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-57


Number Description
Digit Number
* Only visible if Load Sen-
sor Menu selection is not 0 1 4 UNDER PLATFORM: Use the EIM for load sensing.
and under certain market
selections.
will limit load sensor
options.

18*
market selections.
* Certain market selections 2 DRIVE CUTOUT: Drive & steer cutout above elevation.
will limit function cutout
options or alter default set- 3 DRIVE CUT E&T: Drive & steer cutout above elevation and tilted.
ting.

19*
* Certain market selections 1 DRIVE: Travel alarm sounds when the drive function is active (Option).

20*
model selections.

21*
* Certain market selections 1 FAHRENHEIT: Fahrenheit unit selection.
6-58 – JLG Lift – 3120895


Number Description
Digit Number

22*
* Only visible on 800S 1 LEVEL LIFT/TELESCOPE: Platform level on lift and telescope only.
models.
DRIVE CONTROL: 0 NORMAL: Drive coils are energized from the Ground Module. 2
23
1 PROPULSION: Drive coils are energized from the Propulsion Module.
2 ENHANCED: Drive coils are energized from the Ground Module and the ground side of
the drive coils are brought back to current feedback returns.
CLEARSKY: 0 NO: Clearsky (telematics) option is disabled. 0

24
1 YES: Clearsky (telematics) option is enabled.
CRIBBING OPTION: 0 NO: Cribbing Option is disabled. 0

25
1 YES: Cribbing Option is enabled.
4150364-19
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-59

NOTE: Bold Italic Numbers indicate the default setting. Plain text indicates another available selection. Bold, Italic
underlined numbers indicate the default when the option is factory installed. Shaded cells indicate a hidden
menu or selection.
400S
ENGINE SHUTDOWN
STARTER LOCKOUT
GEN SET / WELDER

FLYWHEEL TEETH
GEN SET CUTOUT

MODEL NUMBER
4 WHEEL STEER
GLOW PLUGS
SOFT TOUCH
MARKET
ENGINE
TILT
JIB
ANSI USA 2 0 7 0 1 0 1 2 0 1 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
ANSI EXPORT 2 1 7 0 1 0 1 2 0 1 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
CSA 2 2 7 0 1 0 1 2 0 1 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
CE 2 3 7 0 1 0 1 2 0 1 0 1 X 2 3 4 5 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
AUSTRALIA 2 4 7 0 1 0 1 2 0 1 0 1 X 2 3 4 5 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
JAPAN 2 5 7 0 1 0 1 2 0 1 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
400S
CABLE BREAK SWITCH
HEAD & TAIL LIGHTS
FUNCTION CUTOUT
GROUND ALARM
LEVELING MODE
TEMPERATURE
LOAD SENSOR
LOAD SYSTEM
DRIVE TYPE
ANSI USA 0 1 0 1 0 X X X X 0 1 0 X X X 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 0 1 0 1
ANSI EXPORT 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 0 1 0 1
CSA 0 1 0 1 0 X X X X 0 1 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 0 1 0 1
CE 0 1 0 1 0 X 2 3 X 0 1 0 1 X X 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 0 1 0 1
AUSTRALIA 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 0 1 0 1
JAPAN 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 0 1 0 1
6-60 – JLG Lift – 3120895

NOTE: Bold Italic Numbers indicate the default setting. Plain text indicates another available selection. Bold, Italic
underlined numbers indicate the default when the option is factory installed. Shaded cells indicate a hidden
menu or selection.
460SJ
ENGINE SHUTDOWN
STARTER LOCKOUT
GEN SET / WELDER

FLYWHEEL TEETH
GEN SET CUTOUT

MODEL NUMBER
4 WHEEL STEER
GLOW PLUGS
SOFT TOUCH
MARKET
ENGINE
TILT
JIB
ANSI USA 1 0 7 0 1 0 1 2 0 1 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
ANSI EXPORT 1 1 7 0 1 0 1 2 0 1 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
CSA 1 2 7 0 1 0 1 2 0 1 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
CE 1 3 7 0 1 0 1 2 0 1 0 1 X 2 3 4 5 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
AUSTRALIA 1 4 7 0 1 0 1 2 0 1 0 1 X 2 3 4 5 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
JAPAN 1 5 7 0 1 0 1 2 0 1 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
460SJ
CABLE BREAK SWITCH
HEAD & TAIL LIGHTS
FUNCTION CUTOUT
GROUND ALARM
LEVELING MODE
TEMPERATURE
LOAD SENSOR
LOAD SYSTEM
DRIVE TYPE
ANSI USA 0 1 0 1 0 X X X X 0 1 0 X X X 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 0 1 0 1
ANSI EXPORT 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 0 1 0 1
CSA 0 1 0 1 0 X X X X 0 1 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 0 1 0 1
CE 0 1 0 1 0 X 2 3 X 0 1 0 1 X X 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 0 1 0 1
AUSTRALIA 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 0 1 0 1
JAPAN 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 0 1 0 1
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-61

6.9 SYSTEM TEST 3.Pull out the Emergency Stop switch and Start the
engine.
The Control System Incorporates a built-in system test to
check the system components and functions. To use this
function, use the following procedures.
Test from the Platform

1. Position the Platform/Ground select switch to the
Platform position.
4.The analyzer screen should read:
2.Plug the analyzer into the connector at the base of the

platform control box.
5.Use the arrow button to reach SYSTEM TEST. Hit Enter.

The analyzer will prompt you asking if you want to
activate the system test; hit Enter again to activate.
6.Follow the flow path in Figure 6-13., System Test Flow
Chart - Platform Tests and go through the compo-
nent tests. Hit the ESC key during any part of the
test to return to the main menu without completing
all tests or wait until all tests are complete. During
the TEST ALL INPUTS sequence, the analyzer
allows control switches to be operated and shows if
they are closed (CL) or open (OP).
6-62 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Figure 6-13. System Test Flow Chart - Platform Tests
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-63

Test from the Ground Station 3.Pull out the Emergency Stop switch. and Start the
engine.
1. Position the Platform/Ground select switch to the
Ground position.
4.The analyzer screen should read:
2.Plug the analyzer into the connector inside the Ground

control box.
5.Use the arrow button to reach SYSTEM TEST. Hit Enter.

The analyzer will prompt you asking if you want to
activate the system test; hit Enter again to activate.
6.Follow the flow path in Figure 6-14., System Test Flow
Chart - Ground Station Tests and go through the
component tests. Hit the ESC key during any part of
the test to return to the main menu without complet-
ing all tests or wait until all tests are complete. Dur-
ing the TEST ALL INPUTS sequence, the analyzer
allows control switches to be operated and shows if
they are closed (CL) or open (OP).
6-64 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Figure 6-14. System Test Flow Chart - Ground Station Tests
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-65

Table 6-7. System Test Messages
Message Displayed on Message Displayed on

Description
Analyzer Analyzer
RUNNING Initial display when system test is run; certain “critical” checks are made. Prob-
lems that can be reported include below messages.
ONLY 1 ANALYZER! Do not connect two Analyzers while running the system test.
BATTERY TOO LOW The system test cannot run with battery voltage below minimum (9 V).
BATTERY TOO HIGH The system test cannot run with battery voltage above maximum. (16 V).
CHECK CAN WIRING The system test cannot run in platform mode unless data is being received from
the platform and ground modules. The system test cannot run in ground mode
unless data is being received from the platform module.
CHECK SPEED There is an open- or short- circuit in the speed encoder wiring. Check speed
encoder.
BAD GROUND MODULE An internal problem was detected in the ground module.
HIGH TILT ANGLE The vehicle is very tilted (19.3 ), or the tilt sensor has been damaged. Check tilt
sensor.
HOT ENGINE The engine temperature exceeds 100C. This is only a warning.
BAD I/O PORTS The controller detected a problem with its internal circuits at switch on. If other
problems are also detected, the controller may need replacing.
SUSPECT EEPROM The controller detected a problem with its EEPROM stored personality settings at
switch on. Check and, if necessary correct, all personality settings.
OPEN FSW In platform mode, the footswitch must be open at the start of the test.
CLOSE FSW In platform mode, the footswitch must be closed when this message is displayed;
the footswitch MUST BE KEPT CLOSED during the valve & contactor tests.
BAD FSW The two footswitch signals are not changing together, probably because one is
open-circuit. One footswitch signal (“FSW1”) is routed to the power module, the
other (“FSW2”) is routed to the platform module. Check footswitch and wiring.
6-66 – JLG Lift – 3120895


Description
Analyzer Analyzer
TESTING VALVES Indicates that the valve test is beginning. Each valve is alternately energized and
de-energized; checks are made for open- and short- circuit valve coils.
NOTE: In platform mode, the footswitch must be closed.
NOTE: Tower lift valves are not tested if TOWER LIFT=NO. Tower telescope
valves are not tested if TOWER TELE=NO. Jib valves are not tested if JIB = NO.
Extendable axle valves are not tested if EXT AXLES=NO. Four wheel steer valves
are not tested if 4WS=NO.
NOTE: Left/right jib valves are not tested unless JIB = SIDESWING.
Problems that can be reported include below messages.
CANT TEST VALVES There is a wiring problem, which prevents the valve test from functioning correctly.
Check valve wiring. Check ground alarm & hour meter wiring.
XXXXXXX S/C The named valve is drawing too much current so is presumed to be short-cir-
cuited. Check valve wiring.
XXXXXXX O/C The named valve is drawing too little current so is presumed to be open-circuit.
Check valve wiring.
CHECKING INPUTS Indicates that the inputs test is beginning. Every input is checked to ensure that it is
in its “normal” position; function switches should be open, cutout switches should
be closed, joysticks should be in neutral.
In platform mode any non-neutral platform switch or joystick is reported; any
active cutouts are reported.
In ground mode any non-neutral ground switches is reported; any active cutouts
are reported.
NOTE: Switches, which are not in use (due to the settings of machine digits), are
not checked.
NOTE: The pump pot is checked only for a wire-off condition; it can be at any
demand from creep to maximum.
Problems that can be reported include below messages.
CHECK XXXXXXX The named switch is not in its “normal” position. Check switch & wiring.
CHECK XXXXXXX JOY The named joystick appears to be faulty. Check joystick.
TESTING LAMPS Indicates that the lamps test is beginning. Each lamp is energized in turn; a prompt
asks for confirmation that the lamp is lit.
ENTER must be pressed or clicked to continue the test.
NOTE: Lamps, which are not in use (due to the settings of machine digits), are not
checked.
NOTE: Platform Lamps are only tested in platform mode.
NOTE: The GM overload lamp and 500# capacity lamp are not tested.
NOTE: Head and tail lamps are tested in both platform and ground mode if
enabled by a machine digit.
TESTING ALARMS Indicates that the alarms test is beginning. Each alarm is energized in turn; a
prompt asks for confirmation that the alarm is sounding.
ENTER must be pressed or clicked to continue the test.
NOTE: The platform alarm and the horn are only tested in platform mode.
NOTE: The ground alarm is not tested if GROUND ALARM = NO.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-67


Description
Analyzer Analyzer
TEST ALL INPUTS? Prompts whether to check every operator input. If ESC is pressed or clicked, the
system test ends. If ENTER is pressed or clicked, each operator input is prompted
for in turn.
In platform mode every platform switch and joystick is tested.
In ground mode every ground switch is tested.
NOTE: Tower lift switches are not tested if TOWER LIFT=NO. Tower telescope
switches are not tested if TOWER TELE=NO. Jib switches are not tested if JIB =
NO. Extendable axle switches are not tested if EXT AXLES=NO. Four wheel steer
switches are not tested if 4WS=NO.
NOTE: Left/right jib switches are not tested unless JIB = SIDESWING.
Prompts displayed during the operator input test below messages.
CLOSE XXXXXXX The named switch should be closed.
OPEN XXXXXXX The named switch should be opened.
XXXXXXX XXXXXXX TO MAX The named joystick should be pushed to its full extent in the named direction.
XXXXXXX XXXXXXX TO MIN The named joystick should be returned to neutral from the named direction.
PUMP POT TO MAX The pump pot should be turned to maximum.
PUMP POT TO MIN The pump pot should be turned to minimum.
MULTIPLE CLOSURE More than one operator input is closed; if only one has been operated, there could
be a short between two inputs.
TESTS COMPLETE Indicates that the system test is complete. Any problems reported should have
been noted and should now be rectified. Press ESC/CANCEL to return to the
RUN SYSTEM TEST Analyzer menu.
6-68 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Table 6-8. Machine Configuration Parameters
Configuration Parameter Parameter Value Description Rang Definition Data Default

Digit (Displayed on (Displayed on Analyzer e Increment Value
Analyzer 1st Line) 2nd Line)
1 Model Number: 1=400 Displays/adjusts 1 400 1 1

2=450 machine model 2 450
3=600 3 600
4=601 4 601
5=800 5 800
2 Engine: 1=FORD EFI GAS Displays/adjusts 1 Ford LRG425EFI Gas 1 1

2=FORD EFI D/F engine manufac-
3=DEUTZ F4 turer/type 2 Ford LRG425EFI Gas with
4=DEUTZ F3 dual fuel
3 Deutz F4M1011F Diesel

Deutz F3M1011F Diesel
3 Glow Plug: 0=NO Display/adjusts 0 No glow plugs installed 1 0

1=”NUMBER OF glow plug presence
MINUTES” and on-time 1-10 Setting this number tells the
controller how many minutes
after the EMS is pulled to out-
put to the glow plugs before
permitting the engine to be
started.
4 ENG 0=NO Displays/adjusts 0 No engine shutdown 1 0

SHUTDOWN: 1=SHUTDOWN presence of the
engine shutdown 1 Shutdown engine when cool-
feature. ant temperature is greater
than 130° C (266° F)or the oil
pressure is less than 0.5 bar
(8 psi).
5 JOYSTICK 1=RESISTIVE Displays/adjusts 1 Resistive 1 0

TYPE: 2=INDUCTIVE joystick type
2 Inductive
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-69

6 Tilt: 1=5Deg Displays/adjusts tilt 1 5 degree – reduces the maxi- 1 1

2=4Deg sensor function mum speed of all boom func-
3=3Deg tions to creep when tilted and
above elevation. Reduces
drive speed to creep when
tilted ANSI (US); ANSI
(EXPORT); CSA; JAPAN-All
Models
2 4 degree - reduces the maxi-

mum speed of all boom func-
tions to creep when tilted and
tilted. CE; AUSTRALIA -
Model 400S Only
3 3 degree – reduces the maxi-

mum speed of all boom func-
tions to creep when titled and
tilted. CE; AUSTRALIA - Mod-
els 450, 600, 601, and 800.
7 Tower Lift: 0=NO Displays/adjusts 0 No Tower Lift installed 1 0

1=YES tower lift presence
1 Yes
8 Tower Tele: 0=NO Displays/adjusts 0 No Tower Telescope installed 1 0

1=YES tower telescope
presence 1 Yes
9 Jib: 0=NO Displays/adjusts jib 0 No Jib installed 1 0

1=YES presence
2=SIDESWING 1 Jib installed which has up
and down movements only
2 Jib installed which has up

and down movements and
side to side movements
10 4ws 0=NO Displays/adjusts 4 0 No 4 wheel steer installed 1 0

1=YES wheel steer pres-
ence 1 Yes
11 soft touch 0=NO Displays presence 0 No Soft Touch System 1 0

1=YES of soft touch sys- installed
tem
1 Yes
12 generator 0=NO Displays presence 0 No Generator installed 1 0

1=YES of generator
1 Yes
6-70 – JLG Lift – 3120895

13 Head & Tail 0=NO Displays presence 0 No Head and Tail Lights 1 0
LIGHTS 1=YES of head and tail installed
lights
1 Yes
14 BROKEN Cable 0=NO Displays presence 0 No Broken Cable Switch 1 0

switch 1=YES of broken cable installed
switch
1 Yes
15 load SENSOR 0=NO Displays presence/ 0 No Load Sensor installed 1 0

1=WARN ONLY function of load
2=WARN & CUTOUT sensor 1 Functions in Creep, Overload
Lamp Lit, Platform Alarm
Beeps Continuously
2 All functions cutout, flash

overload light (500mS on,
500mS off), Platform Alarm
beeps (5 sec. on, 55 sec. off,
5 sec. on)
16 angle SENSOR 0=NO Displays presence/ 0 No Angle Sensor installed 1 0

1=DIGITAL function of angle
2=ANALOG sensor 1 Limit switches are installed
2 An analog sensor is installed
17 length SENSOR 0=NO Displays presence/ 0 No Length Sensor Installed 1 0

1=DIGITAL function of length
2=ANALOG sensor 1 Limit switch installed
2 An analog sensor is installed
18 FUNCTION 0=NO Displays presence/ 0 No Drive Cutout 1 0

CUTOUT 1=BOOM CUTOUT function of drive
2=DRIVE CUTOUT cutout. 1 Boom Function Cutout While
3=DRIVE CUT E & T Driving Above Elevation. (CE)
2 Drive Cutout Above Elevation
3 Drive Cutout Above Elevation

And Tilted
19 ground alarm 0=NO Displays/adjusts 0 No Ground Alarm installed 1 0

1=DRIVE ground alarm pres-
2=LIFT DOWN ence/function 1 Travel alarm – sounds when
3=BOOM & DRIVE the drive function is active.
(Option)
2 Descent alarm – sounds

when either lift down is
active. (Option)
3 Motion alarm – sounds when

any function is active.
(Option)
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-71

20 PLATFORM 0=NO Displays/adjusts 0 Sounds Continuously When 1 0

ALARM 1=FAULT CODE platform alarm Above Elevation And Tilted
presence/functions Only.
1 Sounds Continuously When

Above Elevation And Tilted,
And In Conjunction With Fault
Code Flashes. (Option)
21 Tower Prox 0=NO Displays presence/ 0 No Tower Prox Switches 1 0

Switches 1=YES function of Tower Installed
Proximity switches
for the models 1 Tower Prox Switches
specified. Installed
6-72 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Table 6-9. Analyzer Fault Code Listing
DTC Analyzer Text

001 EVERYTHING OK
002 GROUND MODE OK
0010 RUNNING AT CUTBACK - OUT OF TRANSPORT POSITION
0011 FSW OPEN
0012 RUNNING AT CREEP - CREEP SWITCH OPEN
0013 RUNNING AT CREEP - TILTED AND ABOVE ELEVATION
0014 CHASSIS TILT SENSOR OUT OF RANGE
0015 LOAD SENSOR READING UNDER WEIGHT
0035 APU ACTIVE
211 POWER CYCLE
212 KEYSWITCH FAULTY
213 FSW FAULTY
227 STEER SWITCHES FAULTY
2211 FSW INTERLOCK TRIPPED
2212 DRIVE LOCKED - JOYSTICK MOVED BEFORE FOOTSWITCH
2213 STEER LOCKED - SELECTED BEFORE FOOTSWITCH
2214 DRIVE/STEER LOCKED - JOYSTICK MOVED BEFORE ENABLE
2216 D/S JOY. OUT OF RANGE HIGH
2217 D/S JOY. CENTER TAP BAD
2218 L/S JOY. OUT OF RANGE LOW
2219 L/S JOY. OUT OF RANGE HIGH
2220 L/S JOY. CENTER TAP BAD
2221 LIFT/SWING LOCKED - JOYSTICK MOVED BEFORE FOOTSWITCH
2222 WAITING FOR FSW TO BE OPEN
2223 FUNCTION SWITCHES LOCKED - SELECTED BEFORE ENABLE
2224 FOOTSWITCH SELECTED BEFORE START
234 FUNCTION SWITCHES FAULTY - CHECK DIAGNOSTICS/BOOM
235 FUNCTION SWITCHES LOCKED - SELECTED BEFORE AUX POWER
236 FUNCTION SWITCHES LOCKED - SELECTED BEFORE START SWITCH
237 START SWITCH LOCKED - SELECTED BEFORE KEYSWITCH
259 MODEL CHANGED - HYDRAULICS SUSPENDED - CYCLE EMS
2513 GENERATOR MOTION CUTOUT ACTIVE
2514 BOOM PREVENTED - DRIVE SELECTED
2516 DRIVE PREVENTED - ABOVE ELEVATION
2517 DRIVE PREVENTED - TILTED & ABOVE ELEVATION
2518 DRIVE PREVENTED - BOOM SELECTED
2519 DRIVE PREVENTED - TILTED & EXTENDED OR HIGH ANGLE
2520 FUNCTIONS LOCKED OUT - CONSTANT DATA VERSION IMPROPER
2530 UMS SENSOR FORWARD LIMIT REACHED
2531 UMS SENSOR OUT OF USABLE RANGE
2532 UMS SENSOR BACKWARD LIMIT REACHED
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-73

DTC Analyzer Text

331 BRAKE - SHORT TO BATTERY
332 BRAKE - OPEN CIRCUIT
3311 GROUND ALARM - SHORT TO BATTERY
3316 RIGHT FORWARD DRIVE PUMP - SHORT TO GROUND
3319 RIGHT FORWARD DRIVE PUMP - SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN CIRCUIT
3320 RIGHT REVERSE DRIVE PUMP - SHORT TO GROUND
3323 RIGHT REVERSE DRIVE PUMP - SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN CIRCUIT
3324 LEFT FORWARD DRIVE PUMP - SHORT TO GROUND
3327 LEFT FORWARD DRIVE PUMP - SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN CIRCUIT
3328 LEFT REVERSE DRIVE PUMP - SHORT TO GROUND
3331 LEFT REVERSE DRIVE PUMP - SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN CIRCUIT
3332 FORWARD DRIVE PUMP - SHORT TO GROUND
3333 FORWARD DRIVE PUMP - SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN CIRCUIT
3334 REVERSE DRIVE PUMP - SHORT TO GROUND
3335 REVERSE DRIVE PUMP - SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN CIRCUIT
3336 ALTERNATOR POWER - SHORT TO GROUND
3340 AUX POWER - SHORT TO GROUND
3341 AUX POWER - OPEN CIRCUIT
3342 AUX POWER - SHORT TO BATTERY
3346 ELECTRIC FAN - SHORT TO GROUND
3347 ELECTRIC FAN - OPEN CIRCUIT
3348 ELECTRIC FAN - SHORT TO BATTERY
3349 ELECTRIC PUMP - SHORT TO GROUND
3350 ELECTRIC PUMP - OPEN CIRCUIT
3351 ELECTRIC PUMP - SHORT TO BATTERY
3352 LP LOCK - SHORT TO GROUND
3353 LP LOCK - OPEN CIRCUIT
3354 LP LOCK - SHORT TO BATTERY
3355 LP START ASSIST - SHORT TO GROUND
3356 LP START ASSIST - OPEN CIRCUIT
3357 LP START ASSIST - SHORT TO BATTERY
3358 MAIN DUMP VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
3359 MAIN DUMP VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
3360 MAIN DUMP VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
3361 BRAKE - SHORT TO GROUND
3362 START SOLENOID - SHORT TO GROUND
3363 START SOLENOID - OPEN CIRCUIT
3364 START SOLENOID - SHORT TO BATTERY
3365 STEER DUMP VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
3366 STEER DUMP VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
3367 STEER DUMP VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
3368 TWO SPEED VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
3369 TWO SPEED VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
6-74 – JLG Lift – 3120895

DTC Analyzer Text

3370 TWO SPEED VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
3371 GROUND ALARM - SHORT TO GROUND
3372 GROUND ALARM - OPEN CIRCUIT
3373 GEN SET/WELDER - SHORT TO GROUND
3374 GEN SET/WELDER - OPEN CIRCUIT
3375 GEN SET/WELDER - SHORT TO BATTERY
3376 HEAD TAIL LIGHT - SHORT TO GROUND
3377 HEAD TAIL LIGHT - OPEN CIRCUIT
3378 HEAD TAIL LIGHT - SHORT TO BATTERY
3379 HOUR METER - SHORT TO GROUND
3382 PLATFORM LEVEL UP VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
3383 PLATFORM LEVEL UP VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
3384 PLATFORM LEVEL UP VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
3385 PLATFORM LEVEL UP OVERRIDE VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
3386 PLATFORM LEVEL UP OVERRIDE VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
3387 PLATFORM LEVEL UP OVERRIDE VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
3388 PLATFORM LEVEL DOWN VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
3389 PLATFORM LEVEL DOWN VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
3390 PLATFORM LEVEL DOWN VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
3391 PLATFORM LEVEL DOWN OVERRIDE VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
3392 PLATFORM LEVEL DOWN OVERRIDE VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
3393 PLATFORM LEVEL DOWN OVERRIDE VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
3394 PLATFORM ROTATE LEFT VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
3395 PLATFORM ROTATE LEFT VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
3396 PLATFORM ROTATE LEFT VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
3397 PLATFORM ROTATE RIGHT VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
3398 PLATFORM ROTATE RIGHT VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
3399 PLATFORM ROTATE RIGHT VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
33100 JIB LIFT UP VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
33101 JIB LIFT UP VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
33102 JIB LIFT UP VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
33103 JIB LIFT DOWN VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
33104 JIB LIFT DOWN VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
33105 JIB LIFT DOWN VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
33106 TOWER LIFT UP VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
33107 TOWER LIFT UP VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
33108 TOWER LIFT UP VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
33109 TOWER LIFT DOWN VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
33110 TOWER LIFT DOWN VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
33111 TOWER LIFT DOWN VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
33112 TOWER TELESCOPE IN VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
33113 TOWER TELESCOPE IN VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
33114 TOWER TELESCOPE IN VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-75

DTC Analyzer Text

33115 TOWER TELESCOPE OUT VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
33116 TOWER TELESCOPE OUT VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
33117 TOWER TELESCOPE OUT VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
33118 SWING RIGHT VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
33119 SWING RIGHT VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
33120 TELESCOPE IN VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
33121 SWING RIGHT VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
33122 SWING LEFT VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
33123 TELESCOPE OUT VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
33124 LIFT UP DUMP VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
33125 LIFT UP DUMP VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
33126 LIFT UP DUMP VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
33127 LIFT DOWN HOLDING VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
33128 LIFT DOWN HOLDING VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
33129 LIFT DOWN HOLDING VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
33130 THROTTLE ACTUATOR - SHORT TO GROUND
33131 THROTTLE ACTUATOR - OPEN CIRCUIT
33132 THROTTLE ACTUATOR - SHORT TO BATTERY
33133 PLATFORM CONTROL VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
33134 PLATFORM CONTROL VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
33135 PLATFORM CONTROL VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
33170 LIFT DOWN VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
33171 LIFT DOWN VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
33172 LIFT DOWN VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
33175 JIB ROTATE LEFT VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
33176 JIB ROTATE LEFT VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
33177 JIB ROTATE LEFT VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
33178 JIB ROTATE RIGHT VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
33179 JIB ROTATE RIGHT VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
33180 JIB ROTATE RIGHT VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
33186 TELESCOPE OUT VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
33188 TELESCOPE OUT VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
33189 TELESCOPE IN VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
33190 TELESCOPE IN VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
33207 HORN - OPEN CIRCUIT
33208 HORN - SHORT TO BATTERY
33209 HORN - SHORT TO GROUND
33279 GLOWPLUG - OPEN CIRCUIT
33280 GLOWPLUG - SHORT TO BATTERY
33281 GLOWPLUG - SHORT TO GROUND
33295 SWING LEFT VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
33306 SWING LEFT VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
33314 FLOW CONTROL VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
6-76 – JLG Lift – 3120895

DTC Analyzer Text

33315 FLOW CONTROL VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
33316 FLOW CONTROL VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
33317 DRIVE FORWARD VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
33318 DRIVE FORWARD VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
33319 DRIVE FORWARD VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
33320 DRIVE REVERSE VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
33321 DRIVE REVERSE VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
33322 DRIVE REVERSE VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
33323 LIFT UP VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
33324 LIFT UP VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
33325 LIFT UP VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
33331 DRIVE - CURRENT FEEDBACK READING TOO LOW
33332 LEFT TRACK - CURRENT FEEDBACK READING TOO LOW
33333 RIGHT TRACK - CURRENT FEEDBACK READING TOO LOW
33408 LEFT TRACK - CURRENT FEEDBACK READING LOST
33409 RIGHT TRACK - CURRENT FEEDBACK READING LOST
33410 DRIVE - CURRENT FEEDBACK READING LOST
341 PLATFORM LEVEL UP VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
342 PLATFORM LEVEL UP VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
343 PLATFORM LEVEL UP VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
344 PLATFORM LEVEL UP VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN CIRCUIT
345 PLATFORM LEVEL DOWN VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
346 PLATFORM LEVEL DOWN VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
347 PLATFORM LEVEL DOWN VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
348 PLATFORM LEVEL DOWN VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY OR OPEN CIRCUIT
349 PLATFORM ROTATE LEFT VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
3410 PLATFORM ROTATE LEFT VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
3411 PLATFORM ROTATE LEFT VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
3412 PLATFORM ROTATE RIGHT VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
3413 PLATFORM ROTATE RIGHT VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
3414 PLATFORM ROTATE RIGHT VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
3415 JIB LIFT UP VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
3416 JIB LIFT UP VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
3417 JIB LIFT UP VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
3418 JIB LIFT DOWN VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
3419 JIB LIFT DOWN VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
3420 JIB LIFT DOWN VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
3421 JIB ROTATE LEFT VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
3422 JIB ROTATE LEFT VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
3423 JIB ROTATE LEFT VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
3424 JIB ROTATE RIGHT VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
3425 JIB ROTATE RIGHT VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
3426 JIB ROTATE RIGHT VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-77

DTC Analyzer Text

431 FUEL SENSOR - SHORT TO BATTERY
432 FUEL SENSOR - SHORT TO GROUND
433 OIL PRESSURE - SHORT TO BATTERY
434 OIL PRESSURE - SHORT TO GROUND
435 COOLANT TEMPERATURE - SHORT TO GROUND
436 FORD FAULT CODE ##
437 ENGINE TROUBLE CODE
438 HIGH ENGINE TEMP
439 AIR FILTER BYPASSED
4310 NO ALTERNATOR OUTPUT
4311 LOW OIL PRESSURE
4312 485 COMMUNICATIONS LOST
4313 THROTTLE ACTUATOR FAILURE
4314 WRONG ENGINE SELECTED - ECM DETECTED
4322 LOSS OF ENGINE SPEED SENSOR
4323 SPEED SENSOR READING INVALID SPEED
441 BATTERY VOLTAGE TOO LOW - SYSTEM SHUTDOWN
442 BATTERY VOLTAGE TOO HIGH - SYSTEM SHUTDOWN
445 BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW
662 CANBUS FAILURE - PLATFORM MODULE
664 CANBUS FAILURE - ACCESSORY MODULE
665 CANBUS FAILURE - PROPULSION MODULE
666 CANBUS FAILURE - ENGINE CONTROLLER
6620 CANBUS FAILURE - UMS SENSOR
671 ACCESSORY FAULT
813 CHASSIS TILT SENSOR NOT CALIBRATED
815 CHASSIS TILT SENSOR DISAGREEMENT
816 UMS SENSOR NOT CALIBRATED
817 UMS SENSOR FAULT
825 LSS HAS NOT BEEN CALIBRATED
826 RUNNING AT CREEP - PLATFORM OVERLOADED
827 DRIVE & BOOM PREVENTED - PLATFORM OVERLOADED
828 LIFT UP & TELE OUT PREVENTED - PLATFORM OVERLOADED
831 PLATFORM LEVELING OVERRIDE ON
832 PLATFORM LEVELING OVERRIDE OFF
833 PLATFORM LEVEL UP CRACKPOINT - NOT CALIBRATED
834 PLATFORM LEVEL DOWN CRACKPOINT - NOT CALIBRATED
835 PLATFORM LEVEL SENSOR #1 - NOT ZERO CALIBRATED
836 PLATFORM LEVEL SENSOR #1 - ZERO OUT OF RANGE
837 PLATFORM LEVEL SENSOR #1 - SHORT TO BATTERY
838 PLATFORM LEVEL SENSOR #1 - SHORT TO GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT
839 PLATFORM LEVEL SENSOR #2 - NOT ZERO CALIBRATED
8310 PLATFORM LEVEL SENSOR #2 - ZERO OUT OF RANGE
6-78 – JLG Lift – 3120895

DTC Analyzer Text

8311 PLATFORM LEVEL SENSOR #2 - SHORT TO BATTERY
8312 PLATFORM LEVEL SENSOR #2 - SHORT TO GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT
8313 PLATFORM LEVEL SENSOR #1 - REFERENCE VOLTAGE OUT OF RANGE
8314 PLATFORM LEVEL SENSOR #2 - REFERENCE VOLTAGE OUT OF RANGE
8315 PLATFORM LEVELING SENSOR - DISAGREEMENT
8316 PLATFORM LEVEL SENSOR #1 - COMMUNICATIONS LOST
8317 PLATFORM LEVEL SENSOR #2 - COMMUNICATIONS LOST
8318 PLATFORM LEVELING SYSTEM TIMEOUT
8639 FRONT LEFT STEER VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
8640 FRONT LEFT STEER VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
8641 FRONT LEFT STEER VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
8642 FRONT RIGHT STEER VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
8643 FRONT RIGHT STEER VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
8644 FRONT RIGHT STEER VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
8645 REAR LEFT STEER VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
8646 REAR LEFT STEER VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
8647 REAR LEFT STEER VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
8648 REAR RIGHT STEER VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
8649 REAR RIGHT STEER VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
8650 REAR RIGHT STEER VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
8652 RIGHT TRACK FORWARD VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
8653 RIGHT TRACK FORWARD VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
8654 RIGHT TRACK FORWARD VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
8655 RIGHT TRACK REVERSE VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
8656 RIGHT TRACK REVERSE VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
8657 RIGHT TRACK REVERSE VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
8658 LEFT TRACK FORWARD VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
8659 LEFT TRACK FORWARD VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
8660 LEFT TRACK FORWARD VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
8661 LEFT TRACK REVERSE VALVE - OPEN CIRCUIT
8662 LEFT TRACK REVERSE VALVE - SHORT TO BATTERY
8663 LEFT TRACK REVERSE VALVE - SHORT TO GROUND
871 RETURN FILTER BYPASSED
872 CHARGE PUMP FILTER BYPASSED
998 EEPROM FAILURE - CHECK ALL SETTINGS
9910 FUNCTIONS LOCKED OUT - PLATFORM MODULE SOFTWARE VERSION IMPROPER
9913 FUNCTIONS LOCKED OUT - PROPULSION MODULE SOFTWARE VERSION IMPROPER
9914 PLATFORM MODULE SOFTWARE UPDATE REQUIRED
9915 CHASSIS TILT SENSOR NOT GAIN CALIBRATED
9916 CHASSIS TILT SENSOR GAIN OUT OF RANGE
9917 HIGH RESOLUTION A2D FAILURE - INTERRUPT LOST
9918 HIGH RESOLUTION A2D FAILURE - REINIT LIMIT
9919 GROUND SENSOR REF VOLTAGE OUT OF RANGE
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-79

DTC Analyzer Text

9920 PLATFORM SENSOR REF VOLTAGE OUT OF RANGE
9921 GROUND MODULE FAILURE - HIGH SIDE DRIVER CUTOUT FAULTY
9922 PLATFORM MODULE FAILURE - HWFS CODE 1
9923 GROUND MODULE FAILURE - HWFS CODE 1
9924 FUNCTIONS LOCKED OUT - MACHINE NOT CONFIGURED
9944 CURRENT FEEDBACK GAINS OUT OF RANGE
9945 CURRENT FEEDBACK CALIBRATION CHECKSUM INCORRECT
6-80 – JLG Lift – 3120895

6.10 ANALYZER DIAGNOSTICS MENU the next outer level. The LEFT/RIGHT arrow keys move
between items in the same level. The UP/DOWN arrow
STRUCTURE keys alter a value if allowed
In the following structure descriptions, an intended item is
selected by pressing ENTER; pressing ESC steps back to
Table 6-10. ADJUSTMENTS - Personality Descriptions
DRIVE
ACCEL … Displays/adjusts drive acceleration
DECEL … Displays/adjusts drive deceleration
MIN FORWARD … Displays/adjusts minimum forward drive speed
MAX FORWARD … Displays/adjusts maximum forward drive speed
MIN REVERSE … Displays/adjusts minimum reverse drive speed
MAX REVERSE … Displays/adjusts maximum reverse drive speed
ELEVATED MAX … Displays/adjusts maximum drive speed

NOTE: used when elevation cutout switches are limiting maximum speed
CREEP MAX … Displays/adjusts maximum drive speed

NOTE: used when creep switch on pump pot is active
STEER MAX … Displays/adjusts the maximum steer speed
LIFT
ACCEL … Displays/adjusts upper lift acceleration
DECEL … Displays/adjusts upper lift deceleration
MIN UP … Displays/adjusts minimum upper lift up speed
MAX UP … Displays/adjusts maximum upper lift up speed
CREEP UP … Displays/adjusts maximum upper lift up speed

MIN DOWN … Displays/adjusts minimum upper lift down speed
MAX DOWN … Displays/adjusts maximum upper lift down speed
CREEP DOWN … Displays/adjusts maximum upper lift down speed

3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-81

SWING
ACCEL … Displays/adjusts swing acceleration
DECEL … Displays/adjusts swing deceleration
MIN LEFT … Displays/adjusts minimum swing left speed
MAX LEFT … Displays/adjusts maximum swing left speed
CREEP LEFT … Displays/adjusts maximum swing left speed

MIN RIGHT … Displays/adjusts minimum swing right speed
MAX RIGHT … Displays/adjusts maximum swing right speed
CREEP RIGHT … Displays/adjusts maximum swing right speed

UPPER TELESCOPE
ACCEL … Displays/adjusts telescope acceleration
DECEL … Displays/adjusts telescope deceleration
MIN IN … Displays/adjusts minimum telescope in speed
MAX IN … Displays/adjusts maximum telescope in speed
MIN OUT … Displays/adjusts minimum telescope out speed
MAX OUT … Displays/adjusts maximum telescope out speed
BASKET LEVEL
ACCEL … Displays/adjusts basket level acceleration
DECEL … Displays/adjusts basket level deceleration
MIN UP … Displays/adjusts minimum basket level up speed
MAX UP … Displays/adjusts maximum basket level up speed
MIN DOWN … Displays/adjusts minimum basket level down speed
MAX DOWN … Displays/adjusts maximum basket level down speed
BASKET ROTATE
ACCEL … Displays/adjusts basket rotate acceleration
DECEL … Displays/adjusts basket rotate deceleration
MIN LEFT … Displays/adjusts minimum basket rotate left speed
MAX LEFT … Displays/adjusts maximum basket rotate left speed
MIN RIGHT … Displays/adjusts minimum basket rotate right speed
MAX RIGHT … Displays/adjusts maximum basket rotate right speed
6-82 – JLG Lift – 3120895

JIB LIFT Not displayed if JIB = NO
ACCEL … Displays/adjusts jib acceleration
DECEL … Displays/adjusts jib deceleration
MIN UP … Displays/adjusts minimum jib up speed
MAX UP … Displays/adjusts maximum jib up speed
MIN DOWN … Displays/adjusts minimum jib down speed
MAX DOWN … Displays/adjusts maximum jib down speed
MIN LEFT … Displays/adjusts minimum jib left speed
MAX LEFT … Displays/adjusts maximum jib left speed
MIN RIGHT … Displays/adjusts minimum jib right speed
MAX RIGHT … Displays/adjusts maximum jib right speed
STEER
MAX SPEED … Displays/adjusts maximum steer speed, which applies when vehicle speed is at minimum
GROUND MODE
LIFT UP … Displays/adjusts fixed lift up speed
LIFT DOWN … Displays/adjusts fixed lift down speed
SWING … Displays/adjusts fixed swing speed
TELE … Displays/adjusts fixed telescope speed
BASKETLEVEL … Displays/adjusts fixed basket level speed
BASKETROTATE … Displays/adjusts fixed basket rotate speed
JIB (U/D) … Displays/adjusts jib lift speed

Not displayed if JIB = NO
JIB (L/R)… Displays/adjusts jib swing speed

3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-83

Table 6-11. Diagnostic Menu Descriptions
DRIVE
DRIVE FOR … Displays drive joystick direction & demand
STEER … Displays steer switch direction & demand

NOTE: steer demand is inversely proportional to vehicle speed
BRAKES … Displays brake control system status
CREEP … Displays pump pot creep switch status
TWO SPEED... Displays two speed switch status
2 SPEED MODE Displays status of two speed valve
HIGH ENGINE Displays high engine switch status
BOOM
U LIFT UP … Displays lift joystick direction & demand
SWING LEFT … Displays swing joystick direction & demand
LEVEL UP … Displays basket level switch direction & demand

NOTE: demand is controlled by the pump pot
ROT. LEFT … Displays basket rotate switch direction & demand

U TELE IN … Displays telescope switch direction & demand

JIB UP … Displays jib lift switch direction & demand

JIB LEFT … Displays jib swing switch direction & demand

PUMP POT … Displays pump pot demand
ENGINE
START … Displays start switch status
AIR FILTER … Displays air filter status
BATTERY … Displays measured battery voltage
COOLANT … Displays coolant temperature
OIL PRS … Displays oil pressure status
FUEL SELECT … Displays selected fuel (Dual Fuel only)
FUEL LEVEL … Displays fuel level status
RPM Displays Engine RPM
GM BATTERY Displays battery voltage at ground module
6-84 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Table 6-11. Diagnostic Menu Descriptions
PM BATTERY … Displays battery voltage at platform module
TEMP... Displays ground module temperature
ELEV. CUTOUT … Displays elevation cutout switch status
FUNC. CUTOUT … Displays function cutout switch status
CREEP… Displays creep switch status
TILT … Displays measured vehicle tilt
AUX POWER … Displays status of auxiliary power switch
HORN … Displays status of horn switch
R FILTER … Displays status of return filter switch
C FILTER … Displays status of charge pump filter
LOAD LENGTH … Displays length switch status
ANGLE … Displays angle switch status
LOAD … Displays load sensor value

NOTE: Not displayed if load = 0.
DATALOG
ON … Displays total controller on (EMS) time
ENGINE … Displays engine run time
DRIVE … Displays total controller drive operation time
LIFT … Displays total controller lift operation time
SWING … Displays total controller swing operation time
TELE … Displays total controller tele operation time
MAX.TEMP … Displays maximum measured heat sink temp.
MIN.TEMP … Displays minimum measured heat sink temp.
MAX.VOLTS … Displays maximum measured battery voltage
RENTAL … Displays total controller operation time

NOTE: can be reset
ERASE RENTAL Not available at password level 2
YES:ENTER, NO:ESC ENTER resets rental datalog time to zero
VERSIONS
GROUND … Displays ground module software version
PLATFORM … Displays platform module software version
ANALYSER … Displays Analyzer software version
3120895 – JLG Lift – 6-85

NOTES:
6-86 – JLG Lift – 3120895

SECTION 7. BASIC ELECTRICAL INFORMATION & SCHEMATICS
7.1 GENERAL are reversed. Check what reading is expected, the loca-
tion of the signal and that the leads are connected to the
This section contains basic electrical information and device under test correctly. Also check that the lead on the
schematics to be used for locating and correcting most of "COM" port goes to the Ground or negative side of the sig-
the operating problems which may develop. If a problem nal and the lead on the other port goes to the positive side
should develop which is not presented in this section or of the signal.
which is not corrected by listed corrective actions, techni-
cally qualified guidance should be obtained before pro- Scale
ceeding with any maintenance.
M = Mega = 1,000,000 * (Displayed Number)
7.2 MULTIMETER BASICS k = kilo = 1,000 * (Displayed Number)
A wide variety of multimeters or Volt Ohm Meters (VOM)
m = milli = (Displayed Number) / 1,000
can be used for troubleshooting your equipment. This
section shows diagrams of a common, digital VOM con- μ = micro = (Displayed Number) / 1,000,000
figured for several different circuit measurements. Instruc-
tions for your VOM may vary. Please consult the meter Example: 1.2 k = 1200 
operator’s manual for more information. Example: 50 mA = 0.05 A
Grounding Voltage Measurement

"Grounding the meter" means to take the black lead
(which is connected to the COM (common) or negative
port) and touch it to a good path to the negative side of
the Voltage source.
Backprobing
To "backprobe" means to take the measurement by
accessing a connector’s contact on the same side as the
wires, the back of the connector. Readings can be done
while maintaining circuit continuity this way. If the connec-
tor is the sealed type, great care must be taken to avoid
damaging the seal around the wire. It is best to use
probes or probe tips specifically designed for this tech-
nique, especially on sealed connectors. Whenever possi-
ble insert probes into the side of the connector such that
the test also checks both terminals of the connection. It is
possible to inspect a connection within a closed connec-
tor by backprobing both sides of a connector terminal and
measuring resistance. Do this after giving each wire a
gentle pull to ensure the wires are still attached to the con-
tact and contacts are seated in the connector.
Min/Max Figure 7-1. Voltage Measurement (DC)
Use of the "Min/Max" recording feature of some meters •If meter is not auto ranging, set it to the correct
can help when taking measurements of intermittent condi- range (See multimeter’s operation manual)
tions while alone. For example, you can read the Voltage
applied to a solenoid when it is only operational while a •Use firm contact with meter leads
switch, far from the solenoid and meter, is held down.
Polarity
Getting a negative Voltage or current reading when
expecting a positive reading frequently means the leads
3120895 – JLG Lift – 7-1

Resistance Measurement •Use firm contact with meter leads
Continuity Measurement
Figure 7-3. Continuity Measurement
•Some meters require a separate button press to

Figure 7-2. Resistance Measurement enable audible continuity testing
•First test meter and leads by touching leads •Circuit power must be turned OFF before testing
together. Resistance should read a short circuit continuity
(very low resistance)
•Disconnect component from circuit before testing
•Circuit power must be turned OFF before testing
resistance •Use firm contact with meter leads
•Disconnect component from circuit before testing
•First test meter and leads by touching leads
•If meter is not auto ranging, set it to the correct together. Meter should produce an audible alarm,
range (See multimeter’s operation manual) indicating continuity
7-2 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Current Measurement b. Change the switch position.

c. Measure resistance again with the leads in the
same positions. If the meter was reading short, it
should read an open. If the meter was reading
open it should read short.
5. If the switch has more than two terminals, consult

the schematic or switch diagram to determine what
terminals will be connected. The test is similar to
testing a switch with two terminals.
a. Place one meter lead on the common contact

and the other on a different contact in the same
circuit.
b. Cycle through all positions of the switch. The
meter should read short only when the switch
connects the two terminals and open otherwise.
c. If the switch has more than one common contact
repeat the process for that circuit.
Limit Switches
Limit switches are used to control movement or indicate
position. Mechanical limit switches are just like manually
operated switches except that the moving object operates
the switch. These switches can be tested the same way as
Figure 7-4. Current Measurement (DC) a standard switch by manually operating the sensing arm.
•Set up the meter for the expected current range Another type of limit switch used by JLG is the inductive
proximity switch, also referred to as a "prox switch". Induc-
•Be sure to connect the meter leads to the correct tive proximity switches are actuated only by ferrous metal
jacks for the current range you have selected (metal that contains Iron, such as steel) near the switch.
•If meter is not auto ranging, set it to the correct They do not require contact, and must be energized to
range (See multi meter’s operation manual) actuate. These types of switches can be used to detect
boom or platform position, for example. These switches
•Use firm contact with meter leads have a sensing face where the switch can detect ferrous
metal close to it. To find the sensing face, take note how
the switch is mounted and how the mechanisms meet the
7.3 CHECKING SWITCHES switch. Test this type of switch as follows:
1. Remove prox switch from its mount.

Basic Check
2. Reconnect harness if it was disconnected for step a,
The following check determines if the switch is functioning and turn on machine.
properly, not the circuit in which the switch is placed. A
switch is functioning properly when there is continuity 3. Hold switch away from metal and observe switch
between the correct terminals or contacts only when state in the control system diagnostics using the
selected. Analyzer. See vehicle or control system documenta-
tion on how to do this.
1. De-energize the circuit.
4. Place sensing face of switch on the object to be
2. Isolate the switch from the rest of the circuit if possi- sensed by the switch. If that is not available, use a
ble. If not possible, keep in mind it may affect read- piece of ferrous metal physically similar to it. The
ings. switch state in the control system diagnostics
3. Access the terminals to the switch. should change.
4. If the switch has two terminals: 5. When reinstalling or replacing switch be sure to fol-
low mounting instructions and properly set the gap
a. Measure resistance across the terminals. between the switch and object sensed.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 7-3

Automatic Switches 7.4 APPLYING SILICONE DIELECTRIC

If the switch is actuated automatically, by temperature or
COMPOUND TO ELECTRICAL
pressure for example, find a way to manually actuate the CONNECTIONS
switch to test it. Do this either by applying heat or pres-
sure, for example, to the switch. These switches may need NOTE: This section is not applicable for battery terminals.
to be energized to actuate.
1. Connect instrumentation to monitor and/or control

the parameter the switch is measuring. JLG P/N 0100048 DIELECTRIC GREASE (NOVAGARD G661) IS
THE ONLY MATERIAL APPROVED FOR USE AS A DIELECTRIC
2. Observe switch state in control system with the Ana- GREASE.
lyzer. See vehicle or control system documentation
on how to do this. NOTE: Do NOT apply dielectric grease to the following con-
nections:
3. Operate system such that the switch actuates. This
could be going over a certain pressure or tempera- • Main Boom Rotary sensor connections (on Celesco
ture, for example. The state indicated in the control Sensor),
system should change.
• LSS Modules connections,
Switch Wiring - Low Side, High Side • Deutz EMR 2 ECM connection.
When controlling a load, a switch can be wired between Silicone Dielectric Compound must be used on all electri-
the positive side of the power source and the load. This cal connections except for those mentioned above for the
switch is called a "high side" switch. The switch supplies following reasons:
the power to the load. When a switch is wired between the
negative side of the power source and the load, it is a "low • To prevent oxidation at the mechanical joint between
side" switch. The switch provides the ground to the load. male and female pins.
• To prevent electrical malfunction caused by low level

A low side switch will allow voltage to be present on the
conductivity between pins when wet.
load. No power is applied because the switch is stopping
current flow. This voltage can be seen if the measurement Use the following procedure to apply Silicone Dielectric
is taken with one test lead on the load and the other on Compound to the electrical connectors. This procedure
the battery negative side or grounded to the vehicle. What applies to all plug connections not enclosed in a box. Sili-
is actually being measured is the voltage drop across the cone grease should not be applied to connectors with
switch. This could mislead a technician into thinking the external seals.
load is receiving power but not operating. To produce an 1. To prevent oxidation, silicone grease must be
accurate picture of power or voltage applied to the load, packed completely around male and female pins on
measure voltage across the load’s power terminals. Also, the inside of the connector prior to assembly. This is
the technician can measure the voltage at both power ter- most easily achieved by using a syringe.
minals with respect to battery ground. The difference
between those two measurements is the voltage applied NOTE: Over a period of time, oxidation increases electrical
to the load. resistance at the connection, eventually causing cir-
cuit failure.
2. To prevent shorting, silicone grease must be packed

around each wire where they enter the outside of the
connector housing. Also, silicone grease must be
applied at the joint where the male and female con-
nectors come together. Any other joints (around
strain reliefs, etc.) where water could enter the con-
nector should also be sealed.
NOTE: This condition is especially common when machines

are pressure washed since the washing solution is
much more conductive than water.
7-4 – JLG Lift – 3120895

3. Anderson connectors for the battery boxes and bat- Deutsch HD, DT, DTM, DRC Series
tery chargers should have silicone grease applied to
the contacts only. The Deutsch connector system is commonly used for
harsh environment interconnect. Follow the installation
NOTE: Curing-type sealants might also be used to prevent
instructions.
shorting and would be less messy, but would make
future pin removal more difficult.
When applied to electrical connections, dielectric grease

helps to prevent corrosion of electrical contacts and
improper conductivity between contacts from moisture
intrusion. Open and sealed connectors benefit from the
application of dielectric grease.
Dielectric grease shall be applied to all electrical connec-
tors at the time of connection (except those noted under
Exclusions).
Installation of Dielectric Grease

Before following these instructions, refer to excluded con-
nector types (See Exclusions below).
1. Use dielectric grease in a tube for larger connection
points or apply with a syringe for small connectors.
AMP Seal
2. Apply dielectric grease to the female contact (fill it The AMP Seal connector system is used on the Control
approximately ½ full; see example below) ADE Platform and Ground Modules.
3. Leave a thin layer of dielectric grease on the face of Apply dielectric grease to the female contact. If trapped air
the connector prevents the connector from latching, pierce one of the
unused wire seals. After assembly, install a seal plug (JLG
4. Assemble the connector system immediately to pre-
#4460905) in that location to prevent moisture ingress.
vent moisture ingress or dust contamination
5. Pierce one of the unused wire seals prior to assem- Note that seal plugs may be installed by the wire harness
bly if the connector system tends to trap air (i.e. manufacturer if an unused wire seal becomes compro-
AMP Seal) and then install a seal plug. mised (wire inserted in the wrong cavity during assembly
and then corrected).
Figure 7-5. Application to Female Contacts
3120895 – JLG Lift – 7-5

Exclusions
A limited number of connectors do not benefit from dielec-
tric grease, or may be permanently damaged by applica-
tion. Dielectric grease may not be required in properly
sealed enclosures.
BRAD HARRISON / PHOENIX CONTACT M12

The connector uses gold contact material to resist corro-
sion and an o-ring seal for moisture integrity. If dielectric
grease is mistakenly applied to this connector system, the
low-force contacts cannot displace the grease to achieve
electrical contact. Once contaminated, there is no practi-
cal way to remove the dielectric grease (replacement of
female contacts required). The JLG Load Sensing System
and 1250AJP Rotary Angle Sensors are examples of com-
ponents with the M12 connector system.
Figure 7-6. Use of Seal Plugs
AMP Mate-N-Lok
Follow the installation instructions.
DIN Connectors
This connector is typically used on hydraulic valves. Fol-
low the installation instructions.
7-6 – JLG Lift – 3120895

AMP JUNIOR TIMER MIL-C-5015 SPEC CONNECTORS

This type of connector uses back-seals for moisture integ- Crown Connector Inc's recommendation is to not use
rity. However, the low-force contacts cannot displace dielectric grease for this series connector. For similar
dielectric grease and create electrical contact. It is possi- model series connectors, the manufacturer should be
ble to use solvents (i.e. contact cleaner or mineral spirits) contacted for confirmation before applying dielectric
for the removal of improperly applied dielectric grease. grease. A typical application for this connector is on David
The EMR2 engine control module from Deutz employs Clark Intercom connections in Aerial Work Platforms.
this connector system (for example).
SEALED ENCLOSURES
Application of dielectric grease is not required in properly
sealed enclosures. To meet criteria, the enclosure must
be rated to at least IP66 (dust tight; protected from power-
ful jets of water). The enclosure must be fitted with a high
quality, continuous gasket and all wiring must pass
through cable entrances.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 7-7

7.5 AMP CONNECTOR Assembly

Applying Silicone Dielectric Compound to Check to be sure the wedge lock is in the open, or as-
shipped, position (See Figure 7-7.). Proceed as follows:
AMP Connectors
Silicone Dielectric Compound must be used on the AMP
connections for the following reasons:
• To prevent oxidation at the mechanical joint between

male and female pins.
• To prevent electrical malfunction caused by low level
conductivity between pins when wet.
Use the following procedure to apply Silicone Dielectric
Compound to the electrical connectors.
1. To prevent oxidation and low level conductivity, sili-

cone dielectric grease must be packed completely
around male and female pins on the inside of the
connector after the mating of the housing to the
header. This is easily achieved by using a syringe to
fill the header with silicone dielectric compound, to a
point just above the top of the male pins inside the
header. When assembling the housing to the
header, it is possible that the housing will become Figure 7-7. Connector Assembly Figure 1
air locked, thus preventing the housing latch from
engaging.
2. Pierce one of the unused wire seals to allow the 1. To insert a contact, push it straight into the appropri-
trapped air inside the housing to escape. ate circuit cavity as far as it will go (See Figure 7-9.).
3. Install a hole plug into this and/or any unused wire 2. Pull back on the contact wire with a force of 1 or 2
seal that has silicone dielectric compound escaping lbs. to be sure the retention fingers are holding the
from it. contact (See Figure 7-9.).
Figure 7-8. AMP Connector
7-8 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Figure 7-9. Connector Assembly Figure 2
3. After all required contacts have been inserted, the 4. Slide the wedge lock into the housing until it is flush
wedge lock must be closed to its locked position. with the housing (See Figure 7-11.).
Release the locking latches by squeezing them
inward (See Figure 7-10.).
3120895 – JLG Lift – 7-9

Figure 7-12. Connector Disassembly
Disassembly the field, by using a flat probe such as a pocket knife. DO

NOT use a sharp point such as an ice pick.
1. Insert a 4.8 mm (3/16") wide screwdriver blade
between the mating seal and one of the red wedge Service - Voltage Reading
lock tabs.
2. Pry open the wedge lock to the open position.
DO NOT PIERCE WIRE INSULATION TO TAKE VOLTAGE READ-
3. While rotating the wire back and forth over a half
INGS.
turn (1/4 turn in each direction), gently pull the wire
until the contact is removed.
It has been common practice in electrical troubleshooting
NOTE: The wedge lock should never be removed from the to probe wires by piercing the insulation with a sharp
housing for insertion or removal of the contacts. point. This practice should be discouraged when dealing
with the AMPSEAL plug assembly, or any other sealed
Wedge Lock connector system. The resulting pinholes in the insulation
will allow moisture to invade the system by traveling along
The wedge lock has slotted openings in the forward, or the wire strands. This nullifies the effectiveness of the con-
mating end. These slots accommodate circuit testing in nector seals and could result in system failure.
7-10 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Figure 7-13. Connector Installation
3120895 – JLG Lift – 7-11

7.6 DEUTSCH CONNECTORS NOTE: The receptacle is shown - use the same procedure
for plug.
DT/DTP Series Assembly
DT/DTP Series Disassembly
A B
A B
C D
Figure 7-14. DT/DTP Contact Installation
C
1. Grasp crimped contact about 25mm behind the con-
Figure 7-15. DT/DTP Contact Removal
tact barrel.
2. Hold connector with rear grommet facing you. 1. Remove wedgelock using needlenose pliers or a
hook shaped wire to pull wedge straight out.
3. Push contact straight into connector grommet until a
click is felt. A slight tug will confirm that it is properly 2. To remove the contacts, gently pull wire backwards,
locked in place. while at the same time releasing the locking finger
by moving it away from the contact with a screw-
4. Once all contacts are in place, insert wedgelock with driver.
arrow pointing toward exterior locking mechanism.
The wedgelock will snap into place. Rectangular 3. Hold the rear seal in place, as removing the contact
wedges are not oriented. Thy may go in either way. may displace the seal.
7-12 – JLG Lift – 3120895

HD30/HDP20 Series Assembly HD30/HDP20 Series Disassembly
A B A B
C C
Figure 7-16. HD/HDP Contact Installation Figure 7-18. HD/HDP Contact Removal
1. Grasp contact about 25mm behind the contact

1. With rear insert toward you, snap appropriate size
crimp barrel.
extractor tool over the wire of contact to be
2. Hold connector with rear grommet facing you. removed.
3. Push contact straight into connector grommet until a 2. Slide tool along into the insert cavity until it engages
positive stop is felt. A slight tug will confirm that it is contact and resistance is felt.
properly locked in place. 3. Pull contact-wire assembly out of connector.
Figure 7-17. HD/HDP Locking Contacts Into Position Figure 7-19. HD/HDP Unlocking Contacts
NOTE: Do Not twist or insert tool at an angle.

NOTE: For unused wire cavities, insert sealing plugs for full
environmental sealing
3120895 – JLG Lift – 7-13

Figure 7-20. Electrical Components Installation w/o JLG Control System - Sheet 1 of 2
7-14 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Figure 7-21. Electrical Components Installation w/o JLG Control System - Sheet 2 of 2
3120895 – JLG Lift – 7-15

FOOTSWITCH
PLATFORM
FLOODLIGHTS GENERATOR
SWITCH
PLATFORM
WORK LIGHTS
SOFT TOUCH
LIMIT SWITCH
J7
J1
J5 J6
J2
TRANSPORT
LIMIT SWITCH
J8
(400S ONLY)
ABOVE HORIZONTAL
LIMIT SWITCH
CAPACITY ANGLE
LIMIT SWITCH
(ALL SPECS
EXCEPT CE SPEC)
HEADLIGHTS
PLATFORM TAILLIGHTS
CONTROL
BOX
GROUND
CONTROL
BOX
DIAGNOSTIC
J8
ANALYZER
J1
J7
J2
J4
J3
(DEUTZ
& GM (DEUTZ
ONLY) ONLY)
Figure 7-22. Electrical Components Installation with JLG Control System - Sheet 1 of 2
7-16 – JLG Lift – 3120895

2500W 2500W
GENERATOR GENERATOR
RELAY
GENERATOR
CONTROL BOX
7500W
7500W GENERATOR 7500W
GENERATOR 7500W
GENERATOR CONTROL BOX SKYPOWER
PLATFORM RELAYS
GENERATOR
BOX
THROTTLE
ACTUATOR
(CAT)
ENGINE
CONTROL
(DEUTZ)
BOSCH FUEL ELECTRIC
REGULATOR FAN
(GM) RELAY FUEL AUX
ELECTRIC (CAT) ON
FAN SWITCH PUMP
(CAT) (CAT)
TO FUEL ENGINE
REGULATOR HARNESS
(GM (DEUTZ)
HARNESS)
+ –
TACH GLOW
SENSOR/ PLUGS
SPEED 2 SPEED
PICK-UP & BRAKE BATTERY
(CAT) VALVE
GM HYDRAULIC GLOW
ENGINE PUMPS START PLUG
MODULE RELAY RELAY
AUX
STROBE RELAY
LIGHT STARTER
FUEL
LEVEL
SENSOR
MAIN
CONTROL
VALVE
JIB
VALVE
335A
ALARM
Figure 7-23. Electrical Components Installation with JLG Control System - Sheet 2 of 2
3120895 – JLG Lift – 7-17

7-18 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Figure 7-24. On Board Generator Electrical Schematic. (if equipped)
3120895 – JLG Lift – 7-19

Figure 7-25. Electrical Schematic - Ford Engine w/o JLG Control System - Sheet 1 of 4
7-20 – JLG Lift – 3120895

3120895 – JLG Lift – 7-21

7-22 – JLG Lift – 3120895

3120895 – JLG Lift – 7-23

Figure 7-29. Electrical Schematic - Deutz Engine w/o JLG Control System - Sheet 1 of 4
7-24 – JLG Lift – 3120895

3120895 – JLG Lift – 7-25

7-26 – JLG Lift – 3120895

3120895 – JLG Lift – 7-27

Figure 7-33. Electrical Schematic - Isuzu Engine w/o JLG Control System - Sheet 1 of 4
7-28 – JLG Lift – 3120895

3120895 – JLG Lift – 7-29

7-30 – JLG Lift – 3120895

3120895 – JLG Lift – 7-31

NOTE: This Schematic covers machines built prior to

S/N 99084.
Figure 7-37. Electrical Schematic - Caterpillar Engine - Sheet 1 of 6
7-32 – JLG Lift – 3120895

1870132 M
3120895 – JLG Lift – 7-33


S/N 99084.
7-34 – JLG Lift – 3120895

1870132 M
3120895 – JLG Lift – 7-35


S/N 99084.
7-36 – JLG Lift – 3120895

1870132 M
3120895 – JLG Lift – 7-37

NOTE: This Schematic covers machines built prior to S/N 99084.
Figure 7-43. Electrical Schematic - Deutz EMR2 & GM Engine - Sheet 1 of 6
7-38 – JLG Lift – 3120895

1870191 G
3120895 – JLG Lift – 7-39

NOTE: This Schematic covers machines built

prior to S/N 99084.
7-40 – JLG Lift – 3120895

1870191 G
3120895 – JLG Lift – 7-41


prior to S/N 99084.
7-42 – JLG Lift – 3120895

1870191 G
3120895 – JLG Lift – 7-43

Figure 7-49. Electrical Schematic - Hydraulic Welder
7-44 – JLG Lift – 3120895

This page left intentionally blank.
3120895 – JLG Lift – 7-45

NOTE: This Schematic covers machines built S/N 99084 to Present.
Figure 7-50. Electrical Schematic - Deutz, GM, & CAT Engine - Sheet 1 of 6
7-46 – JLG Lift – 3120895

1870215 B
3120895 – JLG Lift – 7-47

NOTE: This Schematic covers machines built S/N 99084 to Present.
7-48 – JLG Lift – 3120895

1870215 B
3120895 – JLG Lift – 7-49


S/N 99084 to Present.
7-50 – JLG Lift – 3120895

1870215 B
3120895 – JLG Lift – 7-51

Figure 7-56. Hydraulic Schematic - (Sheet 1 of 6)
7-52 – JLG Lift – 3120895

1001093691 A
3120895 – JLG Lift – 7-53

7-54 – JLG Lift – 3120895

1001093691 A
3120895 – JLG Lift – 7-55

7-56 – JLG Lift – 3120895

1001093691 A
3120895 – JLG Lift – 7-57

NOTES:
7-58 – JLG Lift – 3120895

3120895
Corporate Office
JLG Industries, Inc.
1 JLG Drive
McConnellsburg PA. 17233-9533
USA
(717) 485-5161
(717) 485-6417
JLG Worldwide Locations

JLG Industries (Australia) JLG Latino Americana Ltda. JLG Industries (UK) Ltd JLG France SAS
P.O. Box 5119 Rua Eng. Carlos Stevenson, Bentley House Z.I. de Baulieu
11 Bolwarra Road 80-Suite 71 Bentley Avenue 47400 Fauillet
Port Macquarie 13092-310 Campinas-SP Middleton France
N.S.W. 2444 Brazil Greater Manchester +33 (0)5 53 88 31 70
Australia +55 19 3295 0407 M24 2GP - England
+33 (0)5 53 88 31 79
+61 2 65 811111 +55 19 3295 1025 +44 (0)161 654 1000
+61 2 65813058 +44 (0)161 654 1001
JLG Deutschland GmbH JLG Equipment Services Ltd. JLG Industries (Italia) s.r.l. Oshkosh-JLG Singapore
Max-Planck-Str. 21 Rm 1107 Landmark North Via Po. 22 Technology Equipment Pte
D - 27721 Ritterhude - Ihlpohl 39 Lung Sum Avenue 20010 Pregnana Milanese - MI Ltd
Germany Sheung Shui N. T. Italy 29 Tuas Ave 4,
+49 (0)421 69 350 20 Hong Kong +39 029 359 5210 Jurong Industrial Estate
+49 (0)421 69 350 45 (852) 2639 5783 +39 029 359 5845 Singapore, 639379
(852) 2639 5797 +65-6591 9030
+65-6591 9031
Plataformas Elevadoras JLG Sverige AB

JLG Iberica, S.L. Enkopingsvagen 150
Trapadella, 2 Box 704
P.I. Castellbisbal Sur SE - 176 27 Jarfalla
08755 Castellbisbal, Barcelona Sweden
Spain +46 (0)850 659 500
+34 93 772 4700 +46 (0)850 659 534
+34 93 771 1762
www.jlg.com

Service 3120895 12-06-12 CE English PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service 3120895 12-06-12 CE English PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service 3120895 12-06-12 CE English PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What safety precautions should be observed during maintenance?

What safety precautions should be observed during maintenance?

What does the manual cover in Section A?

What does the manual cover in Section A?

Service and Maintenance Manual

SECTION A. INTRODUCTION - MAINTENANCE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

A GENERAL • ENSURE REPLACEMENT PARTS OR COMPONENTS

FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH SAFETY PRECAUTIONS LISTED IN

3120895 – JLG Lift – A-1

Original Issue April 1, 2000

A-2 – JLG Lift – 3120895

SECTION NO. TITLE PAGE NO.

3120895 – JLG Lift – i

SECTION NO. TITLE PAGE NO.

ii – JLG Lift – 3120895

SECTION NO. TITLE PAGE NO.

3120895 – JLG Lift – iii

SECTION NO. TITLE PAGE NO.

iv – JLG Lift – 3120895

SECTION NO. TITLE PAGE NO.

3120895 – JLG Lift – v

SECTION NO. TITLE PAGE NO.

vi – JLG Lift – 3120895

SECTION NO. TITLE PAGE NO.

3120895 – JLG Lift – vii

SECTION NO. TITLE PAGE NO.

viii – JLG Lift – 3120895

FIGURE NO. TITLE PAGE NO.

3120895 – JLG Lift – ix

FIGURE NO. TITLE PAGE NO.

x – JLG Lift – 3120895

FIGURE NO. TITLE PAGE NO.

3120895 – JLG Lift – xi

FIGURE NO. TITLE PAGE NO.

xii – JLG Lift – 3120895

FIGURE NO. TITLE PAGE NO.

3120895 – JLG Lift – xiii

TABLE NO. TITLE PAGE NO.

xiv – JLG Lift – 3120895

TABLE NO. TITLE PAGE NO.

3120895 – JLG Lift – xv

TABLE NO. TITLE PAGE NO.

This page left blank intentionally.

xvi – JLG Lift – 3120895

1.1 CAPACITIES Table 1-3. Deutz F3M1011F/F3M2011F

Table 1-4. Isuzu 4LE1

Fuel Gasoline or Gasoline/LP Gas BHP at Max. RPM 45

Bore 3 in. (96 mm) Low RPM 1000

Stroke 3.4 in. (86.4 mm) Mid RPM 1500

Displacement 153 cu. in. (2.5 L) High RPM 2800

Firing Order 1-3-4-2

Oil Capacity 4.5 quarts (4.26 L) Fuel Diesel

3120895 – JLG Lift – 1-1

Table 1-6. GM 3.0L 1.4 SPECIFICATIONS AND PERFORMANCE

1-2 – JLG Lift – 3120895

Turning Radius (Outside) 16 ft. (5 m.) 4ft. Platform (x 30") 130 59

1.5 TORQUE REQUIREMENTS

3120895 – JLG Lift – 1-3

1.7 MAJOR COMPONENT WEIGHTS 1.8 FUNCTION SPEEDS